Project Gutenberg's Latin for Beginners, by Benjamin Leonard D'Ooge

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org


Title: Latin for Beginners

Author: Benjamin Leonard D'Ooge

Release Date: April 25, 2006 [EBook #18251]

Language: English

Character set encoding: MAC

*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK LATIN FOR BEGINNERS ***




Produced by Louise Hope, Dave Maddock and the Online
Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This
file was made using scans of public domain material by
TextKit.com)




[TranscriberÕs Notes:

This text file is intended for Macintosh users whose browsers or text
readers cannot display either of the utf-8 versions (plain text or
html). A few necessary changes have been made.

The macron (straight line, representing long vowels) has been replaced
  everywhere by a circumflex accent:
    ‰ � ” ™ ž å æ ë ï ó
  The ÒyÓ in ÒPythiaÓ, ÒLydiaÓ and ÒperistylumÓ is also long, and is
  marked Òy:Ó in vocabulary lists.

The breve symbol (ù), representing a short vowel, has been omitted.
  This symbol was used only in the introductory section on
  pronunciation (¤1-18), and in one or two vocabulary entries.
The notation [oo] represents short ÒooÓ.
Letters shown with combined breve and macron have been expanded as
  Ò-ei or -�iÓ, Ò-ius or -”usÓ.

To make this unpaginated e-text easier to use, each chapterÕs Special
Vocabulary has been included with its chapter _in addition to_ its
original location near the end of the book. The same was done with the
irregular verbs. The vocabulary lists are at the beginning of each
chapter, as far as possible from the Exercises.

Boldface is shown by ÇguillemetsÈ, italics by _lines_.

The variation between Ò¾Ó (English text) and ÒaeÓ (Latin text) is as in
the original. Bracketed passages in the original are shown in [[double
brackets]].]

       *       *       *       *       *
           *       *       *       *
       *       *       *       *       *

              LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

                       BY

           BENJAMIN L. DÕOOGE, Ph.D.

 Professor in the Michigan State Normal College




               Ginn and Company
      Boston ¥ New York ¥ Chicago ¥ London


  Copyright, 1909, 1911 by Benjamin L. DÕOoge
          Entered at StationersÕ Hall
              All Rights Reserved
                     013.4




               The Athen¾um Press
Ginn and Company ¥ Proprietors ¥ Boston ¥ U.S.A.


       *       *       *       *       *


PREFACE

To make the course preparatory to C¾sar at the same time systematic,
thorough, clear, and interesting is the purpose of this series of
lessons.

The first pages are devoted to a brief discussion of the Latin language,
its history, and its educational value. The body of the book, consisting
of seventy-nine lessons, is divided into three parts.

Part I is devoted to pronunciation, quantity, accent, and kindred
introductory essentials.

Part II carries the work through the first sixty lessons, and is devoted
to the study of forms and vocabulary, together with some elementary
constructions, a knowledge of which is necessary for the translation of
the exercises and reading matter. The first few lessons have been made
unusually simple, to meet the wants of pupils not well grounded in
English grammar.

Part III contains nineteen lessons, and is concerned primarily with the
study of syntax and of subjunctive and irregular verb forms. The last
three of these lessons constitute a review of all the constructions
presented in the book. There is abundant easy reading matter; and, in
order to secure proper concentration of effort upon syntax and
translation, no new vocabularies are introduced, but the vocabularies in
Part II are reviewed.

It is hoped that the following features will commend themselves to
teachers:

The forms are presented in their natural sequence, and are given, for
the most part, in the body of the book as well as in a grammatical
appendix. The work on the verb is intensive in character, work in other
directions being reduced to a minimum while this is going on. The forms
of the subjunctive are studied in correlation with the subjunctive
constructions.

The vocabulary has been selected with the greatest care, using LodgeÕs
ÒDictionary of Secondary LatinÓ and BrowneÕs ÒLatin Word ListÓ as a
basis. There are about six hundred words, exclusive of proper names, in
the special vocabularies, and these are among the simplest and commonest
words in the language. More than ninety-five per cent of those chosen
are C¾sarian, and of these more than ninety per cent are used in C¾sar
five or more times. The few words not C¾sarian are of such frequent
occurrence in Cicero, Vergil, and other authors as to justify their
appearance here. But teachers desiring to confine word study to C¾sar
can easily do so, as the C¾sarian words are printed in the vocabularies
in distinctive type. Concrete nouns have been preferred to abstract,
root words to compounds and derivatives, even when the latter were of
more frequent occurrence in C¾sar. To assist the memory, related English
words are added in each special vocabulary. To insure more careful
preparation, the special vocabularies have been removed from their
respective lessons and placed by themselves. The general vocabulary
contains about twelve hundred words, and of these above eighty-five per
cent are found in C¾sar.

The syntax has been limited to those essentials which recent
investigations, such as those of Dr. Lee Byrne and his collaborators,
have shown to belong properly to the work of the first year. The
constructions are presented, as far as possible, from the standpoint of
English, the English usage being given first and the Latin compared or
contrasted with it. Special attention has been given to the
constructions of participles, the gerund and gerundive, and the
infinitive in indirect statements. Constructions having a logical
connection are not separated but are treated together.

Exercises for translation occur throughout, those for translation into
Latin being, as a rule, only half as long as those for translation into
English. In Part III a few of the commoner idioms in C¾sar are
introduced and the sentences are drawn mainly from that author. From
first to last a consistent effort is made to instill a proper regard for
Latin word order, the first principles of which are laid down early in
the course.

Selections for reading are unusually abundant and are introduced from
the earliest possible moment. These increase in number and length as the
book progresses, and, for the most part, are made an integral part of
the lessons instead of being massed at the end of the book. This
arrangement insures a more constant and thorough drill in forms and
vocabulary, promotes reading power, and affords a breathing spell
between succeeding subjects. The material is drawn from historical and
mythological sources, and the vocabulary employed includes but few words
not already learned. The book closes with a continued story which
recounts the chief incidents in the life of a Roman boy. The last
chapters record his experiences in C¾sarÕs army, and contain much
information that will facilitate the interpretation of the Commentaries.
The early emphasis placed on word order and sentence structure, the
simplicity of the syntax, and the familiarity of the vocabulary, make
the reading selections especially useful for work in sight translation.

Reviews are called for at frequent intervals, and to facilitate this
branch of the work an Appendix of Reviews has been prepared, covering
both the vocabulary and the grammar.

The illustrations are numerous, and will, it is hoped, do much to
stimulate interest in the ancient world and to create true and lasting
impressions of Roman life and times.

A consistent effort has been made to use simple language and clear
explanation throughout.

As an aid to teachers using this book a ÒTeacherÕs ManualÓ has been
prepared, which contains, in addition to general suggestions, notes on
each lesson.

The author wishes to express his gratitude to the numerous teachers who
tested the advance pages in their classes, and, as a result of their
experience, have given much valuable aid by criticism and suggestion.
Particular acknowledgments are due to Miss A. Susan Jones of the Central
High School, Grand Rapids, Michigan; to Miss Clara Allison of the High
School at Hastings, Michigan; and to Miss Helen B. Muir and Mr. Orland
O. Norris, teachers of Latin in this institution.

  BENJAMIN L. DÕOOGE

    MICHIGAN STATE NORMAL COLLEGE




CONTENTS

Lesson                                                              Page

  TO THE STUDENT--By way of Introduction                             1-4

PART I. THE PRONUNCIATION OF LATIN

  ALPHABET, SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS, SYLLABLES, QUANTITY, ACCENT,
    HOW TO READ LATIN 5-11

PART II. WORDS AND FORMS

      I-VI. FIRST PRINCIPLES--_Subject and Predicate,
            Inflection, Number, Nominative Subject, Possessive
            Genitive, Agreement of Verb, Direct Object,
            Indirect Object, etc._--DIALOGUE                       12-24

  VII-VIII. FIRST OR _å_-DECLENSION--_Gender, Agreement of
            Adjectives, Word Order_                                25-30

      IX-X. SECOND OR _O_-DECLENSION--GENERAL RULES FOR
            DECLENSION--_Predicate Noun, Apposition_--DIALOGUE     31-35

        XI. ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS         36-37

       XII. NOUNS IN Ç-iusÈ AND Ç-iumÈ--GERMåNIA                   38-39

      XIII. SECOND DECLENSION (_Continued_)--Nouns in Ç-erÈ and
            Ç-irÈ--ITALIA--DIALOGUE                                39-41

       XIV. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS                          42-43

        XV. ABLATIVE DENOTING WITH--_Cause, Means, Accompaniment,
            Manner_--THE ROMANS PREPARE FOR WAR                    44-46

       XVI. THE NINE IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES                          46-47

      XVII. THE DEMONSTRATIVE Çis, ea, idÈ--DIALOGUE               48-50

     XVIII. CONJUGATION--Present, Imperfect, and Future of ÇsumÈ--
            DIALOGUE                                               51-53

       XIX. PRESENT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF Çam™È AND Çmone™È         54-56

        XX. IMPERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF Çam™È AND Çmone™È--
            _Meaning of the Imperfect_--NIOBE AND HER CHILDREN     56-57

       XXI. FUTURE ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF Çam™È AND Çmone™È--
            NIOBE AND HER CHILDREN (_Concluded_)                   58-59

      XXII. REVIEW OF VERBS--_The Dative with Adjectives_--
            CORNELIA AND HER JEWELS                                59-61

     XXIII. PRESENT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF Çreg™È AND Çaudi™È--
           CORNELIA AND HER JEWELS (_Concluded_)                   61-63

      XXIV. IMPERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF Çreg™È AND Çaudi™È--
            _The Dative with Special Intransitive Verbs_           63-65

       XXV. FUTURE ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF Çreg™È AND Çaudi™È         65-66

      XXVI. VERBS IN Ç-i™È--Present, Imperfect, and Future Active
            Indicative of Çcapi™È--_The Imperative_                66-68

     XXVII. PASSIVE VOICE--Present, Imperfect, and Future
            Indicative of Çam™È and Çmone™È--PERSEUS AND
            ANDROMEDA                                              68-71

    XXVIII. PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE INDICATIVE PASSIVE
            OF Çreg™È AND Çaudi™È--PERSEUS AND ANDROMEDA
            (_Continued_)                                          72-73

      XXIX. PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE INDICATIVE PASSIVE
            OF Ç-i™È VERBS--PRESENT PASSIVE INFINITIVE AND
            IMPERATIVE                                             73-75

       XXX. SYNOPSES IN THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS--THE ABLATIVE
            DENOTING FROM--_Place from Which, Separation,
            Personal Agent_                                        75-78

      XXXI. PERFECT, PLUPERFECT, AND FUTURE PERFECT OF ÇsumÈ--
           DIALOGUE                                                79-81

     XXXII. PERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF THE FOUR REGULAR
            CONJUGATIONS--_Meanings of the Perfect_--PERSEUS
            AND ANDROMEDA (_Continued_)                            81-83

    XXXIII. PLUPERFECT AND FUTURE PERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE--
           PERFECT ACTIVE INFINITIVE                               84-85

     XXXIV. REVIEW OF THE ACTIVE VOICE--PERSEUS AND ANDROMEDA
            (_Concluded_)                                          86-87

      XXXV. PASSIVE PERFECTS OF THE INDICATIVE--PERFECT PASSIVE
            AND FUTURE ACTIVE INFINITIVE                           88-90

     XXXVI. REVIEW OF PRINCIPAL PARTS--_Prepositions, Yes-or-No
            Questions_                                             90-93

    XXXVII. CONJUGATION OF ÇpossumÈ--_The Infinitive used as in
            English_--_Accusative Subject of an Infinitive_--
            THE FAITHLESS TARPEIA                                  93-96

   XXXVIII. THE RELATIVE PRONOUN AND THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN--
            _Agreement of the Relative_--THE FAITHLESS TARPEIA
            (_Concluded_)                                         97-101

 XXXIX-XLI. THE THIRD DECLENSION--Consonant Stems                101-106

      XLII. REVIEW LESSON--TERROR CIMBRICUS                          107

     XLIII. THIRD DECLENSION--_I_-Stems                          108-110

      XLIV. IRREGULAR NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION--
            GENDER IN THE THIRD DECLENSION--THE FIRST BRIDGE
            OVER THE RHINE                                       111-112

       XLV. ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION--THE ROMANS
            INVADE THE ENEMYÕS COUNTRY                           113-115

      XLVI. THE FOURTH OR _U_-DECLENSION                         116-117

     XLVII. EXPRESSIONS OF PLACE--_Place to Which, Place from
            Which, Place at or in Which, the Locative_--
            Declension of ÇdomusÈ--D®DALUS AND ICARUS            117-121

    XLVIII. THE FIFTH OR _æ_-DECLENSION--_Ablative of Time_
           --D®DALUS AND ICARUS (_Continued_)                    121-123

      XLIX. PRONOUNS--Personal and Reflexive Pronouns--D®DALUS
            AND ICARUS (_Concluded_)                             123-126

         L. THE INTENSIVE PRONOUN ÇipseÈ AND THE DEMONSTRATIVE
            Ç”demÈ--HOW HORATIUS HELD THE BRIDGE                 126-127

        LI. THE DEMONSTRATIVES ÇhicÈ, ÇisteÈ, ÇilleÈ--A GERMAN
            CHIEFTAIN ADDRESSES HIS FOLLOWERS--HOW HORATIUS
            HELD THE BRIDGE (_Continued_)                        128-130

       LII. THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS--HOW HORATIUS HELD THE
            BRIDGE (_Concluded_)                                 130-132

      LIII. REGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES                     133-135

       LIV. IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES--_Ablative with
            Comparatives_                                        135-136

        LV. IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES (_Continued_)--
            Declension of ÇplžsÈ                                 137-138

       LVI. IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES (_Concluded_)--
            _Ablative of the Measure of Difference_              138-139

      LVII. FORMATION AND COMPARISON OF ADVERBS                  140-142

     LVIII. NUMERALS--_Partitive Genitive_                       142-144

       LIX. NUMERALS (_Continued_)--_Accusative of Extent_--
            C®SAR IN GAUL                                        144-146

        LX. DEPONENT VERBS--_Prepositions with the Accusative_   146-147


PART III. CONSTRUCTIONS

       LXI. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD--Inflection of the Present--
            _Indicative and Subjunctive Compared_                148-152

      LXII. THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF PURPOSE 152-153

     LXIII. INFLECTION OF THE IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE--_Sequence
            of Tenses_                                           153-155

      LXIV. INFLECTION OF THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT
            SUBJUNCTIVE--_Substantive Clauses of Purpose_        156-159

       LXV. SUBJUNCTIVE OF ÇpossumÈ--_Verbs of Fearing_          160-161

      LXVI. THE PARTICIPLES--Tenses and Declension               161-164

     LXVII. THE IRREGULAR VERBS Çvol™È, Çn™l™È, Çm‰l™È--
           _Ablative Absolute_                                   164-166

    LXVIII. THE IRREGULAR VERB Çf”™È--_Subjunctive of Result_    167-168

      LXIX. SUBJUNCTIVE OF CHARACTERISTIC--_Predicate
            Accusative_                                          169-171

       LXX. CONSTRUCTIONS WITH ÇcumÈ--_Ablative of
            Specification_                                       171-173

      LXXI. VOCABULARY REVIEW--_Gerund and Gerundive_--
           _Predicate Genitive_                                  173-177

     LXXII. THE IRREGULAR VERB Çe™È--_Indirect Statements_       177-180

    LXXIII. VOCABULARY REVIEW--THE IRREGULAR VERB Çfer™È--
            _Dative with Compounds_                              181-183

     LXXIV. VOCABULARY REVIEW--_Subjunctive in Indirect
            Questions_                                           183-185

      LXXV. VOCABULARY REVIEW--_Dative of Purpose or End for
            Which_                                               185-186

     LXXVI. VOCABULARY REVIEW--_Genitive and Ablative of
            Quality or Description_                              186-188

    LXXVII. REVIEW OF AGREEMENT--_Review of the Genitive,
            Dative, and Accusative_                              189-190

   LXXVIII. REVIEW OF THE ABLATIVE                               191-192

     LXXIX. REVIEW OF THE SYNTAX OF VERBS                        192-193


READING MATTER

  INTRODUCTORY SUGGESTIONS                                       194-195

  THE LABORS OF HERCULES                                         196-203

  P. CORNELIUS LENTULUS: THE STORY OF A ROMAN BOY                204-215


APPENDIXES AND VOCABULARIES

  APPENDIX I. TABLES OF DECLENSIONS, CONJUGATIONS, NUMERALS,
    ETC.                                                         226-260

  APPENDIX II. RULES OF SYNTAX                                   261-264

  APPENDIX III. REVIEWS                                          265-282

  SPECIAL VOCABULARIES                                           283-298

  LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY                                       299-331

  ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY                                       332-343


INDEX                                                            344-348




LATIN FOR BEGINNERS


TO THE STUDENT--BY WAY OF INTRODUCTION

ÇWhat is Latin?È If you will look at the map of Italy on the opposite
page, you will find near the middle of the peninsula and facing the west
coast a district called Latium,[1] and Rome its capital. The Latin
language, meaning the language of Latium, was spoken by the ancient
Romans and other inhabitants of Latium, and Latin was the name applied
to it after the armies of Rome had carried the knowledge of her language
far beyond its original boundaries. As the English of to-day is not
quite the same as that spoken two or three hundred years ago, so Latin
was not always the same at all times, but changed more or less in the
course of centuries. The sort of Latin you are going to learn was in use
about two thousand years ago. And that period has been selected because
the language was then at its best and the greatest works of Roman
literature were being produced. This period, because of its supreme
excellence, is called the Golden Age of Roman letters.

    [Footnote 1: Pronounce _L‰«shi-um_.]

ÇThe Spread of Latin.È For some centuries after Rome was founded, the
Romans were a feeble and insignificant people, their territory was
limited to Latium, and their existence constantly threatened by warlike
neighbors. But after the third century before Christ, RomeÕs power grew
rapidly. She conquered all Italy, then reached out for the lands across
the sea and beyond the Alps, and finally ruled over the whole ancient
world. The empire thus established lasted for more than four hundred
years. The importance of Latin increased with the growth of Roman
power, and what had been a dialect spoken by a single tribe became the
universal language. Gradually the language changed somewhat, developing
differently in different countries. In Italy it has become Italian, in
Spain Spanish, and in France French. All these nations, therefore, are
speaking a modernized form of Latin.

ÇThe Romans and the Greeks.È In their career of conquest the Romans came
into conflict with the Greeks. The Greeks were inferior to the Romans in
military power, but far superior to them in culture. They excelled in
art, literature, music, science, and philosophy. Of all these pursuits
the Romans were ignorant until contact with Greece revealed to them the
value of education and filled them with the thirst for knowledge. And so
it came about that while Rome conquered Greece by force of arms, Greece
conquered Rome by force of her intellectual superiority and became her
schoolmaster. It was soon the established custom for young Romans to
go to Athens and to other centers of Greek learning to finish their
training, and the knowledge of the Greek language among the educated
classes became universal. At the same time many cultured Greeks--poets,
artists, orators, and philosophers--flocked to Rome, opened schools, and
taught their arts. Indeed, the pre‘minence of Greek culture became so
great that Rome almost lost her ambition to be original, and her writers
vied with each other in their efforts to reproduce in Latin what was
choicest in Greek literature. As a consequence of all this, the
civilization and national life of Rome became largely Grecian, and to
Greece she owed her literature and her art.

ÇRome and the Modern World.È After conquering the world, Rome impressed
her language, laws, customs of living, and modes of thinking upon the
subject nations, and they became Roman; and the world has remained
largely Roman ever since. Latin continued to live, and the knowledge of
Latin was the only light of learning that burned steadily through the
dark ages that followed the downfall of the Roman Empire. Latin was the
common language of scholars and remained so even down to the days of
Shakespeare. Even yet it is more nearly than any other tongue the
universal language of the learned. The life of to-day is much nearer
the life of ancient Rome than the lapse of centuries would lead one to
suppose. You and I are Romans still in many ways, and if C¾sar and
Cicero should appear among us, we should not find them, except for dress
and language, much unlike men of to-day.

ÇLatin and English.È Do you know that more than half of the words in the
English dictionary are Latin, and that you are speaking more or less
Latin every day? How has this come about? In the year 1066 William the
Conqueror invaded England with an army of Normans. The Normans spoke
French--which, you remember, is descended from Latin--and spread their
language to a considerable extent over England, and so Norman-French
played an important part in the formation of English and forms a large
proportion of our vocabulary. Furthermore, great numbers of almost pure
Latin words have been brought into English through the writings of
scholars, and every new scientific discovery is marked by the addition
of new terms of Latin derivation. Hence, while the simpler and commoner
words of our mother tongue are Anglo-Saxon, and Anglo-Saxon forms the
staple of our colloquial language, yet in the realms of literature, and
especially in poetry, words of Latin derivation are very abundant. Also
in the learned professions, as in law, medicine, and engineering, a
knowledge of Latin is necessary for the successful interpretation of
technical and scientific terms.

ÇWhy study Latin?È The foregoing paragraphs make it clear why Latin
forms so important a part of modern education. We have seen that our
civilization rests upon that of Greece and Rome, and that we must look
to the past if we would understand the present. It is obvious, too, that
the knowledge of Latin not only leads to a more exact and effective use
of our own language, but that it is of vital importance and of great
practical value to any one preparing for a literary or professional
career. To this it may be added that the study of Latin throws a flood
of light upon the structure of language in general and lays an excellent
foundation for all grammatical study. Finally, it has been abundantly
proved that there is no more effective means of strengthening the mind
than by the earnest pursuit of this branch of learning.

ÇReview QuestionsÈ. Whence does Latin get its name? Where is Latium?
Where is Rome? Was Latin always the same? What sort of Latin are we to
study? Describe the growth of RomeÕs power and the spread of Latin. What
can you say of the origin of Italian, French, and Spanish? How did the
ancient Greeks and Romans compare? How did Greece influence Rome? How
did Rome influence the world? In what sense are we Romans still? What
did Latin have to do with the formation of English? What proportion of
English words are of Latin origin, and what kind of words are they? Why
should we study Latin?




PART I

THE PRONUNCIATION OF LATIN


THE ALPHABET

Ç1.È The Latin alphabet contains the same letters as the English except
that it has no _w_ and no _j_.

Ç2.È The vowels, as in English, are _a, e, i, o, u, y_. The other
letters are consonants.

Ç3.È _I_ is used both as a vowel and as a consonant. Before a vowel in
the same syllable it has the value of a consonant and is called _I
consonant_.

Thus in Iž-li-us the first _i_ is a consonant, the second a vowel.


SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS[1]

    [Footnote 1: N.B. The sounds of the letters are best learned by
    hearing them correctly pronounced. The matter in this section is,
    therefore, intended for reference rather than for assignment as a
    lesson. As a first step it is suggested that the teacher pronounce
    the examples in class, the pupils following.]

Ç4.È Latin was not pronounced like English. The Romans at the beginning
of the Christian era pronounced their language substantially as
described below.

Ç5.È The vowels have the following sounds:

  VOWELS[2]                         LATIN EXAMPLES

  ‰ as in _father_                  h‰c, st‰s
  a like the first _a_ in _aha«_,
    never as in _hat_               a«-mat, ca-n‰s
  � as in _they_                    t�«-la, m�«-ta
  e as in _met_                     te«-net, mer«-c�s
  ” as in _machine_                 ser«-t”, pr‰«-t”
  i as in _bit_                     si«-tis, bi«-b”
  ™ as in _holy_                    R™«-ma, ™«-ris
  o as in _wholly_, never as in
    _hot_                           mo«-do, bo«-n™s
  ž as in _rude_, or as _oo_ in
    _boot_                          ž«-mor, tž«-ber
  u as in _full_, or as _oo_ in
    _foot_                          ut, tž«-tus

NOTE. It is to be observed that there is a decided difference in sound,
except in the case of _a_, between the long and the short vowels. It is
not merely a matter of _quantity_ but also of _quality_.

    [Footnote 2: Long vowels are marked ø, short ones ù.]

  [TranscriberÕs Note:
  In this version of the text, long vowels are shown with a circumflex
  accent (ÒhatÓ) and short vowels are unmarked, as described in the
  introductory notes.]

Ç6.È In ÇdiphthongsÈ (two-vowel sounds) both vowels are heard in a
single syllable.

  DIPHTHONGS                        LATIN EXAMPLES

  ÇaeÈ as _ai_ in _aisle_           tae«-dae
  ÇauÈ as _ou_ in _out_             gau«-det
  ÇeiÈ as _ei_ in _eight_           dein«-de
  ÇeuÈ as _e«[oo]_ (a short _e_
    followed by a short _u_ in
    one syllable)                   seu
  ÇoeÈ like _oi_ in _toil_          foe«-dus
  ÇuiÈ like _[oo]«i_ (a short _u_
    followed by a short _i_ in one
    syllable. Cf. English _we_)     cui, huic

NOTE. Give all the vowels and diphthongs their proper sounds and do not
slur over them in unaccented syllables, as is done in English.

Ç7.È ÇConsonantsÈ are pronounced as in English, except that

  CONSONANTS                        LATIN EXAMPLES

  ÇcÈ is always like _c_ in _cat_,
    never as in _cent_              ca«-d™, ci«-bus, c�«-na
  ÇgÈ is always like _g_ in _get_,
    never as in _gem_               ge«-m™, gig«-n™
  Çi consonantÈ is always like
    _y_ in _yes_                    iam, io«-cus
  ÇnÈ before _c, qu_, or _g_ is
    like _ng_ in _sing_ (compare
    the sound of _n_ in _anchor_)   an«-co-ra (ang«-ko-ra)
  ÇquÈ, ÇguÈ, and sometimes ÇsuÈ
    before a vowel have the sound
    of _qw, gw_, and _sw_. Here
    _u_ has the value of consonant
    _v_ and is not counted a vowel  in«-quit, qu”, lin«-gua,
                                      san«-guis, su‰«-de-™
  ÇsÈ is like _s_ in _sea_, never
    as in _ease_                    ro«-sa, is
  ÇtÈ is always like _t_ in
    _native_, never as in _nation_  ra«-ti-™, n‰«-ti-™
  ÇvÈ is like _w_ in _wine_, never
    as in _vine_                    Çv”«-numÈ, ÇvirÈ
  ÇxÈ has the value of two
    consonants (_cs_ or _gs_) and
    is like _x_ in _extract_, not
    as in _exact_                   Çex«-tr‰È, Çex-‰c«-tusÈ
  ÇbsÈ is like _ps_ and ÇbtÈ like
    _pt_                            ÇurbsÈ, Çob-ti«-ne-™È
  ÇchÈ, ÇphÈ, and ÇthÈ are like
    _c_, _p_, _t_                   Çpul«-cherÈ, ÇPhoe«-b�È,
                                      Çthe-‰«-trumÈ

    _a._ In combinations of consonants give each its distinct sound.
    Doubled consonants should be pronounced with a slight pause between
    the two sounds. Thus pronounce _tt_ as in _rat-trap_, not as in
    _rattle_; _pp_ as in _hop-pole_, not as in _upper_. Examples,
    Çmit«-t™È, ÇAp«pi-usÈ, Çbel«-lumÈ.


SYLLABLES

Ç8.È A Latin word has as many syllables as it has vowels and diphthongs.
Thus Çaes-t‰«-teÈ has three syllables, Çau-di-en«-dusÈ has four.

    _a._ Two vowels with a consonant between them never make one
    syllable, as is so often the case in English. Compare English
    _inside_ with Latin ”n-s”«-de.

Ç9.È Words are divided into syllables as follows:

1. A single consonant between two vowels goes with the second. Thus
Ça-m‰«-bi-lisÈ, Çme-mo«-ri-aÈ, Çin-te«-re-‰È, Ça«-bestÈ,
Çpe-r�«-gitÈ.[3]

    [Footnote 3: In writing and printing it is customary to divide
    the parts of a compound, as Çinter-e‰È, Çab-estÈ, Çsub-‰ctusÈ,
    Çper-�gitÈ, contrary to the correct phonetic rule.]

2. Combinations of two or more consonants:

    _a._ A consonant followed by _l_ or _r_ goes with the _l_ or _r_.
    Thus Çpž«-bli-cusÈ, Ça«-gr”È.

EXCEPTION. Prepositional compounds of this nature, as also _ll_ and
_rr_, follow rule _b_. Thus Çab«-lu-™È, Çab-rum«-p™È, Çil«-leÈ,
Çfer«-rumÈ.

    _b._ In all other combinations of consonants the first consonant
    goes with the preceding vowel.[4] Thus Çmag«-nusÈ, Çe-ges«-t‰sÈ,
    Çvic-t™«-ri-aÈ, Çhos«-pesÈ, Çan«-nusÈ, Çsu-b‰c«-tusÈ.

    [Footnote 4: The combination nct is divided nc-t, as fžnc-tus,
    s‰nc-tus.]

3. The last syllable of a word is called the _ul«-ti-ma_; the one
next to the last, the _pe-nult«_; the one before the penult, the
_an«-te-pe-nult«_.

Ç10.È EXERCISE

Divide the words in the following passage into syllables and pronounce
them, placing the accent as indicated:

V‰«de ad form”«cam, ï p’ger, et c™ns”«der‰ v’‰s Žius et d’sce
sapiŽntiam: quae cum n™n h‡beat dœcem nec praecept™«rem nec pr”«ncipem,
p‡rat in aest‰«te c’bum s’bi et c—ngregat in mŽsse quod c—medat.

[[Go to the ant, thou sluggard; consider her ways, and be wise: which,
having no guide, overseer, or ruler, provideth her meat in the summer
and gathereth her food in the harvest.]]


QUANTITY

Ç11.È The quantity of a vowel or a syllable is the time it takes to
pronounce it. Correct pronunciation and accent depend upon the proper
observance of quantity.

Ç12.È ÇQuantity of Vowels.È Vowels are either long (ø) or short (ù).
In this book the long vowels are marked. Unmarked vowels are to be
considered short.

  [TranscriberÕs Note:
  The wording of ¤ 12 is as in the original.]

  1. A vowel is short before another vowel or _h_; as Çpo-�«-taÈ,
  Çtra«-h™È.

  2. A vowel is short before _nt_ and _nd_, before final _m_ or _t_,
  and, except in words of one syllable, before final _l_ or _r_. Thus
  Ça«-mantÈ, Ça-man«-dusÈ, Ça-m‰«-bamÈ, Ça-m‰«-batÈ, Ça«-ni-malÈ,
  Ça«-morÈ.

  3. A vowel is long before _nf_, _ns_, _nx_, and _nct_. Thus
  Ç”n«-fe-r™È, Çre«-g�nsÈ, Çs‰n«-x”È, Çs‰nc«-tusÈ.

  4. Diphthongs are always long, and are not marked.

Ç13.È ÇQuantity of Syllables.È Syllables are either long or short, and
their quantity must be carefully distinguished from that of vowels.

  1. ÇA syllable is shortÈ,

    _a._ If it ends in a short vowel; as Ça«-m™È, Çpi«-griÈ.

NOTE. In final syllables the short vowel may be followed by a final
consonant. Thus the word Çme-mo«-ri-amÈ contains four short syllables.
In the first three a short vowel ends the syllable, in the last the
short vowel is followed by a final consonant.

  2. ÇA syllable is longÈ,

    _a._ If it contains a long vowel or a diphthong, as Çcž«-r™È,
    Çpoe«-naeÈ, Çaes-t‰«-teÈ.

    _b._ If it ends in a consonant which is followed by another
    consonant, as Çcor«-pusÈ, Çmag«-nusÈ.

NOTE. The vowel in a long syllable may be either long or short, and
should be pronounced accordingly. Thus in Çter«-raÈ, Çin«-terÈ, the
first syllable is long, but the vowel in each case is short and should
be given the short sound. In words like ÇsaxumÈ the first syllable is
long because _x_ has the value of two consonants (_cs_ or _gs_).

  3. In determining quantity _h_ is not counted a consonant.

NOTE. Give about twice as much time to the long syllables as to the
short ones. It takes about as long to pronounce a short vowel plus a
consonant as it does to pronounce a long vowel or a diphthong, and so
these quantities are considered equally long. For example, it takes
about as long to say Çcur«-r™È as it does Çcž«-r™È, and so each of these
first syllables is long. Compare Çmol«-lisÈ and Çm™«-lisÈ, lj-mis«-s”È
and lj-mi«-s”È.


ACCENT

Ç14.È Words of two syllables are accented on the first, as Çm�n«-saÈ,
ÇCae«-sarÈ.

Ç15.È Words of more than two syllables are accented on the penult if the
penult is long. If the penult is short, accent the antepenult. Thus
Çmo-n�«-musÈ, Çre«-gi-turÈ, Ça-gri«-co-laÈ, Ça-man«-dusÈ.

NOTE. Observe that the position of the accent is determined by the
length of the _syllable_ and not by the length of the vowel in the
syllable. (Cf. ¤13.2, Note.)

Ç16.È Certain little words called _enclit«ics_[5] which have no separate
existence, are added to and pronounced with a preceding word. The most
common are Ç-queÈ, _and_; Ç-veÈ, _or_; and Ç-neÈ, the question sign.
The syllable before an enclitic takes the accent, regardless of its
quantity. Thus Çpopulus«queÈ, Çdea«queÈ, Çr�gna«veÈ, Çaudit«neÈ.

    [Footnote 5: Enclitic means _leaning back_, and that is, as you see,
    just what these little words do. They cannot stand alone and so they
    lean back for support upon the preceding word.]

HOW TO READ LATIN

Ç17.È To read Latin well is not so difficult, if you begin right.
Correct habits of reading should be formed now. Notice the quantities
carefully, especially the quantity of the penult, to insure your getting
the accent on the right syllable. (Cf. ¤15.) Give every vowel its
proper sound and every syllable its proper length. Then bear in mind
that we should read Latin as we read English, in phrases rather than in
separate words. Group together words that are closely connected in
thought. No good reader halts at the end of each word.

Ç18.È Read the stanzas of the following poem by Longfellow, one at a
time, first the English and then the Latin version. The syllables
inclosed in parentheses are to be slurred or omitted to secure
smoothness of meter.

EXCELSIOR [[HIGHER]]! [6]

  The shades of night were falling fast,
  As through an Alpine village passed
  A youth, who bore, Õmid snow and ice,
  A banner with the strange device,
           Excelsior!

      Cad�bant noctis umbrae, dum
      Ibat per v”cum Alpicum
      Gelž nivequ(e) adol�sc�ns,
      V�xillum cum sign™ fer�ns,
               Excelsior!

  His brow was sad; his eye beneath,
  Flashed like a falchion from its sheath,
  And like a silver clarion rung
  The accents of that unknown tongue,
           Excelsior!

      Fr™ns tr”stis, micat oculus
      Velut � v‰g”n‰ gladius;
      Sonantque simil�s tubae
      Accentžs lingu(ae) incognitae,
               Excelsior!

  In happy homes he saw the light
  Of household fires gleam warm and bright;
  Above, the spectral glaciers shone,
  And from his lips escaped a groan,
           Excelsior!

      In domibus videt cl‰r‰s
      Foc™rum lžc�s calid‰s;
      Relucet glaci�s ‰cris,
      Et rumpit gemitžs labr”s,
               Excelsior!

  ÒTry not the Pass!Ó the old man said;
  ÒDark lowers the tempest overhead,
  The roaring torrent is deep and wide!Ó
  And loud that clarion voice replied,
        Excelsior!

      D”cit senex, ÒN� tr‰nse‰s!
      Supr‰ nigr�scit tempest‰s;
      L‰tus et altus est torr�ns.Ó
      Cl‰ra v�nit v™x respond�ns,
            Excelsior!

  At break of day, as heavenward
  The pious monks of Saint Bernard
  Uttered the oft-repeated prayer,
  A voice cried through the startled air,
        Excelsior!

      Iam lžc�sc�bat, et fr‰tr�s
      S‰nct” Bernard” vigil�s
      ïr‰bant prec�s solit‰s,
      Cum v™x cl‰m‰vit per aur‰s,
            Excelsior!

  A traveler, by the faithful hound,
  Half-buried in the snow was found,
  Still grasping in his hand of ice
  That banner with the strange device,
        Excelsior!

      S�mi-sepultus vi‰tor
      Can(e) ‰ f”d™ reper”tur,
      Compr�nd�ns pugn™ gelid™
      Illud v�xillum cum sign™,
            Excelsior!

  There in the twilight cold and gray,
  Lifeless, but beautiful, he lay,
  And from the sky, serene and far,
  A voice fell, like a falling star,
        Excelsior!


      Iacet corpus exanimum
      Sed lžce fr”gid‰ pulchrum;
      Et cael™ procul exi�ns
      Cadit v™x, ut Stella cad�ns,
          Excelsior!

    [Footnote 6: Translation by C. W. Goodchild in _Praeco Latinus_,
    October, 1898.]




PART II

WORDS AND FORMS


LESSON I

FIRST PRINCIPLES

Ç19.È ÇSubject and Predicate.È
  1. Latin, like English, expresses thoughts by means of sentences.
  A sentence is a combination of words that expresses a thought, and in
  its simplest form is the statement of a single fact. Thus,

  _Galba is a farmer_
    ÇGalba est agricolaÈ
  _The sailor fights_
    ÇNauta pugnatÈ

In each of these sentences there are two parts:

  SUBJECT               PREDICATE
    _Galba_               _is a farmer_
      ÇGalbaÈ
    _The sailor_          _fights_
      ÇNautaÈ               ÇpugnatÈ

  2. The subject is that person, place, or thing about which something
  is said, and is therefore a _noun_ or some word which can serve the
  same purpose.

    _a._ Pronouns, as their name implies (_pro_, Òinstead of,Ó and
    _noun_), often take the place of nouns, usually to save repeating
    the same noun, as, _Galba is a farmer; ÇheÈ is a sturdy fellow_.

  3. The predicate is that which is said about the subject, and consists
  of a verb with or without modifiers.

    _a._ A verb is a word which asserts something (usually an act)
    concerning a person, place, or thing.

Ç20.È ÇThe Object.È In the two sentences, _The boy hit the ball_ and
_The ball hit the boy_, the same words are used, but the meaning is
different, and depends upon the order of the words. The ÇdoerÈ of the
act, that about which something is said, is, as we have seen above, the
ÇsubjectÈ. ÇThat to which something is doneÈ is the Çdirect objectÈ of
the verb. _The boy hit the ball_ is therefore analyzed as follows:

    SUBJECT        PREDICATE
                 /-----------\
    _The boy_    _hit the ball_
               (verb)  (direct object)

    _a._ A verb whose action passes over to the object directly, as in
    the sentence above, is called a Çtransitive verbÈ. A verb which does
    not admit of a direct object is called ÇintransitiveÈ, as, _I walk_,
    _he comes_.

Ç21.È ÇThe Copula.È The verb _to be_ in its different forms--_are_,
_is_, _was_, etc.--does not tell us anything about the subject; neither
does it govern an object. It simply connects the subject with the word
or words in the predicate that possess a distinct meaning. Hence it is
called the ÇcopulaÈ, that is, _the joiner_ or _link_.

Ç22.È In the following sentences pronounce the Latin and name the
_nouns, verbs, subjects, objects, predicates, copulas_:

  1. ÇAmerica est patria meaÈ
     _America is fatherland my_

  2. ÇAgricola f”liam amatÈ
     _(The) farmer (his) daughter loves_

  3. ÇF”lia est IžliaÈ
     _(His) daughter is Julia_

  4. ÇIžlia et agricola sunt in ”nsul‰È
     _Julia and (the) farmer are on (the) island_

  5. ÇIžlia aquam portatÈ
     _Julia water carries_

  6. ÇRosam in com”s habetÈ
     _(A) rose in (her) hair (she) has_

  7. ÇIžlia est puella pulchraÈ
     _Julia is (a) girl pretty_

  8. ÇDomina f”liam pulchram habetÈ
     _(The) lady (a) daughter beautiful has_

    _a._ The sentences above show that Latin does not express some words
    which are necessary in English. First of all, _Latin has no article
    ÇtheÈ or ÇaÈ_; thus _ÇagricolaÈ_ may mean _the farmer, a farmer_,
    or simply _farmer_. Then, too, the personal pronouns, _I, you, he,
    she_, etc., and the possessive pronouns, _my, your, his, her_, etc.,
    are not expressed if the meaning of the sentence is clear without
    them.


LESSON II

FIRST PRINCIPLES (_Continued_)

Ç23.È ÇInflection.È Words may change their forms to indicate some change
in sense or use, as, _is, are_; _was, were; who, whose, whom; farmer,
farmerÕs; woman, women_. This is called ÇinflectionÈ. The inflection of
a noun, adjective, or pronoun is called its ÇdeclensionÈ, that of a verb
its ÇconjugationÈ.

Ç24.È ÇNumber.È Latin, like English, has two numbers, singular and
plural. In English we usually form the plural by adding _-s_ or _-es_ to
the singular. So Latin changes the singular to the plural by changing
the ending of the word. Compare

  ÇNaut-a pugnatÈ
    _The sailor fights_
  ÇNaut-ae pugnantÈ
    _The sailors fight_

Ç25.È RULE. _Nouns that end in Ç-aÈ in the singular end in Ç-aeÈ in the
plural_.

Ç26.È Learn the following nouns so that you can give the English for the
Latin or the Latin for the English. Write the plural of each.

  Çagri«colaÈ, _farmer_ (agriculture)[1]
  ÇaquaÈ, _water_ (aquarium)
  ÇcausaÈ, _cause, reason_
  Çdo«minaÈ, _lady of the house, mistress_ (dominate)
  ÇfiliaÈ, _daughter_ (filial)
  Çfortž«naÈ, _fortune_
  ÇfugaÈ, _flight_ (fugitive)
  Çiniž«riaÈ, _wrong, injury_
  ÇlžnaÈ, _moon_ (lunar)
  ÇnautaÈ, _sailor_ (nautical)
  Çpuel«laÈ, _girl_
  ÇsilvaÈ, forest (silvan)
  ÇterraÈ, _land_ (terrace)

    [Footnote 1: The words in parentheses are English words related to
    the Latin. When the words are practically identical, as ÇcausaÈ,
    _cause_, no comparison is needed.]

Ç27.È Compare again the sentences

  ÇNauta pugna-tÈ
    _The sailor fights_
  ÇNautae pugna-ntÈ
    _The sailors fight_

In the first sentence the verb Çpugna-tÈ is in the third person
singular, in the second sentence Çpugna-ntÈ is in the third person
plural.

Ç28.È RULE. ÇAgreement of Verb.È _A finite verb must always be in the
same person and number as its subject._

Ç29.È RULE. _In the conjugation of the Latin verb the third person
singular active ends in Ç-tÈ, the third person plural in Ç-ntÈ. The
endings which show the person and number of the verb are called
Çpersonal endingsÈ._

Ç30.È Learn the following verbs and write the plural of each. The
personal pronouns _he_, _she_, _it_, etc., which are necessary in the
inflection of the English verb, are not needed in the Latin, because the
personal endings take their place. Of course, if the verbÕs subject is
expressed we do not translate the personal ending by a pronoun; thus
Çnauta pugnatÈ is translated _the sailor fights_, not _the sailor he
fights_.

  Çama-tÈ _he (she, it) loves, is loving, does love_ (amity, amiable)
  Çlab™«ra-tÈ Ò Ò Ò _labors, is laboring, does labor_
  Çnžntia-tÈ[2] Ò Ò Ò _announces, is announcing, does announce_
  Çporta-tÈ Ò Ò Ò _carries, is carrying, does carry_ (porter)
  Çpugna-tÈ Ò Ò Ò _fights, is fighting, does fight_ (pugnacious)

    [Footnote 2: The _u_ in Çnžnti™È is long by exception.
    (Cf. ¤12.2.)]

Ç31.È EXERCISES

I. 1. The daughter loves, the daughters love. 2. The sailor is carrying,
the sailors carry. 3. The farmer does labor, the farmers labor. 4. The
girl is announcing, the girls do announce. 5. The ladies are carrying,
the lady carries.

II. 1. Nauta pugnat, nautae pugnant. 2. Puella amat, puellae amant.
3. Agricola portat, agricolae portant. 4. F”lia lab™rat, f”liae
lab™rant. 5. Nauta nžntiat, nautae nžntiant. 6. Dominae amant, domina
amat.

  [Illustration: DOMINA]


LESSON III

FIRST PRINCIPLES (_Continued_)

Ç32.È ÇDeclension of Nouns.È We learned above (¤¤19, 20) the difference
between the subject and object, and that in English they may be
distinguished by the order of the words. Sometimes, however, the order
is such that we are left in doubt. For example, the sentence _The lady
her daughter loves_ might mean either that the lady loves her daughter,
or that the daughter loves the lady.

  1. If the sentence were in Latin, no doubt could arise, because the
  subject and the object are distinguished, not by the order of the
  words, but by the endings of the words themselves. Compare the
  following sentences:

  ÇDomina f”liam amatÈ
  ÇF”liam domina amatÈ
  ÇAmat f”liam dominaÈ
  ÇDomina amat f”liamÈ
    _The lady loves her daughter_

  ÇF”lia dominam amatÈ
  ÇDominam f”lia amatÈ
  ÇAmat dominam f”liaÈ
  ÇF”lia amat dominamÈ
    _The daughter loves the lady_

    _a._ Observe that in each case the subject of the sentence ends in
    Ç-aÈ and the object in Ç-amÈ. The _form_ of the noun shows how it is
    used in the sentence, and the order of the words has no effect on
    the essential meaning.

  2. As stated above (¤23), this change of ending is called
  ÇdeclensionÈ, and each different ending produces what is called a
  ÇcaseÈ. When we decline a noun, we give all its different cases, or
  changes of endings. In English we have three cases,--nominative,
  possessive, and objective; but, in nouns, the nominative and objective
  have the same form, and only the possessive case shows a change of
  ending, by adding _Õs_ or the apostrophe. The interrogative pronoun,
  however, has the fuller declension, _who?_ _whose?_ _whom?_

Ç33.È The following table shows a comparison between English and Latin
declension forms, and should be thoroughly memorized:

          ENGLISH CASES                         LATIN CASES
  +---+-------------+--------------+------------------+----------------+
  |   | Declension  | Name of case | Declension of    | Name of case   |
  |   | of _who?_   | and use      | ÇdominaÈ         |   and use      |
  |   |             |              | and translation  |                |
  +---+-------------+--------------+------------------+----------------+
  |   | Who?        | Nominative-- | Çdo«min-aÈ       | Nominative--   |
  | S |             |  case of the |  _the lady_      |  case of the   |
  | I |             |  subject     |                  |  subject       |
  | N |             |              |                  |                |
  | G | Whose?      | Possessive-- | Çdomin-aeÈ       | Genitive--     |
  | U |             |  case of the |  _the ladyÕs_    |  case of the   |
  | L |             |  possessor   |  _of the lady_   |  possessor     |
  | A |             |              |                  |                |
  | R | Whom?       | Objective--  | Çdomin-amÈ       | Accusative--   |
  |   |             |  case of the |  _the lady_      |  case of the   |
  |   |             |  object      |                  |  direct object |
  +---+-------------+--------------+------------------+----------------+
  |   | Who?        | Nominative-- | Çdomin-aeÈ       | Nominative--   |
  |   |             |  case of the | _the ladies_     |  case of the   |
  | P |             |  subject     |                  |  subject       |
  | L |             |              |                  |                |
  | U | Whose?      | Possessive-- | Çdomin-‰«rumÈ    | Genitive--     |
  | R |             |  case of the |  _the ladiesÕ_   | case of the    |
  | A |             |  possessor   |  _of the ladies_ | possessor      |
  | L |             |              |                  |                |
  |   | Whom?       | Objective--  | Çdomin-‰sÈ       | Accusative--   |
  |   |             |  case of the |  _the ladies_    |  case of the   |
  |   |             |  object      |                  |  direct object |
  +---+-------------+--------------+------------------+----------------+

When the nominative singular of a noun ends in Ç-aÈ, observe that

    _a._ The nominative plural ends in Ç-aeÈ.

    _b._ The genitive singular ends in Ç-aeÈ and the genitive plural in
    Ç-‰rumÈ.

    _c._ The accusative singular ends in Ç-amÈ and the accusative plural
    in Ç-‰sÈ.

    _d._ The genitive singular and the nominative plural have the same
    ending.

Ç34.È EXERCISE

Pronounce the following words and give their general meaning. Then give
the number and case, and the use of each form. Where the same form
stands for more than one case, give all the possible cases and uses.

1. Silva, silv‰s, silvam. 2. Fugam, fugae, fuga. 3. Terr‰rum,
terrae, terr‰s. 4. Aqu‰s, causam, lžn‰s. 5. F”liae, fortžnae, lžnae.
6. Inižri‰s, agricol‰rum, aqu‰rum. 7. Inižri‰rum, agricolae, puell‰s.
8. Nautam, agricol‰s, naut‰s. 9. Agricolam, puellam, silv‰rum.


LESSON IV

FIRST PRINCIPLES (_Continued_)

  [Special Vocabulary]

  [See TranscriberÕs Note at beginning of text.]

  NOUNS
  ÇdeaÈ, _goddess_ (deity)
   Di‰«na, _Diana_
  ÇferaÈ, _a wild beast_ (fierce)
   L‰t™«na, _Latona_
  Çsagit«taÈ, _arrow_

  VERBS
  ÇestÈ, _he (she, it) is_; ÇsuntÈ, _they are_
  ÇnecatÈ, _he (she, it) kills, is killing, does kill_

  CONJUNCTION[A]
  ÇetÈ, _and_

  PRONOUNS
  ÇquisÈ, interrog. pronoun, nom. sing., _who?_
  ÇcuiusÈ (pronounced _c[oo]i«y[oo]s_, two syllables), interrog.
     pronoun, gen. sing., _whose?_

    [Footnote A: A _conjunction_ is a word which connects words, parts
    of sentences, or sentences.]

Ç35.È We learned from the table (¤33) that the Latin nominative,
genitive, and accusative correspond, in general, to the nominative,
possessive, and objective in English, and that they are used in the same
way. This will be made even clearer by the following sentence:

  ÇF”lia agricolae nautam amatÈ,
    _the farmerÕs daughter_ (or _the daughter of the farmer_)
    _loves the sailor_

What is the subject? the direct object? What case is used for the
subject? for the direct object? What word denotes the possessor? In what
case is it?

Ç36.È RULE. ÇNominative Subject.È _The subject of a finite verb is in
the Nominative and answers the question Who? or What?_

Ç37.È RULE. ÇAccusative Object.È _The direct object of a transitive verb
is in the Accusative and answers the question Whom? or What?_

Ç38.È RULE. ÇGenitive of the Possessor.È _The word denoting the owner or
possessor of something is in the Genitive and answers the question
Whose?_

  [Illustration: DIANA SAGITTAS PORTAT ET FERAS NECAT]

Ç39.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 283.

I. 1. Di‰na est dea. 2. L‰t™na est dea. 3. Di‰na et L‰t™na sunt deae.
4. Di‰na est dea lžnae. 5. Di‰na est f”lia L‰t™nae. 6. L‰t™na Di‰nam
amat. 7. Di‰na est dea silv‰rum. 8. Di‰na silvam amat. 9. Di‰na sagitt‰s
portat. 10. Di‰na fer‰s silvae necat. 11. Ferae terr‰rum pugnant.

For the order of words imitate the Latin above.

II. 1. The daughter of Latona does love the forests. 2. LatonaÕs
daughter carries arrows. 3. The farmersÕ daughters do labor. 4. The
farmerÕs daughter loves the waters of the forest. 5. The sailor is
announcing the girlsÕ flight. 6. The girls announce the sailorsÕ wrongs.
7. The farmerÕs daughter labors. 8. DianaÕs arrows are killing the wild
beasts of the land.

Ç40.È CONVERSATION

Translate the questions and answer them in Latin. The answers may be
found in the exercises preceding.

  1. Quis est Di‰na?
  2. Cuius f”lia est Di‰na?
  3. Quis Di‰nam amat?
  4. Quis silvam amat?
  5. Quis sagitt‰s portat?
  6. Cuius f”liae lab™rant?


LESSON V

FIRST PRINCIPLES (_Continued_)

  [Special Vocabulary]

  NOUNS
  Çcor™«naÈ, _wreath, garland, crown_
   f‰«bula, _story_ (fable)
  Çpecž«niaÈ, _money_ (pecuniary)
  ÇpugnaÈ, _battle_ (pugnacious)
  Çvict™«riaÈ, _victory_

  VERBS
  ÇdatÈ, _he (she, it) gives_
   n‰rrat, _he (she, it) tells_ (narrate)

  CONJUNCTION[A]
  ÇquiaÈ or ÇquodÈ, _because_

  ÇcuiÈ (pronounced _c[oo]i_, one syllable), interrog. pronoun, dat.
     sing., _to whom?_ _for whom?_

    [Footnote A: A _conjunction_ is a word which connects words, parts
    of sentences, or sentences.]

Ç41.È ÇThe Dative Case.È In addition to the relationships between words
expressed by the nominative, genitive (possessive), and accusative
(objective) cases, there are other relationships, to express which in
English we use such words as _from_, _with_, _by_, _to_, _for_, _in_,
_at_.[1]

    [Footnote 1: Words like _to_, _for_, _by_, _from_, _in_, etc., which
    define the relationship between words, are called ÇprepositionsÈ.]

Latin, too, makes frequent use of such prepositions; but often it
expresses these relations without them by means of case forms which
English does not possess. One of the cases found in the Latin declension
and lacking in English is called the _dative_.

Ç42.È When the nominative singular ends in Ç-aÈ, the dative singular
ends in Ç-aeÈ and the dative plural in Ç-”sÈ.

NOTE. Observe that the _genitive singular_, the _dative singular_, and
the _nominative plural_ all have the same ending, Ç-aeÈ; but the uses of
the three cases are entirely different. The general meaning of the
sentence usually makes clear which case is intended.

    _a._ Form the dative singular and plural of the following nouns:
    ÇfugaÈ, ÇcausaÈ, ÇfortžnaÈ, ÇterraÈ, ÇaquaÈ, ÇpuellaÈ, ÇagricolaÈ,
    ÇnautaÈ, ÇdominaÈ.

Ç43.È ÇThe Dative Relation.È The dative case is used to express the
relations conveyed in English by the prepositions _to_, _towards_,
_for_.

These prepositions are often used in English in expressions of motion,
such as _She went to town_, _He ran towards the horse_, _Columbus sailed
for America_. In such cases the dative is not used in Latin, as _motion
through space_ is foreign to the dative relation. But the dative is used
to denote that _to_ or _towards which_ a benefit, injury, purpose,
feeling, or quality is directed, or that _for which_ something serves or
exists.

    _a._ What dative relations do you discover in the following?

The teacher gave a prize to John because he replied so promptly to all
her questions--a good example for the rest of us. It is a pleasure to us
to hear him recite. Latin is easy for him, but it is very hard for me.
Some are fitted for one thing and others for another.

Ç44.È ÇThe Indirect Object.È Examine the sentence

  ÇNauta fugam nžntiatÈ,
    _the sailor announces the flight_

Here the verb, ÇnžntiatÈ, governs the direct object, ÇfugamÈ, in the
accusative case. If, however, we wish to mention the persons Çto whomÈ
the sailor announces the flight, as, _The sailor announces the flight
Çto the farmersÈ_, the verb will have two objects:

  1. Its direct object, _flight_ (ÇfugamÈ)
  2. Its indirect object, _farmers_

According to the preceding section, _to the farmers_ is a relation
covered by the dative case, and we are prepared for the following rule:

Ç45.È RULE. ÇDative Indirect Object.È _The indirect object of a verb is
in the Dative._

    _a._ The indirect object usually stands before the direct object.

Ç46.È We may now complete the translation of the sentence _The sailor
announces the flight to the farmers_, and we have

  ÇNauta agricol”s fugam nžntiatÈ

Ç47.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 283.

_Point out the direct and indirect objects and the genitive of the
possessor._

I. 1. Quis naut”s pecžniam dat? 2. F”liae agricolae naut”s pecžniam
dant. 3. Quis fortžnam pugnae nžntiat? 4. Galba agricol”s fortunam
pugnae nžntiat. 5. Cui domina f‰bulam n‰rrat? 6. F”liae agricolae domina
f‰bulam n‰rrat. 7. Quis Di‰nae cor™nam dat? 8. Puella Di‰nae cor™nam dat
quia Di‰nam amat. 9. Dea lžnae sagitt‰s portat et fer‰s silv‰rum necat.
10. Cuius vict™riam Galba nžntiat? 11. Nautae vict™riam Galba nžntiat.

Imitate the word order of the preceding exercise.

II. 1. To whom do the girls give a wreath? 2. The girls give a wreath to
Julia, because Julia loves wreaths. 3. The sailors tell the ladies[2] a
story, because the ladies love stories. 4. The farmer gives his
(¤22.a) daughter water. 5. Galba announces the cause of the battle
to the sailor. 6. The goddess of the moon loves the waters of the
forest. 7. Whose wreath is Latona carrying? DianaÕs.

    [Footnote 2: Observe that in English the indirect object often
    stands without a preposition _to_ to mark it, especially when it
    precedes the direct object.]


LESSON VI

FIRST PRINCIPLES (_Continued_)

  [Special Vocabulary]

  ADJECTIVES
  ÇbonaÈ, _good_
  Çgr‰taÈ, _pleasing_
  ÇmagnaÈ, _large, great_
  ÇmalaÈ, _bad, wicked_
  ÇparvaÈ, _small, little_
  ÇpulchraÈ, _beautiful, pretty_
  Çs™laÈ, _alone_

  NOUNS
  ancil«la, _maidservant_
  Ižlia, _Julia_

  ADVERBS[A]
  ÇcžrÈ, _why_
  Çn™nÈ, _not_

  PRONOUNS
  ÇmeaÈ, _my_; ÇtuaÈ, _thy, your_ (possesives)
  ÇquidÈ, interrog. pronoun, nom. and acc. sing., _what?_

  Ç-neÈ, the question sign, an enclitic (¤16) added to the first word,
     which, in a question, is usually the verb, as ÇamatÈ, _he loves_,
     but Çamat«neÈ? _does he love?_ ÇestÈ, _he is_; ÇestneÈ? _is he?_
     Of course Ç-neÈ is not used when the sentence contains ÇquisÈ,
     ÇcžrÈ, or some other interrogative word.

    [Footnote A: An _adverb_ is a word used to modify a verb, an
    adjective, or another adverb; as, She sings _sweetly_; she is
    _very_ talented; she began to sing _very early_.]

Ç48.È ÇThe Ablative Case.È Another case, lacking in English but found in
the fuller Latin declension, is the _ab«la-tive._

Ç49.È When the nominative singular ends in Ç-aÈ, the ablative singular
ends in Ç-‰È and the ablative plural in Ç-”sÈ.

    _a._ Observe that the final -a of the nominative is short, while the
    final -‰ of the ablative is long, as,

      _Nom._ f”lia
      _Abl._ f”li‰

    _b._ Observe that the ablative plural is like the dative plural.

    _c._ Form the ablative singular and plural of the following nouns:
    ÇfugaÈ, ÇcausaÈ, ÇfortžnaÈ, ÇterraÈ, ÇaquaÈ, ÇpuellaÈ, ÇagricolaÈ,
    ÇnautaÈ, ÇdominaÈ.

Ç50.È ÇThe Ablative Relation.È The ablative case is used to express the
relations conveyed in English by the prepositions _from_, _with_, _by_,
_at_, _in_. It denotes

  1. That from which something is separated, from which it starts, or of
  which it is deprived--generally translated by _from_.

  2. That with which something is associated or by means of which it is
  done--translated by _with_ or _by_.

  3. The place where or the time when something happens--translated by
  _in_ or _at_.

    _a._ What ablative relations do you discover in the following?

      In our class there are twenty boys and girls. Daily at eight
      oÕclock they come from home with their books, and while they are
      at school they read with ease the books written by the Romans.
      By patience and perseverance all things in this world can be
      overcome.

Ç51.È ÇPrepositions.È While, as stated above (¤41), many relations
expressed in English by prepositions are in Latin expressed by case
forms, still prepositions are of frequent occurrence, but only with the
accusative or ablative.

Ç52.È RULE. ÇObject of a Preposition.È _A noun governed by a preposition
must be in the Accusative or Ablative case._

Ç53.È Prepositions denoting the ablative relations _from, with, in, on_,
are naturally followed by the ablative case. Among these are

  ljÈ[1] or ÇabÈ, _from, away from_
  Çd�È, _from, down from_
  Ç�È[1] or ÇexÈ, _from, out from, out of_
  ÇcumÈ, _with_
  ÇinÈ, _in, on_

    [Footnote 1: Ç‰È and Ç�È are used only before words beginning with
    a consonant; ÇabÈ and ÇexÈ are used before either vowels or
    consonants.]

  1. _Translate into Latin, using prepositions._ In the water, on the
  land, down from the forest, with the fortune, out of the forests, from
  the victory, out of the waters, with the sailors, down from the moon.

Ç54.È ÇAdjectives.È Examine the sentence

  ÇPuella parva bonam deam amatÈ,
    _the little girl loves the good goddess_

In this sentence ÇparvaÈ (_little_) and ÇbonamÈ (_good_) are not nouns,
but are descriptive words expressing quality. Such words are called
_adjectives_,[2] and they are said to belong to the noun which they
describe.

    [Footnote 2: _Pick out the adjectives in the following:_ ÒWhen I
    was a little boy, I remember that one cold winterÕs morning I was
    accosted by a smiling man with an ax on his shoulder. ÔMy pretty
    boy,Õ said he, Ôhas your father a grindstone?Õ ÔYes, sir,Õ said I.
    ÔYou are a fine little fellow,Õ said he. ÔWill you let me grind my
    ax on it?ÕÓ]

You can tell by its ending to which noun an adjective belongs. The
ending of ÇparvaÈ shows that it belongs to ÇpuellaÈ, and the ending of
ÇbonamÈ that it belongs to ÇdeamÈ. Words that belong together are said
to agree, and the belonging-together is called _agreement_. Observe that
_the adjective and its noun agree in number and case_.

Ç55.È Examine the sentences

  ÇPuella est parvaÈ,
    _the girl is little_
  ÇPuella parva bonam deam amatÈ,
    _the little girl loves the good goddess_

In the first sentence the adjective ÇparvaÈ is separated from its noun
by the verb and stands in the predicate. It is therefore called a
_predicate adjective_. In the second sentence the adjectives ÇparvaÈ and
ÇbonamÈ are closely attached to the nouns ÇpuellaÈ and ÇdeamÈ
respectively, and are called _attributive adjectives._

    _a._ Pick out the attributive and the predicate adjectives in the
    following:

Do you think Latin is hard? Hard studies make strong brains. Lazy
students dislike hard studies. We are not lazy.

Ç56.È DIALOGUE

JULIA AND GALBA

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 283.

  I. Quis, Galba, est Di‰na?
  G. Di‰na, Ižlia, est pulchra dea lžnae et silv‰rum.
  I. Cuius f”lia, Galba, est Di‰na?
  G. L‰t™nae f”lia, Ižlia, est Di‰na.
  I. Quid Di‰na portat?
  G. Sagitt‰s Di‰na portat.
  I. Cžr Di‰na sagitt‰s portat?
  G. Di‰na sagitt‰s portat, Ižlia, quod mal‰s fer‰s silvae magnae necat.
  I. Amatne L‰t™na f”liam?
  G. Amat, et f”lia L‰t™nam amat.
  I. Quid f”lia tua parva portat?
  G. Cor™n‰s pulchr‰s f”lia mea parva portat.
  I. Cui f”lia tua cor™n‰s pulchr‰s dat?
  G. Di‰nae cor™n‰s dat.
  I. Quis est cum f”li‰ tu‰? Estne s™la?
  G. S™la n™n est; f”lia mea parva est cum ancill‰ me‰.

    _a._ When a person is called or addressed, the case used is called
    the _voc«ative_ (Latin _voc‰re_, Òto callÓ). _In form the vocative
    is regularly like the nominative_. In English the name of the person
    addressed usually stands first in the sentence. _The Latin vocative
    rarely stands first_. Point out five examples of the vocative in
    this dialogue.

    _b._ Observe that questions answered by _yes_ or _no_ in English
    are answered in Latin by repeating the verb. Thus, if you wished to
    answer in Latin the question _Is the sailor fighting?_ ÇPugnatne
    nauta?È you would say ÇPugnatÈ, _he is fighting_, or ÇN™n pugnatÈ,
    _he is not fighting._


LESSON VII

THE FIRST OR _å_-DECLENSION

  [Special Vocabulary]

  NOUNS
  Çcasa, -aeÈ, f., _cottage_
   c�na, -ae, f., _dinner_
  Çgall”«na, -aeÈ, f., _hen, chicken_
  Ç”n«sula, aeÈ, f., _island_ (pen-insula)

  ADVERBS
  Çde-in«deÈ, _then, in the next place_
  ÇubiÈ, _where_

  PREPOSITION
  ÇadÈ, _to_, with acc. to express motion toward

  PRONOUN
  ÇquemÈ, interrog. pronoun, acc. sing., _whom?_

  VERBS
  ha«bitat, _he (she, it) lives, is living, does live_ (inhabit)
  ÇlaudatÈ, _he (she, it) praises, is praising, does praise_ (laud)
  ÇparatÈ, _he (she, it) prepares, is preparing, does prepare_
  ÇvocatÈ, _he (she, it) calls, is calling, does call; invites,
     is inviting, does invite_ (vocation)

Ç57.È In the preceding lessons we have now gone over all the cases,
singular and plural, of nouns whose nominative singular ends in Ç-aÈ.
All Latin nouns whose nominative singular ends in Ç-aÈ belong to the
First Declension. It is also called the _å_-Declension because of the
prominent part which the vowel ÇaÈ plays in the formation of the cases.
We have also learned what relations are expressed by each case. These
results are summarized in the following table:

+--------+----------------+-------------------+-------------------------+
|  CASE  | NOUN           |   TRANSLATION     | USE AND GENERAL MEANING |
|        |                |                   | OF EACH CASE            |
+--------+----------------+-------------------+-------------------------+
|        |                |     SINGULAR      |                         |
+--------+----------------+-------------------+-------------------------+
| _Nom._ | do«min-a       | _the lady_        | The subject             |
|        |                |                   |                         |
| _Gen._ | domin-ae       | _of the lady_,    | The possessor           |
|        |                |  or _the ladyÕs_  |   of something          |
|        |                |                   |                         |
| _Dat._ | domin-ae       | _to_ or _for      | Expressing the relation |
|        |                |  the lady_        |   _to_ or _for_,        |
|        |                |                   |   especially the        |
|        |                |                   |   indirect object       |
|        |                |                   |                         |
| _Acc._ | domin-am       | _the lady_        | The direct object       |
|        |                |                   |                         |
| _Abl._ | domin-‰        | _from, with, by,  | Separation (_from_),    |
|        |                |   in, the lady_   | association or means    |
|        |                |                   | (_with, by_), place     |
|        |                |                   | where or time when      |
|        |                |                   | (_in, at_)              |
+--------+----------------+-------------------+-------------------------+
|        |                |      PLURAL       |                         |
+--------+----------------+-------------------+-------------------------+
| _Nom._ | domin-ae       | _the ladies_      |                         |
|        |                |                   |                         |
| _Gen._ | domin-‰«rum    | _of the ladies_,  |                         |
|        |                |  or _the ladiesÕ_ |                         |
|        |                |                   |                         |
| _Dat._ | domin-”s       | _to_ or _for      | The same as             |
|        |                |   the ladies_     |   the singular          |
|        |                |                   |                         |
| _Acc._ | domin-‰s       | _the ladies_      |                         |
|        |                |                   |                         |
| _Abl._ | domin-”s       | _from, with, by_, |                         |
|        |                |  _in, the ladies_ |                         |
+--------+----------------+-------------------+-------------------------+

Ç58.È ÇThe Base.È That part of a word which remains unchanged in
inflection and to which the terminations are added is called the ÇbaseÈ.

Thus, in the declension above, Çdomin-È is the base and Ç-aÈ is the
termination of the nominative singular.

Ç59.È Write the declension of the following nouns, separating the base
from the termination by a hyphen. Also give them orally.

  ÇpugnaÈ, ÇterraÈ, ÇlžnaÈ, Çancil«laÈ, Çcor™«naÈ, Ç”n«sulaÈ, ÇsilvaÈ

Ç60.È ÇGender.È In English, names of living beings are either masculine
or feminine, and names of things without life are neuter. This is called
Çnatural genderÈ. Yet in English there are some names of things to which
we refer as if they were feminine; as, ÒHave you seen my yacht? _She_ is
a beauty.Ó And there are some names of living beings to which we refer
as if they were neuter; as, ÒIs the baby here? No, the nurse has taken
_it_ home.Ó Some words, then, have a gender quite apart from sex or real
gender, and this is called Çgrammatical genderÈ.

Latin, like English, has three genders. Names of males are usually
masculine and of females feminine, but _names of things have grammatical
gender and may be either masculine, feminine, or neuter_. Thus we have
in Latin the three words, ÇlapisÈ, _a stone_; Çržp�sÈ, _a cliff_; and
ÇsaxumÈ, _a rock_. ÇLapisÈ is _masculine_, Çržp�sÈ _feminine_, and
ÇsaxumÈ _neuter_. The gender can usually be determined by the ending of
the word, and _must always be learned_, for without knowing the gender
it is impossible to write correct Latin.

Ç61.È ÇGender of First-Declension Nouns.È Nouns of the first declension
are feminine unless they denote males. Thus ÇsilvaÈ is feminine, but
ÇnautaÈ, _sailor_, and ÇagricolaÈ, _farmer_, are masculine.

Ç62.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 284.

I. 1. Agricola cum f”li‰ in cas‰ habitat. 2. Bona f”lia agricolae c�nam
parat. 3. C�na est gr‰ta agricolae[1] et agricola bonam f”liam laudat.
4. Deinde f”lia agricolae gall”n‰s ad c�nam vocat. 5. Gall”nae f”liam
agricolae amant. 6. Malae f”liae bon‰s c�n‰s n™n parant. 7. F”lia
agricolae est gr‰ta dominae. 8. Domina in ”nsul‰ magn‰ habitat.
9. Domina bonae puellae parvae pecžniam dat.

II. 1. Where does the farmer live? 2. The farmer lives in the small
cottage. 3. Who lives with the farmer? 4. (His) little daughter lives
with the farmer. 5. (His) daughter is getting (ÇparatÈ) a good dinner
for the farmer. 6. The farmer praises the good dinner. 7. The daughterÕs
good dinner is pleasing to the farmer.

    [Footnote 1: Note that the relation expressed by the dative case
    covers that _to which a feeling is directed._ (Cf. ¤43.)]

  [Illustration]

What Latin words are suggested by this picture?

Ç63.È CONVERSATION

Answer the questions in Latin.

  1. Quis cum agricol‰ in cas‰ habitat?
  2. Quid bona f”lia agricolae parat?
  3. Quem agricola laudat?
  4. Vocatne f”lia agricolae gall”n‰s ad c�nam?
  5. Cuius f”lia est gr‰ta dominae?
  6. Cui domina pecžniam dat?


LESSON VIII

FIRST DECLENSION (_Continued_)

  [Special Vocabulary]

  NOUNS
  ÇItalia, -aeÈ, f., _Italy_
   Sicilia, -ae, f., _Sicily_
  Çtuba, -aeÈ, f., _trumpet_ (tube)
  Çvia, -aeÈ, f., _way, road, street_ (viaduct)

  ADJECTIVES
  ÇaltaÈ, _high, deep_ (altitude)
  Çcl‰raÈ, _clear, bright; famous_
  Çl‰taÈ, _wide_ (latitude)
  ÇlongaÈ, _long_ (longitude)
  ÇnovaÈ, _new_ (novelty)

Ç64.È We have for some time now been using adjectives and nouns together
and you have noticed an agreement between them in _case_ and in _number_
(¤54). They agree also in _gender_. In the phrase Çsilva magnaÈ, we
have a feminine adjective in Ç-aÈ agreeing with a feminine noun in Ç-aÈ.

Ç65.È RULE. ÇAgreement of Adjectives.È _Adjectives agree with their
nouns in gender, number, and case._

Ç66.È Feminine adjectives in Ç-aÈ are declined like feminine nouns in
Ç-aÈ, and you should learn to decline them together as follows:

          NOUN               ADJECTIVE
  ÇdominaÈ (base Çdomin-È),  ÇbonaÈ (base Çbon-È),
     f., _lady_                _good_

          SINGULAR                TERMINATIONS
  _Nom._  do«mina             bona        -a
  _Gen._  dominae             bonae       -ae
  _Dat._  dominae             bonae       -ae
  _Acc._  dominam             bonam       -am
  _Abl._  domin‰              bon‰        -‰

          PLURAL
  _Nom._  dominae             bonae       -ae
  _Gen._  domin‰«rum          bon‰«rum    -‰rum
  _Dat._  domin”s             bon”s       -”s
  _Acc._  domin‰s             bon‰s       -‰s
  _Abl._  domin”s             bon”s       -”s

    _a._ In the same way decline together Çpuella malaÈ, _the bad girl_;
    Çancil«la parvaÈ, _the little maid_; Çfortž«na magnaÈ, _great
    fortune._

Ç67.È The words ÇdeaÈ, _goddess_, and Çf”liaÈ, _daughter_, take the
ending Ç-‰busÈ instead of Ç-”sÈ in the _dative and ablative plural._
Note the _dative and ablative plural_ in the following declension:

  Çdea bonaÈ (bases Çde-È Çbon-È)

          SINGULAR      PLURAL
  _Nom._  dea bona      deae bonae
  _Gen._  deae bonae    de‰«rum bon‰«rum
  _Dat._  deae bonae    de‰«bus bon”s
  _Acc._  deam bonam    de‰s bon‰s
  _Abl._  de‰ bon‰      dea«bus bon”s

    _a._ In the same way decline together Çf”l”a parvaÈ.

Ç68.È ÇLatin Word Order.È The order of words in English and in Latin
sentences is not the same.

In English we arrange words in a fairly fixed order. Thus, in the
sentence _My daughter is getting dinner for the farmers_, we cannot
alter the order of the words without spoiling the sentence. We can,
however, throw emphasis on different words by speaking them with more
force. Try the effect of reading the sentence by putting special force
on _my, daughter, dinner, farmers_.

In Latin, where the office of the word in the sentence is shown by its
_ending_ (cf. ¤32.1), and not by its _position_, the order of words is
more free, and position is used to secure the same effect that in
English is secured by emphasis of voice. To a limited extent we can
alter the order of words in English, too, for the same purpose. Compare
the sentences

    _I saw a game of football at Chicago last November_ (normal order)
    _ÇLast NovemberÈ I saw a game of football at Chicago_
    _At Chicago, last November, I saw a game of ÇfootballÈ_

  1. In a Latin sentence the most emphatic place is the _first_; next in
  importance is the _last_; the weakest point is the _middle_. Generally
  the _subject_ is the most important word, and is placed _first_;
  usually the _verb_ is the next in importance, and is placed _last_.
  The other words of the sentence stand between these two in the order
  of their importance. Hence the normal order of words--that is, where
  no unusual emphasis is expressed--is as follows:

    _subject_--_modifiers of the subject_--_indirect object_--
    _direct object_--_adverb_--_verb_

  Changes from the normal order are frequent, and are due to the desire
  for throwing emphasis upon some word or phrase. _Notice the order of
  the Latin words when you are translating, and imitate it when you are
  turning English into Latin._

  2. Possessive pronouns and modifying genitives normally stand after
  their nouns. When placed before their nouns they are emphatic, as

    Çf”lia meaÈ, _my daughter_;
      Çmea f”liaÈ, _ÇmyÈ daughter_;
    Çcasa GalbaeÈ, _GalbaÕs cottage_;
      ÇGalbae casaÈ, _ÇGalbaÕsÈ cottage_.

  Notice the variety of emphasis produced by writing the following
  sentence in different ways:

    ÇF”lia mea agricol”s c�nam paratÈ (normal order)
    ÇMea f”lia agricol”s parat c�namÈ (ÇmeaÈ and Çc�namÈ emphatic)
    ÇAgricol”s f”lia mea c�nam paratÈ (Çagricol”sÈ emphatic)

  3. An adjective placed before its noun is more emphatic than when it
  follows. When great emphasis is desired, the adjective is separated
  from its noun by other words.

    ÇF”lia mea casam parvam n™n amatÈ (ÇparvamÈ not emphatic)
    ÇF”lia mea parvam casam n™n amatÈ (ÇparvamÈ more emphatic)
    ÇParvam f”lia mea casam n™n amatÈ (ÇparvamÈ very emphatic)

  4. Interrogative words usually stand first, the same as in English.

  5. The copula (as ÇestÈ, ÇsuntÈ) is of so little importance that it
  frequently does not stand last, but may be placed wherever it sounds
  well.

Ç69.È EXERCISE

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 284.

_Note the order of the words in these sentences and pick out those that
are emphatic._

1. Longae n™n sunt tuae viae. 2. Suntne tubae novae in me‰ cas‰? N™n
sunt. 3. Quis l‰t‰ in silv‰ habitat? Di‰na, lžnae cl‰rae pulchra dea,
l‰t‰ in silv‰ habitat. 4. Nautae alt‰s et l‰t‰s amant aqu‰s. 5. Quid
ancilla tua portat? Ancilla mea tubam novam portat. 6. Ubi sunt Lesbia
et Ižlia? In tu‰ casa est Lesbia et Ižlia est in me‰. 7. Estne Italia
l‰ta terra? Longa est Italia, n™n l‰ta. 8. Cui Galba agricola f‰bulam
novam n‰rrat? F”li‰bus dominae cl‰rae f‰bulam novam n‰rrat. 9. Cl‰ra
est ”nsula Sicilia. 10. Quem laudat L‰t™na? L‰t™na laudat f”liam.

       *       *       *       *       *

  ÇFirst Review of Vocabulary and Grammar, ¤¤502-505È

       *       *       *       *       *

LESSON IX

THE SECOND OR _O_-DECLENSION

  [Special Vocabulary]

  NOUNS
  Çbellum, -”È, n., _war_ (re-bel)
  Çc™nstantia, -aeÈ, f., _firmness, constancy, steadiness_
   dominus, -”, m., _master, lord_ (dominate)
  Çequus, -”È, m., _horse_ (equine)
  Çfržmentum, -”È, n., _grain_
  Çl�g‰tus, -”È, m., _lieutenant, ambassador_ (legate)
  ÇM‰rcus, -”È, m., _Marcus, Mark_
  Çmžrus, -”È, m., _wall_ (mural)
  Çoppid‰nus, -”È, m., _townsman_
  Çoppidum, -”È, n., _town_
  Çp”lum, -”È, n., _spear_ (pile driver)
  Çservus, -”È, m., _slave, servant_
   Sextus, -”, m., _Sextus_

  VERBS
  ÇcžratÈ, _he (she, it) cares for_, with acc.
  ÇproperatÈ, _he (she, it) hastens_

Ç70.È Latin nouns are divided into five declensions.

The declension to which a noun belongs is shown by the ending of
the genitive singular. This should always be learned along with the
nominative and the gender.

Ç71.È The nominative singular of nouns of the Second or _O_-Declension
ends in Ç-usÈ, Ç-erÈ, Ç-irÈ, or Ç-umÈ. The genitive singular ends in
Ç-”È.

Ç72.È ÇGender.È Nouns in Ç-umÈ are neuter. The others are regularly
masculine.

Ç73.È ÇDeclension of nouns in -_us_ and -_um_È. Masculines in Ç-usÈ and
neuters in Ç-umÈ are declined as follows:

  ÇdominusÈ (base Çdomin-È),    Çp”lumÈ (base Çp”l-È),
     m., _master_                n., _spear_

                 TERMINATIONS       TERMINATIONS
          SINGULAR
  _Nom._  do«minus[1]  -us       p”lum     -um
  _Gen._  domin”       -”        p”l”      -”
  _Dat._  domin™       -™        p”l™      -™
  _Acc._  dominum      -um       p”lum     -um
  _Abl._  domin™       -™        p”l™      -™
  _Voc._  domine       -e        p”lum     -um

          PLURAL
  _Nom._  domin”       -”        p”la      -a
  _Gen._  domin™«rum   -™rum     p”l™«rum  -™rum
  _Dat._  domin”s      -”s       p”l”s     -”s
  _Acc._  domin™s      -™s       p”la      -a
  _Abl._  domin”s      -”s       p”l”s     -”s

    [Footnote 1: Compare the declension of ÇdominaÈ and of ÇdominusÈ.]

    _a._ Observe that the masculines and the neuters have the same
    terminations excepting in the nominative singular and the nominative
    and accusative plural.

    _b._ The vocative singular of words of the second declension in
    Ç-usÈ ends in Ç-eÈ, as ÇdomineÈ, _O master_; ÇserveÈ, _O slave_.
    This is the most important exception to the rule in ¤56.a.

Ç74.È Write side by side the declension of ÇdominaÈ, ÇdominusÈ, and
Çp”lumÈ. A comparison of the forms will lead to the following rules,
which are of great importance because they apply to all five
declensions:

    _a._ The vocative, with a single exception (see ¤73.b), is like
    the nominative. That is, the vocative singular is like the
    nominative singular, and the vocative plural is like the nominative
    plural.

    _b._ The nominative, accusative, and vocative of neuter nouns are
    alike, and in the plural end in Ç-aÈ.

    _c._ The accusative singular of masculines and feminines ends in
    Ç-mÈ and the accusative plural in Ç-sÈ.

    _d._ The dative and ablative plural are always alike.

    _e._ Final Ç-iÈ and Ç-oÈ are always _long_; final Ç-aÈ is _short_,
    except in the ablative singular of the first declension.

Ç75.È Observe the sentences

  ÇLesbia est bonaÈ,
    _Lesbia is good_
  ÇLesbia est ancillaÈ,
    _Lesbia is a maidservant_

We have learned (¤55) that ÇbonaÈ, when used, as here, in the predicate
to describe the subject, is called a _predicate adjective_. Similarly a
_noun_, as ÇancillaÈ, used in the _predicate_ to define the subject is
called a Çpredicate nounÈ.

Ç76.È RULE. ÇPredicate Noun.È _A predicate noun agrees in case with the
subject of the verb._

  [Illustration: PILA]

Ç77.È DIALOGUE

GALBA AND MARCUS

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 285.

  G. Quis, M‰rce, est l�g‰tus cum p”l™ et tub‰?
  M. L�g‰tus, Galba, est Sextus.
  G. Ubi Sextus habitat?[2]
  M. In oppid™ Sextus cum f”li‰bus habitat.
  G. Amantne oppid‰n” Sextum?
  M. Amant oppid‰n” Sextum et laudant, quod magn‰ cum c™nstanti‰ pugnat.
  G. Ubi, M‰rce, est ancilla tua? Cžr n™n c�nam parat?
  M. Ancilla mea, Galba, equ™ l�g‰t” aquam et fržmentum dat.
  G. Cžr n™n servus Sext” equum domin” cžrat?
  M. Sextus et servus ad mžrum oppid” properant. Oppid‰n” bellum
    parant.[3]

    [Footnote 2: ÇhabitatÈ is here translated _does live_. Note the
    _three_ possible translations of the Latin present tense:
      ÇhabitatÈ
          _he lives_
          _he is living_
          _he does live_
    Always choose the translation which makes the best sense.]

    [Footnote 3: Observe that the verb Çpar™È means not only
    _to prepare_ but also _to prepare for_, and governs the
    accusative case.]

  [Illustration: LEGATUS CUM PILO ET TUBA]

Ç78.È CONVERSATION

Translate the questions and answer them in Latin.

  1. Ubi f”liae Sext” habitant?
  2. Quem oppid‰n” amant et laudant?
  3. Quid ancilla equ™ l�g‰t” dat?
  4. Cuius equum ancilla cžrat?
  5. Quis ad mžrum cum Sext™ properat?
  6. Quid oppid‰n” parant?


LESSON X

SECOND DECLENSION (_Continued_)

  [Special Vocabulary]

  NOUNS
  Çam”cus, -”È, m., _friend_ (amicable)
  ÇGerm‰nia, -aeÈ, f., _Germany_
  Çpatria, -aeÈ, f., _fatherland_
  Çpopulus, -”È, m., _people_
  ÇRh�nus, -”È, m., _the Rhine_
  Çv”cus, -”È, m., _village_

Ç79.È We have been freely using feminine adjectives, like ÇbonaÈ, in
agreement with feminine nouns of the first declension and declined like
them. _Masculine_ adjectives of this class are declined like ÇdominusÈ,
and _neuters_ like p”lum. The adjective and noun, masculine and neuter,
are therefore declined as follows:

  MASCULINE NOUN AND ADJECTIVE         NEUTER NOUN AND ADJECTIVE
  Çdominus bonusÈ, _the good master_   Çp”lum bonumÈ, _the good spear_
    BASES domin- bon-                    BASES p”l- bon-

                          TERMINATIONS               TERMINATIONS
          SINGULAR
  _Nom._  do«minus bonus       -us      p”lum bonum        -um
  _Gen._  domin” bon”          -”       p”l” bon”         -”
  _Dat._  domin™ bon™          -™       p”l™ bon™         -™
  _Acc._  dominum bonum        -um      p”lum bonum       -um
  _Abl._  domin™ bon™          -™       p”l™ bon™         -™
  _Voc._  domine bone          -e       p”lum bonum       -um

          PLURAL
  _Nom._  domin” bon”          -”       ”la bona          -a
  _Gen._  domin™«rum bon™«rum  -™rum    ”l™«rum bon™«rum  -™rum
  _Dat._  domin”s bon”s        -is      ”l”s bon”s        -”s
  _Acc._  domin™s bon™s        -™s      ”la bona          -a
  _Abl._  domin”s bon”s        -”s      ”l”s bon”s        -”s

Decline together Çbellum longumÈ, Çequus parvusÈ, Çservus malusÈ,
Çmžrus altusÈ, Çfržmentum novumÈ.

Ç80.È Observe the sentences

  ÇLesbia ancilla est bonaÈ,
    _Lesbia, the maidservant, is good_
  ÇF”lia Lesbiae ancillae est bonaÈ,
    _the daughter of Lesbia, the maidservant, is good_
  ÇServus Lesbiam ancillam amatÈ,
    _the slave loves Lesbia, the maidservant_

In these sentences ÇancillaÈ, ÇancillaeÈ, and ÇancillamÈ denote the
class of persons to which _Lesbia_ belongs and explain who she is. Nouns
so related that the second is only another name for the first and
explains it are said to be in apposition, and are always in the same
case.

Ç81.È RULE. ÇApposition.È _An appositive agrees in case with the noun
which it explains._

Ç82.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 285.

I. 1. Patria serv” bon”, v”cus serv™rum bon™rum, bone popule. 2. Populus
oppid” magn”, in oppid™ magn™, in oppid”s magn”s. 3. Cum p”l”s long”s,
ad p”la longa, ad mžr™s l‰t™s. 4. L�g‰te male, am”c” leg‰t” mal”, c�na
gr‰ta domin™ bon™. 5. Fržmentum equ™rum parv™rum, domine bone, ad
l�g‰t™s cl‰r™s. 6. Rh�nus est in Germ‰ni‰, patri‰ me‰. 7. Sextus l�g‰tus
p”lum longum portat. 8. Oppid‰n” bon” Sext™ l�g‰t™ cl‰r‰ pecžniam dant.
9. Mal” serv” equum bonum M‰rc” domin” necant. 10. Galba agricola et
Ižlia f”lia bona lab™rant. 11. M‰rcus nauta in ”nsul‰ Sicili‰ habitat.

II. 1. Wicked slave, who is your friend? Why does he not praise Galba,
your master? 2. My friend is from (ÇexÈ) a village of Germany, my
fatherland. 3. My friend does not love the people of Italy. 4. Who is
caring for[1] the good horse of Galba, the farmer? 5. Mark, where is
Lesbia, the maidservant? 6. She is hastening[1] to the little cottage[2]
of Julia, the farmerÕs daughter.

    [Footnote 1: See footnote 1, p. 33. Remember that ÇcžratÈ is
    transitive and governs a direct object.]

    [Footnote 2: Not the dative. (Cf. ¤43.)]


LESSON XI

ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS

  [Special Vocabulary]

  NOUNS
  Çarma, arm™rumÈ, n., plur., _arms_, especially defensive weapons
  Çf‰ma, -aeÈ, f., _rumor; reputation, fame_
  Çgalea, -aeÈ, f., _helmet_
  Çpraeda, -aeÈ, f., _booty, spoils_ (predatory)
  Çt�lum, -”È, n., _weapon of offense, spear_

  ADJECTIVES
  Çdžrus, -a, -umÈ, _hard,  rough; unfeeling, cruel; severe, toilsome_
     (durable)
  ÇR™m‰nus, -a, -umÈ, _Roman_. As a noun, ÇR™m‰nus, -”È, m., _a Roman_

Ç83.È Adjectives of the first and second declensions are declined in the
three genders as follows:

          MASCULINE  FEMININE   NEUTER
          SINGULAR
  _Nom._  bonus      bona       bonum
  _Gen._  bon”       bonae      bon”
  _Dat._  bon™       bonae      bon™
  _Acc._  bonum      bonam      bonum
  _Abl._  bon™       bon‰       bon™
  _Voc._  bone       bona       bonum

        PLURAL
  _Nom._  bon”       bonae      bona
  _Gen._  bon™rum    bon‰rum    bon™rum
  _Dat._  bon”s      bon”s      bon”s
  _Acc._  bon™s      bon‰s      bona
  _Abl._  bon”s      bon”s      bon”s

    _a._ Write the declension and give it orally _across the page_, thus
    giving the three genders for each case.

    _b._ Decline Çgr‰tus, -a, -umÈ; Çmalus, -a, -umÈ; Çaltus, -a, -umÈ;
    Çparvus, -a, -umÈ.

Ç84.È Thus far the adjectives have had the same terminations as the
nouns. However, the agreement between the adjective and its noun does
_not_ mean that they must have the same termination. If the adjective
and the noun belong to different declensions, the terminations will, in
many cases, not be the same. For example, ÇnautaÈ, _sailor_, is
masculine and belongs to the first declension. The masculine form of the
adjective ÇbonusÈ is of the second declension. Consequently, _a good
sailor_ is Çnauta bonusÈ. So, _the wicked farmer_ is Çagricola malusÈ.
Learn the following declensions:

Ç85.È Çnauta bonusÈ (bases naut- bon-), m., _the good sailor_

          SINGULAR
  _Nom._  nauta     bonus
  _Gen._  nautae    bon”
  _Dat._  nautae    bon™
  _Acc._  nautam    bonum
  _Abl._  naut‰     bon™
  _Voc._  nauta     bone

          PLURAL
  _Nom._  nautae    bon”
  _Gen._  naut‰rum  bon™rum
  _Dat._  naut”s    bon”s
  _Acc._  naut‰s    bon™s
  _Abl._  naut”s    bon”s
  _Voc._  nautae    bon”

Ç86.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 285.

I. 1. Est[1] in v”c™ nauta bonus. 2. Sextus est am”cus nautae bon”.
3. Sextus nautae bon™ galeam dat. 4. Populus R™m‰nus nautam bonum
laudat. 5. Sextus cum naut‰ bon™ praedam portat. 6. Ubi, nauta bone,
sunt anna et t�la l�g‰t” R™m‰n”? 7. Nautae bon” ad bellum properant.
8. F‰ma naut‰rum bon™rum est cl‰ra. 9. Pugnae sunt gr‰tae naut”s bon”s.
10. Oppid‰n” naut‰s bon™s cžrant. 11. Cžr, nautae bon”, mal” agricolae
ad Rh�num properant? 12. Mal” agricolae cum bon”s naut”s pugnant.

II. 1. The wicked farmer is hastening to the village with (his) booty.
2. The reputation of the wicked farmer is not good. 3. Why does GalbaÕs
daughter give arms and weapons to the wicked farmer? 4. Lesbia invites
the good sailor to dinner. 5. Why is Lesbia with the good sailor
hastening from the cottage? 6. Sextus, where is my helmet? 7. The good
sailors are hastening to the toilsome battle. 8. The horses of the
wicked farmers are small. 9. The Roman people give money to the good
sailors. 10. Friends care for the good sailors. 11. Whose friends are
fighting with the wicked farmers?

    [Footnote 1: ÇEstÈ, beginning a declarative sentence, _there is._]

  [Illustration: GALEAE]


LESSON XII

NOUNS IN _-IUS_ AND _-IUM_

  [Special Vocabulary]

  NOUNS
  Çf”lius, f”l”È, m., _son_ (filial)
   fluvius, fluv”, m., _river_ (fluent)
  Çgladius, glad”È, m., _sword_ (gladiator)
  Çpraesidium, praesi«d”È, n., _garrison, guard, protection_
  Çproelium, proel”È, n., _battle_

  ADJECTIVES
  Çf”nitimus, -a, -umÈ, _bordering upon, neighboring, near to_.
     As a noun, Çf”nitim”, -™rumÈ, m., plur., _neighbors_
  ÇGerm‰nus, -a, -umÈ, _German_. As a noun, ÇGerm‰nus, -”È, m.,
    _a German_
  Çmultus, -a, -umÈ, _much_; plur., _many_

  ADVERB
  ÇsaepeÈ, _often_

Ç87.È Nouns of the second declension in Ç-iusÈ and Ç-iumÈ end in Ç-”È in
the genitive singular, _not_ in Ç-i”È, and the accent rests on the
penult; as, Çf”l”È from Çf”liusÈ (_son_), Çpraesi«d”È from Çpraesi«diumÈ
(_garrison_).

Ç88.È Proper names of persons in Ç-iusÈ, and Çf”liusÈ, end in Ç-”È in
the vocative singular, _not_ in Ç-eÈ, and the accent rests on the
penult; as, ÇVergi«l”È, _O Vergil_; Çf”l”È, _O son._

    _a._ Observe that in these words the vocative and the genitive are
    alike.

Ç89.È   ÇpraesidiumÈ (base praesidi-),  Çf”liusÈ (base f”li-),
           n., _garrison_                  m., _son_

          SINGULAR
  _Nom._  praesidium                      f”lius
  _Gen._  praesi«d”                       f”l”
  _Dat._  praesidi™                       f”li™
  _Acc._  praesidium                      f”lium
  _Abl._  praesidi™                       f”li™
  _Voc._  praesidium                      f”l”

The plural is regular. Note that the Ç-i-È of the base is lost only in
the genitive singular, and in the vocative of words like Çf”liusÈ.

Decline together Çpraesidium parvumÈ; Çf”lius bonusÈ; Çfluvius longusÈ,
_the long river_; Çproelium cl‰rumÈ, _the famous battle._

Ç90.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 285.

I. 1. Fržmentum bonae terrae, glad” mal”, bell” long”. 2. C™nstantia
magna, praesidia magna, cl‰re Vergi«l”. 3. Male serve, ï cl‰rum oppidum,
male f”l”, f”li” mal”, f”l” mal”. 4. Fluv” long”, fluvi” long”,
fluvi™rum long™rum, f‰ma praesi«d” magn”. 5. Cum gladi”s parv”s, cum
de‰bus cl‰r”s, ad naut‰s cl‰r™s. 6. Mult™rum proeli™rum, praedae magnae,
ad proelia džra.

GERMåNIA

II. Germ‰nia, patria Germ‰n™rum, est cl‰ra terra. In Germ‰ni‰ sunt
fluvi” mult”. Rh�nus magnus et l‰tus fluvius Germ‰niae est. In silv”s
l‰t”s Germ‰niae sunt ferae multae. Multi Germ‰nii in oppid”s magnis et
in v”c”s parv”s habitant et mult” sunt agricolae bon”. Bella Germ‰n™rum
sunt magna et cl‰ra. Populus Germ‰niae bellum et proelia amat et saepe
cum finitim”s pugnat. Fluvius Rh�nus est f”nitimus oppid”s[1] mult”s et
cl‰r”s.

    [Footnote 1: Dative with Çf”nitimusÈ. (See ¤43.)]


LESSON XIII

SECOND DECLENSION (_Continued_)

  [Special Vocabulary]

  NOUNS
  Çager, agr”È, m., _field_ (acre)
  Çc™pia, -aeÈ, f., _plenty, abundance_ (copious); plur., _troops,
     forces_
  ÇCorn�lius, Corn�«l”È, m., _Cornelius_
  Çl™r”«ca, -aeÈ, f., _coat of mail, corselet_
  Çpraemium, praem”È, n., _reward, prize_ (premium)
  Çpuer, puer”È, m., _boy_ (puerile)
  ÇR™ma, -aeÈ, f., _Rome_
  Çscžtum, -”È, n., _shield_ (escutcheon)
  Çvir, vir”È, m., _man, hero_ (virile)

  ADJECTIVES
  Çlegi™n‰rius, -a, -umÈ,[A] _legionary, belonging to the legion_.
     As a noun, Çlegi™n‰ri”, -™rumÈ, m., plur., _legionary soldiers_
  Çl”ber, l”bera, l”berumÈ, _free_ (liberty) As a noun. Çl”ber”, -™rumÈ,
     m., plur., _children_ (lit. _the freeborn_)
  Çpulcher, pulchra, pulchrumÈ, _pretty, beautiful_

  PREPOSITION
  ÇapudÈ, _among_, with acc.

  CONJUNCTION
  ÇsedÈ, _but_

    [Footnote A: The genitive singular masculine of adjectives in Ç-iusÈ
    ends in Ç-i”È and the vocative in Ç-ieÈ; not in Ç-”È, as in nouns.]

Ç91.È ÇDeclension of Nouns in _-er_ and _-ir_.È In early Latin all the
masculine nouns of the second declension ended in Ç-osÈ. This Ç-osÈ
later became Ç-usÈ in words like ÇservusÈ, and was dropped entirely in
words with bases ending in Ç-rÈ, like ÇpuerÈ, _boy_; ÇagerÈ, _field_;
and ÇvirÈ, _man_. These words are therefore declined as follows:

Ç92.È ÇpuerÈ, m., _boy_  ÇagerÈ, m., _field_  ÇvirÈ, m., _man_
         BASE Çpuer-È       BASE Çagr-È          BASE Çvir-È

          SINGULAR                                    TERMINATIONS
  _Nom._  puer               ager                 vir      ----
  _Gen._  puer”              agr”                 vir”     -”
  _Dat._  puer™              agr™                 vir™     -™
  _Acc._  puerum             agrum                virum    -um
  _Abl._  puer™              agr™                 vir™     -™

          PLURAL
  _Nom._  puer”              agr”                 vir”     -”
  _Gen._  puer™rum           agr™rum              vir™rum  -™rum
  _Dat._  puer”s             agr”s                vir”s    -”s
  _Acc._  puer™s             agr™s                vir™s    -™s
  _Abl._  puer”s             agr”s                vir”s    -”s

    _a._ The vocative case of these words is like the nominative,
    following the general rule (¤74.a).

    _b._ The declension differs from that of ÇservusÈ only in the
    nominative and vocative singular.

    _c._ Note that in ÇpuerÈ the ÇeÈ remains all the way through, while
    in ÇagerÈ it is present only in the nominative. In ÇpuerÈ the ÇeÈ
    belongs to the base, but in ÇagerÈ (base Çagr-È) it does not, and
    was inserted in the nominative to make it easier to pronounce. Most
    words in Ç-erÈ are declined like ÇagerÈ. _The genitive shows whether
    you are to follow_ ÇpuerÈ _or_ ÇagerÈ.

Ç93.È Masculine adjectives in Ç-erÈ of the second declension are
declined like nouns in Ç-erÈ. A few of them are declined like ÇpuerÈ,
but most of them like ÇagerÈ. The feminine and neuter nominatives show
which form to follow, thus,

  MASC.    FEM.     NEUT.
  l”ber    l”bera   l”berum   (_free_)
     is like ÇpuerÈ
  pulcher  pulchra  pulchrum  (_pretty_)
     is like ÇagerÈ

For the full declension in the three genders, see ¤469._b._ _c._

Ç94.È Decline together the words Çvir l”berÈ, Çterra l”beraÈ, Çfržmentum
l”berumÈ, Çpuer pulcherÈ, Çpuella pulchraÈ, Çoppidum pulchrumÈ

Ç95.È ITALIA[1]

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 286.

Magna est Italiae f‰ma, patriae R™m‰n™rum, et cl‰ra est R™ma, domina
orbis terr‰rum.[2] Tiberim,[3] fluvium R™m‰num, quis n™n laudat et
pulchr™s fluvi™ f”nitim™s agr™s? Alt™s mžr™s, longa et džra bella,
cl‰r‰s vict™ri‰s quis n™n laudat? Pulchra est terra Italia. Agr” bon”
agricol”s praemia dant magna, et equ” agricol‰rum c™piam fržment” ad
oppida et v”c™s portant. In agr”s popul” R™m‰n” lab™rant mult” serv”.
Viae Italiae sunt longae et l‰tae. F”nitima Italiae est ”nsula Sicilia.

    [Footnote 1: In this selection note especially the emphasis as shown
    by the order of the words.]

    [Footnote 2: Çorbis terr‰rumÈ, _of the world_.]

    [Footnote 3: ÇTiberimÈ, _the Tiber_, accusative case.]

Ç96.È DIALOGUE

MARCUS AND CORNELIUS

  C. Ubi est, M‰rce, f”lius tuus? Estne in pulchr‰ terr‰ Itali‰?
  M. N™n est, Corn�l”, in Itali‰. Ad fluvium Rh�num properat cum c™pi”s
    R™m‰n”s quia est[4] f‰ma Nov” bell” cum Germ‰n”s. L”ber Germ‰niae
    populus R™m‰n™s N™n amat.
  C. Estne f”lius tuus copi‰rum R™m‰n‰rum l�g‰tus?
  M. L�g‰tus n™n est, sed est apud legi™n‰ri™s.
  C. Quae[5] arma portat[6]?
  M. Scžtum magnum et l™r”cam džram et galeam pulchram portat.
  C. Quae t�la portat?
  M. Gladium et p”lum longum portat.
  C. Amatne l�g‰tus f”lium tuum?
  M. Amat, et saepe f”li™ me™ praemia pulchra et praedam multam dat.
  C. Ubi est terra Germ‰n™rum?
  M. Terra Germ‰n™rum, Corn�l” est f”nitima Rh�n™, fluvi™ magn™ et alt™.

    [Footnote 4: ÇestÈ, before its subject, _there is_; so ÇsuntÈ,
    _there are._]

    [Footnote 5: ÇQuaeÈ, _what kind of_, an interrogative adjective
    pronoun.]

    [Footnote 6: What are the three possible translations of the present
    tense?]

  [Illustration: LEGIONARIUS]


LESSON XIV

THE POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS

  [Special Vocabulary]

  NOUNS
  Çauxilium, auxi«l”È, n., _help, aid_ (auxiliary)
  Çcastrum, -”È, n., _fort_ (castle); plur., _camp_ (lit. _forts_)
  Çcibus, -”È, m., _food_
  Çc™nsilium, c™nsi«l”È, n., _plan_ (counsel)
  Çd”ligentia, -aeÈ, f.. _diligence, industry_
   magister, magistr”, m., _master, teacher_[A]

  ADJECTIVES
  Çaeger, aegra, aegrumÈ, _sick_
  Çcr�ber, cr�bra, cr�brumÈ, _frequent_
  Çmiser, misera, miserumÈ, _wretched, unfortunate_ (miser)

    [Footnote A: Observe that ÇdominusÈ, as distinguished from
    ÇmagisterÈ, means _master_ in the sense of _owner_.]

Ç97.È Observe the sentences

  _This is my shield_
  _This shield is mine_

In the first sentence _my_ is a possessive adjective; in the second
_mine_ is a possessive pronoun, for it takes the place of a noun, _this
shield is mine_ being equivalent to _this shield is my shield_.
Similarly, in Latin the possessives are sometimes _adjectives_ and
sometimes _pronouns_.

Ç98.È The possessives _my, mine, your, yours_, etc. are declined like
adjectives of the first and second declensions.

               SINGULAR
  _1st Pers._  meus, mea, meum          _my, mine_
  _2d Pers._   tuus, tua, tuum          _your, yours_
  _3d Pers._   suus, sua, suum          _his (own), her (own),
                                           its (own)_
               PLURAL
  _1st Pers._  noster, nostra, nostrum  _our, ours_
  _2d Pers._   vester, vestra, vestrum  _your, yours_
  _3d Pers._   suus, sua, suum          _their (own), theirs_

NOTE. ÇMeusÈ has the irregular vocative singular masculine Çm”È, as
Çm” f”l”È, _O my son_.

    _a._ The possessives agree with the name of the _thing possessed_ in
    gender, number, and case. Compare the English and Latin in

      _Sextus is calling ÇhisÈ boy_  ÇSextusÈ } Çsuum puerum vocatÈ
      _Julia is calling ÇherÈ boy_   ÇIžliaÈ  }

    Observe that ÇsuumÈ agrees with ÇpuerumÈ, and is unaffected by the
    gender of Sextus or Julia.

    _b._ When _your, yours_, refers to _one_ person, use ÇtuusÈ; when to
    _more than one_, ÇvesterÈ; as,

      _Lesbia, your wreaths are pretty_
        ÇCor™nae tuae, Lesbia, sunt pulchraeÈ
      _Girls, your wreaths are pretty_
        ÇCor™nae vestrae, puellae, sunt pulchraeÈ

    _c._ ÇSuusÈ is a _reflexive_ possessive, that is, it usually stands
    in the predicate and regularly refers back to the _subject_. Thus,
    ÇVir su™s serv™s vocatÈ means _The man calls his (own) slaves._ Here
    _his_ (Çsu™sÈ) refers to _man_ (ÇvirÈ), and could not refer to any
    one else.

    _d._ Possessives are used much less frequently than in English,
    being omitted whenever the meaning is clear without them. (Cf.
    ¤22.a.) This is especially true of Çsuus, -a, -umÈ, which, when
    inserted, is more or less emphatic, like our _his own, her own_,
    etc.

Ç99.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 286.

I. 1. M‰rcus am”c™ Sext™ c™nsilium suum nžntiat 2. Est c™pia fržment” in
agr”s nostr”s. 3. Am”c” me” bonam c�nam ancillae vestrae laudant 4. Tua
l™r”ca, m” f”l”, est džra. 5. Scžta nostra et t�la, m” am”ce, in castrls
R™m‰n”s sunt. 6. Suntne vir” patriae tuae l”ber”? Sunt. 7. Ubi, Corn�l”,
est tua galea pulchra? 8. Mea galea, Sexte, est in cas‰ me‰. 9. P”lum
longum est tuum, sed gladius est meus. 10. Ižlia gall”n‰s su‰s pulchr‰s
amat et gall”nae dominam suam amant. 11. Nostra castra sunt vestra.
12. Est c™pia praedae in castr”s vestr”s. 13. Am”c” tu” miser”s et
aegr”s cibum et pecžniam saepe dant.

II. 1. Our teacher praises MarkÕs industry. 2. My son Sextus is carrying
his booty to the Roman camp.[1] 3. Your good girls are giving aid to the
sick and wretched.[2] 4. There are [3] frequent battles in our villages.
5. My son, where is the lieutenantÕs food? 6. The camp is mine, but the
weapons are yours.

    [Footnote 1: Not the dative. Why?]

    [Footnote 2: Here the adjectives _sick_ and _wretched_ are used like
    nouns.]

    [Footnote 3: Where should ÇsuntÈ stand? Cf. I. 2 above.]

  [Illustration: AGRICOLA ARAT]


LESSON XV

THE ABLATIVE DENOTING _WITH_

  [Special Vocabulary]

  NOUNS
  Çcarrus, -”È, m., _cart, wagon_
  Çinopia, -aeÈ, f., _want, lack;_ the opposite of Çc™piaÈ
  Çstudium, stud”È, n., _zeal, eagerness_ (study)

  ADJECTIVES
  Çarm‰tus, -a, -umÈ, _armed_
  Ç”nf”rmus, -a, -umÈ, _week, feeble_ (infirm)
   vali«dus, -a, -um, _strong, sturdy_

  VERB
  Çm‰tžratÈ, _he (she, it) hastens._ Cf. properat

  ADVERB
  ÇiamÈ, _already, now_

  Ç-queÈ, conjunction, _and_; an enclitic (cf. ¤16) and always added
  to the _second_ of two words to be connected, as Çarma t�la«queÈ,
  _arms and weapons_.

Ç100.È Of the various relations denoted by the ablative case (¤50)
there is none more important than that expressed in English by the
preposition _with_. This little word is not so simple as it looks.
It does not always convey the same meaning, nor is it always to be
translated by ÇcumÈ. This will become clear from the following
sentences:

  _a._ Mark is feeble _with_ (_for_ or _because of_) want of food
  _b._ Diana kills the beasts _with_ (or _by_) her arrows
  _c._ Julia is _with_ Sextus
  _d._ The men fight _with_ great steadiness

    _a._ In sentence _a_, _with want_ (_of food_) gives the cause of
    MarkÕs feebleness. This idea is expressed in Latin by the ablative
    without a preposition, and the construction is called the Çablative
    of causeÈ:

      ÇM‰rcus est ”nf”rmus inopi‰ cib”È

    _b._ In sentence _b_, _with_ (or _by_) _her arrows_ tells Çby means
    of whatÈ Diana kills the beasts. This idea is expressed in Latin by
    the ablative without a preposition, and the construction is called
    the Çablative of meansÈ:

      ÇDi‰na sagitt”s su”s fer‰s necatÈ

    _c._ In sentence _c_ we are told that Julia is not alone, but Çin
    company withÈ Sextus. This idea is expressed in Latin by the
    ablative with the preposition ÇcumÈ, and the construction is called
    the Çablative of accompanimentÈ:

      ÇIžlia est cum Sext™È

    _d._ In sentence _d_ we are told how the men fight. The idea is one
    of ÇmannerÈ. This is expressed in Latin by the ablative with ÇcumÈ,
    unless there is a modifying adjective present, in which case ÇcumÈ
    may be omitted. This construction is called the Çablative of
    mannerÈ:

      ÇVir” (cum) c™nstanti‰ magn‰ pugnantÈ

Ç101.È You are now able to form four important rules for the ablative
denoting _with_:

Ç102.È RULE. ÇAblative of Cause.È _Cause is denoted by the ablative
without a preposition. This answers the question Because of what?_

Ç103.È RULE. ÇAblative of Means.È _Means is denoted by the ablative
without a preposition. This answers the question By means of what?
With what?_

N.B. ÇCumÈ must never be used with the ablative expressing cause or
means.

Ç104.È RULE. ÇAblative of Accompaniment.È _Accompaniment is denoted by
the ablative with ÇcumÈ. This answers the question With whom?_

Ç105.È RULE. ÇAblative of Manner.È _The ablative with ÇcumÈ is used to
denote the manner of an action. ÇCumÈ may be omitted, if an adjective is
used with the ablative. This answers the question How? In what manner?_

Ç106.È What uses of the ablative do you discover in the following
passage, and what question does each answer?

The soldiers marched to the fort with great speed and broke down the
gate with blows of their muskets. The inhabitants, terrified by the din,
attempted to cross the river with their wives and children, but the
stream was swollen with (_or_ by) the rain. Because of this many were
swept away by the waters and only a few, almost overcome with fatigue,
with great difficulty succeeded in gaining the farther shore.

Ç107.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 286.

I. _The Romans prepare for War._ R™m‰n”, cl‰rus Italiae populus, bellum
parant. Ex agr”s su”s, vic”s, oppid”sque magn™ studi™ vir” valid” ad
arma properant. Iam l�gat” cum legi™nari”s ex Itali‰ ad Rh�num, fluvium
Germ‰niae altum et l‰tum, properant, et serv” equ”s et carr”s cibum
fržmentumque ad castra R™m‰na portant. Inopi‰ bon™rum t�l™rum ”nfirm”
sunt Germ‰n”, sed R™m‰n” arm‰ti gale”s, l™r”c”s, scžt”s, gladi”s,
p”l”sque sunt valid”.

II. 1. The sturdy farmers of Italy labor in the fields with great
diligence. 2. Sextus, the lieutenant, and (his) son Mark are fighting
with the Germans. 3. The Roman legionaries are armed with long spears.
4. Where is Lesbia, your maid, Sextus? Lesbia is with my friends in
GalbaÕs cottage. 5. Many are sick because of bad water and for lack of
food. 6. The Germans, with (their) sons and daughters, are hastening
with horses and wagons.


LESSON XVI

THE NINE IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES

Ç108.È There are nine irregular adjectives of the first and second
declensions which have a peculiar termination in the genitive and
dative singular of all genders:

           MASC.  FEM.  NEUT.
  _Gen._   -”us   -”us  -”us
  _Dat._   -”     -”    -”

Otherwise they are declined like Çbonus, -a, -umÈ. Learn the list and
the meaning of each:

  Çalius, alia, aliudÈ, _other, another_ (of several)
  Çalter, altera, alterumÈ, _the one, the other_ (of two)
  Çžnus, -a, -umÈ, _one, alone_; (in the plural) _only_
  Çžllus, -a, -umÈ, _any_
  Çnžllus, -a, -umÈ, _none, no_
  Çs™lus, -a, -umÈ, _alone_
  Çt™tus, -a, -umÈ, _all, whole, entire_
  Çuter, utra, utrumÈ, _which?_ (of two)
  Çneuter, neutra, neutrumÈ, _neither_ (of two)

Ç109.È PARADIGMS

          SINGULAR
          MASC.     FEM.      NEUT.
  _Nom._  nžllus    nžlla     nžllum
  _Gen._  nžll”«us  nžll”«us  nžll”«us
  _Dat._  nžll”     nžll”     nžll”
  _Acc._  nžllum    nžllam    nžllum
  _Abl._  nžll™     nžll‰     nžll™

          MASC.     FEM.      NEUT.
  _Nom._  alius     alia      aliud
  _Gen._  al”«us    al”«us    al”«us
  _Dat._  ali”      ali”      ali”
  _Acc._  alium     aliam     aliud
  _Abl._  ali™      ali‰      ali™

  THE PLURAL IS REGULAR

    _a._ Note the peculiar neuter singular ending in Ç-dÈ of ÇaliusÈ.
    The genitive Çal”usÈ is rare. Instead of it use Çalter”usÈ, the
    genitive of ÇalterÈ.

    _b._ These peculiar case endings are found also in the declension of
    pronouns (see ¤114). For this reason these adjectives are sometimes
    called the Çpronominal adjectivesÈ.

Ç110.È Learn the following idioms:

  Çalter, -era, -erumÈ ... Çalter, -era, -erumÈ, _the one ... the other_
    (of two)
  Çalius, -a, -udÈ ... Çalius, -a, -udÈ, _one ... another _ (of any
    number)
  Çali”, -ae, -aÈ ... Çali”, -ae, -aÈ, _some ... others_

EXAMPLES

  1. ÇAlterum oppidum est magnum, alterum parvumÈ, _the one town is
  large, the other small_ (of two towns).

  2. ÇAliud oppidum est validum, aliud ”nf”rmumÈ, _one town is strong,
  another weak_ (of towns in general).

  3. ÇAli” gladi™s, ali” scžta portantÈ, _some carry swords, others
  shields._

Ç111.È EXERCISES

I. 1. In utr‰ cas‰ est Ižlia? Ižlia est in neutr‰ cas‰. 2. Nžll” mal™
puer™ praemium dat magister. 3. Alter puer est nauta, alter agricola.
4. Ali” vir” aquam, ali” terram amant. 5. Galba žnus (_or_ s™lus) cum
studi™ lab™rat. 6. Estne žllus carrus in agr™ me™? 7. Lesbia est ancilla
alter”us domin”, Tullia alter”us. 8. Lesbia s™la c�nam parat. 9. C�na
nžll”us alter”us ancillae est bona. 10. Lesbia nžll” ali” vir™ c�nam
dat.

NOTE. The pronominal adjectives, as you observe, regularly stand before
and not after their nouns.

II. 1. The men of all Germany are preparing for war. 2. Some towns are
great and others are small. 3. One boy likes chickens, another horses.
4. Already the booty of one town is in our fort. 5. Our whole village is
suffering for (i.e. _weak because of_) lack of food. 6. The people are
already hastening to the other town. 7. Among the Romans (there) is no
lack of grain.


LESSON XVII

THE DEMONSTRATIVE _IS, EA, ID_

  [Special Vocabulary]

  NOUNS
  Çagr” cultžra, -aeÈ, f., _agriculture_
  ÇGallia, -aeÈ, f., _Gaul_
  Çdomicil”um, dom”ci«l”È, n., _dwelling place_ (domicile), _abode_
  ÇGallus, -iÈ, m., _a Gaul_
  Çlacrima, -aeÈ, f., _tear_
  Çf�mina, -aeÈ, f., _woman_ (female)
  Çnumerus, -”È, m., _number_ (numeral)

  ADJECTIVE
  Çm‰tžrus, -a, -umÈ, _ripe, mature_

  ADVERB
   qu™, _whither_

  VERBS
   arat, _he (she, it) plows_ (arable)
  Çd�s”deratÈ, _he (she, it) misses, longs for_ (desire), with acc.

  CONJUNCTION
  ÇanÈ, _or_, introducing the second half of a double question, as
    _Is he a Roman or a Gaul_, ÇEstne Romanus an Gallus?È

Ç112.È A demonstrative is a word that points out an object definitely,
as _this, that, these, those_. Sometimes these words are pronouns, as,
_Do you hear these?_ and sometimes adjectives, as, _Do you hear these
men?_ In the former case they are called Çdemonstrative pronounsÈ, in
the latter Çdemonstrative adjectivesÈ.

Ç113.È Demonstratives are similarly used in Latin both as _pronouns_ and
as _adjectives_. The one used most is

  ÇisÈ, masculine; ÇeaÈ, feminine; ÇidÈ, neuter
  SINGULAR: _this, that_; PLURAL: _these, those_

Ç114.È ÇIsÈ is declined as follows. Compare its declension with that of
ÇaliusÈ, ¤109.

  BASE Çe-È

          SINGULAR              PLURAL
          MASC.  FEM.   NEUT.   MASC.      FEM.    NEUT.
  _Nom._  is     ea     id      e”         eae     ea
                                (_or_ i”)
  _Gen._  eius   eius   eius    e™rum      e‰rum   e™rum
  _Dat._  e”     e”     e”      e”s        e”s     e”s
                                (_or_ i”s    i”s     i”s)
  _Acc._  eum    eam    id      e™s        e‰s     ea
  _Abl._  e™     e‰     e™      e”s        e”s     e”s
                                (_or_ i”s    i”s     i”s)

Note that the base Çe-È changes to Çi-È in a few cases. The genitive
singular ÇeiusÈ is pronounced _eh«yus_. In the plural the forms with two
ÇiÈÕs are preferred and the two ÇiÈÕs are pronounced as one. Hence,
pronounce Çi”È as Ç”È and Çi”sÈ as Ç”sÈ.

Ç115.È Besides being used as demonstrative pronouns and adjectives the
Latin demonstratives are regularly used for the personal pronoun _he,
she, it_. As a personal pronoun, then, ÇisÈ would have the following
meanings:

  SINGULAR
  _Nom._ ÇisÈ, _he_; ÇeaÈ, _she_; ÇidÈ, _it_
  _Gen._ ÇeiusÈ, _of him_ or _his_;
         ÇeiusÈ, _of her, her_, or _hers_;
         ÇeiusÈ, _of it_ or _its_
  _Dat._ Çe”È, _to_ or _for him_;
         Çe”È, _to_ or _for her_;
         Çe”È, _to_ or _for it_
  _Acc._ ÇeumÈ, _him_; ÇeamÈ, _her_; ÇidÈ, _it_
  _Abl._ Çe™È, _with, from_, etc., _him_;
         Çe‰È, _with, from_, etc., _her_;
         Çe™È, _with, from_, etc., _it_

  PLURAL
  _Nom._ Çe”È or Çi”È, ÇeaeÈ, ÇeaÈ, _they_
  _Gen._ Çe™rumÈ, Çe‰rumÈ, Çe™rumÈ, _of them, their_
  _Dat._ Çe”sÈ or Çi”sÈ, Çe”sÈ or Çi”sÈ, Çe”sÈ or Çi”sÈ,
           _to_ or _for them_
  _Acc._ Çe™s, e‰s, eaÈ, _them_
  _Abl._ Çe”sÈ or Çi”sÈ, Çe”sÈ or Çi”sÈ, Çe”sÈ or Çi”sÈ,
           _with, from_, etc., _them_

Ç116.È ÇComparison between _suus_ and _is_.È We learned above (¤98.c)
that ÇsuusÈ is a _reflexive_ possessive. When _his, her_ (poss.), _its,
their_, do not refer to the subject of the sentence, we express _his,
her, its_ by ÇeiusÈ, the genitive singular of ÇisÈ, ÇeaÈ, ÇidÈ; and
_their_ by the genitive plural, using Çe™rumÈ to refer to a masculine
or neuter antecedent noun and Çe‰rumÈ to refer to a feminine one.

EXAMPLES

  _Galba calls his_ (own) _son_,
    ÇGalba suum f”lium vocatÈ
  _Galba calls his son_ (not his own, but anotherÕs),
    ÇGalba eius f”lium vocatÈ
  _Julia calls her_ (own) _children_,
    ÇIžlia su™s l”ber™s vocatÈ
  _Julia calls her children_ (not her own, but anotherÕs),
    ÇIžlia eius l”ber™s vocatÈ
  _The men praise their_ (own) _boys_,
    Çvir” su™s puer™s laudantÈ
  _The men praise their boys_ (not their own, but othersÕ),
    Çvir” e™rum puer™s laudantÈ

Ç117.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 287.

1. He praises her, him, it, them. 2. This cart, that report, these
teachers, those women, that abode, these abodes. 3. That strong
garrison, among those weak and sick women, that want of firmness,
those frequent plans.

4. The other woman is calling her chickens (_her own_). 5. Another woman
is calling her chickens (_not her own_). 6. The Gaul praises his arms
(_his own_). 7. The Gaul praises his arms (_not his own_). 8. This
farmer often plows their fields. 9. Those wretched slaves long for their
master (_their own_). 10. Those wretched slaves long for their master
(_not their own_). 11. Free men love their own fatherland. 12. They
love its villages and towns.

Ç118.È DIALOGUE[1]

CORNELIUS AND MARCUS

  M. Quis est vir, Corn�l”, cum puer™ parv™? Estne R™m‰nus et l”ber?
  C. R™m‰nus n™n est, M‰rce. Is vir est servus et eius domicilium est in
    silv”s Galliae.
  M. Estne puer f”lius eius serv” an alter”us?
  C. Neutr”us f”lius est puer. Is est f”lius l�g‰t” Sext”.
  M. Qu™ puer cum e™ serv™ properat?
  C. Is cum serv™ properat ad l‰t™s Sext” agr™s.[2] T™tum fržmentum est
    iam m‰tžrum et magnus serv™rum numerus in Italiae[3] agr”s lab™rat.
  M. Agricolaene sunt Gall” et patriae suae agr™s arant?
  C. N™n agricolae sunt. Bellum amant Gall”, n™n agr” cultžram. Apud e™s
    vir” pugnant et f�minae auxili™ l”ber™rum agr™s arant parantque
    cibum.
  M. Magister noster puer”s puell”sque gr‰t‰s Gall™rum f‰bul‰s saepe
    n‰rrat et laudat e™s saepe.
  C. Mala est fortžna e™rum et saepe miser” serv” mult”s cum lacrim”s
    patriam suam d�s”derant.

    [Footnote 1: There are a number of departures from the normal order
    in this dialogue. Find them, and give the reason.]

    [Footnote 2: When a noun is modified by both a genitive and an
    adjective, a favorite order of words is _adjective, genitive,
    noun_.]

    [Footnote 3: A modifying genitive often stands between a preposition
    and its object.]

       *       *       *       *       *

  ÇSecond Review, Lessons IX-XVII, ¤¤506-509È

       *       *       *       *       *

LESSON XVIII

ÇCONJUGATIONÈ
THE PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE TENSES OF ÇSUMÈ

  [Special Vocabulary]

  NOUNS
   lždus, -”, m.,_school_
  Çsocius, soc”È, m., _companion, ally_ (social)

  ADJECTIVES
  Ç”r‰tus, -a, -umÈ, _angry, furious_ (irate)
  Çlaetus, -a, -umÈ, _happy, glad_ (social)

  ADVERBS
   hodi�, _to-day_
  ÇibiÈ, _there, in that place_
   mox, _presently, soon_, of the immediate future
  ÇnuncÈ, _now, the present moment_
  ÇnžperÈ, _lately, recently_, of the immediate past

Ç119.È The inflection of a verb is called its _conjugation_ (cf. ¤23).
In English the verb has but few changes in form, the different meanings
being expressed by the use of personal pronouns and auxiliaries, as,
_I am carried, we have carried, they shall have carried_, etc. In Latin,
on the other hand, instead of using personal pronouns and auxiliary
verbs, the form changes with the meaning. In this way the Romans
expressed differences in _tense, mood, voice, person_, and _number_.

Ç120.È ÇThe Tenses.È The different forms of a verb referring to
different times are called its _tenses_. The chief distinctions of
time are present, past, and future:

  1. ÇThe presentÈ, that is, _what is happening now_, or
     _what usually happens_, is expressed by
        THE PRESENT TENSE

  2. ÇThe pastÈ, that is, _what was happening, used to happen,
      happened, has happened_, or _had happened_, is expressed by
        THE IMPERFECT, PERFECT, AND PLUPERFECT TENSES

  3. ÇThe futureÈ, that is, _what is going to happen_, is expressed by
        THE FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT TENSES

Ç121.È ÇThe Moods.È Verbs have inflection of _mood_ to indicate the
manner in which they express action. The moods of the Latin verb are the
_indicative, subjunctive, imperative_, and _infinitive_.

    _a._ A verb is in the _indicative_ mood when it makes a statement or
    asks a question about something assumed as a fact. All the verbs we
    have used thus far are in the present indicative.

Ç122.È ÇThe Persons.È There are three persons, as in English. The first
person is the person speaking (_I sing_); the second person the person
spoken to (_you sing_); the third person the person spoken of (_he
sings_). Instead of using personal pronouns for the different persons in
the two numbers, singular and plural, the Latin verb uses the personal
endings (cf. ¤22 _a_; 29). We have already learned that Ç-tÈ is the
ending of the third person singular in the active voice and Ç-ntÈ of the
third person plural. The complete list of personal endings of the active
voice is as follows:

              SINGULAR                  PLURAL
  _1st Pers._ _I_             -m or -™  _we_   -mus
  _2d Pers._  _thou_ or _you_ -s        _you_  -tis
  _3d Pers._  _he, she, it_   -t        _they_ -nt

Ç123.È Most verbs form their moods and tenses after a regular plan and
are called _regular_ verbs. Verbs that depart from this plan are called
_irregular_. The verb _to be_ is irregular in Latin as in English. The
present, imperfect, and future tenses of the indicative are inflected as
follows:

  PRESENT INDICATIVE
              SINGULAR                        PLURAL
  _1st Pers._ su-m, _I am_                    su-mus, _we are_
  _2d Pers._  e-s, _you[1] are_               es-tis, _you[1] are_
  _3d Pers._  es-t, _he, she_, or _it is_     su-nt,  _they are_

  IMPERFECT INDICATIVE
              SINGULAR                        PLURAL
  _1st Pers._ er-a-m, _I was_                 er-‰«-mus, _we were_
  _2d Pers._  er-‰-s, _you were_              er-‰«-tis, _you were_
  _3d Pers._  er-a-t, _he, she_, or _it was_  er-‰-nt,   _they were_

  FUTURE INDICATIVE
              SINGULAR                        PLURAL
  _1st Pers._ er-™,   _I shall be_            er«-i-mus, _we shall be_
  _2d Pers._  er-i-s, _you will be_           er«-i-tis, _you will be_
  _3d Pers._  er-i-t, _he will be_            er-u-nt,   _they will be_

    _a._ Be careful about vowel quantity and accent in these forms, and
    consult ¤¤12.2; 14; 15.

    [Footnote 1: Observe that in English _you are_, _you were_, etc. may
    be either singular or plural. In Latin the singular and plural forms
    are never the same.]

Ç124.È DIALOGUE

THE BOYS SEXTUS AND MARCUS

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 287.

  S. Ubi es, M‰rce? Ubi est Qu”ntus? Ubi estis, am”c”?
  M. Cum Qu”nt™, Sexte, in silv‰ sum. N™n s™l” sumus; sunt in silv‰
    mult” ali” puer”.
  S. Nunc laetus es, sed nžper n™n laetus er‰s. Cžr miser er‰s?
  M. Miser eram quia am”c” me” erant in ali™ vic™ et eram s™lus. Nunc
    sum apud soci™s me™s. Nunc laet” sumus et erimus.
  S. Er‰tisne in lždo hodi�?
  M. Hodi� n™n er‰mus in lžd™, quod magister erat aeger.
  S. Eritisne mox in lžd™?
  M. Am”c” me” ibi erunt, sed ego (_I_) n™n er™.
  S. Cžr n™n ibi eris? Magister, saepe ir‰tus, inopiam tuam stud”
    d”ligentiaeque n™n laudat.
  M. Nžper aeger eram et nunc ”nf”rmus sum.

Ç125.È EXERCISE

1. You are, you were, you will be, (_sing. and plur._). 2. I am, I was,
I shall be. 3. He is, he was, he will be. 4. We are, we were, we shall
be. 5. They are, they were, they will be.

6. Why were you not in school to-day? I was sick. 7. Lately he was a
sailor, now he is a farmer, soon he will be a teacher. 8. To-day I am
happy, but lately I was wretched. 9. The teachers were happy because of
the boysÕ industry.

  [Illustration: PUERI ROMANI IN LUDO]


LESSON XIX

THE FOUR REGULAR CONJUGATIONS
PRESENT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF _AMï_ AND _MONEï_

Ç126.È There are four conjugations of the regular verbs. These
conjugations are distinguished from each other by the final vowel of the
present conjugation-stem.[1] This vowel is called the _distinguishing
vowel_, and is best seen in the present infinitive.

    [Footnote 1: The _stem_ is the body of a word to which the
    terminations are attached. It is often identical with the base (cf.
    ¤58). If, however, the stem ends in a vowel, the latter does not
    appear in the base, but is variously combined with the inflectional
    terminations. This point is further explained in ¤230.]

Below is given the _present infinitive_ of a verb of each conjugation,
the _present stem_, and the _distinguishing vowel._

                                                    DISTINGUISHING
  CONJUGATION   PRES. INFIN.            PRES. STEM      VOWEL
      I.         Çam‰«reÈ, _to love_     Çam‰-È          ljÈ
     II.         Çmon�«reÈ, _to advise_  Çmon�-È         Ç�È
    III.         Çre«gereÈ, _to rule_    Çrege-È         ÇeÈ
     IV.         Çaud”«reÈ, _to hear_    Çaudi-È         Ç”È

    _a._ Note that the present stem of each conjugation is found by
    dropping Ç-reÈ, the ending of the present infinitive.

NOTE. The present infinitive of ÇsumÈ is ÇesseÈ, and Çes-È is the
present stem.

Ç127.È From the present stem are formed the _present_, _imperfect_, and
_future_ tenses.

Ç128.È The inflection of the Present Active Indicative of the first and
of the second conjugation is as follows:

     Ça«m™, am‰«reÈ (_love_)        Çmo«ne™, mon�«reÈ (_advise_)
      PRES. STEM Çam‰-È              PRES. STEM Çmon�-È

      SINGULAR                    PLURAL            PERSONAL ENDINGS
  1. a«m™, _I love_               mo«ne™, _I advise_              -™
  2. a«m‰s, _you love_            mo«n�s, _you advise_            -s
  3. a«mat, _he (she, it) loves_  mo«net, _he (she, it) advises_  -t

  1. am‰«mus, _we love_           mon�«mus, _we advise_         -mus
  2. am‰«tis, _you love_          mon�«tis, _you advise_        -tis
  3. a«mant, _they love_          mo«nent, _they advise_         -nt

  1. The present tense is inflected by adding the personal endings to
  the present stem, and its first person uses Ç-oÈ and not Ç-mÈ. The
  form Çam™È is for Çam‰-™È, the two vowels lj-™È contracting to Ç™È. In
  Çmone™È there is no contraction. _Nearly all regular verbs ending in
  Ç-eoÈ belong to the second conjugation._

  2. Note that the long final vowel of the stem is shortened before
  another vowel (Çmon�-™È = Çmo«ne™È), and before final Ç-tÈ (ÇamatÈ,
  ÇmonetÈ) and Ç-ntÈ (ÇamantÈ, ÇmonentÈ). Compare ¤12.2.

Ç129.È Like Çam™È and Çmone™È inflect the present active indicative of
the following verbs[2]:

    [Footnote 2: The only new verbs in this list are the five of the
    second conjugation which are starred. Learn their meanings.]

  INDICATIVE PRESENT           INFINITIVE PRESENT
   a«r™, _I plow_               ar‰«re, _to plow_
   cž«r™, _I care for_          cžr‰«re, _to care for_
  *d�«le™, _I destroy_          d�l�«re, _to destroy_
   d�s”«der™, _I long for_      d�s”der‰«re, _to long for_
   d™,[3] _I give_              da«re, _to give_
  *ha«be™, _I have_             hab�«re, _to have_
   ha«bit™, _I live, I dwell_   habit‰«re, _to live, to dwell_
  *iu«be™, _I order_            iub�«re, _to order_
   lab™«r™, _I labor_           lab™r‰«re, _to labor_
   lau«d™, _I praise_           laud‰«re, _to praise_
   m‰tž«r™, _I hasten_          m‰tžr‰«re, _to hasten_
  *mo«ve™, _I move_             mov�«re, _to move_
   n‰r«r™, _I tell_             n‰rr‰«re, _to tell_
   ne«c™, _I kill_              nec‰«re, _to kill_
   nžn«ti™, _I announce_        nžnti‰«re, _to announce_
   pa«r™, _I prepare_           par‰«re, _to prepare_
   por«t™, _I carry_            port‰«re, _to carry_
   pro«per™, _I hasten_         proper‰«re, _to hasten_
   pug«n™, _I fight_            pugn‰«re, _to fight_
  *vi«de™, _I see_              vid�«re, _to see_
   vo«c™, _I call_              voc‰«re, _to call_

    [Footnote 3: Observe that in Çd™, dareÈ, the ÇaÈ is _short_, and
    that the present stem is Çda-È and not Çd‰-È. The only forms of Çd™È
    that have a long are Çd‰sÈ (pres. indic.), Çd‰È (pres. imv.), and
    Çd‰nsÈ (pres. part.).]

Ç130.È ÇThe Translation of the Present.È In English there are three ways
of expressing present action. We may say, for example, _I live, I am
living_, or _I do live_. In Latin the one expression Çhabit™È covers all
three of these expressions.

Ç131.È EXERCISES

Give the _voice_, _mood_, _tense_, _person_, and _number_ of each form.

I. 1. Voc‰mus, proper‰tis, iubent. 2. Mov�tis, laud‰s, vid�s.
3. D�l�tis, hab�tis, dant. 4. M‰tžr‰s, d�s”derat, vid�mus. 5. Iubet,
movent, necat. 6. N‰rr‰mus, mov�s, vident. 7. Lab™r‰tis, properant,
port‰s, parant. 8. D�let, hab�tis, iub�mus, d‰s.

N.B. Observe that the personal ending is of prime importance in
translating a Latin verb form. Give that your first attention.

II. 1. We plow, we are plowing, we do plow. 2. They care for, they are
caring for, they do care for. 3. You give, you are having, you do have
(_sing_.). 4. We destroy, I do long for, they are living. 5. He calls,
they see, we are telling. 6. We do fight, we order, he is moving, he
prepares. 7. They are laboring, we kill, you announce.


LESSON XX

IMPERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF _AMï_ AND _MONEï_

  [Special Vocabulary]

  NOUNS
  Çf™rma, -aeÈ, f., _form, beauty_
  Çreg”na, -aeÈ, f., _queen_ (regal)
  Çpoena, -aeÈ, f., _punishment, penalty_
   superbia, -ae, f., _pride, haughtiness_
  Çpotentia, -aeÈ, f., _power_ (potent)
  Çtr”st”t”a, -aeÈ, f., _sadness, sorrow_

  ADJECTIVES
  ÇseptemÈ, indeclinable, _seven_
  Çsuperbus, -a, -umÈ, _proud, haughty_ (superb)

   CONJUNCTIONS
  Çn™n s™lum ... sed etiamÈ, _not only ... but also_

Ç132.È ÇTense Signs.È Instead of using auxiliary verbs to express
differences in tense, like _was_, _shall_, _will_, etc., Latin adds to
the verb stem certain elements that have the force of auxiliary verbs.
These are called _tense signs_.

Ç133.È ÇFormation and Inflection of the Imperfect.È The tense sign of
the imperfect is Ç-b‰-È, which is added to the present stem. The
imperfect consists, therefore, of three parts:

  PRESENT STEM  TENSE SIGN  PERSONAL ENDING
  Çam‰-È        Çba-È       ÇmÈ
  _loving_      _was_       _I_

The inflection is as follows:

  CONJUGATION I                    CONJUGATION II
                                                                PERSONAL
     SINGULAR                                                    ENDINGS
  1. am‰«bam, _I was loving_       mon�«bam, _I was advising_         -m
  2. am‰«b‰s, _you were loving_    mon�«b‰s, _you were advising_      -s
  3. am‰«bat, _he was loving_      mon�«bat, _he was advising_        -t

     PLURAL
  1. am‰b‰«mus, _we were loving_   mon�b‰«mus, _we were advising_   -mus
  2. am‰b‰«tis, _you were loving_  mon�b‰«tis, _you were advising_  -tis
  3. am‰«bant, _they were loving_  mon�«bant, _they wereadvising_    -nt

    _a._ Note that the Ç‰È of the tense sign Ç-b‰-È is shortened before
    Ç-ntÈ, and before ÇmÈ and ÇtÈ when final. (Cf. ¤12.2.)

In a similar manner inflect the verbs given in ¤129.

Ç134.È ÇMeaning of the Imperfect.È The Latin imperfect describes an
act as _going on_ or _progressing in past time_, like the English
past-progressive tense (as, _I was walking_). It is the regular tense
used to describe a past situation or condition of affairs.

Ç135.È EXERCISES

I. 1. Vid�b‰mus, d�s”der‰bat, m‰tžr‰b‰s. 2. Dabant, voc‰b‰tis,
d�l�b‰mus. 3. Pugnant, laud‰b‰s, mov�b‰tis. 4. Iub�bant, proper‰b‰tis,
port‰b‰mus. 5. Dab‰s, n‰rr‰bant, lab™r‰b‰tis. 6. Vid�bant, mov�b‰s,
nžnti‰b‰mus. 7. Nec‰bat, mov�bam, hab�bat, par‰b‰tis.

II. 1. You were having (_sing. and plur._), we were killing, they were
laboring. 2. He was moving, we were ordering, we were fighting. 3. We
were telling, they were seeing, he was calling. 4. They were living,
I was longing for, we were destroying. 5. You were giving, you were
moving, you were announcing, (_sing. and plur._). 6. They were caring
for, he was plowing, we were praising.

Ç136.È NI«OBE AND HER CHILDREN

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 287.

Niob�, r�gina Th�b‰n™rum, erat pulchra f�mina sed superba. Erat superba
n™n s™lum f™rm‰[1] su‰ mar”t”que potenti‰[1] sed etiam magn™ l”ber™rum
numer™.[1] Nam hab�bat[2] septem f”li™s et septem f”li‰s. Sed ea
superbia erat r�g”nae[3] causa magnae tr”stitiae et l”ber”s[3] causa
džrae poenae.

NOTE. The words ÇNiob�È, ÇTh�b‰n™rumÈ, and Çmar”t”È will be found in the
general vocabulary. Translate the selection without looking up any other
words.

    [Footnote 1: Ablative of cause.]

    [Footnote 2: Translate _had_; it denotes a past situation. (See
    ¤134.)]

    [Footnote 3: Dative, cf. ¤43.]


LESSON XXI

FUTURE ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF _AMï_ AND _MONEï_

  [Special Vocabulary]

  NOUNS
   sacrum, -”, n., _sacrifice, offering, rite_
  Çverbum, -”È, n., _word_ (verb)

  VERBS
   sede™, -�re, _sit_ (sediment)
   vol™, -‰re, _fly_ (volatile)

  ADJECTIVES
  Çinterfectus, -a, -umÈ, _slain_
  Çmolestus, -a, -umÈ, _troublesome, annoying_ (molest)
  Çperpetuus, -a, -umÈ, _perpetual, continuous_

  ÇegoÈ, personal pronoun, _I_ (egotism). Always emphatic in the
     nominative.

Ç137.È The tense sign of the Future Indicative in the first and second
conjugations is Ç-bi-È. This is joined to the present stem of the verb
and followed by the personal ending, as follows:

  PRESENT STEM  TENSE SIGN  PERSONAL ENDING
  Çam‰-È        Çbi-È       ÇsÈ
  _love_        _will_      _you_

Ç138.È The Future Active Indicative is inflected as follows.

     CONJUGATION I              CONJUGATION II
     SINGULAR
  1. am‰«b™, _I shall love_      mon�«b™, _I shall advise_
  2. am‰«bis, _you will love_    mon�«bis, _you will advise_
  3. am‰«bit, _he will love_     mon�«bit, _he will advise_

     PLURAL
  1. am‰«bimus, _we shall love_  mon�«bimus, _we shall advise_
  2. am‰«bitis _you will love_   mon�«bitis, _you will advise_
  3. am‰«bunt, _they will love_  mon�«bunt, _they will advise_

    _a._ The personal endings are as in the present. The ending Ç-b™È
    in the first person singular is contracted from Ç-bi-™È. The Ç-bi-È
    appears as Ç-bu-È in the third person plural. Note that the
    inflection is like that of Çer™È, the future of ÇsumÈ. _Pay especial
    attention to the accent._

In a similar manner inflect the verbs given in ¤129.

Ç139.È EXERCISES

I. 1. Mov�bitis, laud‰bis, ar‰b™. 2. D�l�bitis, voc‰bitis, dabunt.
3. M‰tžr‰bis, d�s”der‰bit, vid�bimus. 4. Hab�bit, mov�bunt, nec‰bit.
5. N‰rr‰bimus, mon�bis, vid�bunt. 6. Lab™r‰bitis, cžr‰bunt, dabis.
7. Habit‰bimus, proper‰bitis, iub�bunt, par‰bit. 8. Nžnti‰b™,
port‰bimus, iub�b™.

II. 1. We shall announce, we shall see, I shall hasten. 2. I shall
carry, he will plow, they will care for. 3. You will announce, you will
move, you will give, (_sing. and plur._). 4. We shall fight, we shall
destroy, I shall long for. 5. He will call, they will see, you will tell
(_plur._). 6. They will dwell, we shall order, he will praise. 7. They
will labor, we shall kill, you will have (_sing. and plur._), he will
destroy.

Ç140.È NI«OBE AND HER CHILDREN (_Concluded_)

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 288.

Apoll™ et Di‰na erant l”ber” L‰t™nae. I”s Th�b‰n” sacra cr�bra
par‰bant.[1] Oppid‰n” am‰bant L‰t™nam et l”ber™s eius. Id superbae
r�g”nae erat molestum. ÒCžr,Ó inquit, ÒL‰t™nae et l”ber”s sacra par‰tis?
Du™s l”ber™s habet L‰t™na; quattuordecim habe™ ego. Ubi sunt mea sacra?Ó
L‰t™na i”s verb”s[2] ”r‰ta l”ber™s su™s vocat. Ad eam volant Apoll™
Di‰naque et sagitt”s[3] su”s miser™s l”ber™s r�g”nae superbae d�lent.
Niob�, nžper laeta, nunc misera, sedet apud l”ber™s interfect™s et cum
perpetu”s lacrim”s[4] e™s d�s”derat.

NOTE. Consult the general vocabulary for ÇApoll™È, ÇinquitÈ, Çdu™sÈ, and
ÇquattuordecimÈ. Try to remember the meaning of all the other words.

    [Footnote 1: Observe the force of the imperfect here, _used to
    prepare_, _were in the habit of preparing_; so Çam‰bantÈ denotes a
    past situation of affairs. (See ¤134.)]

    [Footnote 2: Ablative of cause.]

    [Footnote 3: Ablative of means.]

    [Footnote 4: This may be either manner or accompaniment. It is often
    impossible to draw a sharp line between means, manner, and
    accompaniment. The Romans themselves drew no sharp distinction. It
    was enough for them if the general idea demanded the ablative case.]


LESSON XXII

REVIEW OF VERBS ¥ THE DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES

  [Special Vocabulary]

  NOUNS
  Çdiscipl”na, -aeÈ, f., _training, culture, discipline_
  ÇG‰ius, G‰”È, m., _Caius_, a Roman first name
  Ç™rn‰mentum, -”È, n., _ornament, jewel_
   Tiberius, Tibe«r”, m., _Tiberius_, a Roman first name

  VERB
  Çdoce™, -�reÈ, _teach_ (doctrine)

  ADVERB
  Çmaxim�È, _most of all, especially_

  ADJECTIVE
  Çant”quus, -qua, -quumÈ, _old, ancient_ (antique)

Ç141.È Review the present, imperfect, and future active indicative, both
orally and in writing, of ÇsumÈ and the verbs in ¤129.

Ç142.È We learned in ¤43 for what sort of expressions we may expect the
dative, and in ¤44 that one of its commonest uses is with _verbs_ to
express the indirect object. It is also very common with _adjectives_
to express the object toward which the quality denoted by the adjective
is directed. We have already had a number of cases where Çgr‰tusÈ,
_agreeable to_, was so followed by a dative; and in the last lesson we
had ÇmolestusÈ, _annoying to_, followed by that case. The usage may be
more explicitly stated by the following rule:

Ç143.È RULE. ÇDative with Adjectives.È _The dative is used with
adjectives to denote the object toward which the given quality is
directed. Such are, especially, those meaning ÇnearÈ, also ÇfitÈ,
ÇfriendlyÈ, ÇpleasingÈ, ÇlikeÈ, and their opposites._

Ç144.È Among such adjectives memorize the following:

  Çid™neus, -a, -umÈ, _fit, suitable_ (for)
  Çam”cus, -a, -umÈ, _friendly_ (to)
  Çinimicus, -a, -umÈ, _hostile_ (to)
  Çgr‰tus, -a, -umÈ, _pleasing_ (to), _agreeable_ (to)
  Çmolestus, -a, -umÈ, _annoying_ (to), _troublesome_ (to)
  Çf”nitimus, -a, -umÈ, _neighboring_ (to)
  Çproximus, -a, -umÈ, _nearest, next_ (to)

Ç145.È EXERCISES

I. 1. R™m‰n” terram id™neam agr” cultžrae habent. 2. Gall” c™pi”s
R™m‰n”s inim”c” erant. 3. Cui dea L‰t™na am”ca non erat? 4. Dea L‰t™na
superbae r�g”nae am”ca n™n erat. 5. Cibus noster, M‰rce, erit arm‰t”s
vir”s gr‰tus. 6. Quid erat molestum popul”s Italiae? 7. Bella longa cum
Gall”s erant molesta popul”s Italiae. 8. Agr” Germ‰n™rum fluvi™ Rh�n™
f”nitim” erant. 9. R™m‰n” ad silvam oppid™ proximam castra mov�bant.
10. N™n s™lum f™rma sed etiam superbia r�g”nae erat magna. 11. Mox
r�g”na pulchra erit aegra tr”stiti‰. 12. Cžr erat Niob�, r�g”na
Th�b‰n™rum, laeta? Laeta erat Niob� mult”s f”li”s et f”li‰bus.

II. 1. The sacrifices of the people will be annoying to the haughty
queen. 2. The sacrifices were pleasing not only to Latona but also to
Diana. 3. Diana will destroy those hostile to Latona. 4. The punishment
of the haughty queen was pleasing to the goddess Diana. 5. The Romans
will move their forces to a large field[1] suitable for a camp. 6. Some
of the allies were friendly to the Romans, others to the Gauls.

    [Footnote 1: Why not the dative?]

Ç146.È CORNELIA AND HER JEWELS

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 288.

Apud ant”qu‰s domin‰s, Corn�lia, åfric‰n” f”lia, erat[2] maxim� cl‰ra.
F”li” eius erant Tiberius Gracchus et G‰ius Gracchus. I” puer” cum
Corn�li‰ in oppid™ R™m‰, cl‰r™ Italiae oppid™, habit‰bant. Ibi e™s
cžr‰bat Corn�lia et ibi magn™ cum studi™ e™s doc�bat. Bona f�mina erat
Corn�lia et bonam discipl”nam maxim� am‰bat.

NOTE. Can you translate the paragraph above? There are no new words.

    [Footnote 2: Observe that all the imperfects denote continued or
    progressive action, or describe a state of affairs. (Cf. ¤134.)]


LESSON XXIII

PRESENT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF _REGï_ AND _AUDIï_

Ç147.È As we learned in ¤126, the present stem of the third conjugation
ends in Ç-eÈ, and of the fourth in Ç-”È. The inflection of the Present
Indicative is as follows:

     CONJUGATION III               CONJUGATION IV
    Çre«g™, re«gereÈ (_rule_)     Çau«dio, aud”«reÈ (_hear_)
     PRES. STEM Çrege-È            PRES. STEM Çaud”-È

     SINGULAR
  1. re«g™, _I rule_               au«di™, _I hear_
  2. re«gis, _you rule_            au«d”s, _you hear_
  3. re«git, _he (she, it) rules_  au«dit, _he (she, it) hears_

     PLURAL
  1. re«gimus, _we rule_           aud”«mus, _we hear_
  2. re«gitis, _you rule_          aud”«tis, _you hear_
  3. re«gunt, _they rule_          au«diunt, _they hear_

  1. The personal endings are the same as before.

  2. The final short Ç-e-È of the stem Çrege-È combines with the Ç-™È in
  the first person, becomes Ç-u-È in the third person plural, and
  becomes Ç-i-È elsewhere. The inflection is like that of Çer™È, the
  future of ÇsumÈ.

  3. In Çaudi™È the personal endings are added regularly to the stem
  Çaud”-È. In the third person plural Ç-u-È is inserted between the stem
  and the personal ending, as Çaudi-u-ntÈ. Note that the long vowel of
  the stem is shortened before final Ç-tÈ just as in Çam™È and Çmone™È.
  (Cf. ¤12.2.)

Note that Ç-i-È is always short in the third conjugation and long in
the fourth, excepting where long vowels are regularly shortened. (Cf.
¤12.1, 2.)

Ç148.È Like Çreg™È and Çaudi™È inflect the present active indicative of
the following verbs:

  INDICATIVE PRESENT  INFINITIVE PRESENT

  ag™, _I drive_      agere, _to drive_
  d”c™, _I say_       d”cere, _to say_
  džc™, _I lead_      džcere, _to lead_
  mitt™, _I send_     mittere, _to send_
  mžni™, _I fortify_  mžn”re, _to fortify_
  reperi™, _I find_   reper”re, _to find_
  veni™, _I come_     ven”re, _to come_

Ç149.È EXERCISES

I. 1. Quis agit? Cžr venit? Quem mittit? Quem džcis? 2. Quid mittunt? Ad
quem veniunt? Cuius castra mžniunt? 3. Quem agunt? Ven”mus. Quid puer
reperit? 4. Quem mittimus? Cuius equum džcitis? Quid d”cunt? 5. Mžn”mus,
ven”tis, d”cit. 6. Agimus, reper”tis, mžn”s. 7. Reperis, ducitis, d”cis.
8. Agitis, audimus, regimus.

II. 1. What do they find? Whom do they hear? Why does he come? 2. Whose
camp are we fortifying? To whom does he say? What are we saying? 3. I am
driving, you are leading, they are hearing. 4. You send, he says, you
fortify (_sing. and plur._). 5. I am coming, we find, they send. 6. They
lead, you drive, he does fortify. 7. You lead, you find, you rule, (_all
plur._).

Ç150.È CORNELIA AND HER JEWELS (_Concluded_)

Proximum domic”li™ Corn�liae erat pulchrae Camp‰nae domicilium. Camp‰na
erat superba n™n s™lum f™rm‰ su‰ sed maxim� ™rn‰ment”s su”s. Ea[1]
laud‰bat semper. ÒHab�sne tž žlla orn‰menta, Corn�lia?Ó inquit. ÒUbi
sunt tua ™rn‰menta?Ó Deinde Corn�lia f”li™s su™s Tiberium et G‰ium
vocat. ÒPuer” me”,Ó inquit, Òsunt mea ™rn‰menta. Nam bon” l”ber” sunt
semper bonae f�minae ™rn‰menta maxim� cl‰ra.Ó

NOTE. The only new words here are ÇCamp‰naÈ, ÇsemperÈ, and ÇtžÈ.

    [Footnote 1: ÇEaÈ, accusative plural neuter.]

  [Illustration: ÒPUERI MEI SUNT MEA ORNAMENTAÓ]


LESSON XXIV

IMPERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF _REGï_ AND _AUDIï_
THE DATIVE WITH SPECIAL INTRANSITIVE VERBS

Ç151.È PARADIGMS

     CONJUGATION III              CONJUGATION IV
     SINGULAR
  1. reg�«bam, _I was ruling_       audi�«bam, _I was hearing_
  2. reg�«b‰s, _you were riding_    audi�«b‰s, _you were hearing_
  3. reg�«bat, _he was ruling_      audi�«bat, _he was hearing_

     PLURAL
  1. reg�b‰«mus, _we were ruling_   audi�b‰«mus, _we were hearing_
  2. reg�b‰«tis, _you were ruling_  audi�b‰«tis, _you were hearing_
  3. reg�«bant, _they were ruling_  audi�«bant, _they were hearing_

  1. The tense sign is Ç-b‰-È, as in the first two conjugations.

  2. Observe that the final Ç-e-È of the stem is lengthened before the
  tense sign Ç-b‰-È. This makes the imperfect of the third conjugation
  just like the imperfect of the second (cf. Çmon�bamÈ and Çreg�bamÈ).

  3. In the fourth conjugation Ç-�-È is inserted between the stem and
  the tense sign Ç-b‰-È (Çaudi-�-ba-mÈ).

  4. In a similar manner inflect the verbs given in ¤148.

Ç152.È EXERCISES

I. 1. Ag�bat, veni�bat, mitt�bat, džc�bant. 2. Ag�bant, mitt�bant,
džc�bas, mžni�bant. 3. Mitt�b‰mus, džc�b‰tis, d”c�bant. 4. Mžni�b‰mus,
veni�b‰tis, d”c�b‰s. 5. Mitt�b‰s, veni�b‰mus, reperi�bat. 6. Reperi�b‰s,
veni�b‰s, audi�b‰tis. 7. Ag�b‰mus, reperi�b‰tis, mžni�bat. 8. Ag�b‰tis,
d”c�bam, mžni�bam.

II. 1. They were leading, you were driving (_sing. and plur._), he was
fortifying. 2. They were sending, we were finding, I was coming. 3. You
were sending, you were fortifying, (_sing. and plur._), he was saying.
4. They were hearing, you were leading (_sing. and plur._), I was
driving. 5. We were saying, he was sending, I was fortifying. 6. They
were coming, he was hearing, I was finding. 7. You were ruling (_sing.
and plur._), we were coming, they were ruling.

Ç153.È ÇThe Dative with Special Intransitive Verbs.È We learned above
(¤20.a) that a verb which does not admit of a direct object is called
an _intransitive_ verb. Many such verbs, however, are of such meaning
that they can govern an indirect object, which will, of course, be in
the dative case (¤45). Learn the following list of intransitive verbs
with their meanings. In each case the dative indirect object is the
person or thing to which a benefit, injury, or feeling is directed.
(Cf. ¤43.)

  Çcr�d™, cr�dereÈ, _believe_ (give belief to)
  Çfave™, fav�reÈ, _favor_ (show favor to)
  Çnoce™, noc�reÈ, _injure_ (do harm to)
  Çp‰re™, p‰r�reÈ, _obey_ (give obedience to)
  Çpersu‰de™, persu‰d�reÈ, _persuade_ (offer persuasion to)
  Çresist™, resistereÈ, _resist_ (offer resistance to)
  Çstude™, stud�reÈ, _be eager for_ (give attention to)

Ç154.È RULE. ÇDative with Intransitive Verbs.È _The dative of the
indirect object is used with the intransitive verbs Çcr�d™È, Çfave™È,
Çnoce™È, Çp‰re™È, Çpersu‰de™È, Çresist™È, Çstude™È, and others of like
meaning._

Ç155.È EXERCISE

1. Cr�disne verb”s soci™rum? Mult” verb”s e™rum n™n cr�dunt. 2. Me”
f”nitim” c™nsili™ tu™ n™n fav�bunt, quod bell™ student. 3. Tiberius et
G‰ius discipl”nae džrae n™n resist�bant et Corn�liae p‰r�bant. 4. Dea
erat inim”ca septem f”li‰bus r�g”nae. 5. Džra poena et perpetua
tr”stitia r�g”nae n™n persu‰d�bunt. 6. Nžper ea resist�bat et nunc
resistit potentiae L‰t™nae. 7. Mox sagittae vol‰bunt et l”ber”s miser”s
noc�bunt.


LESSON XXV

FUTURE ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF _REGï_ AND _AUDIï_

Ç156.È In the future tense of the third and fourth conjugations we meet
with a new tense sign. Instead of using Ç-bi-È, as in the first and
second conjugations, we use Ç-‰-È[1] in the first person singular and
Ç-�-È in the rest of the tense. In the third conjugation the final Ç-e-È
of the stem is dropped before this tense sign; in the fourth conjugation
the final Ç-”-È of the stem is retained.[2]

    [Footnote 1: The Ç-‰-È is shortened before Ç-mÈ final, and Ç-�-È
    before Ç-tÈ final and before Ç-ntÈ. (Cf. ¤12.2.)]

    [Footnote 2: The Ç-”-È is, of course, shortened, being before
    another vowel. (Cf. ¤12.1.)]

Ç157.È PARADIGMS

     CONJUGATION III            CONJUGATION IV
     SINGULAR
  1. re«gam, _I shall rule_     au«diam, _I shall hear_
  2. re«g�s, _you will rule_    au«di�s, _you will hear_
  3. re«get, _he will rule_     au«diet, _he will hear_

     PLURAL
  1. reg�«mus, _we shall rule_  audi�«mus, _we shall hear_
  2. reg�«tis, _you will rule_  audi�«tis, _you will hear_
  3. re«gent, _they will rule_  au«dient, _they will hear_

  1. Observe that the future of the third conjugation is like the
  present of the second, excepting in the first person singular.

  2. In the same manner inflect the verbs given in ¤148.

Ç158.È EXERCISES

I. 1. D”cet, džc�tis, mžni�mus. 2. D”cent, d”c�tis, mitt�mus.
3. Mžnient, venient, mittent, agent. 4. Džcet, mitt�s, veniet, aget.
5. Mžniet, reperi�tis, ag�mus. 6. Mittam, veni�mus, regent. 7. Audi�tis,
veni�s, reperi�s. 8. Reperiet, agam, džc�mus, mittet. 9. Vid�bitis,
sed�b™, voc‰bimus.

II. 1. I shall find, he will hear, they will come. 2. I shall fortify,
he will send, we shall say. 3. I shall drive, you will lead, they will
hear. 4. You will send, you will fortify, (_sing. and plur._), he will
say. 5. I shall come, we shall find, they will send.

6. Who[3] will believe the story? I[4] shall believe the story. 7. Whose
friends do you favor? We favor our friends. 8. Who will resist our
weapons? Sextus will resist your weapons. 9. Who will persuade him?
They will persuade him. 10. Why were you injuring my horse? I was not
injuring your horse. 11. Whom does a good slave obey? A good slave obeys
his master. 12. Our men were eager for another battle.

    [Footnote 3: Remember that ÇquisÈ, _who_, is singular in number.]

    [Footnote 4: Express by ÇegoÈ, because it is emphatic.]


LESSON XXVI

VERBS IN _-Iï_ OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION ¥ THE IMPERATIVE MOOD

Ç159.È There are a few common verbs ending in Ç-i™È which do not belong
to the fourth conjugation, as you might infer, but to the third. The
fact that they belong to the third conjugation is shown by the ending of
the infinitive. (Cf. ¤126.) Compare

  Çaudi™, aud”«reÈ (_hear_), fourth conjugation
  Çcapi™, ca«pereÈ (_take_), third conjugation

Ç160.È The present, imperfect, and future active indicative of Çcapi™È
are inflected as follows:

  Çcapi™, capereÈ, _take_
  PRES. STEM  Çcape-È

     PRESENT     IMPERFECT      FUTURE
     SINGULAR
  1. ca«pi™      capi�«bam      ca«piam
  2. ca«pis      capi�«b‰s      ca«pi�s
  3. ca«pit      capi�«bat      ca«piet

     PLURAL
  1. ca«pimus    capi�b‰«mus    capi�«mus
  2. ca«pitis    capi�b‰«tis    capi�«tis
  3. ca«piunt    capi�«bant     ca«pient

  1. Observe that Çcapi™È and the other Ç-i™È verbs follow the fourth
  conjugation wherever in the fourth conjugation _two vowels occur in
  succession._ (Cf. capi™, audi™; capiunt, audiunt; and all the
  imperfect and future.) All other forms are like the third conjugation.
  (Cf. capis, regis; capit, regit; etc.)

  2. Like Çcapi™È, inflect

  Çfaci™, facereÈ, _make, do_
  Çfugi™, fugereÈ, _flee_
  Çiaci™, iacereÈ, _hurl_
  Çrapi™, rapereÈ, _seize_

Ç161.È ÇThe Imperative Mood.È The imperative mood expresses a command;
as, _come!_ _send!_ The present tense of the imperative is used only in
the second person, singular and plural. _The singular in the active
voice is regularly the same in form as the present stem. The plural is
formed by adding Ç-teÈ to the singular._

  CONJUGATION      SINGULAR             PLURAL
    I.             am‰, _love thou_     am‰«te, _love ye_
   II.             mon�, _advise thou_  mon�«te, _advise ye_
  III. (_a_)       rege, _rule thou_    re«gite, _rule ye_
       (_b_)       cape, _take thou_    ca«pite, _take ye_
   IV.             aud”, _hear thou_    aud”«te, _hear ye_
  sum (irregular)  es, _be thou_        este, _be ye_

  1. In the third conjugation the final -e- of the stem becomes -i- in
  the plural.

  2. The verbs Çd”c™È, _say_; Çdžc™È, _lead_; and Çfaci™È, _make_, have
  the irregular forms Çd”cÈ, ÇdžcÈ, and ÇfacÈ in the singular.

  3. Give the present active imperative, singular and plural, of
  Çveni™È, Çdžc™È, Çvoc™È, Çdoce™È, Çlaud™È, Çd”c™È, Çsede™È, Çag™È,
  Çfaci™È, Çmžni™È, Çmitt™È, Çrapi™È.

Ç162.È EXERCISES

I. 1. Fugient, faciunt, iaci�bat. 2. D�l�, nžnti‰te, fugiunt. 3. Ven”te,
d”c, faci�tis. 4. Džcite, iaciam, fugi�bant. 5. Fac, iaci�b‰mus,
fugimus, rapite. 6. Sed�te, reper”, doc�te. 7. Fugi�mus, iacient,
rapi�s. 8. Reperient, rapi�b‰tis, nocent. 9. Fav�te, resist�, p‰r�bitis.

10. Vol‰ ad mult‰s terr‰s et d‰ auxilium. 11. Ego t�la mea capiam et
mult‰s fer‰s d�l�b™. 12. Quis f‰bulae tuae cr�det? 13. Este bon”, puer”,
et aud”te verba gr‰ta magistr”.

II. 1. The goddess will seize her arms and will hurl her weapons.
2. With her weapons she will destroy many beasts. 3. She will give aid
to the weak.[1] 4. She will fly to many lands and the beasts will flee.
5. Romans, tell[2] the famous story to your children.

    [Footnote 1: Plural. An adjective used as a noun. (Cf.
    ¤99.II.3.)]

    [Footnote 2: Imperative. The imperative generally stands first, as
    in English.]

       *       *       *       *       *

  ÇThird Review, Lessons XVIII-XXVI, ¤¤510-512È

       *       *       *       *       *

LESSON XXVII

THE PASSIVE VOICE
PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE INDICATIVE OF _AMï_ AND _MONEï_

  [Special Vocabulary]

  NOUNS
  ljla, -aeÈ, f., _wing_
  Çdeus, -”È, m., _god_ (deity)[A]
  Çmonstrum, -”È, n., _omen, prodigy; monster_
   ™r‰culum, -”, n., _oracle_

  VERB
  Çv‰st™, -‰reÈ, _lay waste, devastate_

  ADJECTIVES
  Çcomm™tus, -a, -umÈ, _moved, excited_
  Çmaximus, -a, -umÈ, _greatest_ (maximum)
  Çsaevus, -a, -umÈ, _fierce, savage_

  ADVERBS
  ÇitaÈ, _thus, in this way, as follows_
  ÇtumÈ, _then, at that time_

    [Footnote A: For the declension of ÇdeusÈ, see ¤468]

Ç163.È ÇThe Voices.È Thus far the verb forms have been in the _active
voice_; that is, they have represented the subject as _performing_ an
action; as,

  The lion ---> _killed_ ---> the hunter

A verb is said to be in the _passive voice_ when it represents its
subject as _receiving_ an action; as,

  The lion <--- _was killed_ <--- by the hunter

Note the direction of the arrows.

Ç164.È ÇPassive Personal Endings.È In the passive voice we use a
different set of personal endings. They are as follows:

      SINGULAR                PLURAL
   1. -r, _I_              1. -mur, _we_
   2. -ris, -re, _you_     2. -min”, _you_
   3. -tur, _he, she, it_  3. -ntur, _they_

    _a._ Observe that the letter Ç-rÈ appears somewhere in all but one
    of the endings. This is sometimes called the _passive sign_.

Ç165.È PARADIGMS

  Çam™, am‰reÈ                 Çmon�o, mon�reÈ
  PRES. STEM Çam‰-È            PRES. STEM Çmon�-È

  PRESENT INDICATIVE                                            PERSONAL
                                                                 ENDINGS
  SINGULAR
  a«mor, _I am loved_          mo«neor, _I am advised_            -or[1]
  am‰«ris or am‰«re,           mon�«ris or mon�«re.          -ris or -re
    _you are loved_              _you are advised_
  am‰«tur,  _he is loved_      mon�«tur,  _he is advised_           -tur

  PLURAL
  am‰«mur,  _we are loved_     mon�«mur,  _we are advised_          -mur
  am‰«min”,  _you are loved_   mon�«min”,  _you are advised_       -mini
  aman«tur,  _they are loved_  monen«tur,  _they are advised_      -ntur

    [Footnote 1: In the present the personal ending of the first person
    singular is Ç-orÈ.]

  IMPERFECT INDICATIVE (TENSE SIGN Ç-b‰-È)

  SINGULAR
  am‰«bar,                     mon�«bar,                              -r
    _I was being loved_          _I was being advised_
  am‰b‰«ris or am‰b‰«re,       mon�b‰«ris or mon�b‰«re       -ris or -re
    _you were being loved_       _you were being advised_
  am‰b‰«tur,                   mon�b‰«tur,                          -tur
    _he was being loved_        _he was being advised_

  PLURAL
  am‰b‰«mur,                   mon�b‰«mur,                          -mur
    _we were being loved_        _we were being advised_
  am‰b‰«min”,                  mon�b‰«min”,                        -min”
    _you were being loved_       _you were being advised_
  am‰ban«tur,                  mon�ban«tur,                        -ntur
    _they were being loved_      _they were being advised_

  FUTURE (TENSE SIGN Ç-bi-È)

  SINGULAR
  am‰«bor,                     mon�«bor,                              -r
    _I shall be loved_           _I shall be advised_
  am‰«beris, _or_ am‰«bere     mon�«beris _or_ mon�«bere,    -ris or -re
    _you will be loved_          _you will be advised_
  am‰«bitur,                   mon�«bitur,                          -tur
    _he will be loved_           _he will be advised_

  PLURAL
  am‰«bimur,                   mon�«bimur,                          -mur
    _we shall be loved_          _we shall be advised_
  am‰bi«min”,                  mon�bi«min”,                        -min”
    _you will be loved_          _you will be advised_
  am‰bun«tur,                  mon�bun«tur,                        -ntur
    _they will be loved_         _they will be advised_

  1. The tense sign and the personal endings are added as in the active.

  2. In the future the tense sign Ç-bi-È appears as Ç-bo-È in the first
  person, Ç-be-È in the second, singular number, and as Ç-bu-È in the
  third person plural.

  3. Inflect Çlaud™È, Çnec™È, Çport™È, Çmove™È, Çd�le™È, Çiube™È, in the
  present, imperfect, and future indicative, active and passive.

Ç166.È Intransitive verbs, such as Çm‰tžr™È, _I hasten_; Çhabit™È, _I
dwell_, do not have a passive voice with a personal subject.

Ç167.È EXERCISES

I. 1. Laud‰ris _or_ laud‰re, laud‰s, datur, dat. 2. Dabitur, dabit,
vid�min”, vid�tis. 3. Voc‰bat, voc‰b‰tur, d�l�bitis, d�l�bimin”.
4. Par‰b‰tur, par‰bat, cžr‰s, cžr‰ris _or_ cžr‰re. 5. Port‰bantur,
port‰bant, vid�bimur, vid�bimus. 6. Iub�ris _or_ iub�re, iub�s,
laud‰b‰ris _or_ laud‰b‰re, laud‰b‰s. 7. Mov�beris or mov�bere, mov�bis,
dabantur, dabant. 8. D�lentur, d�lent, par‰b‰mur, par‰b‰mus.

II. 1. We prepare, we are prepared, I shall be called, I shall call, you
were carrying, you were being carried. 2. I see, I am seen, it was being
announced, he was announcing, they will order, they will be ordered.
3. You will be killed, you will kill, you move, you are moved, we are
praising, we are being praised. 4. I am called, I call, you will have,
you are cared for. 5. They are seen, they see, we were teaching, we were
being taught, they will move, they will be moved.

  [Illustration: PERSEUS ANDROMEDAM SERVAT]

Ç168.È PER«SEUS AND ANDROM«EDA

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 288.

Perseus f”lius erat Iovis,[2] maxim”[3] de™rum. D� e™ mult‰s fabul‰s
n‰rrant po�tae. E” favent de”, e” magica arma et ‰l‰s dant. E”s t�l”s
arm‰tus et ‰l”s fr�tus ad mult‰s terr‰s vol‰bat et m™nstra saeva d�l�bat
et miser”s ”nf”rm”sque auxilium dabat.

Aethiopia est terra åfricae. Eam terram C�pheus[4] reg�bat. E”[5]
Neptžnus, maximus aqu‰rum deus, erat ”r‰tus et mittit[6] m™nstrum saevum
ad Aethiopiam. Ibi m™nstrum n™n s™lum l‰t”s pulchr”sque Aethiopiae agr”s
noc�bat sed etiam domicilia agricol‰rum d�l�bat, et mult™s vir™s,
f�min‰s, l”ber™sque nec‰bat. Populus ex agr”s fugi�bat et oppida mžr”s
valid”s mžni�bat. Tum C�pheus magn‰ tr”stiti‰ comm™tus ad Iovis ™r‰culum
properat et ita d”cit: ÒAm”c” me” necantur; agr” me” v‰stantur. Aud”
verba mea, Iuppiter. D‰ miser”s auxilium. Age m™nstrum saevum ex
patri‰.Ó

    [Footnote 2: ÇIovisÈ, the genitive of ÇIuppiterÈ.]

    [Footnote 3: Used substantively, _the greatest_. So below, l. 4,
    Çmiser”sÈ and Ç”nf”rm”sÈ are used substantively.]

    [Footnote 4: Pronounce in two syllables, _Ce«pheus_.]

    [Footnote 5: ÇE”È, _at him_, dative with Ç”r‰tusÈ.]

    [Footnote 6: The present is often used, as in English, in speaking
    of a past action, in order to make the story more vivid and
    exciting.]


LESSON XXVIII

PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE INDICATIVE PASSIVE OF _REGï_ AND _AUDIï_

  [Special Vocabulary]

  VERBS
  Çresponde™, -�reÈ, _respond, reply_
  Çserv™, -‰reÈ, _save, preserve_

  ADJECTIVE
  Çc‰rus, -a, -umÈ, _dear_ (cherish)

  CONJUNCTION
  ÇautemÈ, _but, moreover, now_. Usually stands second, never first

  NOUN
  Çv”ta, -aeÈ, f., _life_ (vital)

Ç169.È Review the present, imperfect, and future indicative active of
Çreg™È and Çaudi™È, and learn the passive of the same tenses (¤¤490,
491).

    _a._ Observe that the tense signs of the imperfect and future are
    the same as in the active voice, and that the passive personal
    endings (¤164) are added instead of the active ones.

    _b._ Note the slight irregularity in the second person singular
    present of the third conjugation. There the final Ç-e-È of the stem
    is not changed to Ç-i-È, as it is in the active. We therefore have
    Çre«gerisÈ or Çre«gereÈ, _not_ Çre«girisÈ, Çre«gireÈ.

    _c._ Inflect Çag™È, Çd”c™È, Çdžc™È, Çmžni™È, Çreperi™È, in the
    present, imperfect, and future indicative, active and passive.

Ç170.È EXERCISES

I. 1. Ag�bat, ag�b‰tur, mitt�bat, mitt�b‰tur, džc�bat. 2. Agunt,
aguntur, mittuntur, mittunt, mžniunt. 3. Mittor, mittar, mittam, džc�re,
džcere. 4. D”c�mur, d”cimus, d”c�mus, d”cimur, mžni�bamin”. 5. Džcitur,
džcimin”, reper”mur, reperiar, agitur. 6. Ag�b‰mus, ag�b‰mur, reper”ris,
reperi�min”. 7. Mžn”min”, veni�bam, džc�bar, d”c�tur. 8. Mittimin”,
mittitis, mitt�ris, mitteris, ag�b‰min”. 9. D”citur, d”cit, mžniuntur,
reperient, audientur.

II. 1. I was being driven, I was driving, we were leading, we were being
led, he says, it is said. 2. I shall send, I shall be sent, you will
find, you will be found, they lead, they are led. 3. I am found, we are
led, they are driven, you were being led (_sing. and plur._). 4. We
shall drive, we shall be driven, he leads, he is being led, they will
come, they will be fortified. 5. They were ruling, they were being
ruled, you will send, you will be sent, you are sent, (_sing. and
plur._). 6. He was being led, he will come, you are said (_sing. and
plur._).

Ç171.È PERSEUS AND ANDROMEDA (_Continued_)

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 288.

Tum ™r‰culum ita respondet: ÒMala est fortžna tua. Neptžnus, magnus
aqu‰rum deus, terrae Aethiopiae inim”cus, e‰s poen‰s mittit. Sed par‰
”r‰t™ de™ sacrum id™neum et m™nstrum saevum ex patri‰ tu‰ ag�tur.
Andromeda f”lia tua est m™nstr™ gr‰ta. D‰ eam m™nstr™. Serv‰ c‰ram
patriam et v”tam popul” tu”.Ó Andromeda autem erat puella pulchra. Eam
am‰bat C�pheus maxim�.


LESSON XXIX

PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE INDICATIVE PASSIVE OF _-Iï_ VERBS
PRESENT PASSIVE INFINITIVE AND IMPERATIVE

  [Special Vocabulary]

  VERB
  Çsuper™, -‰reÈ, _conquer, overcome_ (insuperable)

  NOUNS
  Çcžra, -aeÈ, f., _care, trouble_
  Çlocus, -”È, m., _place, spot_ (location). ÇLocusÈ is neuter in the
     plural and is declined Çloca, -™rumÈ, etc.
  Çper”culum, -”È, n., _danger, peril_

  ADVERBS
  ÇsemperÈ, _always_
  ÇtamenÈ, _yet, nevertheless_

  PREPOSITIONS
  Çd�È, with abl., _down from; concerning_
  ÇperÈ, with acc., _through_

  CONJUNCTION
  ÇsiÈ, _if_

Ç172.È Review the active voice of Çcapi™È, present, imperfect, and
future, and learn the passive of the same tenses (¤492).

    _a._ The present forms ÇcapiorÈ and ÇcapiunturÈ are like Çaudior,
    audiunturÈ, and the rest of the tense is like ÇregorÈ.

    _b._ In like manner inflect the passive of Çiaci™È and Çrapi™È.

Ç173.È ÇThe Infinitive.È The infinitive mood gives the general meaning
of the verb without person or number; as, Çam‰reÈ, _to love_. Infinitive
means _unlimited_. The forms of the other moods, being limited by person
and number, are called the _finite_, or limited, verb forms.

Ç174.È The forms of the Present Infinitive, active and passive, are as
follows:

  CONJ.  PRES.      PRES. INFINITIVE    PRES. INFINITIVE
         STEM         ACTIVE              PASSIVE

    I.   Çam‰-È     am‰«re,             am‰«r”,
                      _to love_           _to be loved_
   II.   Çmon�-È    mon�«re,            mon�«r”,
                      _to advise_         _to be advised_
  III.   Çrege-È    re«gere,            re«g”,
                      _to rule_           _to be ruled_
         Çcape-È     ca«pere            ca«p”,
                      _to take_           _to be taken_
   IV.   Çaud”-È     aud”«re,           aud”r”,
                       _to hear_          _to be heard_

  1. Observe that to form the present active infinitive we add Ç-reÈ to
  the present stem.

    _a._ The present infinitive of ÇsumÈ is ÇesseÈ. There is no passive.

  2. Observe that the present passive infinitive is formed from the
  active by changing final Ç-eÈ to Ç-”È, except in the third
  conjugation, which changes final Ç-ereÈ to Ç-”È.

  3. Give the active and passive present infinitives of Çdoce™È,
  Çsede™È, Çvol™È, Çcžr™È, Çmitt™È, Çdžc™È, Çmžni™È, Çreperi™È, Çiaci™È,
  Çrapi™È.

Ç175.È The forms of the Present Imperative, active and passive, are as
follows:

         ACTIVE[1]              PASSIVE
  CONJ.  SINGULAR    PLURAL     SINGULAR             PLURAL
     I.  Ça«m‰È      am‰«te     am‰«re,              am‰«min”,
                                _be thou loved_     _be ye loved_
    II.  Çmo«n�È     mon�«te    mon�«re,             mon�«min”,
                                _be thou advised_   _be ye advised_
   III.  Çre«geÈ     re«gite    re«gere,             regi«min”,
                                _be thou ruled _     _be ye ruled_
         Çca«peÈ     ca«pite    ca«pere,             capi«min”,
                                _be thou taken_      _be ye taken_
    IV.  Çau«d”È     aud”«te    aud”«re,             aud”«min”,
                                _be thou heard_      _be ye heard_

  1. Observe that the second person singular of the present passive
  imperative is like the present active infinitive, and that both
  singular and plural are like the second person singular[2] and plural,
  respectively, of the present passive indicative.

  2. Give the present imperative, both active and passive, of the verbs
  in ¤174.3.

    [Footnote 1: For the sake of comparison the active is repeated from
    ¤161.]

    [Footnote 2: That is, using the personal ending Ç-reÈ. A form like
    Çam‰reÈ may be either _indicative_, _infinitive_, or _imperative_.]

Ç176.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 289.

I. 1. Tum Perseus ‰l”s ad terr‰s mult‰s volabit. 2. M™nstrum saevum per
aqu‰s properat et mox agr™s nostr™s v‰st‰bit. 3. S” autem C�pheus ad
™r‰culum proper‰bit, ™r‰culum ita respond�bit. 4. Quis t�l”s Perse”
super‰bitur? Multa m™nstra t�l”s eius super‰buntur. 5. Cum cžr”s magn”s
et lacrim”s mult”s agricolae ex domicili”s c‰r”s aguntur. 6. Multa loca
v‰st‰bantur et multa oppida d�l�bantur. 7. M™nstrum est validum, tamen
super‰bitur. 8. Cr�d�sne semper verb”s ™r‰cul”? Ego i”s non semper
cr�dam. 9. P‰r�bitne C�pheus ™r‰cul™? Verba ™r‰cul” e” persu‰d�bunt.
10. Si n™n fugi�mus, oppidum capi�tur et oppid‰n” nec‰buntur. 11. Voc‰te
puer™s et n‰rr‰te f‰bulam cl‰ram d� m™nstr™ saev™.

II. 1. Fly thou, to be cared for, be ye sent, lead thou. 2. To lead, to
be led, be ye seized, fortify thou. 3. To be hurled, to fly, send thou,
to be found. 4. To be sent, be ye led, to hurl, to be taken. 5. Find
thou, hear ye, be ye ruled, to be fortified.


LESSON XXX

SYNOPSES IN THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS ¥ THE ABLATIVE DENOTING _FROM_

  [Special Vocabulary]

  VERBS
  Çabsum, abesseÈ, irreg., _be away, be absent, be distant_, with
     separative abl.
  Çadpropinqu™, -‰reÈ, _draw near, approach_ (propinquity), with
     dative[A]
  Çcontine™, -�reÈ, _hold together, hem in, keep_ (contain)
  Çdisc�d™, -ereÈ, _depart, go away, leave_, with separative abl.
  Çege™, -�reÈ, _lack, need, be without_, with separative abl.
  Çinterfici™, -ereÈ, _kill_
  Çprohibe™, -�reÈ, _restrain, keep from_ (prohibit)
  Çvulner™, -‰reÈ, _wound_ (vulnerable)

  NOUNS
  Çpr™vincia, -aeÈ, f., _province_
  Çv”num, -”È, n., _wine_

  ADJECTIVE
  Çd�fessus, -a, -umÈ, _weary, worn out_

  ADVERB
  Çlong�È, _far, by far, far away_

    [Footnote A: This verb governs the dative because the idea of
    _nearness to_ is stronger than that of _motion to_. If the latter
    idea were the stronger, the word would be used with ÇadÈ and the
    accusative.]

Ç177.È You should learn to give rapidly synopses of the verbs you have
had, as follows:[1]

            CONJUGATION I       CONJUGATION II
                       INDICATIVE
            ACTIVE   PASSIVE    ACTIVE    PASSIVE
  _Pres._   a«m™     a«mor      mo«ne™    mo«neor
  _Imperf._ am‰«bam  am‰«bar    mon�«bam  mon�«bar
  _Fut._    am‰«bo   am‰«bor    mon�«bo   mon�«bor

    [Footnote 1: Synopses should be given not only in the first person,
    but in other persons as well, particularly in the third singular and
    plural.]

            CONJUGATION I          CONJUGATION II
                          IMPERATIVE
            ACTIVE    PASSIVE     ACTIVE     PASSIVE
  _Pres._   a«m‰      am‰«re      mo«n�      mon�«re

                         INFINITIVE
  _Pres._   am‰«re    am‰«r”      mon�«re    mon�«r”

            CONJUGATION III        CONJUGATION III (Ç-i™È verbs)
                         INDICATIVE
            ACTIVE    PASSIVE     ACTIVE     PASSIVE
  _Pres._   re«g™     re«gor      ca«pi™     ca«pior
  _Imperf._ reg�«bam  reg�«bar    capi�«bam  capi�«bar
  _Fut._    re«gam    re«gar      ca«piam    ca«piar

                         IMPERATIVE
  _Pres._   re«ge     re«gere     ca«pe       ca«pere

                         INFINITIVE
  _Pres._   re«gere   re«g”       ca«pere     ca«p”

            CONJUGATION IV
              INDICATIVE
            ACTIVE     PASSIVE
  _Pres._   au«di™     au«dior
  _Imperf._ audi�«bam  audi�«bar
  _Fut._    au«diam    au«diar

              IMPERATIVE
  _Pres._   au«d”      aud”«re

              INFINITIVE
  _Pres._   aud”«re    aud”«r”

  1. Give the synopsis of Çrapi™È, Çmžni™È, Çreperi™È, Çdoce™È, Çvide™È,
  Çd”c™È, Çag™È, Çlaud™È, Çport™È, and vary the person and number.

Ç178.È We learned in ¤50 that one of the three relations covered by the
ablative case is expressed in English by the preposition _from._ This is
sometimes called the _separative ablative_, and it has a number of
special uses. You have already grown familiar with the first mentioned
below.

Ç179.È RULE. ÇAblative of the Place From.È _The place from which is
expressed by the ablative with the prepositions Ç‰È or ÇabÈ, Çd�È, Ç�È
or ÇexÈ._

  ÇAgricolae ex agr”s veniuntÈ, _the farmers come from the fields_

    _a._ Ç‰È or ÇabÈ denotes _from near_ a place; Ç�È or ÇexÈ, _out
    from_ it; and Çd�È, _down from_ it. This may be represented
    graphically as follows:

                               _________
                              |         |
                  Ç‰È or ÇabÈ |         | Ç�È or ÇexÈ
                /_____________|    ___________________\
                \             |  Place  |             /
                              |_________|
                                   |
                                   | Çd�È
                                   |
                                   V

Ç180.È RULE. ÇAblative of Separation.È _Words expressing separation or
deprivation require an ablative to complete their meaning._

    _a._ If the separation is _actual_ and _literal_ of one material
    thing from another, the preposition Ç‰È or ÇabÈ, Ç�È or ÇexÈ, or
    Çd�È is generally used. If no actual motion takes place of one thing
    from another, no preposition is necessary.

      (a) ÇPerseus terram ‰ m™nstr”s l”beratÈ
        _Perseus frees the land from monsters_
          (literal separation--actual motion is expressed)
      (b) ÇPerseus terram tr”stiti‰ l”beratÈ
        _Perseus frees the land from sorrow_
          (figurative separation--no actual motion is expressed)

Ç181.È RULE. ÇAblative of the Personal Agent.È _The word expressing the
person from whom an action starts, when not the subject, is put in the
ablative with the preposition Ç‰È or ÇabÈ._

    _a._ In this construction the English translation of ljÈ, ÇabÈ is
    _by_ rather than _from_. This ablative is regularly used with
    passive verbs to indicate the _person by whom_ the act was
    performed.

      ÇM™nstrum ‰ Perse™ nec‰turÈ, _the monster is being slain by_
        (lit. _from_) _Perseus_

    _b._ Note that the active form of the above sentence would be
    ÇPerseus monstrum necatÈ, _Perseus is slaying the monster_. In the
    passive the _object_ of the active verb becomes the _subject_, and
    the _subject_ of the active verb becomes the _ablative of the
    personal agent_, with Ç‰È or ÇabÈ.

    _c._ Distinguish carefully between the ablative of means and the
    ablative of the personal agent. Both are often translated into
    English by the preposition _by_. (Cf. ¤100. _b._) _Means is a
    ÇthingÈ; the agent or actor is a ÇpersonÈ_. The ablative of means
    has no preposition. The ablative of the personal agent has Ç‰È or
    ÇabÈ. Compare

      ÇFera sagitt‰ nec‰turÈ, _the wild beast is killed by an arrow_
      ÇFera ‰ Di‰n‰ nec‰turÈ, _the wild beast is killed by Diana_

    ÇSagitt‰È, in the first sentence, is the ablative of means; lj
    Di‰n‰È, in the second, is the ablative of the personal agent.

Ç182.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 289.

I. 1. Viri inopi‰ cib” d�fess” ab e™ loc™ disc�dent. 2. Gerin‰n” castr”s
R™m‰n”s adpropinqu‰bant, tamen l�g‰tus c™pi‰s ‰ proeli™ contin�bat.
3. Multa Gall™rum oppida ab R™man”s capientur. 4. Tum R™m‰n” t™tum
populum e™rum oppid™rum gladi”s p”l”sque interficient. 5. Oppid‰n”
R™m‰n”s resistent, sed defess” long™ proel”o fugient. 6. Mult” ex
Galli‰ fugi�bant et in Germ‰n™rum vic”s habit‰bant. 7. Miser” nautae
vulnerantur ab inim”c”s[2] saev”s et cib™ egent. 8. Disc�dite et
date vir”s fržmentum et c™piam v”n”. 9. C™piae nostrae ‰ proeli™
contin�bantur ab Sext™ l�gat™. 10. Id oppidum ab pr™vinci‰ R™m‰n‰ long�
aberat.

II. 1. The weary sailors were approaching a place dear to the goddess
Diana. 2. They were without food and without wine. 3. Then Galba and
seven other men are sent to the ancient island by Sextus. 4. Already
they are not far away from the land, and they see armed men on a high
place. 5. They are kept from the land by the men with spears and arrows.
6. The men kept hurling their weapons down from the high place with
great eagerness.

    [Footnote 2: Çinim”c”sÈ, here used as a noun. See vocabulary.]


LESSON XXXI

PERFECT, PLUPERFECT, AND FUTURE PERFECT OF _SUM_

  [Special Vocabulary]

  NOUNS
   aurum, -”, n., _gold_ (oriole)
  Çmora, -aeÈ, f., _delay_
  Çn‰vigium, n‰vi«g”È, n., _boat, ship_
  Çventus, -”È, m., _wind_ (ventilate)

  VERB
  Çn‰vig™, -‰reÈ, _sail_ (navigate)

  ADJECTIVES
   attentus, -a, -um, _attentive, careful_
  Çdubius, -a, -umÈ, _doubtful_ (dubious)
   perfidus, -a, -um, _faithless, treacherous_ (perfidy)

  ADVERB
  Çante‰È, _before, previously_

  PREPOSITION
  ÇsineÈ, with abl., _without_

Ç183.È ÇPrincipal Parts.È There are certain parts of the verb that are
of so much consequence in tense formation that we call them the
_principal parts._

The principal parts of the Latin verb are the present, the past, and the
past participle; as _go, went, gone_; _see, saw, seen_, etc.

The principal parts of the Latin verb are the _first person singular of
the present indicative_, the _present infinitive_, the _first person
singular of the perfect indicative_, and _the perfect passive
participle._

Ç184.È ÇConjugation Stems.È From the principal parts we get three
conjugation stems, from which are formed the entire conjugation. We
have already learned about the Çpresent stemÈ, which is found from the
present infinitive (cf. ¤126.a). The other two stems are the Çperfect
stemÈ and the Çparticipial stemÈ.

Ç185.È ÇThe Perfect Stem.È The perfect stem of the verb is formed in
various ways, but may always be _found by dropping Ç-”È from the first
person singular of the perfect_, the third of the principal parts. From
the perfect stem are formed the following tenses:

  THE PERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE
  THE PLUPERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE (ENGLISH PAST PERFECT)
  THE FUTURE PERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE

All these tenses express completed action in present, past, or future
time respectively.

Ç186.È ÇThe Endings of the Perfect.È The perfect active indicative is
inflected by adding the endings of the perfect to the perfect stem.
These endings are different from those found in any other tense, and are
as follows:

     SINGULAR               PLURAL
  1. -”, _I_             1. -imus, _we_
  2. -ist”, _you_        2. -istis, _you_
  3. -it, _he, she, it_  3. -�runt or -�re, _they_

Ç187.È Inflection of ÇsumÈ in the perfect, pluperfect, and future
perfect indicative:

               PRES. INDIC.  PRES. INFIN.  PERF. INDIC.
  PRIN. PARTS  sum           esse          fu”

               PERFECT STEM fu-

    PERFECT
  SINGULAR                     PLURAL
  fu«”, _I have been, I was_     fu«imus, _we have been, we were_
  fuis«t”,                       fuis«tis, _you have been, you were_
    _you have been, you were_
  fu«it, _he has been, he was_   fu�«runt _or_ fu�«re,
                                   _they have been, they were_

    PLUPERFECT (TENSE SIGN Ç-er‰-È)
  fu«eram, _I had been_          fuer‰«mus, _we had been_
  fu«er‰s, _you had been_        fuer‰«tis, _you had been_
  fu«erat, _he had been_         fu«erant, _they had been_

    FUTURE PERFECT (TENSE SIGN Ç-eri-È)
  fu«er™, _I shall have been_    fue«rimus, _we shall have been_
  fu«eris, _you will have been_  fue«ritis, _you will have been_
  fu«erit, _he will have been_   fu«erint, _they will have been_

  1. Note carefully the changing accent in the perfect.

  2. Observe that the pluperfect may be formed by adding ÇeramÈ, the
  imperfect of ÇsumÈ, to the perfect stem. The tense sign is Ç-er‰-È.

  3. Observe that the future perfect may be formed by adding Çer™È, the
  future of ÇsumÈ, to the perfect stem. But the third person plural ends
  in Ç-erintÈ, not in Ç-eruntÈ. The tense sign is Ç-eri-È.

  4. All active perfects, pluperfects, and future perfects are formed on
  the perfect stem and inflected in the same way.

Ç188.È DIALOGUE

THE BOYS TITUS, MARCUS, AND QUINTUS

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 289.

  M. Ubi fuistis, Tite et Qu”nte?
  T. Ego in me™ lžd™ fu” et Qu”ntus in su™ lžd™ fuit. Bon” puer” fuimus.
    Fuitne Sextus in v”c™ hodi�?
  M. Fuit. Nžper per agr™s proxim™s fluvi™ proper‰bat. Ibi is et
    Corn�lius habent n‰vigium.
  T. _N‰vigium_ d”cis? Ali”[1] n‰rr‰ eam f‰bulam!
  M. V�r™ (_Yes, truly_), pulchrum et novum n‰vigium!
  Q. Cuius pecžni‰[2] Sextus et Corn�lius id n‰vigium parant? Quis i”s
    pecžniam dat?
  M. Am”c” Corn�l” multum habent aurum et puer pecžni‰ n™n eget.
  T. Qu™ puer” n‰vig‰bunt? N‰vig‰buntne long� ‰ terr‰?
  M. Dubia sunt c™nsilia e™rum. Sed hodi�, cr�d™, s” ventus erit
    id™neus, ad maximam ”nsulam n‰vig‰bunt. Iam ante‰ ibi fu�runt.
    Tum autem ventus erat perfidus et puer” magn™ in per”cul™ erant.
  Q. Aqua vent™ comm™ta est inim”ca naut”s semper, et saepe perfidus
    ventus n‰vigia rapit, agit, d�letque. I” puer”, s” n™n fuerint
    maxim� attent”, ”r‰t‰ aqu‰ et valid™ vent™ super‰buntur et ita
    interficientur.

    [Footnote 1: Dative case. (Cf. ¤109.)]

    [Footnote 2: Ablative of means.]

Ç189.È EXERCISE

1. Where had the boys been before? They had been in school. 2. Where had
Sextus been? He had been in a field next to the river. 3. Who has been
with Sextus to-day? Cornelius has been with him. 4. Who says so? Marcus.
5. If the wind has been suitable, the boys have been in the boat.
6. Soon we shall sail with the boys. 7. There[3] will be no danger,
if we are (shall have been) careful.[4]

    [Footnote 3: The expletive _there_ is not expressed, but the verb
    will precede the subject, as in English.]

    [Footnote 4: This predicate adjective must be nominative plural to
    agree with _we_.]


LESSON XXXII

THE PERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF THE FOUR REGULAR CONJUGATIONS

  [Special Vocabulary]

  NOUNS
  Çanimus, -”È, m., _mind, heart; spirit, feeling_ (animate)
  Çbracchium, bracch”È, n., _forearm, arm_
  Çporta, -aeÈ, f., _gate_ (portal)

  ADJECTIVES
  Çadversus, -a, -umÈ, _opposite; adverse, contrary_
  Çpl�nus, -a, -umÈ, _full_ (plenty)

  PREPOSITION
  Çpr™È, with abl., _before; in behalf of; instead of_

  ADVERB
  ÇdižÈ, _for a long time, long_

Ç190.È ÇMeanings of the Perfect.È The perfect tense has two distinct
meanings. The first of these is equivalent to the English present
perfect, or perfect with _have_, and denotes that the action of the verb
is complete at the time of speaking; as, _I have finished my work_. As
this denotes completed action at a definite time, it is called the
Çperfect definiteÈ.

The perfect is also used to denote an action that happened _sometime in
the past_; as, _I finished my work._ As no definite time is specified,
this is called the Çperfect indefiniteÈ. It corresponds to the ordinary
use of the English past tense.

    _a._ Note carefully the difference between the following tenses:

      _I {was finishing } my work_ (imperfect, ¤134)
         {used to finish}
      _I finished my work_         (perfect indefinite)
      _I have finished my work_    (perfect definite)

When telling a story the Latin uses the _perfect indefinite_ to mark the
different _forward steps_ of the narrative, and the _imperfect_ to
_describe situations and circumstances_ that attend these steps. If the
following sentences were Latin, what tenses would be used?

  ÒLast week I went to Boston. I was trying to find an old friend of
  mine, but he was out of the city. Yesterday I returned home.Ó

Ç191.È ÇInflection of the Perfect.È We learned in ¤186 that any perfect
is inflected by adding the endings of the perfect to the perfect stem.
The inflection in the four regular conjugations is then as follows:

  CONJ. I   Çam‰v”È  _I have loved_, _I loved_ or _did love_
  CONJ. II  Çmonu”È  _I have advised_, _I advised_ or _did advise_
  CONJ. III Çr�x”È   _I have ruled_, _I ruled_ or _did rule_
            Çc�p”È   _I have taken_, _I took_ or _did take_
  CONJ. IV  Çaud”v”È _I have heard_, _I heard_ or _did hear_

     PERFECT STEMS
     Çam‰v-È     Çmonu-È        Çr�x-È        Çc�p-È        Çaud”v-È

     SINGULAR
  1. am‰«v”      mo«nu”         r�«x”          c�«p”         aud”«v”
  2. am‰vis«t”   monuis«t”      r�xis«t”       c�pis«t”      aud”vis«t”
  3. am‰«vit     mo«nuit        r�«xit         c�«pit        aud”«vit

     PLURAL
  1. am‰«vimus   monu«imus      r�«ximus       c�«pimus     aud”«vimus
  2. am‰vis«tis  monuis«tis     r�xis«tis      c�pis«tis    aud”vis«tis
  3. am‰v�«runt  monu�«runt     r�x�«runt      c�p�«runt    aud”v�«runt
       _or_        _or_           _or_           _or_         _or_
       am‰v�«re    monu�«re       r�x�«re        c�p�«re      aud”v�«re

  1. The first person of the perfect is always given as the third of the
  principal parts. From this we get the perfect stem. _This shows the
  absolute necessity of learning the principal parts thoroughly._

  2. Nearly all perfects of the first conjugation are formed by adding
  Ç-v”È to the present stem. Like Çam‰v”È inflect Çpar‰v”È, Çvoc‰v”È,
  Çcžr‰v”È, Çlaud‰v”È.

  3. Note carefully the changing accent in the perfect. Drill on it.

Ç192.È Learn the principal parts and inflect the perfects:

  PRES. INDIC.  PRES. INFIN.  PERF. INDIC.
  d™            dare          ded”          _give_
  d�le™         d�l�re        d�l�v”        _destroy_
  habe™         hab�re        habu”         _have_
  move™         mov�re        m™v”          _move_
  p‰re™         p‰r�re        p‰ru”         _obey_
  prohibe™      prohib�re     proh”bu”      _restrain, keep from_
  vide™         vid�re        v”d”          _see_
  d”c™          d”cere        d”x”          _say_
  disc�d™       disc�dere     discess”      _depart_
  džc™          džcere        džx”          _lead_
  faci™         facere        f�c”          _make, do_
  mitt™         mittere       m”s”          _send_
  mžni™         mžn”re        mžn”v”        _fortify_
  veni™         ven”re        v�n”          _come_

Ç193.È PERSEUS AND ANDROMEDA (_Continued_)

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 290.

C�pheus, advers‰ fortžn‰ maxim� comm™tus, discessit et mult”s cum
lacrim”s popul™ Aethiopiae verba ™r‰cul” n‰rr‰vit. F‰ta Andromedae,
puellae pulchrae, ‰ t™t™ popul™ d�pl™r‰bantur, tamen nžllum erat
auxilium. Deinde C�pheus cum pl�n™ tr”stitiae anim™ c‰ram suam f”liam
ex oppid” port‰ ad aquam džxit et bracchia eius ad saxa džra rev”nxit.
Tum am”c” puellae miserae long� discess�runt et diž m™nstrum saevum
exspect‰v�runt.

Tum forte Perseus, ‰l”s fr�tus, super Aethiopiam vol‰bat. V”dit populum,
Andromedam, lacrim‰s, et, magnopere attonitus, ad terram d�scendit. Tum
C�pheus e” t™t‰s cžr‰s n‰rr‰vit et ita d”xit: ÒP‰r�b™ verb”s ™r‰cul”, et
pr™ patri‰ f”liam meam dab™; sed s” id m™nstrum interfici�s et
Andromedam serv‰bis, tibi (_to you_) eam dab™.Ó


LESSON XXXIII

PLUPERFECT AND FUTURE PERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE
PERFECT ACTIVE INFINITIVE

Ç194.È            CONJ. I  CONJ. II  CONJ. III         CONJ. IV
                  Çam™È    Çmone™È   Çreg™È  Çcapi™È   Çaudi™È
  PERFECT STEMS   Çam‰v-È  Çmonu-È   Çr�x-È  Çc�p-È    Çaud”v-È


  PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE ACTIVE
  TENSE SIGN Ç-er‰-È

     SINGULAR
     I had loved  I had advised  I had ruled  I had taken  I had heard

  1. am‰«veram    monu«eram      r�«xeram     c�«peram     aud”«veram
  2. am‰«ver‰s    monu«er‰s      r�«xer‰s     c�«per‰s     aud”«ver‰s
  3. am‰«verat    monu«erat      r�«xerat     c�«perat     aud”«verat

     PLURAL
  1. am‰ver‰«mus  monuer‰«mus    r�xer‰«mus   c�per‰«mus   aud”ver‰«mus
  2. am‰ver‰«tis  monuer‰«tis    r�xer‰«tis   c�per‰«tis   aud”ver‰«tis
  3. ama«verant   monu«erant     r�«xerant    c�«perant    aud”«verant


  FUTURE PERFECT INDICATIVE ACTIVE
  TENSE SIGN Ç-eri-È

     SINGULAR
   I shall have  I shall have  I shall have  I shall have  I shall have
      loved         advised       ruled         taken         heard

  1. am‰«ver™     monu«er™     r�«xer™       c�«per™       aud”«ver™
  2. am‰«veris    monu«eris    r�«xeris      c�«peris      aud”«veris
  3. am‰«verit    monu«erit    r�«xerit      c�«perit      aud”«verit

     PLURAL
  1. am‰ve«rimus  monue«rimus  r�xe«rimus    c�pe«rimus    aud”ve«rimus
  2. am‰ve«ritis  monue«ritis  r�xe«ritis    c�pe«ritis    aud”ve«ritis
  3. am‰«verint   monu«erint   r�«xerint     c�«perint     aud”«verint

  1. Observe that these are all inflected alike and the rules for
  formation given in ¤187.2-4 hold good here.

  2. In like manner inflect the pluperfect and future perfect indicative
  active of Çd™È, Çport™È, Çd�le™È, Çmove™È, Çhabe™È, Çd”c™È, Çdisc�d™È,
  Çfaci™È, Çveni™È, Çmžni™È.

Ç195.È ÇThe Perfect Active Infinitive.È The perfect active infinitive is
formed by adding Ç-isseÈ to the perfect stem.

  CONJ       PERFECT STEM  PERFECT INFINITIVE
    I.       am‰v-         am‰vis«se, _to have loved_
   II.       monu-         monuis«se, _to have advised_
  III. (_a_) r�x-          r�xis«se, _to have ruled_
       (_b_) c�p-          c�pis«se, _to have taken_
   IV.       aud”vÈ        aud”vis«se, _to have heard_
  sum        fu-           fuis«se, _to have been_

  1. In like manner give the perfect infinitive active of Çd™È, Çport™È,
  Çd�le™È, Çmove™È, Çhabe™È, Çd”c™È, Çdisc�d™È, Çfaci™È, Çveni™È,
  Çmžni™È.

Ç196.È EXERCISES

I. 1. Habuist”, m™v�runt, miserant. 2. V”dit, d”xeris, džxisse.
3. M”sistis, p‰ru�runt, discesser‰mus. 4. Mžn”vit, dederam, m”ser™.
5. Habuerimus, d�l�v”, p‰ruit, fuisse. 6. Deder‰s, mžn”veritis,
v�ner‰tis, m”sisse. 7. V�ner‰s, f�cisse, deder‰tis, port‰veris.

8. Quem verba ™r‰cul” m™verant? Populum verba ™r‰cul” m™verant.
9. Cui C�pheus verba ™r‰cul” n‰rr‰verit? Perse™ C�pheus verba ™r‰cul”
n‰rr‰verit. 10. Am”c” ab Andromed‰ discesserint. 11. M™nstrum saevum
domicilia multa d�l�verat. 12. Ubi m™nstrum v”distis? Id in aqu‰
v”dimus. 13. Quid m™nstrum faciet? M™nstrum Andromedam interficiet.

II. 1. They have obeyed, we have destroyed, I shall have had. 2. We
shall have sent, I had come, they have fortified. 3. I had departed, he
has obeyed, you have sent (_sing. and plur._). 4. To have destroyed, to
have seen, he will have given, they have carried. 5. He had destroyed,
he has moved, you have had (_sing. and plur._). 6. I have given, you had
moved (_sing. and plur._), we had said. 7. You will have made (_sing.
and plur._), they will have led, to have given.

8. Who had seen the monster? Andromeda had seen it. 9. Why had the men
departed from[1] the towns? They had departed because the monster had
come. 10. Did Cepheus obey[2] the oracle[3]? He did.

    [Footnote 1: ÇexÈ. What would ÇabÈ mean?]

    [Footnote 2: _Did ... obey_, perfect tense.]

    [Footnote 3: What case?]


LESSON XXXIV

REVIEW OF THE ACTIVE VOICE

  [Special Vocabulary]

  ADVERBS
  ÇceleriterÈ, _quickly_ (celerity)
  Çd�niqueÈ, _finally_
  ÇgraviterÈ, _heavily, severely_ (gravity)
  Çsubit™È, _suddenly_

  VERB
  Çreport™, -‰re, -‰v”È, _bring back, restore; win, gain_ (report)

Ç197.È A review of the tenses of the indicative active shows the
following formation:

             { PRESENT        = First of the principal parts
  TENSES     { IMPERFECT      = Present stem + -ba-m
  OF THE     { FUTURE         = Present stem + -b™, Conj. I and II
  INDICATIVE {                                 -a-m, Conj. III and IV
             { PERFECT        = Third of the principal parts
             { PLUPERFECT     = Perfect stem + -era-m
             { FUTURE PERFECT = Perfect stem + -er™

Ç198.È The synopsis of the active voice of Çam™È, as far as we have
learned the conjugation, is as follows:

  PRINCIPAL PARTS Çam™, am‰re, am‰v”È

  PRES. STEM Çam‰-È

         { _Pres._      am™
  INDIC. { _Imperf._    am‰bam
         { _Fut._       am‰b™
  PRES. IMV.            am‰
  PRES. INFIN.          am‰re

  PERF. STEM Çam‰v-È

         { _Perf._      am‰v”
  INDIC. { _Pluperf._   am‰veram
         { _Fut. perf._ am‰ver™
  PERF. INFIN.          am‰visse

  1. Learn to write in the same form and to give rapidly the principal
  parts and synopsis of Çpar™È, Çd™È, Çlaud™È, Çd�le™È, Çhabe™È,
  Çmove™È, Çp‰re™È, Çvide™È, Çd”c™È, Çdisc�d™È, Çdžc™È, Çmitt™È,
  Çcapi™È, Çmuni™È, Çveni™È.[1]

    [Footnote 1: Learn to give synopses rapidly, and not only in the
    first person singular but in any person of either number.]

Ç199.È Learn the following principal parts:[2]

    PRES. INDIC.   PRES. INFIN.  PERF. INDIC.

  IRREGULAR VERBS
    sum           esse           fu”           _be_
    ab«sum        abes«se        ‰«fu”         _be away_
    d™            dare           ded”          _give_

  CONJUGATION II
    contine™      contin�re      continu”      _hold in, keep_
    doce™         doc�re         docu”         _teach_
    ege™          eg�re          egu”          _need_
    fave™         fav�re         f‰v”          _favor_
    iube™         iub�re         iuss”         _order_
    noce™         noc�re         nocu”         _injure_
    persu‰de™     persu‰d�re     persu‰s”      _persuade_
    responde™     respond�re     respond”      _reply_
    sede™         sed�re         s�d”          _sit_
    stude™        stud�re        studu”        _be eager_

  CONJUGATION III
    ag™           agere          �g”           _drive_
    cr�d™         cr�dere        cr�did”       _believe_
    fugi™         fugere         fžg”          _flee_
    iaci™         iacere         i�c”          _hurl_
    interfici™    interficere    interf�c”     _kill_
    rapi™         rapere         rapu”         _seize_
    resis«t™      resis«tere     re«stit”      _resist_

  CONJUGATION IV
    repe«ri™      reper”«re      rep«per”      _find_

    [Footnote 2: These are all verbs that you have had before, and the
    perfect is the only new form to be learned.]

Ç200.È PERSEUS AND ANDROMEDA (_Concluded_)

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 290. Read the whole story.

Perseus semper proeli™ stud�bat[3] et respondit,[3] ÒVerba tua sunt
maxim� gr‰ta,Ó et laetus arma sua magica par‰vit.[3] Subit™ m™nstrum
vid�tur; celeriter per aquam properat et Andromedae adpropinquat. Eius
am”c” long� absunt et misera puella est s™la. Perseus autem sine mor‰
super aquam vol‰vit.[3] Subit™ d�scendit[3] et džr™ gladi™ saevum
m™nstrum graviter vulner‰vit.[3] Diž pugn‰tur,[4] diž proelium est
dubium. D�nique autem Perseus m™nstrum interf�cit[3] et vict™riam
report‰vit.[3] Tum ad saxum v�nit[3] et Andromedam l”ber‰vit[3] et eam
ad C�pheum džxit.[3] Is, nžper miser, nunc laetus, ita d”xit[3]: ÒTu™
auxili™, m” am”ce, c‰ra f”lia mea est l”bera; tua est Andromeda.Ó Diž
Perseus cum Andromed‰ ibi habit‰bat[3] et magnopere ‰ t™t™ popul™
am‰b‰tur.[3]

    [Footnote 3: See if you can explain the use of the perfects and
    imperfects in this passage.]

    [Footnote 4: The verb pugn‰tur means, literally, _it is fought_;
    translate freely, _the battle is fought_, or _the contest rages_.
    The verb pugn™ in Latin is intransitive, and so does not have a
    personal subject in the passive. A verb with an indeterminate
    subject, designated in English by _it_, is called impersonal.]


LESSON XXXV

THE PASSIVE PERFECTS OF THE INDICATIVE
THE PERFECT PASSIVE AND FUTURE ACTIVE INFINITIVE

Ç201.È The fourth and last of the principal parts (¤183) is the Çperfect
passive participleÈ. _From it we get the participial stem on which are
formed the future active infinitive and all the passive perfects._

  1. Learn the following principal parts, which are for the first time
  given in full:

  CONJ.  PRES. INDIC.  PRES. INFIN.  PERF. INDIC.  PERF. PASS. PART.
     I.  am™           am‰«-re       am‰«v-”       am‰«t-us
     This is the model for all regular verbs of the first conjugation.
    II.  mo«ne™        mon�«-re      mo«nu-”       mo«nit-us
   III.  reg™          re«ge-re      r�x-”         r�ct-us
         ca«pi™        ca«pe-re      c�p-”         capt-us
    IV.  au«di™        aud”«-re      aud”«v-”      aud”«t-us

  2. The base of the participial stem is found by dropping Ç-usÈ from
  the perfect passive participle.

Ç202.È In English the perfect, past perfect, and future perfect tenses
of the indicative passive are made up of forms of the auxiliary verb
_to be_ and the past participle; as, _I have been loved_, _I had been
loved_, _I shall have been loved._

Very similarly, in Latin, the perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect
passive tenses use respectively the present, imperfect, and future of
ÇsumÈ as an auxiliary verb with the perfect passive participle, as

  Perfect passive, Çam‰«tus sumÈ, _I have been_ or _was loved_
  Pluperfect passive, Çam‰«tus eramÈ, _I had been loved_
  Future perfect passive, Çam‰«tus er™È, _I shall have been loved_

  1. In the same way give the synopsis of the corresponding tenses of
  Çmone™È, Çreg™È, Çcapi™È, and Çaudi™È, and give the English meanings.

Ç203.È ÇNature of the Participle.È A participle is partly verb and
partly adjective. As a verb it possesses tense and voice. As an
adjective it is declined and agrees with the word it modifies in gender,
number, and case.

Ç204.È The perfect passive participle is declined like Çbonus, bona,
bonumÈ, and in the compound tenses (¤202) it agrees as a predicate
adjective with the subject of the verb.

  EXAMPLES IN SINGULAR
    ÇVir laud‰tus estÈ, _the man was praised_, or _has been praised_
    ÇPuella laud‰ta estÈ, _the girl was praised_, or _has been praised_
    ÇC™nsilium laud‰tum estÈ, _the plan was praised_, or
                                _has been praised_

  EXAMPLES IN PLURAL
    ÇVir” laud‰t” suntÈ, _the men were praised_, or _have been praised_
    ÇPuellae laud‰tae suntÈ, _the girls were praised_, or
                               _have been praised_
    ÇC™nsilia laud‰ta suntÈ, _the plans were praised_, or
                               _have been praised_

  1. Inflect the perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect indicative
  passive of Çam™È, Çmone™È, Çreg™È, Çcapi™È, and Çaudi™È (¤¤488-492).

Ç205.È ÇThe perfect passive infinitiveÈ is formed by adding ÇesseÈ,
the present infinitive of ÇsumÈ, to the perfect passive participle; as,
am‰«t-us (-a, -um) ÇesseÈ, _to have been loved_; mo«nit-us (-a,
-um) ÇesseÈ, _to have been advised_.

  1. Form the perfect passive infinitive of Çreg™È, Çcapi™È, Çaudi™È,
  and give the English meanings.

Ç206.È The future active infinitive is formed by adding ÇesseÈ, the
present infinitive of ÇsumÈ, to the future active participle. This
participle is made by adding Ç-žrus, -a, -umÈ to the base of the
participial stem. Thus the future active infinitive of Çam™È is
amat-ž«rus (-a, -um) ÇesseÈ, _to be about to love_.

    _a._ Note that in forming the three tenses of the active infinitive
    we use all three conjugation stems:

      Present, am‰re (present stem), _to love_
      Perfect, am‰visse (perfect stem), _to have loved_
      Future, am‰tžrus esse (participial stem), _to be about to love_

  1. Give the three tenses of the active infinitive of Çlaud™È, Çmone™È,
  Çreg™È, Çcapi™È, Çaudi™È, with the English meanings.

Ç207.È EXERCISES

I. 1. F‰bula Andromedae n‰rr‰ta est. 2. Multae f‰bulae ‰ magistr™
n‰rr‰tae sunt. 3. Ager ab agricol‰ valid™ ar‰tus erat. 4. Agr” ab
agricol”s valid”s ar‰t” erant. 5. Aurum ‰ serv™ perfid™ ad domicilium
suum port‰tum erit. 6. Nostra arma ‰ l�g‰t™ laud‰ta sunt. Quis vestra
arma laud‰vit? 7. Ab ancill‰ tu‰ ad c�nam voc‰tae sumus. 8. Andromeda
m™nstr™ n™n data est, quia m™nstrum ‰ Perse™ nec‰tum erat.

II. 1. The provinces were laid waste, the field had been laid waste, the
towns will have been laid waste. 2. The oracles were heard, the oracle
was heard, the oracles had been heard. 3. The oracle will have been
heard, the province had been captured, the boats have been captured.
4. The fields were laid waste, the man was advised, the girls will have
been advised. 5. The towns had been ruled, we shall have been captured,
you will have been heard.


LESSON XXXVI

REVIEW OF PRINCIPAL PARTS ¥ PREPOSITIONS _YES_-OR-_NO_ QUESTIONS

  [Special Vocabulary]

  Çdexter, dextra, dextrumÈ, _right_ (dextrous)
  Çsinister, sinistra, sinistrumÈ, _left_
  Çfržstr‰È, adv., _in vain_ (frustrate)

  Çger™, gerere, gess”, gestusÈ, _bear, carry on; wear_;
    Çbellum gerereÈ, _to wage war_
  Çoccup™, occup‰re, occup‰v”, occup‰tusÈ, _seize, take possession of_
    (occupy)
  Çpostul™, postul‰re, postul‰v”, postul‰tusÈ, _demand_ (ex-postulate)
  Çrecžs™, recžs‰re, recžs‰v”, recžs‰tusÈ, _refuse_
  Çst™, st‰re, stet”, statusÈ, _stand_
  Çtempt™, tempt‰re, tempt‰v”, tempt‰tusÈ, _try, tempt, test; attempt_
  Çtene™, ten�re, tenu”, ----È, _keep, hold_ (tenacious)

  The word ÇubiÈ, which we have used so much in the sense of _where_ in
  asking a question, has two other uses equally important:

  1. ÇubiÈ = _when_, as a relative conjunction denoting time; as,
    ÇUbi m™nstrum aud”v�runt, fžg�runtÈ, _when they heard the monster,
    they fled_

  2. ÇubiÈ = _where_, as a relative conjunction denoting place; as,
    ÇVide™ oppidum ubi Galba habitatÈ, _I see the town where Galba
    lives_

  ÇubiÈ is called a _relative conjunction_ because it is equivalent to
  a relative pronoun. _When_ in the first sentence is equivalent to
  _at the time Çat whichÈ;_ and in the second, _where_ is equivalent
  to _the place Çin whichÈ._

Ç208.È The following list shows the principal parts of all the verbs you
have had excepting those used in the paradigms. The parts you have had
before are given for review, and the perfect participle is the only new
form for you to learn. Sometimes one or more of the principal parts are
lacking, which means that the verb has no forms based on that stem. A
few verbs lack the perfect passive participle but have the future active
participle in Ç-žrusÈ, which appears in the principal parts instead.

  IRREGULAR VERBS

  ÇsumÈ     ÇesseÈ     Çfu”È    ÇfutžrusÈ    _be_
  ÇabsumÈ   ÇabesseÈ   ljfu”È   ljfutžrusÈ   _be away_
  Çd™È[1]   ÇdareÈ     Çded”È   ÇdatusÈ      _give_

    [Footnote 1: Çd™È is best classed with the irregular verbs because
    of the short ÇaÈ in the present and participial stems.]

  CONJUGATION I

  Çport™È   Çport‰reÈ   Çport‰v”È   Çport‰tusÈ   _carry_

  So for all verbs of this conjugation thus far used.

  CONJUGATION II

  Çcontine™È   Çcontin�reÈ   Çcontinu”È  ÇcontentusÈ   _hold in, keep_
  Çd�le™È      Çd�l�reÈ      Çd�l�v”È    Çd�l�tusÈ     _destroy_
  Çdoce™È      Çdoc�reÈ      Çdocu”È     ÇdoctusÈ      _teach_
  Çege™È       Çeg�reÈ       Çegu”È       ----         _lack_
  Çfave™È      Çfav�reÈ      Çf‰v”È      ÇfautžrusÈ    _favor_
  Çiube™È      Çiub�reÈ      Çiuss”È     ÇiussusÈ      _order_
  Çmove™È      Çmov�reÈ      Çm™v”È      Çm™tusÈ       _move_
  Çnoce™È      Çnoc�reÈ      Çnocu”È     ÇnocitžrusÈ   _injure_
  Çp‰re™È      Çp‰r�reÈ      Çp‰ru”È      ----         _obey_
  Çpersu‰de™È  Çpersu‰d�reÈ  Çpersu‰s”È  Çpersu‰susÈ   _persuade (from)_
  Çprohibe™È   Çprohib�reÈ   Çprohibu”È  ÇprohibitusÈ  _restrain, keep_
  Çresponde™È  Çrespond�reÈ  Çrespond”È  Çresp™nsusÈ   _reply_
  Çsede™È      Çsed�reÈ      Çs�d”È      Ç-sessusÈ     _sit_
  Çstude™È     Çstud�reÈ     Çstudu”È      ----        _be eager_
  Çvide™È      Çvid�reÈ      Çv”d”È      Çv”susÈ       _see_

  CONJUGATION III

  Çag™È         ÇagereÈ        Ç�g”È        ljctusÈ        _drive_
  Çcr�d™È       Çcr�dereÈ      Çcr�did”È    Çcr�ditusÈ     _believe_
  Çd”c™È        Çd”cereÈ       Çd”x”È       ÇdictusÈ       _say_
  Çdisc�d™È     Çdisc�dereÈ    Çdiscess”È   ÇdiscessusÈ    _depart_
  Çdžc™È        ÇdžcereÈ       Çdžx”È       ÇductusÈ       _lead_
  Çfaci™È[2]    ÇfacereÈ       Çf�c”È       ÇfactusÈ       _make_
  Çfugi™È       ÇfugereÈ       Çfžg”È       ÇfugitžrusÈ    _flee_
  Çiaci™È       ÇiacereÈ       Çi�c”È       ÇiactusÈ       _hurl_
  Çinterfici™È  ÇinterficereÈ  Çinterf�c”È  ÇinterfectusÈ  _kill_
  Çmitt™È       ÇmittereÈ      Çm”s”È       ÇmissusÈ       _send_
  Çrapi™È       ÇrapereÈ       Çrapu”È      ÇraptusÈ       _seize_
  Çresist™È     ÇresistereÈ    Çrestit”È     ----          _resist_

  CONJUGATION IV

  Çmžni™È     Çmžn”reÈ     Çmžn”v”È     Çmžn”tusÈ    _fortify_
  Çreperi™È   Çreper”reÈ   Çrep«per”È   ÇrepertusÈ   _find_
  Çveni™È     Çven”reÈ     Çv�n”È       ÇventusÈ     _come_

    [Footnote 2: Çfaci™È has an irregular passive which will be
    presented later.]

Ç209.È ÇPrepositions.È
  1. We learned in ¤¤52, 53 that only the _accusative_ and the
  _ablative_ are used with prepositions, and that prepositions
  expressing ablative relations govern the ablative case. Those we have
  had are here summarized. The table following should be learned.

    Ç‰È or ÇabÈ,  _from, by_
    ÇcumÈ,        _with_
    Çd�È,         _down from, concerning_
    Ç�È or ÇexÈ,  _out from, out of_
    Çpr™È,        _before, in front of; for, in behalf of_
    ÇsineÈ,       _without_

  2. Prepositions not expressing ablative relations must govern the
  _accusative_ (¤52). Of these we have had the following:

    ÇadÈ,    _to_;
    ÇapudÈ,  _among_;
    ÇperÈ,   _through_

  There are many others which you will meet as we proceed.

  3. The preposition ÇinÈ when meaning _in_ or _on_ governs the
  _ablative_; when meaning _to, into, against_ (relations foreign to the
  ablative) ÇinÈ governs the _accusative_.

Ç210.È Ç_Yes_-or-_No_ Questions.È Questions not introduced by some
interrogative word like _who, why, when_, etc., but expecting the answer
_yes_ or _no_, may take one of three forms:

  1. _Is he coming?_ (Asking for information. Implying nothing as to
       the answer expected.)
  2. _Is he not coming?_ (Expecting the answer _yes_.)
  3. _He isn«t coming, is he?_ (Expecting the answer _no_.)

These three forms are rendered in Latin as follows:

  1. ÇVenitne?È _is he coming?_
  2. ÇN™nne venit?È _is he not coming?_
  3. ÇNum venit?È _he isn«t coming, is he?_

    _a._ Ç-neÈ, the question sign, is usually added to the verb, which
    then stands first.

    _b._ We learned in ¤56.b that _yes_-or-_no_ questions are usually
    answered by repeating the verb, with or without a negative. Instead
    of this, ÇitaÈ, Çv�r™È, Çcert�È, etc. (_so, truly, certainly_, etc.)
    may be used for _yes_, and Çn™nÈ, Çminim�È, etc. for _no_ if the
    denial is emphatic, as, _by no means_, _not at all_.

Ç211.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 290.

I. 1. N™nne hab�bat Corn�lia ™rn‰menta aur”? Hab�bat. 2. Num Sextus
l�g‰tus scžtum in dextr™ bracchi™ ger�bat? N™n in dextr™, sed sinistr™
in bracchi™ Sextus scžtum ger�bat. 3. Fržstr‰ bella multa ab Gall”s
gesta erant. 4. Ubi oppidum ‰ perfid™ Sext™ occup‰tum est, oppid‰n”
miser” gladi™ interfect” sunt. 5. Id oppidum erat pl�num fržment”.
6. N™nne Sextus ab oppid‰n”s fržmentum postul‰vit? V�r™, sed i”
recžs‰v�runt fržmentum dare. 7. Cžr oppidum ab Sext™ d�l�tum est? Quia
fržmentum recžs‰tum est. 8. Ea vict™ria n™n dubia erat. 9. Oppid‰n”
erant d�fess” et arm”s eg�bant. 10. Num fugam tempt‰v�runt? Minim�.

II. 1. Where was Julia standing? She was standing where you had ordered.
2. Was Julia wearing any ornaments? She had many ornaments of gold.
3. Did she not attempt flight when she saw the danger? She did. 4. Who
captured her? Galba captured her without delay and held her by the left
arm. 5. She didn«t have the ladyÕs gold, did she? No, the gold had been
taken by a faithless maid and has been brought back.

       *       *       *       *       *

  ÇFourth Review, Lessons XXVII-XXXVI, ¤¤513-516È

       *       *       *       *       *

LESSON XXXVII

CONJUGATION OF _POSSUM_ ¥ THE INFINITIVE USED AS IN ENGLISH

  [Special Vocabulary]

  ÇnequeÈ or ÇnecÈ, conj., _neither_, _nor_, _and ... not_;
    Çneque ... nequeÈ, _neither ... nor_
  Çcastellum, -”È, n., _redoubt, fort_ (castle)
  Çcot”di�È, adv., _daily_
   cess™, cess‰re, cess‰v”, cess‰tus, _cease_, with the infin.

  Çincipi™, incipere, inc�p”, inceptusÈ, _begin_ (incipient),
     with the infin.
  Çoppugn™, oppugn‰re, oppugn‰v”, oppugn‰tusÈ, _storm, assail_
  Çpet™, petere, petiviÈ or Çpeti”, pet”tusÈ, _aim at, assail, storm,
     attack; seek, ask_ (petition)
  Çp™n™, p™nere, posu”, positusÈ, _place, put_ (position);
    Çcastra p™nereÈ, _to pitch camp_
  Çpossum, posse, potu”, ----È, _be able, can_ (potent), with the infin.
  Çvet™, vet‰re, vetu”, vetitusÈ, _forbid_ (veto), vith the infin.;
    opposite of Çiube™È, _command_
  Çvinc™, vincere, v”c”, victusÈ, _conquer_ (in-vincible)
  Çv”v™, v”vere, v”x”, ----È, _live, be alive_ (re-vive)

Ç212.È Learn the principal parts of ÇpossumÈ, _I am able_, _I can_, and
its inflection in the indicative and infinitive. (Cf. ¤495.)

    _a._ ÇPossumÈ, _I can_, is a compound of ÇpotisÈ, _able_, and ÇsumÈ,
    _I am_.

Ç213.È ÇThe Infinitive with Subject Accusative.È The _infinitive_ (cf.
¤173) is a _verbal noun_. Used as a noun, it has the constructions of a
noun. As a verb it can govern a case and be modified by an adverb. The
uses of the infinitive are much the same in Latin as in English.

  1. In English certain verbs of _wishing, commanding, forbidding_, and
  the like are used with an object clause consisting of a substantive in
  the objective case and an infinitive, as, _he commanded the men to
  flee_. Such object clauses are called infinitive clauses, and the
  substantive is said to be the subject of the infinitive.

  Similarly in Latin, some verbs of _wishing, commanding, forbidding_,
  and the like are used with an object clause consisting of an
  infinitive with a subject in the accusative case, as, ÇIs vir™s
  fugere iussitÈ, _he commanded the men to flee_.

Ç214.È RULE. ÇSubject of the Infinitive.È _The subject of the infinitive
is in the accusative._

Ç215.È ÇThe Complementary Infinitive.È In English a verb is often
followed by an infinitive to complete its meaning, as, _the Romans are
able to conquer the Gauls_. This is called the _complementary_
infinitive, as the predicate is not _complete_ without the added
infinitive.

Similarly in Latin, _verbs of incomplete predication_ are completed by
the infinitive. Among such verbs are ÇpossumÈ, _I am able, I can_;
Çproper™È, Çm‰tžr™È, _I hasten_; Çtempt™È, _I attempt_; as

  ÇR™m‰n” Gall™s super‰re possuntÈ,
    _the Romans are able to_ (or _can_) _conquer the Gauls_
  ÇBellum gerere m‰tžrantÈ,
    _they hasten to wage war_

    _a._ A predicate adjective completing a complementary infinitive
    agrees in gender, number, and case with the subject of the main
    verb.

      ÇMal” puer” esse bon” n™n possuntÈ, _bad boys are not able to_
        (or _cannot_) _be good._

    Observe that Çbon”È agrees with Çpuer”È.

Ç216.È ÇThe Infinitive used as a Noun.È In English the infinitive is
often used as a pure noun, as the subject of a sentence, or as a
predicate nominative. For example, _To conquer_ (= conquering) _is
pleasing; To see_ (= seeing) _is to believe_ (= believing). The same use
of the infinitive is found in Latin, especially with ÇestÈ, as

  ÇSuper‰re est gr‰tumÈ, _to conquer is pleasing_
  ÇVid�re est cr�dereÈ, _to see is to believe_

    _a._ In the construction above, the infinitive often has a subject,
    which must then be in the accusative case, as

      ÇGalbam super‰re inim”c™s est gr‰tum mult”sÈ,
        _for Galba to conquer his enemies is pleasing to many_

    _b._ An infinitive used as a noun is neuter singular. Thus, in the
    sentence Çsuper‰re est gr‰tumÈ, the predicate adjective Çgr‰tumÈ is
    in the neuter nominative singular to agree with Çsuper‰reÈ the
    subject.

Ç217.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 291.

I. 1. Magister lžd” l”ber™s cum d”ligenti‰ lab™r‰re iussit. 2. Eg�re
cib™ et vin™ est vir”s molestum. 3. Vir” arm‰t” vetu�runt Gall™s castra
ibi p™nere. 4. Estne l�g‰tus in castell™ an in mžr™? Is est pr™ port‰.
5. Ubi nostr”[1] fugere inc�p�runt, l�g‰tus ab vestr”s[1] captus est.
6. Gall” castellum ibi oppugn‰verant ubi praesidium erat ”nf”rmum.
7. Ali” pugn‰re tempt‰bant, ali” port‰s pet�bant. 8. F�minae pr™
domicili”s sed�bant neque resistere valid”s Gall”s poterant.
9. Bellum est saevum, nec ”nf”rm”s nec miser”s favet. 10. Sed vir” arma
postul‰bant et stud�bant Gall™s d� mžr”s agere. 11. Id castellum ab
Gall”s occup‰r” R™m‰n”s n™n gr‰tum erit. 12. Gall” ubi ‰ R™m‰n”s vict”
sunt, esse l”ber”[2] cess‰v�runt. 13. Diž sine aqu‰ v”vere n™n potestis.

II. 1. The girl began daily to carry water from the river to the gates.
2. The Gauls had pitched their camp in a place suitable for a battle.
3. For a long time they tried in vain to seize the redoubt. 4. Neither
did they cease to hurl weapons against[3] the walls. 5. But they were
not able to (could not) take the town.

    [Footnote 1: Supply _men_. ÇnostriÈ, Çvestr”È, and Çsu”È are often
    used as nouns in this way.]

    [Footnote 2: Not _children_. The Romans used Çl”ber”È either as an
    adjective, meaning _free_, or as a noun, meaning _the free_, thereby
    signifying their _free-born children_. The word was never applied to
    children of slaves.]

    [Footnote 3: ÇinÈ with the accusative.]

Ç218.È THE FAITHLESS TARPE«IA

Sab”n” ™lim cum R™m‰n”s bellum ger�bant et mult‰s vict™ri‰s
report‰verant. Iam agr™s proxim™s mžr”s v‰st‰bant, iam oppid™
adpropinqu‰bant. R™m‰n” autem in Capit™lium fžgerant et long� per”cul™
aberant. Mžr”s valid”s et sax”s alt”s cr�d�bant. Fržstr‰ Sab”n” t�la
iaci�bant, fržstr‰ port‰s džr‰s pet�bant; castellum occup‰re n™n
poterant. Deinde novum c™nsilium c�p�runt.[4]

Tarp�ia erat puella R™m‰na pulchra et superba. Cot”di� aquam c™pi”s
R™m‰n”s in Capit™lium port‰bat. E”[5] n™n noc�bant Sab”n”, quod ea sine
arm”s erat neque Sab”n” bellum cum f�min”s l”ber”sque ger�bant. Tarp�ia
autem maxim� am‰bat ™rn‰menta aur”. Cot”di� Sab”n™rum ™rn‰menta vid�bat
et mox ea d�s”der‰re incipi�bat. E” žnus ex[6] Sab”n”s d”xit, ÒDžc
c™pi‰s Sab”n‰s intr‰ port‰s, Tarp�ia, et maxima erunt praemia tua.Ó

    [Footnote 4: Çc™nsilium capereÈ, _to make a plan_. Why is the
    _perfect_ tense used here and the imperfect in the preceding
    sentences? Explain the use of tenses in the next paragraph.]

    [Footnote 5: Dative with Çnoc�bantÈ. (Cf. ¤154.)]

    [Footnote 6: ÇexÈ, _out of_, i.e. _from the nuumber of_; best
    translated _of_.]

  [Illustration: TARPEIA PUELLA PERFIDA]


LESSON XXXVIII

THE RELATIVE PRONOUN AND THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN

Ç219.È Sentences are _simple, compound_, or _complex_.

    _a._ A _simple sentence_ is a sentence containing but one statement,
    that is, one subject and one predicate: _The Romans approached the
    town._

    _b._ A _compound sentence_ is a sentence containing two or more
    independent statements:
      _The Romans approached the town_ | and | _the enemy fled._

NOTE. An independent statement is one that can stand alone; it does not
depend upon another statement.

    _c._ A _complex sentence_ is a sentence containing one independent
    statement and one or more dependent statements:
      _When the Romans approached the town | the enemy fled._

NOTE. A dependent or subordinate statement is one that depends on or
qualifies another statement; thus _the enemy fled_ is independent, and
_when the Romans approached the town_ is dependent or subordinate.

    _d._ The separate statements in a compound or complex sentence are
    called _clauses_. In a complex sentence the independent statement is
    called the _main clause_ and the dependent statement the
    _subordinate clause._

Ç220.È Examine the complex sentence

  _The Romans killed the men who were taken_

Here are two clauses:

  _a._ The main clause, _The Romans killed the men_

  _b._ The subordinate clause, _who were taken_

The word _who_ is a pronoun, for it takes the place of the noun _men_.
It also connects the subordinate clause _who were taken_ with the noun
_men_. Hence the clause is an _adjective clause_. A pronoun that
connects an _adjective clause_ with a substantive is called a _relative
pronoun_, and the substantive for which the relative pronoun stands is
called its _antecedent_. The relative pronouns in English are _who,
whose, whom, which, what, that_.

Ç221.È The relative pronoun in Latin is Çqu”È, ÇquaeÈ, ÇquodÈ, and it is
declined as follows:

          SINGULAR                     PLURAL
          MASC.    FEM.     NEUT.      MASC.     FEM.      NEUT.
  _Nom._  Çqu”È    ÇquaeÈ   ÇquodÈ     Çqu”È     ÇquaeÈ    ÇquaeÈ
  _Gen._  ÇcuiusÈ  ÇcuiusÈ  ÇcuiusÈ    Çqu™rumÈ  Çqu‰rumÈ  Çqu™rumÈ
  _Dat._  ÇcuiÈ    ÇcuiÈ    ÇcuiÈ      ÇquibusÈ  ÇquibusÈ  ÇquibusÈ
  _Acc._  ÇquemÈ   ÇquamÈ   ÇquodÈ     Çqu™sÈ    Çqu‰sÈ    ÇquaeÈ
  _Abl._  Çqu™È    Çqu‰È    Çqu™È      ÇquibusÈ  ÇquibusÈ  ÇquibusÈ

  1. Review the declension of ÇisÈ, ¤114, and note the similarity in
  the endings. The forms Çqu”È, ÇquaeÈ, and ÇquibusÈ are the only forms
  showing new endings.

NOTE. The genitive ÇcuiusÈ and the dative ÇcuiÈ are pronounced
_c[oo]i«y[oo]s_ (two syllables) and _c[oo]i_ (one syllable).

Ç222.È ÇThe Relative Pronoun is translated as follows:È[1]

           MASC. AND FEM.         NEUT.
  _Nom._  _who, that_            _which, what, that_
  _Gen._  _of whom, whose_       _of which, of what, whose_
  _Dat._  _to_ or _for whom_     _to_ or _for which_, _to_ or _for what_
  _Acc._  _whom, that_           _which, what, that_
  _Abl._  _from_, etc., _whom_   _from_, etc., _which_ or _what_

    [Footnote 1: This table of meanings need not be memorized. It is
    inserted for reference when translating.]

    _a._ We see from the table above that Çqu”È, when it refers to a
    person, is translated by some form of _who_ or by _that_; and that
    when it refers to anything else it is translated by _which, what_,
    or _that_.

Ç223.È Note the following sentences:

  _The Romans killed the men who were taken_
  _The Romans killed the woman who was taken_
  ÇR™m‰n” interf�c�runt vir™s qu” capt” suntÈ
  ÇR™m‰n” interf�c�runt f�minam quae capta estÈ

In the first sentence _who_ (Çqu”È) refers to the antecedent _men_
(Çvir™sÈ), and is _masculine plural_. In the second, _who_ (ÇquaeÈ)
refers to _woman_ (Çf�minamÈ), and _feminine singular_. From this we
learn that the relative must agree with its antecedent in _gender_ and
_number_. In neither of the sentences are the antecedents and relatives
in the same case. ÇVir™sÈ and Çf�minamÈ are accusatives, and Çqu”È and
ÇquaeÈ are nominatives, being the subjects of the subordinate clauses.
Hence

Ç224.È RULE. ÇAgreement of the Relative.È _A relative pronoun must agree
with its antecedent in gender and number; but its case is determined by
the way it is used in its own clause._

Ç225.È ÇInterrogative Pronouns.È An interrogative pronoun is a pronoun
that asks a question. In English the interrogatives are _who?_ _which?_
_what?_ In Latin they are Çquis?È Çquid?È (pronoun) and Çqu”?È Çquae?È
Çquod?È (adjective).

Ç226.È Examine the sentences

  _a._ _Who is the man?_ ÇQuis est vir?È
  _b._ _What man is leading them?_ ÇQu” vir e™s džcit?È

In _a_, _who_ is an interrogative _pronoun_. In _b_, _what_ is an
interrogative _adjective_. Observe that in Latin ÇquisÈ, ÇquidÈ is the
_pronoun_ and Çqu”È, ÇquaeÈ, ÇquodÈ is the _adjective_.

Ç227.È 1. The interrogative adjective Çqu”È, ÇquaeÈ, ÇquodÈ is declined
just like the relative pronoun. (See ¤221.)

  2. The interrogative pronoun ÇquisÈ, ÇquidÈ is declined like Çqu”È,
  ÇquaeÈ, ÇquodÈ in the plural. In the singular it is declined as
  follows:

          MASC. AND FEM.                NEUT.
  _Nom._  ÇquisÈ, _who?_                ÇquidÈ, _what? which?_
  _Gen._  ÇcuiusÈ, _whose?_             ÇcuiusÈ, _whose?_
  _Dat._  ÇcuiÈ, _to_ or _for whom?_    ÇcuiÈ, _to_ or _for_
                                          _what_ or _which?_
  _Acc._  ÇquemÈ, _whom?_               ÇquidÈ, _what? which?_
  _Abl._  Çqu™È, _from_, etc., _whom?_  Çqu™È, _from_, etc.,
                                          _which_ or _what?_

NOTE. Observe that the masculine and feminine are alike and that all the
forms are like the corresponding forms of the relative, excepting quis
and quid.

Ç228.È EXERCISES

I. 1. Quis est aeger? Servus quem am™ est aeger. 2. Cuius scžtum hab�s?
Scžtum habe™ quod l�g‰tus ad castellum m”sit. 3. Cui l�g‰tus suum scžtum
dabit? F”li™ me™ scžtum dabit. 4. Ubi Germ‰n” ant”qu” v”v�bant? In terr‰
quae est proxima Rh�n™ Germ‰n” v”v�bant. 5. Quibuscum[1] Germ‰n” bellum
ger�bant? Cum R™m‰n”s, qui e™s super‰re stud�bant, Germ‰n” bellum
ger�bant. 6. Qu” vir” castra p™nunt? I” sunt vir” qu™rum arm”s Germ‰n”
vict” sunt. 7. Quibus t�l”s c™piae nostrae egu�runt? Gladi”s et tel”s
nostrae c™piae egu�runt. 8. å quibus porta sinistra ten�b‰tur? å soci”s
porta sinistra ten�b‰tur. 9. Quae pr™vinciae ‰ R™m‰n”s occup‰tae sunt?
Multae pr™vinciae ‰ R™m‰n”s occup‰tae sunt. 10. Quibus vir”s de”
fav�bunt? Bon”s vir”s de” fav�bunt.

    [Footnote 1: ÇcumÈ is added to the ablative of relative,
    interrogative, and personal pronouns instead of being placed
    before them.]

  [Illustration: GERMANI ANTIQUI]

II. 1. What victory will you announce? 2. I will announce to the people
the victory which the sailors have won. 3. The men who were pitching
camp were eager for battle. 4. Nevertheless they were soon conquered by
the troops which Sextus had sent. 5. They could not resist our forces,
but fled from that place without delay.

Ç229.È THE FAITHLESS TARPEIA (_Concluded_)[2]

Tarp�ia, comm™ta ™rnament”s Sab”n™rum pulchr”s, diž resistere n™n potuit
et respondit: ÒDate mihi[3] ™rn‰menta quae in sinistr”s bracch”s
geritis, et celeriter c™pi‰s vestr‰s in Capit™lium džcam.Ó Nec Sab”n”
recžs‰v�runt, sed per džr‰s magn‰sque castell” port‰s proper‰v�runt
qu™[1] Tarp�ia džxit et mox intr‰ valid™s et alt™s mžr™s st‰bant. Tum
sine mor‰ in[2] Tarp�iam scžta graviter i�c�runt; nam scžta quoque in
sinistr”s bracchi”s ger�bant. Ita perfida puella Tarp�ia interfecta est;
ita Sab”n” Capit™lium occup‰v�runt.

    [Footnote 2: Explain the use of the tenses in this selection.]

    [Footnote 3: _to me._]

    [Footnote 1: qu™ = _whither_, _to the place where_. Here ÇquoÈ is
    the relative adverb. We have had it used before as the interrogative
    adverb, _whither?_ _to what place?_]

    [Footnote 2: _upon_.]


LESSON XXXIX

THE THIRD DECLENSION ¥ CONSONANT STEMS

  [Special Vocabulary]

  Çbarbarus, -a, -umÈ, _strange, foreign, barbarous_. As a noun,
    Çbarbar”, -™rumÈ, m., plur., _savages, barbarians_
  Çdux, ducisÈ, m., _leader_ (duke). Cf. the verb Çdžc™È
  Çeques, equitisÈ, m., _horseman, cavalryman_ (equestrian)
   iždex, iždicis, _m., judge_
  Çlapis, lapidisÈ, m., _stone_ (lapidary)
  Çm”les, m”litisÈ, m., _soldier_ (militia)
  Çpedes, peditisÈ, m., _foot soldier_ (pedestrian)
  Çp�s, pedisÈ,[A] m., _foot_ (pedal)
  Çpr”nceps, pr”ncipisÈ, m., _chief_ (principal)
  Çr�x, r�gisÈ, m., _king_ (regal)
  Çsummus, -a, -umÈ, _highest, greatest_ (summit)
  Çvirtžs, virtžtisÈ, f., _manliness, courage_ (virtue)

    [Footnote A: Observe that ÇeÈ is _long_ in the nom. sing, and
    _short_ in the other cases.]

Ç230.È ÇBases and Stems.È In learning the first and second declensions
we saw that the different cases were formed by adding the case
terminations to the part of the word that did not change, which we
called the ÇbaseÈ. If to the base we add Ç-‰È in the first declension,
and Ç-oÈ in the second, we get what is called the ÇstemÈ. Thus ÇportaÈ
has the base Çport-È and the stem Çport‰-È; ÇservusÈ has the base
Çserv-È and the stem Çservo-È.

These stem vowels, Ç-‰-È and Ç-o-È, play so important a part in the
formation of the case terminations that these declensions are named from
them respectively the _å_- and _O_-Declensions.

Ç231.È ÇNouns of the Third Declension.È The third declension is called
the Consonant or _I_-Declension, and its nouns are classified according
to the way the _stem_ ends. If the last letter of the stem is a
consonant, the word is said to have a _consonant stem_; if the stem ends
in Ç-i-È, the word is said to have an Çi-È_stem_. _In consonant stems
the stem is the same as the base. In_ Çi-È_stems the stem is formed by
adding_ Ç-i-È _to the base._ The presence of the ÇiÈ makes a difference
in certain of the cases, so the distinction is a very important one.

Ç232.È Consonant stems are divided into two classes:

   I. Stems that add Ç-sÈ to the base to form the nominative singular.
  II. Stems that add no termination in the nominative singular.

CLASS I

Ç233.È Stems that add Ç-sÈ to the base in the nominative singular are
either masculine or feminine and are declined as follows:

            Çpr”ncepsÈ,   Çm”lesÈ, m.,  ÇlapisÈ,
            m., _chief_   _soldier_     m., _stone_
  BASES OR
  STEMS     Çpr”ncip-È    Çm”lit-È      Çlapid-È

            SINGULAR                               TERMINATIONS
                                                   M. AND F.
  _Nom._    pr”nceps      m”les         lapis      -s
  _Gen._    pr”n«cipis    m”litis       lapidis    -is
  _Dat._    pr”n«cip”     m”lit”        lapid”     -”
  _Acc._    pr”n«cipem    m”litem       lapidem    -em
  _Abl._    pr”n«cipe     m”lite        lapide     -e

            PLURAL
  _Nom._    pr”n«cip�s    m”lit�s       lapid�s    -�s
  _Gen._    pr”n«cipum    m”litum       lapidum    -um
  _Dat._    pr”nci«pibus  m”litibus     lapidibus  -ibus
  _Acc._    pr”n«cip�s    m”lit�s       lapid�s    -�s
  _Abl._    pr”nci«pibus  m”litibus     lapidibus  -ibus


            Çr�xÈ,      ÇiždexÈ,     ÇvirtžsÈ, f.,
            m., _king_  m.,_judge_   _manliness_
  BASES OR
  STEMS     Çr�g-È      Çiždic-È     Çvirtžt-È

            SINGULAR                              TERMINATIONS
            M. AND F.
  _Nom._    r�x         iždex        virtžs       -s
  _Gen._    r�gis       iždicis      virtž«tis    -is
  _Dat._    r�g”        iždic”       virtž«t”     -”
  _Acc._    r�gem       iždicem      virtž«tem    -em
  _Abl._    r�ge        iždice       virtž«te     -e

            PLURAL
  _Nom._    r�g�s       iždic�s      virtž«t�s    -�s
  _Gen._    r�gum       iždicum      virtž«tum    -um
  _Dat._    r�gibus     iždicibus    virtž«tibus  -ibus
  _Acc._    r�g�s       iždic�s      virtž«t�s    -�s
  _Abl._    r�gibus     iždicibus    virtž«tibus  -ibus

  1. The base or stem is found by dropping Ç-isÈ in the genitive
  singular.

  2. Most nouns of two syllables, like Çpr”ncepsÈ (Çpr”ncip-È), Çm”lesÈ
  (Çm”lit-È), ÇiždexÈ (Çiždic-È), have ÇiÈ in the base, but ÇeÈ in the
  nominative.

    _a._ ÇlapisÈ is an exception to this rule.

  3. Observe the consonant changes of the base or stem in the
  nominative:

    _a._ A final Ç-tÈ or Ç-dÈ is dropped before Ç-sÈ; thus Çm”lesÈ for
    Çm”letsÈ, ÇlapisÈ for ÇlapidsÈ, ÇvirtžsÈ for ÇvirtžtsÈ.

    _b._ A final Ç-cÈ or Ç-gÈ unites with Ç-sÈ and forms Ç-xÈ; thus
    ÇiždecÈ + ÇsÈ = ÇiždexÈ, Çr�gÈ + ÇsÈ = Çr�xÈ.

  4. Review ¤74 and apply the rules to this declension.

  In like manner decline Çdux, ducisÈ, m., _leader_; Çeques, equitisÈ,
  m., _horseman_; Çpedes, peditisÈ, m., _foot soldier_; Çp�s, pedisÈ,
  m.,_foot_.

Ç234.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 291.

I. 1. Neque pedit�s neque equit�s occup‰re castellum R™m‰num poterant.
2. Summ‰ virtžte mžr™s alt™s cot”di� oppugn‰bant. 3. Pedes m”litum
lapidibus qu” d� mžr™ iaci�bantur saepe vulner‰bantur. 4. Quod novum
c™nsilium dux c�pit? 5. Is perfidam puellam pulchr”s ™rn‰ment”s
tempt‰vit. 6. Quid puella f�cit? 7. Puella comm™ta aur™ m”lit�s per
port‰s džxit. 8. Tamen praemia quae summ™ studi™ pet”verat n™n
report‰vit. 9. Apud R™m‰n™s ant”qu™s Tarp�ia n™n est laud‰ta.

II. 1. What ship is that which I see? That (ÇilludÈ) ship is the
_Victory_. It is sailing now with a favorable wind and will soon
approach Italy. 2. The judges commanded the savages to be seized and to
be killed. 3. The chiefs of the savages suddenly began to flee, but were
quickly captured by the horsemen. 4. The king led the foot soldiers to
the wall from which the townsmen were hurling stones with the greatest
zeal.

  [Illustration: NAVIGIUM]


LESSON XL

THE THIRD DECLENSION ¥ CONSONANT STEMS (_Continued_)

  [Special Vocabulary]

  ÇCaesar, -arisÈ, m., _C¾sar_
  Çcapt”vus, -”È, m., _captive, prisoner_
  Çc™nsul, -isÈ, m., _consul_
  Çfr‰ter, fr‰trisÈ, m., _brother_ (fraternity)
  Çhom™, hominisÈ, m., _man, human being_
  Çimped”mentum, -”È, n., _hindrance_ (impediment); plur.
    Çimped”menta, -™rumÈ, _baggage_
  Çimper‰tor, imper‰t™risÈ, m., _commander in chief, general_ (emperor)
  Çlegi™, legi™nisÈ, f., _legion_
  Çm‰ter, m‰trisÈ, f., _mother_ (maternal)
  Ç™rd™, ™rdinisÈ, m., _row, rank_ (order)
  Çpater, patrisÈ, m., _father_ (paternal)
  Çsalžs, salžtisÈ, f., _safety_ (salutary)
  Çsoror, sor™risÈ, f., _sister_ (sorority)

CLASS II

Ç235.È Consonant stems that add no termination in the nominative are
declined in the other cases exactly like those that add Ç-sÈ. They may
be masculine, feminine, or neuter.

Ç236.È PARADIGMS

MASCULINES AND FEMININES

            Çc™nsulÈ,     Çlegi™È, f.,  Ç™rd™È,    ÇpaterÈ, m.,
            m., _consul_  _legion_      m., _row_  _father_
  BASES OR
  STEMS     Çc™nsul-È     Çlegi™n-È     Ç™rdin-È   Çpatr-È

            SINGULAR                                       TERMINATIONS
                                                           M. AND F.
  _Nom._    c™nsul        legi™         ™rd™       pater     --
  _Gen._    c™nsulis      legi™nis      ™rdinis    patris    -is
  _Dat._    c™nsul”       legi™n”       ™rdin”     patr”     -”
  _Acc._    c™nsulem      legi™nem      ™rdinem    patrem    -em
  _Abl._    c™nsule       legi™ne       ™rdine     patre     -e

            PLURAL
  _Nom._    c™nsul�s      legi™n�s      ™rdin�s    patr�s    -�s
  _Gen._    c™nsulum      legi™num      ™rdinum    patrum    -um
  _Dat._    c™nsulibus    legi™nibus    ™rdinibus  patribus  -ibus
  _Acc._    c™nsul�s      legi™n�s      ™rdin�s    patr�s    -�s
  _Abl._    c™nsulibus    legi™nibus    ™rdinibus  patribus  -ibus

  1. With the exception of the nominative, the terminations are exactly
  the same as in Class I, and the base or stem is found in the same way.

  2. Masculines and feminines with bases or stems in -in- and -™n- drop
  -n- and end in -™ in the nominative, as legi™ (base or stem legi™n-),
  ™rd™ (base or stem ™rdin-).

  3. Bases or stems in -tr- have -ter in the nominative, as pater (base
  or stem patr-).

  4. Note how the genitive singular gives the clue to the whole
  declension. _Always learn this with the nominative._

Ç237.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 291.

I. 1. Aud”sne tub‰s, M‰rce? N™n s™lum tub‰s audi™ sed etiam ™rdin�s
militum et carr™s imped”ment™rum pl�n™s vid�re possum. 2. Qu‰s legi™n�s
vid�mus? Eae legi™n�s nžper ex Galli‰ v�n�runt. 3. Quid ibi f�c�runt?
Stud�bantne pugn‰re an sine virtžte erant? 4. Multa proelia f�c�runt[1]
et magn‰s vict™ri‰s et mult™s capt”v™s report‰v�runt. 5. Quis est
imper‰tor e‰rum legi™num? Caesar, summus R™m‰n™rum imper‰tor. 6. Quis
est eques qu” pulchram cor™nam gerit? Is eques est fr‰ter meus. E”
cor™na ‰ c™nsule data est quia summ‰ virtžte pugn‰verat et ‰ barbar”s
patriam serv‰verat.

II. 1. Who has seen my father to-day? 2. I saw him just now (ÇnžperÈ).
He was hastening to your dwelling with your mother and sister. 3. When
men are far from the fatherland and lack food, they cannot be
restrained[2] from wrong[3]. 4. The safety of the soldiers is dear to
C¾sar, the general. 5. The chiefs were eager to storm a town full of
grain which was held by the consul. 6. The king forbade the baggage of
the captives to be destroyed.

    [Footnote 1: Çproelium facereÈ = _to fight a battle._]

    [Footnote 2: Çcontine™È. Cf. ¤180.]

    [Footnote 3: Abl. inižri‰.]


LESSON XLI

THE THIRD DECLENSION ¥ CONSONANT STEMS (_Concluded_)

  [Special Vocabulary]

  Çcalamit‰s, calamit‰tisÈ, f., _loss, disaster, defeat_ (calamity)
  Çcaput, capitisÈ, n., _head_ (capital)
  Çflžmen, flžminisÈ, n., _river_ (flume)
  Çlabor, lab™risÈ, m., _labor, toil_
  Çopus, operisÈ, n., _work, task_
  Ç™r‰tor, ™r‰t™risÈ, m., _orator_
  Çr”pa, -aeÈ, f., _bank_ (of a stream)
  Çtempus, temporisÈ, n., _time_ (temporal)
  Çterror, terr™risÈ, m., _terror, fear_
  Çvictor, vict™risÈ, m., _victor_

  Çaccipi™, accipere, acc�p”, acceptusÈ, _receive, accept_
  Çc™nfirm™, c™nf”rm‰re, c™nf”rm‰v”, c™nf”rm‰tusÈ, _strengthen,
     establish, encourage_ (confirm)

Ç238.È Neuter consonant stems add no termination in the nominative and
are declined as follows:

            ÇflžmenÈ,    ÇtempusÈ,   ÇopusÈ,     ÇcaputÈ,
            n., _river_  n., _time_  n., _work_  n., _head_
  BASES OR
  STEMS     Çflžmin-È    Çtempor-È   Çoper-È     Çcapit-È

            SINGULAR                                     TERMINATIONS
  _Nom._    flžmen       tempus      opus        caput       --
  _Gen._    flžminis     temporis    operis      capitis    -is
  _Dat._    flžmin”      temper”     oper”       capit”     -”
  _Acc._    flžmen       tempus      opus        caput       --
  _Abl._    flžmine      tempore     opere       capite     -e

             PLURAL
  _Nom._     flžmina      tempora     opera      capita     -a
  _Gen._     flžminum     temporum    operum     capitum    -um
  _Dat._     flžminibus   temporibus  operibus   capitibus  -ibus
  _Acc._     flžmina      tempora     opera      capita     -a
  _Abl._     flžminibus   temporibus  operibus   capitibus  -ibus

  1. Review ¤74 and apply the rules to this declension.

  2. Bases or stems in -in- have -e- instead of -i- in the nominative,
  as flžmen, base or stem flžmin-.

  3. Most bases or stems in -er- and -or- have -us in the nominative, as
  opus, base or stem oper-; tempus, base or stem tempor-.

Ç239.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 292.

I. 1. Barbar” ubi R™mam c�p�runt, maxima r�gum opera d�l�v�runt.
2. R™m‰n” mult‰s calamit‰t�s ‰ barbar”s acc�p�runt. 3. Ubi erat summus
terror apud oppid‰n™s, anim” dubi” e™rum ab ™r‰t™re clar™ c™nf”rm‰ti
sunt. 4. R™ma est in r”p”s fižminis magn”. 5. Ubi Caesar imper‰tor
m”lit�s su™s arma capere iussit, i” ‰ proeli™ contin�r” n™n potu�runt.
6. Ubi proelium factum est, imper‰tor reper”r” n™n potuit. 7. Imper‰tor
sagitt‰ in capite vulner‰tus erat et st‰re n™n poterat. 8. Eum magn™
lab™re pedes ex proeli™ port‰vit. 9. Is bracchi”s su”s imper‰t™rem
tenuit et eum ex per”cul”s summ”s serv‰vit. 10. Virtžte su‰ bonus m”les
ab imper‰t™re cor™nam acc�pit.

II. 1. The consul placed a crown on the head of the victor. 2. Before
the gates he was received by the townsmen. 3. A famous orator praised
him and said, ÒBy your labors you have saved the fatherland from
disaster.Ó 4. The words of the orator were pleasing to the victor.
5. To save the fatherland was a great task.

  [Illustration: Corona]


LESSON XLII

REVIEW LESSON

Ç240.È Review the paradigms in ¤¤233, 236, 238; and decline all nouns of
the third declension in this selection.

TERROR CIMBRICUS[1]

ïlim Cimbr” et Teuton�s, popul” Germ‰niae, cum f�min”s l”ber”sque
Italiae adpropinqu‰verant et c™pi‰s R™m‰n‰s maxim™ proeli™ v”cerant. Ubi
fuga legi™num nžnti‰ta est, summus erat terror t™t”us R™mae, et R™m‰n”,
graviter comm™t”, sacra cr�bra de”s faci�bant et salžtem pet�bant.

Tum M‰nlius ™r‰tor anim™s popul” ita c™nf”rm‰vit:--ÒMagnam calamit‰tem
acc�pimus. Oppida nostra ‰ Cimbr”s Teutonibusque capiuntur, agricolae
interficiuntur, agr” v‰stantur, c™piae barbar™rum R™mae adpropinquant.
Itaque, nisi nov”s anim”s proelium novum faci�mus et Germ‰n™s ex patri‰
nostr‰ sine mor‰ ag�mus, erit nžlla salžs f�min”s nostr”s l”ber”sque.
Serv‰te l”ber™s! Serv‰te patriam! Ante‰ super‰t” sumus quia imper‰t™r�s
nostr” fu�runt ”nf”rm”. Nunc Marius, cl‰rus imper‰tor, qu” iam mult‰s
ali‰s vict™ri‰s report‰vit, legi™n�s džcet et anim™s nostr™s terr™re
Cimbric™ l”ber‰re m‰tžr‰bit.Ó

Marius tum in åfric‰ bellum ger�bat. Sine mor‰ ex åfric‰ in Italiam
voc‰tus est. C™pi‰s nov‰s n™n s™lum t™t” Italiae sed etiam pr™vinci”s
soci™rum imper‰vit.[2] Discipl”n‰ autem džr‰ lab™ribusque perpetu”s
m”lit�s exercuit. Tum cum peditibus equitibusque, qu” iam proeli™
stud�bant, ad Germ‰n™rum castra celeriter proper‰vit. Diž et ‰criter
pugn‰tum est.[3] D�nique barbar” fžg�runt et mult” in fug‰ ab equitibus
sunt interfect”. Marius pater patriae voc‰tus est.

    [Footnote 1: About the year 100 B.C. the Romans were greatly alarmed
    by an invasion of barbarians from the north known as Cimbri and
    Teutons. They were traveling with wives and children, and had an
    army of 300,000 fighting men. Several Roman armies met defeat, and
    the city was in a panic. Then the Senate called upon Marius, their
    greatest general, to save the country. First he defeated the Teutons
    in Gaul. Next, returning to Italy, he met the Cimbri. A terrible
    battle ensued, in which the Cimbri were utterly destroyed; but the
    _terror Cimbricus_ continued to haunt the Romans for many a year
    thereafter.]

    [Footnote 2: _He made a levy_ (of troops) _upon_, Çimper‰vitÈ with
    the acc. and the dat.]

    [Footnote 3: Cf. ¤200. II. 2.]


LESSON XLIII

THE THIRD DECLENSION ¥ _I_-STEMS

  [Special Vocabulary]

  Çanimal, anim‰lis (-ium[A])È, n., _animal_
  Çavis, avis (-ium)È, f., _bird_ (aviation)
  Çcaed�s, caedis (-ium)È, f., _slaughter_
  calcar, calc‰ris (-ium), n., _spur_
  Çc”vis, c”vis (-ium)È, m. and f., _citizen_ (civic)
  Çcli�ns, clientis (-ium)È, m., _retainer, dependent_ (client)
  Çf”nis, f”nis (-ium)È, m., _end, limit_ (final);
    plur., _country, territory_
  Çhostis, hostis (-ium)È, m. and f., _enemy_ in war (hostile).
    Distinguish from Çinim”cusÈ, which means a _personal_ enemy
  Çignis, ignis (-ium)È, m., _fire_ (ignite)
  Ç”nsigne, ”nsignis (-ium)È, n. _decoration, badge_ (ensign)
  Çmare, maris (-ium[B])È, n., _sea_ (marine)
  Çn‰vis, n‰vis (-ium)È, f., _ship_ (naval);
  Çn‰vis longaÈ, _man-of-war_
  Çturris, turris (-ium)È, f., _tower_ (turret)
  Çurbs, urbis (-ium)È, f., _city_ (suburb). An ÇurbsÈ is larger than an
     ÇoppidumÈ.

    [Footnote A: The genitive plural ending Ç-iumÈ is written to mark
    the i-stems.]

    [Footnote B: The genitive plural of ÇmareÈ is not in use.]

Ç241.È To decline a noun of the third declension correctly we must know
whether or not it is an ÇiÈ-stem. Nouns with ÇiÈ-stems are

  1. Masculines and feminines:

    _a._ Nouns in Ç-�sÈ and Ç-”sÈ with the same number of syllables in
    the genitive as in the nominative. Thus Çcaed�s, caedisÈ, is an
    ÇiÈ-stem, but Çm”les, m”litisÈ, is a consonant stem.

    _b._ Nouns in Ç-nsÈ and Ç-rsÈ.

    _c._ Nouns of one syllable in Ç-sÈ or Ç-xÈ preceded by a consonant.

  2. Neuters in Ç-eÈ, Ç-alÈ, and Ç-arÈ.

Ç242.È The declension of ÇiÈ-stems is nearly the same as that of
consonant stems. Note the following differences:

_a._ Masculines and feminities have Ç-iumÈ in the genitive plural and
Ç-”sÈ or Ç-�sÈ in the accusative plural.

_b._ Neuters have Ç-”È in the ablative singular, and an Ç-i-È in every
form of the plural.

Ç243.È ÇMasculine and Feminine _I_-Stems.È Masculine and feminine
ÇiÈ-stems are declined as follows:

         Çcaed�sÈ, f., ÇhostisÈ,    ÇurbsÈ, f., Çcli�nsÈ, m.,
         _slaughter_   m., _enemy_  _city_      _retainer_
  STEMS  Çcaedi-È      Çhosti-È     Çurbi-È     Çclienti-È
  BASES  Çcaed-È       Çhost-È      Çurb-È      Çclient-È

         SINGULAR                                           TERMINATIONS
                                                            M. AND F.
  _Nom._ caed�s        hostis       urbs        cli�ns[1]      -s, -is,
                                                                _or_ -�s
  _Gen._ caedis        hostis       urbis       clientis       -is
  _Dat._ caed”         host”        urb”        client”        -”
  _Acc._ caedem        hostem       urbem       clientem       -em (-im)
  _Abl._ caede         hoste        urbe        cliente        -e (-”)

         PLURAL
  _Nom._ caed�s        host�s       urb�s       client�s       -�s
  _Gen._ caedium       hostium      urbium      clientium      -ium
  _Dat._ caedibus      hostibus     urbibus     clientibus     -ibus
  _Acc._ caed”s, -�s   host”s, -�s  urb”s, -�s  client”s, -�s  -”s, -�s
  _Abl._ caedibus      hostibus     urbibus     clientibus     -ibus

    [Footnote 1: Observe that the vowel before Ç-nsÈ is long, but that
    it is shortened before Ç-ntÈ. Cf. ¤12.2, 3.]

  1. ÇavisÈ, Çc”visÈ, Çf”nisÈ, ÇignisÈ, Çn‰visÈ have the ablative
  singular in Ç-”È or Ç-eÈ.

  2. ÇturrisÈ has accusative ÇturrimÈ and ablative Çturr”È or ÇturreÈ.

Ç244.È ÇNeuter _I_-Stems.È Neuter ÇiÈ-stems are declined as follows:

          Ç”nsigneÈ, n.,  ÇanimalÈ, n.,  ÇcalcarÈ,
          _decoration_    _animal_       n., _spur_
  STEMS   Ç”nsigni-È      Çanim‰li-È     Çcalc‰ri-È
  BASES   Ç”nsign-È       Çanim‰l-È      Çcalc‰r-È

          SINGULAR                                 TERMINATIONS
  _Nom._  ”nsigne         animal         calcar      -e _or_ --
  _Gen._  ”nsignis        anim‰lis       calc‰ris    -is
  _Dat._  ”nsign”         anim‰l”        calc‰r”     -”
  _Acc._  ”nsigne         animal         calcar      -e _or_ --
  _Abl._  ”nsign”         anim‰l”        calc‰r”     -”

          PLURAL
  _Nom._  ”nsignia        anim‰lia       calc‰ria    -ia
  _Gen._  ”nsignium       anim‰lium      calc‰rium   -ium
  _Dat._  ”nsignibus      anim‰libus     calc‰ribus  -ibus
  _Acc._  ”nsignia        anim‰lia       calc‰ria    -ia
  _Abl._  ”nsignibus      anim‰libus     calc‰ribus  -ibus

  1. Review ¤74 and see how it applies to this declension.

  2. The final Ç-i-È of the stem is usually dropped in the nominative.
  If not dropped, it is changed to Ç-eÈ.

  3. A long vowel is shortened before final Ç-lÈ or Ç-rÈ. (Cf. ¤12.2.)

Ç245.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 292.

I. 1. Quam urbem vid�mus? Urbs quam vid�tis est R™ma. 2. C”v�s R™m‰n”
urbem suam turribus alt”s et mžr”s long”s mžn”verant. 3. Vent” n‰v”s
long‰s prohib�bant f”nibus hostium adpropinqu‰re. 4. Imper‰tor a
clientibus su”s calc‰ria aur” et alia ”nsignia acc�pit. 5. M”lit�s
R™m‰n” cum hostibus bella saeva gess�runt et e™s caede magn‰
super‰v�runt. 6. Alia anim‰lia terram, alia mare amant. 7. N‰v�s longae
quae auxilium ad imper‰t™rem port‰bant ign” ab hostibus d�l�tae sunt.
8. In e™ mar” avis mult‰s v”dimus quae long� ‰ terr‰ vol‰verant.
9. N™nne v”distis n‰v”s long‰s hostium et ign”s quibus urbs nostra
v‰st‰b‰tur? Cert�, sed nec caedem c”vium nec fugam clientium v”dimus.
10. Av�s et alia anim‰lia, ubi ignem v”d�runt, salžtem fug‰ petere
celeriter inc�p�runt. 11. Num. iždex in peditum ™rdinibus st‰bat?
Minim�, iždex erat apud equit�s et equus eius ”nsigne pulchrum ger�bat.

  [Illustration: NAVES LONGAE]

II. 1. Because of the lack of grain the animals of the village were not
able to live. 2. When the general[2] heard the rumor, he quickly sent a
horseman to the village. 3. The horseman had a beautiful horse and wore
spurs of gold. 4. He said to the citizens, ÒSend your retainers with
horses and wagons to our camp, and you will receive an abundance of
grain.Ó 5. With happy hearts they hastened to obey his words.[3]

    [Footnote 2: Place first.]

    [Footnote 3: Not the accusative. Why?]


LESSON XLIV

IRREGULAR NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION ¥ GENDER IN THE THIRD DECLENSION

  [Special Vocabulary]

  Çarbor, arborisÈ, f., _tree_ (arbor)
  Çcollis, collis (-ium)È, m., _hill_
  Çd�ns, dentis (-ium)È, m., _tooth_ (dentist)
   f™ns, fontis (-ium), m.. _fountain, spring; source_
  Çiter, itinerisÈ, n., _march, journey, route_ (itinerary)
  Çm�nsis, m�nsis (-ium)È, m., _month_
  Çmoenia, -iumÈ, n., plur., _walls, fortifications_. Cf. ÇmžrusÈ
  Çm™ns, montis (-ium)È, m., _mountain_;
    Çsummus m™nsÈ, _top of the mountain_
  ÇnumquamÈ, adv., _never_
  Çp™ns, pontisÈ, m., _bridge_ (pontoon)
  Çsanguis, sanguinisÈ, m., blood (sanguinary)
  Çsummus, -a, -umÈ, _highest, greatest_ (summit)
  Çtr‰nsÈ, prep, with acc., _across_ (transatlantic)
  Çv”s (v”s)È, gen. plur. ÇviriumÈ, f. _strength, force, violence_ (vim)

Ç246.È PARADIGMS

  [TranscriberÕs Note:
  The original text gives Çv”-È and Çv”r-È as the ÒBasesÓ of Çv”sÈ, and
  omits the ÒStemsÓ for both words. The forms have been regularized to
  agree with the inflectional table in the Appendix.]

          Çv”sÈ, f., _force_  ÇiterÈ, n., _march_
  STEMS   Çv”-È and Çv”ri-È   Çiter-È and Çitiner-È
  BASES   Çv-È and Çv”r-È     Çiter-È and Çitiner-È

          SINGULAR
  _Nom._  v”s                 iter
  _Gen._  v”s (rare)          itineris
  _Dat._  v” (rare)           itiner”
  _Acc._  vim                 iter
  _Abl._  v”                  itinere

           PLURAL
  _Nom._  v”r�s               itinera
  _Gen._  v”rium              itinerum
  _Dat._  v”ribus             itineribus
  _Acc._  v”r”s, or -�s       itinera
  _Abl._  v”ribus             itineribus

Ç247.È There are no rules for gender in the third declension that do not
present numerous exceptions.[1] The following rules, however, are of
great service, and should be thoroughly mastered:

  1. ÇMasculineÈ are nouns in Ç-orÈ, Ç-™sÈ, Ç-erÈ, Ç-esÈ (gen. Ç-itisÈ).

    _a._ ÇarborÈ, _tree_, is feminine; and ÇiterÈ, _march_, is neuter.

  2. ÇFeminineÈ are nouns in Ç-™È, Ç-isÈ, Ç-xÈ, and in Ç-sÈ preceded by
  a consonant or by any long vowel but Ç™È.

    _a._ Masculine are ÇcollisÈ (_hill_), ÇlapisÈ, Çm�nsisÈ (_month_),
    Ç™rd™È, Çp�sÈ, and nouns in Ç-nisÈ and Ç-guisÈ--as ÇignisÈ,
    ÇsanguisÈ (_blood_)--and the four monosyllables

      Çd�nsÈ, _a tooth_; Çm™nsÈ, _a mountain_
      Çp™nsÈ, _a bridge_; Çf™nsÈ, _a fountain_

  3. ÇNeutersÈ are nouns in Ç-eÈ, Ç-alÈ, Ç-arÈ, Ç-nÈ, Ç-urÈ, Ç-usÈ, and
  ÇcaputÈ.

    [Footnote 1: Review ¤60. Words denoting males are, of course,
    masculine, and those denoting females, feminine.]

Ç248.È Give the gender of the following nouns and the rule by which it
is determined:

  ÇanimalÈ   Çcalamit‰sÈ   ÇflžmenÈ    ÇlapisÈ   Çn‰visÈ
  ÇavisÈ     ÇcaputÈ       ÇignisÈ     Çlegi™È   ÇopusÈ
  Çcaed�sÈ   ÇequesÈ       Ç”nsigneÈ   ÇmareÈ    ÇsalžsÈ
  ÇcalcarÈ   Çf”nisÈ       ÇlaborÈ     Çm”lesÈ   ÇurbsÈ

Ç249.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 292.

I. _The First Bridge over the Rhine._ Salžs soci™rum erat semper c‰ra
R™m‰n”s. ïlim Gall”, am”c” R™m‰n™rum, mult‰s inižri‰s ab Germ‰n”s qu”
tr‰ns flžmen Rh�num viv�bant acc�perant. Ubi l�g‰t” ab i”s ad Caesarem
imper‰t™rem R™m‰num v�n�runt et auxilium postul‰v�runt, R™m‰n” magn”s
itineribus ad hostium f”n”s proper‰v�runt. Mox ad r”p‰s magn” flžminis
v�n�runt. Imper‰tor stud�bat c™pi‰s su‰s tr‰ns fluvium džcere, sed nžll‰
vi‰[2] poterat. Nžll‰s n‰v”s hab�bat. Alta erat aqua. Imper‰tor autem,
vir cl‰rus, numquam advers‰ fortžn‰ comm™tus, novum c™nsilium c�pit.
Iussit su™s[3] in[4] l‰t™ flžmine facere pontem. Numquam ante‰ p™ns in
Rh�n™ v”sus erat. Host�s ubi pontem quem R™m‰n” f�cerant v”d�runt, summ™
terr™re comm™t”, sine mor‰ fugam par‰re inc�p�runt.

II. 1. The enemy had taken (possession of) the top of the mountain.
2. There were many trees on the opposite hills. 3. We pitched our camp
near (ÇadÈ) a beautiful spring. 4. A march through the enemiesÕ country
is never without danger. 5. The time of the month was suitable for the
march. 6. The teeth of the monster were long. 7. When the foot
soldiers[5] saw the blood of the captives, they began to assail the
fortifications with the greatest violence.[2]

    [Footnote 2: Abl. of manner.]

    [Footnote 3: Çsu™sÈ, used as a noun, _his men_.]

    [Footnote 4: We say _build a bridge over_; the Romans, _make a
    bridge on_.]

    [Footnote 5: Place first.]

       *       *       *       *       *

  ÇFifth Review, Lessons XXXVII-XLIV, ¤¤517-520È

       *       *       *       *       *

LESSON XLV

ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION ¥ _I_-STEMS

  [Special Vocabulary]

  ljcer, ‰cris, ‰creÈ, _sharp, keen, eager_ (acrid)
  Çbrevis, breveÈ, _short, brief_
  Çdifficilis, difficileÈ, _difficult_
  Çfacilis, facileÈ, _facile, easy_
  Çfortis, forteÈ, _brave_ (fortitude)
  Çgravis, graveÈ, _heavy, severe, serious_ (grave)
  Çomnis, omneÈ, _every, all_ (omnibus)
  Çp‰rÈ, gen. ÇparisÈ, _equal_ (par)
  Çpauc”, -ae, -aÈ, _few, only a few_ (paucity)
  Çsecundus, -a, -umÈ, _second; favorable_, opposite of adversus
  Çsignum, -”È, n., _signal, sign, standard_
  Çv�l™xÈ, gen. Çv�l™cisÈ, _swift_ (velocity)

  Çconloc™, conloc‰re, conloc‰v”, conloc‰tusÈ, _arrange, station, place_
    (collocation)
  Çd�m™nstr™, d�m™nstr‰re, d�m™nstr‰v”, d�m™nstr‰tusÈ, _point out,
    explain_ (demonstrate)
  Çmand™, mand‰re, mand‰v”, mand‰tusÈ, _commit, intrust_ (mandate)

Ç250.È Adjectives are either of the first and second declensions (like
ÇbonusÈ, ÇaegerÈ, or Çl”berÈ), or they are of the third declension.

Ç251.È Nearly all adjectives of the third declension have ÇiÈ-_stems_,
and they are declined almost like nouns with ÇiÈ-stems.

Ç252.È Adjectives learned thus far have had a different form in the
nominative for each gender, as, ÇbonusÈ, m.; ÇbonaÈ, f.; ÇbonumÈ, n.
Such an adjective is called an _adjective of three endings_. Adjectives
of the third declension are of the following classes:

    I. Adjectives of three endings--
      a different form in the nominative for each gender.

   II. Adjectives of two endings--
      masculine and feminine nominative alike, the neuter different.

  III. Adjectives of one ending--
      masculine, feminine, and neuter nominative all alike.

Ç253.È Adjectives of the third declension in Ç-erÈ have three endings;
those in Ç-isÈ have two endings; the others have one ending.

CLASS I

Ç254.È Adjectives of Three Endings are declined as follows:

          ljcer, ‰cris, ‰creÈ, _keen, eager_
          STEM ljcri-È
          BASE ljcr-È

          SINGULAR               PLURAL
          MASC.  FEM.   NEUT.    MASC.       FEM.        NEUT.
  _Nom._  ‰cer   ‰cris  ‰cre     ‰cr�s       ‰cr�s       ‰cria
  _Gen._  ‰cris  ‰cris  ‰cris    ‰crium      ‰crium      ‰crium
  _Dat._  ‰cr”   ‰cr”   ‰cr”     ‰cribus     ‰cribus     ‰cribus
  _Acc._  ‰crem  ‰crem  ‰cre     ‰cr”s, -�s  ‰cr”s, -�s  ‰cria
  _Abl._  ‰cr”   ‰cr”   ‰cr”     ‰cribus     ‰cribus     ‰cribus


CLASS II

Ç255.È Adjectives of Two Endings are declined as follows:

          Çomnis, omneÈ, _every, all_[1]
          STEM Çomni-È
          BASE Çomn-È

          SINGULAR                 PLURAL
          MASC. AND FEM.  NEUT.    MASC. AND FEM.  NEUT.
  _Nom._  omnis           omne     omn�s           omnia
  _Gen._  omnis           omnis    omnium          omnium
  _Dat._  omn”            omn”     omnibus         omnibus
  _Acc._  omnem           omne     omn”s, -�s      omnia
  _Abl._  omn”            omn”     omnibus         omnibus

    [Footnote 1: ÇomnisÈ is usually translated _every_ in the singular
    and _all_ in the plural.]

CLASS III

Ç256.È Adjectives of One Ending are declined as follows:

         Çp‰rÈ, _equal_
          STEM Çpari-È
          BASE Çpar-È

          SINGULAR                 PLURAL
          MASC. AND FEM.  NEUT.    MASC. AND FEM.  NEUT.
  _Nom._  p‰r             p‰r      par�s           paria
  _Gen._  paris           paris    parium          parium
  _Dat._  par”            par”     paribus         paribus
  _Acc._  parem           p‰r      par”s, -�s      paria
  _Abl._  par”            par”     paribus         paribus

  1. All ÇiÈ-stem adjectives have Ç-”È in the ablative singular.

  2. Observe that the several cases of adjectives of one ending have the
  same form for all genders excepting in the accusative singular and in
  the nominative and accusative plural.

  3. Decline Çvir ‰cerÈ, Çlegi™ ‰crisÈ, Çanimal ‰creÈ, Çager omnisÈ,
  Çscžtum omneÈ, Çproelium p‰rÈ.

Ç257.È There are a few adjectives of one ending that have consonant
stems. They are declined exactly like nouns with consonant stems.

Ç258.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 293.

I. _The Romans invade the EnemyÕs Country._ ïlim pedit�s R™m‰n” cum
equitibus v�l™cibus in hostium urbem iter faci�bant. Ubi n™n long�
‰fu�runt, rapu�runt agricolam, qu” e”s viam brevem et facilem
d�m™nstr‰vit. Iam R™m‰n” moenia alta, turr”s valid‰s aliaque opera urbis
vid�re poterant. In moenibus st‰bant mult” pr”ncip�s. Pr”ncip�s ubi
v”d�runt R™m‰n™s, iuss�runt c”v”s lapid�s aliaque t�la d� mžr”s iacere.
Tum m”lit�s fort�s contin�r” ‰ proeli™ n™n poterant et ‰cer imper‰tor
signum tub‰ dar” iussit. Summ‰ v” omn�s m‰tžr‰v�runt. Imper‰tor Sext™
l�g‰t™ imped”menta omnia mand‰vit. Sextus imped”menta in summ™ colle
conloc‰vit. Grave et ‰cre erat proelium, sed host�s n™n par�s R™m‰n”s
erant. Ali” interfect”, ali” capt” sunt. Apud capt”v™s erant m‰ter
sororque r�gis. Pauc” R™m‰n™rum ab hostibus vulner‰t” sunt. Secundum
proelium R™m‰n”s erat gr‰tum. Fortžna fortibus semper favet.

II. 1. Some months are short, others are long. 2. To seize the top of
the mountain was difficult. 3. Among the hills of Italy are many
beautiful springs. 4. The soldiers were sitting where the baggage had
been placed because their feet were weary. 5. The city which the
soldiers were eager to storm had been fortified by strong walls and high
towers. 6. Did not the king intrust a heavy crown of gold and all his
money to a faithless slave? Yes, but the slave had never before been
faithless.

  [Illustration: AQUILA LEGIONIS]


LESSON XLVI

THE FOURTH OR _U_-DECLENSION

  [Special Vocabulary]

  Çadventus, -žsÈ, m., _approach, arrival_ (advent)
  ÇanteÈ, prep, with acc., _before_ (ante-date)
  Çcornž, -žsÈ, n., _horn, wing_ of an army (cornucopia);
    lj dextr™ cornžÈ, _on the right wing_;
    lj sinistr™ cornžÈ, _on the left wing_
  Çequit‰tus, -žsÈ, m., _cavalry_
  Çexercitus, -žsÈ, m., _army_
  Çimpetus, -žsÈ, m., _attack_ (impetus);
    Çimpetum facere inÈ, with acc., _to make an attack on_
  Çlacus, -žs, dat. and abl. plur. lacubusÈ, m., _lake_
  Çmanus, -žsÈ, f., _hand; band, force_ (manual)
  Çportus, -žsÈ, m., _harbor_ (port)
  ÇpostÈ, prep, with acc., _behind, after_ (post-mortem)

  Çcrem™, crem‰re, crem‰v”, crem‰tusÈ, _burn_ (cremate)
  Çexerce™, exerc�re, exercu”, exercitusÈ, _practice, drill, train_
    (exercise)

Ç259.È Nouns of the fourth declension are either masculine or neuter.

Ç260.È Masculine nouns end in Ç-usÈ, neuters in Ç-žÈ. The genitive ends
in Ç-žsÈ.

    _a._ Feminine by exception are ÇdomusÈ, _house_; ÇmanusÈ, _hand_;
    and a few others.

PARADIGMS

  [TranscriberÕs Note:
  The ÒStemsÓ are missing in the printed book. They have been supplied
  from the inflectional table in the Appendix.]

          ÇadventusÈ,     ÇcornžÈ,
          m., _arrival_   n., _horn_
   STEMS  Çadventu-È      Çcornu-È
   BASES  Çadvent-È       Çcorn-È

          SINGULAR                   TERMINATIONS
          MASC.           NEUT.
  _Nom._  adventus        cornž      -us      -ž
  _Gen._  adventžs        cornžs     -žs      -žs
  _Dat._  adventu” (ž)    cornž      -u” (ž)  -ž
  _Acc._  adventum        cornž      -um      -ž
  _Abl._  adventž         cornž      -ž       -ž

          PLURAL
  _Nom._  adventžs        cornua     -žs       -ua
  _Gen._  adventuum       cornuum    -uum      -uum
  _Dat._  adventibus      cornibus   -ibus     -ibus
  _Acc._  adventžs        cornua     -žs       -ua
  _Abl._  adventibus      cornibus   -ibus     -ibus

  1. Observe that the base is found, as in other declensions, by
  dropping the ending of the genitive singular.

  2. ÇlacusÈ, _lake_, has the ending Ç-ubusÈ in the dative and ablative
  plural; ÇportusÈ, _harbor_, has either Ç-ubusÈ or Ç-ibusÈ.

  3. ÇcornžÈ is the only neuter that is in common use.

Ç261.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 293.

I. 1. Ante adventum Caesaris v�l™c�s hostium equit�s ‰crem impetum in
castra f�c�runt. 2. Contin�re exercitum ‰ proeli™ n™n facile erat.
3. Post adventum suum Caesar iussit legi™n�s ex castr”s džc”. 4. Pr™
castr”s cum hostium equit‰tž pugn‰tum est. 5. Post tempus breve
equit‰tus tr‰ns flžmen fžgit ubi castra hostium posita erant. 6. Tum
victor imper‰tor agr™s v‰st‰vit et v”c™s hostium crem‰vit. 7. Castra
autem n™n oppugn‰vit quia m”lit�s erant d�fess” et locus difficilis.
8. Host�s n™n cess‰v�runt iacere t�la, quae pauc”s nocu�runt. 9. Post
adversum proelium princip�s Gall™rum l�g‰t™s ad Caesarem mittere
stud�bant, sed popul™ persu‰d�re n™n poterant.

II. 1. Did you see the man-of-war on the lake? 2. I did not see it
(_fem_.) on the lake, but I saw it in the harbor. 3. Because of the
strong wind the sailor forbade his brother to sail. 4. C¾sar didn«t make
an attack on the cavalry on the right wing, did he? 5. No, he made an
attack on the left wing. 6. Who taught your swift horse to obey?
7. I trained my horse with my (own) hands, nor was the task difficult.
8. He is a beautiful animal and has great strength.


LESSON XLVII

EXPRESSIONS OF PLACE ¥ THE DECLENSION OF _DOMUS_

  [Special Vocabulary]

   Ath�nae, -‰rum, f., plur., _Athens_
   Corinthus, -”, f., _Corinth_
  Çdomus, -žsÈ, locative Çdom”È, f., _house, home_ (dome). Cf.
    ÇdomiciliumÈ
  ÇGen‰va, -aeÈ, f., _Geneva_
   Pomp�ii, -™rum, m., plur., _Pompeii_, a city in Campania. See map
  ÇpropterÈ, prep. with acc., _on account of, because of_
   ržs, ržris, in the plur. only nom. and acc. ÇržraÈ, n., _country_
    (rustic)
  Çtergum, terg”È, n., _back_; lj terg™È, _behind, in the rear_
  Çvulnus, vulnerisÈ, n., _wound_ (vulnerable)

  Çcommitt™, committere, comm”s”, commissusÈ, _intrust, commit;_
    Çproelium committereÈ, _join battle_
  Çconvoc™, convoc‰re, convoc‰v”, convoc‰tusÈ, _call together, summon_
    (convoke)
  Çtime™, tim�re, timu”, ----È, _fear; be afraid_ (timid)
  Çvert™, vertere, vert”, versusÈ, _turn, change_ (convert);
    Çterga vertereÈ, _to turn the backs_, hence _to retreat_

Ç262.È We have become thoroughly familiar with expressions like the
following:

  ÇGalba adÈ (or ÇinÈ) Çoppidum properatÈ
  ÇGalba abÈ (Çd�È or ÇexÈ) Çoppid™ properatÈ
  ÇGalba in oppid™ habitatÈ

From these expressions we may deduce the following rules:

Ç263.È RULE. ÇAccusative of the Place to.È _The Çplace to whichÈ is
expressed by ÇadÈ or ÇinÈ with the accusative. This answers the question
Whither?_

Ç264.È RULE. ÇAblative of the Place from.È _The Çplace from whichÈ is
expressed by Ç‰È or ÇabÈ, Çd�È, Ç�È or ÇexÈ, with the separative
ablative. This answers the question Whence?_ (Cf. Rule, ¤179.)

Ç265.È RULE. ÇAblative of the Place at or in.È _The Çplace at or in
whichÈ is expressed by the ablative with ÇinÈ. This answers the question
Where?_

    _a._ The ablative denoting the _place where_ is called the _locative
    ablative_ (cf. ÇlocusÈ, _place_).

Ç266.È ÇExceptions.È Names of towns, small islands,[1] ÇdomusÈ, _home_,
ÇržsÈ, _country_, and a few other words in common use omit the
prepositions in expressions of place, as,

  ÇGalba Ath�n‰s properatÈ, _Galba hastens to Athens_
  ÇGalba Ath�n”s properatÈ, _Galba hastens from Athens_
  ÇGalba Ath�n”s habitatÈ, _Galba lives at_ (or _in_) _Athens_
  ÇGalba domum properatÈ, _Galba hastens home_
  ÇGalba ržs properatÈ, _Galba hastens to the country_
  ÇGalba dom™ properatÈ, _Galba hastens from home_
  ÇGalba ržre properatÈ, _Galba hastens from the country_
  ÇGalba ržr”È (less commonly ÇržreÈ) ÇhabitatÈ,
    _Galba lives in the country_

    _a._ Names of _countries_, like ÇGerm‰niaÈ, ÇItaliaÈ, etc., do not
    come under these exceptions. _With them prepositions must not be
    omitted._

    [Footnote 1: Small islands are classed with towns because they
    generally have but one town, and the name of the town is the same as
    the name of the island.]

Ç267.È ÇThe Locative Case.È We saw above that the place-relation
expressed by _at_ or _in_ is regularly covered by the locative ablative.
However, Latin originally expressed this relation by a separate form
known as the _locative case_. This case has been everywhere merged in
the ablative excepting in the singular number of the first and second
declensions. The form of the locative in these declensions is like the
genitive singular, and its use is limited to names of towns and small
islands, Çdom”È, _at home_, and a few other words.

Ç268.È RULE. ÇLocative and Locative Ablative.È _To express the Çplace in
whichÈ with names of towns and small islands, Çif they are singular and
of the first or second declensionÈ, use the locative; otherwise use the
locative ablative without a preposition; as_,

  ÇGalba R™mae habitatÈ, _Galba lives at Rome_
  ÇGalba Corinth” habitatÈ, _Galba lives at Corinth_
  ÇGalba dom” habitatÈ, _Galba lives at home_

Here ÇR™maeÈ, ÇCorinth”È, and Çdom”È are _locatives_, being _singular_
and of the first and second declensions respectively. But in

  ÇGalba Ath�n”s habitatÈ, _Galba lives at Athens_,
  ÇGalba Pomp�i”s habitatÈ, _Galba lives at Pompeii_

ÇAth�n”sÈ and ÇPomp�i”sÈ are locative ablatives. These words can have no
locative case, as the nominatives ÇAth�naeÈ and ÇPomp�i”È are_plural_
and there is no plural locative case form.

Ç269.È The word ÇdomusÈ, _home, house_, has forms of both the second and
the fourth declension. Learn its declension (¤468).

Ç270.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 293.

I. 1. Corinth” omnia ”nsignia aur” ‰ ducibus vict™ribus rapta erant.
2. Caesar Gen‰vam exercitum magn”s itineribus džxit. 3. Quem pontem
host�s crem‰verant? Pontem in Rh�n™ host�s crem‰verant. 4. Pomp�i”s
mult‰s R™m‰n™rum dom™s vid�re poteritis. 5. R™m‰ c™nsul equ™ v�l™c”
ržs proper‰vit. 6. Dom” c™nsulis homin�s mult” sed�bant. 7. Imper‰tor
iusserat l�g‰tum Ath�n‰s cum mult”s n‰vibus long”s n‰vig‰re. 8. Ante
moenia urbis sunt ™rdin�s arborum alt‰rum. 9. Propter arbor�s alt‰s nec
lacum nec portum reper”re potuimus. 10. Proeli”s cr�br”s Caesar legi™n�s
su‰s quae erant in Galli‰ exerc�bat. 11. Cot”di� in loc™ idone™ castra
p™n�bat et mžni�bat.

II. 1. C¾sar, the famous general, when he had departed from Rome,
hastened to the Roman province on a swift horse.[2] 2. He had heard a
rumor concerning the allies at Geneva. 3. After his arrival C¾sar called
the soldiers together and commanded them to join battle. 4. The enemy
hastened to retreat, some because[3] they were afraid, others because[3]
of wounds. 5. Recently I was at Athens and saw the place where the
judges used to sit.[4] 6. Marcus and Sextus are my brothers; the one
lives at Rome, the other in the country.

    [Footnote 2: Latin says Òby a swift horse.Ó What construction?]

    [Footnote 3: Distinguish between the English conjunction _because_
    (ÇquiaÈ or ÇquodÈ) and the preposition _because of_ (ÇpropterÈ).]

    [Footnote 4: _used to sit_, express by the imperfect.]

  [Illustration: DAEDALUS ET ICARUS]

Ç271.È DAED«ALUS AND IC«ARUS

Cr�ta est ”nsula ant”qua quae aqu‰ alt‰ magn” maris puls‰tur. Ibi ™lim
M”n™s erat r�x. Ad eum v�nit Daedalus qu” ex Graeci‰ patri‰ fugi�bat.
Eum M”n™s r�x benign”s verb”s acc�pit et e” domicilium in Cr�t‰ dedit.
[5]Qu™ in loc™ Daedalus sine cžr‰ v”vebat et r�g” multa et cl‰ra opera
faci�bat. Post tempus longum autem Daedalus patriam c‰ram d�s”der‰re
inc�pit. Domum proper‰re stud�bat, sed r�g” persu‰d�re n™n potuit et
mare saevum fugam vet‰bat.

    [Footnote 5: _And in this place_; Çqu™È does not here introduce a
    subordinate relative clause, but establishes the connection with the
    preceding sentence. Such a relative is called a _connecting
    relative_, and is translated by _and_ and a demonstrative or
    personal pronoun.]


LESSON XLVIII

THE FIFTH OR æ-DECLENSION ¥ THE ABLATIVE OF TIME

  [Special Vocabulary]

  Çaci�s, -�”È, f., _line of battle_
  Çaest‰s, aest‰tisÈ, f., _summer_
  Çannus, -”È, m., _year_ (annual)
  Çdi�s, di�”È, m., _day_ (diary)
  Çfid�s, fide”È, no plur., f., _faith, trust; promise, word;
     protection_; Çin fidem ven”reÈ, _to come under the protection_
  Çfluctus, -žsÈ, m. _wave, billow_ (fluctuate)
  Çhiems, hiemisÈ, f., _winter_
  Çh™ra, -aeÈ, f., _hour_
  Çlžx, lžcisÈ, f., _light_ (lucid); Çpr”ma luxÈ, _daybreak_
  Çmer”di�sÈ, acc. -em, abl. -�, no plur., m., _midday_ (meridian)
  Çnox, noctis (-ium)È, f., _night_ (nocturnal)
  Çpr”mus, -a, -umÈ, _first_ (prime)
  Çr�s, re”È, f., _thing, matter_ (real);
  Çr�s gestaeÈ, _deeds, exploits_ (lit. _things performed_);
    Çr�s adversaeÈ, _adversity_; Çr�s secundaeÈ, _prosperity_
  Çsp�s, spe”È, f., _hope_

Ç272.È ÇGender.È Nouns of the fifth declension are feminine except
Çdi�sÈ, _day_, and Çmer”di�sÈ, _midday_, which are usually masculine.

Ç273.È PARADIGMS

  [TranscriberÕs Note:
  The ÒStemsÓ are missing in the printed book. They have been supplied
  from the inflectional table in the Appendix.]

          Çdi�sÈ,     Çr�sÈ, f.,
          m., _day_   _thing_
  STEMS   Çdi�-È      Çr�-È
  BASES   Çdi-È       Çr-È

          SINGULAR          TERMINATIONS
  _Nom._  di�s        r�s      -�s
  _Gen._  di�”        re”      -�” _or_ -e”
  _Dat._  di�”        re”      -�” _or_ -e”
  _Acc._  diem        rem      -em
  _Abl._  di�         r�       -�

          PLURAL
  _Nom._  di�s        r�s      -�s
  _Gen._  di�rum      r�rum    -�rum
  _Dat._  di�bus      r�bus    -�bus
  _Acc._  di�s        r�s      -�s
  _Abl._  di�bus      r�bus    -�bus

  1. The vowel ÇeÈ which appears in every form is regularly long. It is
  shortened in the ending Ç-e”È after a consonant, as in Çr-e”È; and
  before Ç-mÈ in the accusative singular, as in Çdi-emÈ. (Cf. ¤12.2.)

  2. Only Çdi�sÈ and Çr�sÈ are complete in the plural. Most other nouns
  of this declension lack the plural. ÇAci�sÈ, _line of battle_, and
  Çsp�sÈ, _hope_, have the nominative and accusative plural.

Ç274.È The ablative relation (¤50) which is expressed by the
prepositions _at, in_, or _on_ may refer not only to place, but also to
time, as _at noon, in summer, on the first day_. The ablative which is
used to express this relation is called the _ablative of time_.

Ç275.È RULE. ÇThe Ablative of Time.È _The time ÇwhenÈ or Çwithin whichÈ
anything happens is expressed by the ablative without a preposition._

    _a._ Occasionally the preposition Ç_in_È is found. Compare the
    English _Next day we started_ and _ÇOnÈ the next day we started_.

Ç276.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 294.

I. _Galba the Farmer._ Galba agricola ržr” v”vit. Cot”di� pr”m‰ lžce
lab™r‰re incipit, nec ante noctem in studi™ su™ cessat. Mer”di� Ižlia
f”lia eum ad c�nam vocat. Nocte ped�s d�fess™s domum vertit. Aest‰te
f”li” agricolae auxilium patr” dant. Hieme agricola e™s in lždum mittit.
Ibi magister pueris mult‰s f‰bul‰s d� r�bus gest”s Caesaris n‰rrat.
Aest‰te f”li” agricolae perpetu”s lab™ribus exercentur nec grave agr”
opus est i”s molestum. Galba sine žll‰ cžr‰ vivit nec r�s advers‰s
timet.

II. 1. In that month there were many battles in Gaul. 2. The cavalry of
the enemy made an attack upon C¾sarÕs line of battle. 3. In the first
hour of the night the ship was overcome by the billows. 4. On the second
day the savages were eager to come under C¾sarÕs protection. 5. The king
had joined battle, moved by the hope of victory. 6. That year a fire
destroyed many birds and other animals. 7. We saw blood on the wild
beastÕs teeth.

Ç277.È DAED«ALUS AND IC«ARUS (_Continued_)

Tum Daedalus gravibus cžr”s comm™tus f”li™ su™ ëcar™ ita dixit: ÒAnimus
meus, ëcare, est pl�nus tr”stitiae nec ocul” lacrim”s egent. Disc�dere
ex Cr�t‰, Ath�n‰s proper‰re, maxim� stude™; sed r�x recžsat aud”re verba
mea et omnem reditžs spem �ripit. Sed numquam r�bus advers”s vincar.
Terra et mare sunt inim”ca, sed aliam fugae viam reperiam.Ó Tum in art”s
ign™t‰s animum d”mittit et m”rum capit c™nsilium. Nam penn‰s in ™rdine
p™nit et v�r‰s ‰l‰s facit.


LESSON XLIX

PRONOUNS CLASSIFIED ¥ PERSONAL AND REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS

  [Special Vocabulary]

  Çam”citia, -aeÈ, f., _friendship_  (amicable)
  ÇitaqueÈ, conj., _and so, therefore, accordingly_
  Çlittera, -aeÈ, f., _a letter_ of the alphabet;
    plur., _a letter, an epistle_
  Çmetus, metžsÈ, m., _fear_
  Çnihil, indeclinableÈ, n., _nothing_ (nihilist)
  Çnžntius, nžnt”È, m., _messenger_. Cf. Çnžnti™È
  Çp‰x, p‰cisÈ, f., _peace_ (pacify)
  Çr�gnum, -”È, n., _reign, sovereignty, kingdom_
  Çsupplicum, suppli«c”È, n., _punishment_;
    Çsupplicum sžmere d�È, with abl., _inflict punishment on_;
    Çsupplicum dareÈ, _suffer punishment_. Cf. ÇpoenaÈ

  Çplace™, plac�re, placu”, placitusÈ, _be pleasing to, please_,
     with dative. Cf. ¤154
  Çsžm™, sžmere, sžmps”, sžmptusÈ, _take up, assume_
  Çsustine™, sustin�re, sustinu”, sustentusÈ, _sustain_

Ç278.È We have the same kinds of pronouns in Latin as in English. They
are divided into the following eight classes:

  1. ÇPersonal pronounsÈ, which show the person speaking, spoken to, or
  spoken of; as, ÇegoÈ, _I_; ÇtžÈ, _you_; ÇisÈ, _he_. (Cf. ¤279. etc.)

  2. ÇPossessive pronounsÈ, which denote possession; as, ÇmeusÈ, ÇtuusÈ,
  ÇsuusÈ, etc. (Cf. ¤98.)

  3. ÇReflexive pronounsÈ, used in the predicate to refer back to the
  subject; as, _he saw himself_. (Cf. ¤281.)

  4. ÇIntensive pronounsÈ, used to emphasize a noun or pronoun; as, _I
  myself saw it_. (Cf. ¤285.)

  5. ÇDemonstrative pronounsÈ, which point out persons or things; as,
  ÇisÈ, _this, that_. (Cf. ¤112.)

  6. ÇRelative pronounsÈ, which connect a subordinate adjective clause
  with an antecedent; as, Çqu”È, _who_. (Cf. ¤220.)

  7. ÇInterrogative pronounsÈ, which ask a question; as, ÇquisÈ, _who?_
  (Cf. ¤225.)

  8. ÇIndefinite pronounsÈ, which point out indefinitely; as, _some one,
  any one, some, certain ones_, etc. (Cf. ¤296.)

Ç279.È The demonstrative pronoun ÇisÈ, ÇeaÈ, ÇidÈ, as we learned in
¤115, is regularly used as the personal pronoun of the third person
(_he_, _she_, _it_, _they_, etc.).

Ç280.È The personal pronouns of the first person are ÇegoÈ, _I_; Çn™sÈ,
_we_; of the second person, ÇtžÈ, _thou_ or _you_; Çv™sÈ, _ye_ or _you_.
They are declined as follows:

         SINGULAR
         FIRST PERSON                  SECOND PERSON
  _Nom._ ego, _I_                      tž, _you_
  _Gen._ me”, _of me_                  tu”, _of you_
  _Dat._ mihi, _to_ or _for me_        tibi, _to_ or _for you_
  _Acc._ m�, _me_                      t�, _you_
  _Abl._ m�, _with, from_, etc., _me_  t�, _with, from_, etc., _you_

         PLURAL
  _Nom._ n™s, _we_                     v™s, _you_
  _Gen._ nostrum or nostr”, _of us_    vestrum or vestr”, _of you_
  _Dat._ n™b”s, _to_ or _for us_       v™b”s, _to_ or _for you_
  _Acc._ n™s, _us_                     v™s, _you_
  _Abl._ n™b”s, _with, from_,          v™b”s, _with, from_, etc., _you_
           etc., _us_

  1. The personal pronouns are not used in the nominative excepting for
  emphasis or contrast.

Ç281.È ÇThe Reflexive Pronouns.È 1. The personal pronouns ÇegoÈ and ÇtžÈ
may be used in the predicate as reflexives; as,

     Çvide™ m�È, _I see myself_
       Çvid�mus n™sÈ, _we see ourselves_
     Çvid�s t�È, _you see yourself_
       Çvid�tis v™sÈ, _you see yourselves_

  2. The reflexive pronoun of the third person (_himself, herself,
  itself, themselves_) has a special form, used only in these senses,
  and declined alike in the singular and plural.

SINGULAR AND PLURAL
    _Gen._   su”              _Acc._   s�
    _Dat._   sibi                _Abl._   s�

  EXAMPLES
    ÇPuer s� videtÈ, _the boy sees himself_
    ÇPuella s� videtÈ, _the girl sees herself_
    ÇAnimal s� videtÈ, _the animal sees itself_
    ÇI” s� videntÈ, _they see themselves_

    _a._ The form Çs�È is sometimes doubled, Çs�s�È, for emphasis.

  3. Give the Latin for

    _I teach myself_        _We teach ourselves_
    _You teach yourself_    _You teach yourselves_
    _He teaches himself_    _They teach themselves_

Ç282.È The preposition ÇcumÈ, when used with the ablative of ÇegoÈ,
ÇtžÈ, or Çsu”È, is appended to the form, as, Çm�cumÈ, _with me_;
Çt�cumÈ, _with you_; Çn™b”scumÈ, _with us_; etc.

Ç283.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 294.

I. 1. Mea m‰ter est c‰ra mihi et tua m‰ter est c‰ra tibi. 2. Vestrae
litterae erant gr‰tae n™bis et nostrae litterae erant gr‰tae v™b”s.
3. Nžntius r�gis qu” n™b”scum est nihil respond�bit. 4. Nžnti” p‰cem
am”citiamque sibi et su”s soci”s postul‰v�runt. 5. S” tž arma sžm�s,
ego r�gnum occup‰b™. 6. Uter vestrum est c”vis R™m‰nus? Neuter nostrum.
7. E™ tempore mult” supplicium ded�runt quia r�gnum petierant. 8. Sžme
supplicium, Caesar, d� hostibus patriae ‰cribus. 9. Pr”m‰ lžce ali”
metž comm™t” s�s� fugae mand‰v�runt; ali” autem magn‰ virtžte impetum
exercitžs nostr” sustinu�runt. 10. Soror r�gis, ubi d� advers™ proeli™
aud”vit, s�s� Pomp�i”s interf�cit.

II. 1. Whom do you teach? I teach myself. 2. The soldier wounded himself
with his sword. 3. The master praises us, but you he does not praise.
4. Therefore he will inflict punishment on you, but we shall not suffer
punishment. 5. Who will march (i.e. make a march) with me to Rome?
6. I will march with you to the gates of the city. 7. Who will show
us[1] the way? The gods will show you[1] the way.

    [Footnote 1: Not accusative.]

DAED«ALUS AND IC«ARUS (_Concluded_)

Ç284.È Puer ëcarus žn‰[2] st‰bat et m”rum patris opus vid�bat. Postquam
manus ultima[3] ‰l”s imposita est, Daedalus e‰s tempt‰vit et similis av”
in aur‰s vol‰vit. Tum ‰l‰s umer”s f”l” adlig‰vit et docuit eum vol‰re
et d”xit, ÒT� vet™, m” f”l”, adpropinqu‰re aut s™l” aut mar”. S”
fluctibus adpropinqu‰veris,[4] aqua ‰l”s tu”s noc�bit, et s” s™l”
adpropinqu‰veris,[4] ignis e‰s crem‰bit.Ó Tum pater et filius iter
difficile incipiunt. ål‰s movent et aurae s�s� committunt. Sed stultus
puer verb”s patris n™n p‰ret. S™l” adpropinquat. ålae cremantur et
ëcarus in mare d�cidit et vitam ‰mittit. Daedalus autem sine žll™
per”cul™ tr‰ns fluctžs ad ”nsulam Siciliam vol‰vit.

    [Footnote 2: Adverb, see vocabulary.]

    [Footnote 3: Çmanus ultimaÈ, _the finishing touch_. What literally?]

    [Footnote 4: Future perfect. Translate by the present.]


LESSON L

THE INTENSIVE PRONOUN _IPSE_ AND THE DEMONSTRATIVE _ëDEM_

  [Special Vocabulary]

  Çcorpus, corporisÈ, n., _body_ (corporal)
  Çd�nsus, -a, -umÈ, _dense_
  Ç”dem, e«adem, idemÈ, demonstrative pronoun, _the same_ (identity)
  Çipse, ipsa, ipsumÈ, intensive pronoun, _self; even, very_
  Çm”rus, -a, -umÈ, _wonderful, marvelous_ (miracle)
  Ç™limÈ, adv., _formerly, once upon a time_
  Çpars, partis (-ium)È, f., _part, region, direction_
  ÇquoqueÈ, adv., _also_. Stands _after_ the word which it emphasizes
  Çs™l, s™lisÈ, m., _sun_ (solar)
  Çv�rus, -a, -umÈ, _true, real_ (verity)

  Çd�be™, d�b�re, d�bu”, d�bitusÈ, _owe, ought_ (debt)
  Ç�ripi™, �ripere, �ripu”, �reptusÈ, _snatch from_

Ç285.È ÇIpseÈ means _-self_ (_him-self, her-self_, etc.) or is
translated by _even_ or _very_. It is used to emphasize a noun or
pronoun, expressed or understood, with which it agrees like an
adjective.

    _a._ ÇIpseÈ must be carefully distinguished from the reflexive
    Çsu”È. The latter is always used as a pronoun, while ÇipseÈ is
    regularly adjective. Compare

      ÇHom™ s� videtÈ, _the man sees himself_ (reflexive)
      ÇHom™ ipse per”culum videtÈ,
        _the man himself_ (intensive) _sees the danger_
      ÇHom™ ipsum per”culum videtÈ,
        _the man sees the danger itself_ (intensive)

Ç286.È Except for the one form ÇipseÈ, the intensive pronoun is declined
exactly like the nine irregular adjectives (cf. ¤¤108, 109). Learn the
declension (¤481).

Ç287.È The demonstrative Ç”demÈ, meaning _the same_, is a compound of
ÇisÈ. It is declined as follows:

          SINGULAR
          MASC.       FEM.        NEUT.
  _Nom._  ”dem        e«adem      idem
  _Gen._  eius«dem    eius«dem    eius«dem
  _Dat._  e”«dem      e”«dem      e”«dem
  _Acc._  eun«dem     ean«dem     idem
  _Abl._  e™«dem      e‰«dem      e™«dem

          PLURAL
  _Nom._  i”«dem      eae«dem     e«adem
            e”«dem
  _Gen._  e™run«dem   e‰run«dem   e™run«dem
  _Dat._  i”s«dem     i”s«dem     i”s«dem
            e”s«dem     e”s«dem     e”s«dem
  _Acc._  e™s«dem     e‰s«dem     e«adem
  _Abl._  i”s«dem     i”s«dem     i”s«dem
            e”s«dem     e”s«dem     e”s«dem

    _a._ From forms like ÇeundemÈ (eum + -dem), Çe™rundemÈ (e™rum
    + -dem), we learn the rule that ÇmÈ before ÇdÈ is changed to ÇnÈ.

    _b._ The forms Çi”demÈ, Çi”sdemÈ are often spelled and pronounced
    with one Ç”È.

Ç288.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 295.

I. 1. Ego et tž[1] in e‰dem urbe v”vimus. 2. Iter ipsum n™n tim�mus sed
fer‰s saev‰s quae in silv‰ d�ns‰ esse d”cuntur. 3. ïlim n™s ips” idem
iter f�cimus. 4. E™ tempore mult‰s fer‰s v”dimus. 5. Sed n™b”s n™n
nocu�runt. 6. Caesar ipse scžtum d� manibus m”litis �ripuit et in ipsam
aciem proper‰vit. 7. Itaque m”lit�s summ‰ virtžte t�la in hostium
corpora i�c�runt. 8. R™m‰n” quoque gravia vulnera acc�p�runt. 9. D�nique
host�s terga vert�runt et omm”s in part”s[2] fžg�runt. 10. E‰dem h™r‰
litterae R™mam ab imper‰t™re ips™ missae sunt. 11. E™dem m�nse capt”v”
quoque in Italiam miss” sunt. 12. Sed mult” propter vulnera iter
difficile tr‰ns mont”s facere recžs‰bant et Gen‰vae esse d”c�bantur.

II. 1. At Pompeii there is a wonderful mountain. 2. When I was in that
place, I myself saw that mountain. 3. On the same day many cities were
destroyed by fire and stones from that very mountain. 4. You have not
heard the true story of that calamity, have you?[3] 5. On that day the
very sun could not give light to men. 6. You yourself ought to tell (to)
us that story.

    [Footnote 1: Observe that in Latin we say _I and you_, not _you
    and I_.]

    [Footnote 2: Not _parts_, but _directions_.]

    [Footnote 3: Cf. ¤210.]

Ç289.È HOW HORATIUS HELD THE BRIDGE[4]

Tarquinius Superbus, septimus et ultimus r�x R™m‰n™rum, ubi in exsilium
ab ”r‰t”s R™m‰n”s �iectus est, ‰ Porsen‰, r�ge Etržsc™rum, auxilium
petiit. Mox Porsena magn”s cum c™pi”s R™mam v�nit, et ipsa urbs summ™ in
per”cul™ erat. Omnibus in partibus exercitus R™m‰nus victus erat. Iam
r�x montem I‰niculum[5] occup‰verat. Numquam ante‰ R™m‰n” tant™ metž
ten�bantur. Ex agr”s in urbem properab‰nt et summ™ studi™ urbem ipsam
mžni�bant.

    [Footnote 4: The story of Horatius has been made familiar by
    MacaulayÕs well-known poem ÒHoratiusÓ in his _Lays of Ancient Rome_.
    Read the poem in connection with this selection.]

    [Footnote 5: The Janiculum is a high hill across the Tiber from
    Rome.]


LESSON LI

THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS _HIC_, _ISTE_, _ILLE_

  [Special Vocabulary]

  Çhic, haec, hocÈ, demonstrative pronoun, _this_ (of mine);
    _he, she, it_
  Çille, illa, illudÈ, demonstrative pronoun _that_ (yonder);
    _he, she, it_
  Çinv”sus, -a, -umÈ, _hateful, detested_, with dative Cf. ¤143
  Çiste, ista, istudÈ, demonstrative pronoun, _that_ (of yours);
    _he, she, it_
  Çl”bert‰s, -‰tisÈ, f., _liberty_
  Çmodus, -”È, m., _measure; manner, way, mode_
  Çn™men, n™minisÈ, n., _name_ (nominate)
  Çoculus, -”È, m., _eye_ (oculist)
  Çpr”stinus, -a, -umÈ, _former, old-time_ (pristine)
  Çpžblicus, -a, -umÈ, _public, belonging to the state;_
    Çr�s pžblica, re” pžblicaeÈ, f., _the commonwealth, the state,
     the republic_
  Çvest”gium, vest”«g”È, n., _footprint, track; trace, vestige_
  Çv™x, v™cisÈ, f., _voice_

Ç290.È We have already learned the declension of the demonstrative
pronoun ÇisÈ and its use. (Cf. Lesson XVII.) That pronoun refers to
persons or things either far or near, and makes no definite reference to
place or time. If we wish to point out an object definitely in place or
time, we must use ÇhicÈ, ÇisteÈ, or ÇilleÈ. These demonstratives, like
ÇisÈ, are used both as pronouns and as adjectives, and their relation to
the speaker may be represented graphically thus:

             ÇhicÈ          ÇisteÈ        ÇilleÈ
  SPEAKER ------------->-------------->--------------->
          _this_, _he_;  _that_, _he_;  _that_, _he_
            (near);       (remote);     (more remote)

    _a._ In dialogue ÇhicÈ refers to a person or thing near the speaker;
    ÇisteÈ, to a person or thing near the person addressed; ÇilleÈ, to a
    person or thing remote from both. These distinctions are illustrated
    in the model sentences, ¤293, which should be carefully studied and
    imitated.

Ç291.È ÇHicÈ is declined as follows:

           SINGULAR
           MASC.   FEM.    NEUT.
  _Nom._   hic     haec    hoc
  _Gen._   huius   huius   huius
  _Dat._   huic    huic    huic
  _Acc._   hunc    hanc    hoc
  _Abl._   h™c     h‰c     h™c

           PLURAL
  _Nom._   h”      hae     haec
  _Gen._   h™rum   h‰rum   h™rum
  _Dat._   h”s     h”s     h”s
  _Acc._   h™s     h‰s     haec
  _Abl._   h”s     h”s     h”s

    _a._ ÇHuiusÈ is pronounced _h[oo]«y[oo]s_, and ÇhuicÈ is pronounced
    _h[oo]ic_ (one syllable).

Ç292.È The demonstrative pronouns ÇisteÈ, ÇistaÈ, ÇistudÈ, and ÇilleÈ,
ÇillaÈ, ÇilludÈ, except for the nominative and accusative singular
neuter forms ÇistudÈ and ÇilludÈ, are declined exactly like ÇipseÈ,
ÇipsaÈ, ÇipsumÈ. (See ¤481.)

Ç293.È ÇMODEL SENTENCESÈ

  _Is this horse_ (of mine) _strong?_
    ÇEstne hic equus val”dus?È

  _That horse_ (of yours) _is strong, but that one_ (yonder) _is weak_
    ÇIste equus est validus, sed ille est ”nf”rmusÈ

  _Are these_ (men by me) _your friends?_
    ÇSuntne h” am”c” tu”?È

  _Those_ (men by you) _are my friends,
      but those_ (men yonder) _are enemies_
    ÇIst” sunt am”c” me”, sed ill” sunt inim”c”È

Ç294.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 295.

I. _A German Chieftain addresses his Followers._ Ille fortis Germ‰n™rum
dux su™s convoc‰vit et h™c mod™ anim™s e™rum c™nfirm‰vit. ÒV™s, qu” in
h”s f”nibus v”vitis, in hunc locum convoc‰v”[1] quia m�cum d�b�tis ist™s
agr™s et ist‰s dom™s ab inižri”s R™m‰n™rum liber‰re. Hoc n™b”s n™n
difficile erit, quod ill” host�s h‰s silv‰s d�ns‰s, fer‰s saev‰s qu‰rum
vest”gia vident, mont�s alt™s timent. S” fort�s erimus, de” ips” n™b”s
viam salžtis d�monstr‰bunt. Ille s™l, ist” ocul” calam”t‰t�s nostr‰s
v”d�runt.[1] Itaque n™men ill”us re” pžblicae R™m‰nae n™n s™lum n™bis,
sed etiam omnibus hominibus qu” l”bert‰tem amant, est inv”sum. Ad arma
v™s voc™. Exerc�te istam pr”stinam virtžtem et vinc�tis.Ó

    [Footnote 1: The perfect definite. (Cf. ¤190.)]

II. 1. Does that bird (of yours)[2] sing? 2. This bird (of mine)[2]
sings both[3] in summer and in winter and has a beautiful voice.
3. Those birds (yonder)[2] in the country don«t sing in winter.
4. Snatch a spear from the hands of that soldier (near you)[2] and come
home with me. 5. With those very eyes (of yours)[2] you will see the
tracks of the hateful enemy who burned my dwelling and made an attack on
my brother. 6. For (ÇpropterÈ) these deeds (Çr�sÈ) we ought to inflict
punishment on him without delay. 7. The enemies of the republic do not
always suffer punishment.

    [Footnote 2: English words in parentheses are not to be translated.
    They are inserted to show what demonstratives should be used.
    (Cf. ¤290.)]

    [Footnote 3: _both ... and_, Çet ... etÈ.]

  [Illustration: HORATIUS PONTEM DEFENDIT]

Ç295.È HOW HORATIUS HELD THE BRIDGE (_Continued_)

Altera urbis pars mžr”s, altera flžmine satis mžn”r” vid�b‰tur. Sed erat
p™ns in flžmine qu” hostibus iter paene dedit. Tum Hor‰tius Cocles,
fortis vir, magn‰ v™ce d”xit, ÒRescindite pontem, R™m‰n”! Brev” tempore
Porsena in urbem c™pi‰s su‰s tr‰džcet.Ó Iam host�s in ponte erant, sed
Hor‰tius cum du™bus (cf. ¤479) comitibus ad extr�mam pontis partem
proper‰vit, et hi s™li aciem hostium sustinu�runt. Tum v�r™ c”v�s R™m‰n”
pontem ‰ terg™ rescindere incipiunt, et host�s fržstr‰ Hor‰tium super‰re
temptant.


LESSON LII

THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS

  [Special Vocabulary]

  Çincolumis, -eÈ, _unharmed_
  Çn� ... quidemÈ, adv., _not even_. The emphatic word stands between
    Çn�È and ÇquidemÈ
  ÇnisiÈ, conj., _unless, if ... not_
  ÇpaeneÈ, adv., _almost_ (pen-insula)
  ÇsatisÈ, adv., _enough, sufficiently_ (satisfaction)
  Çtantus, -a, -umÈ, _so great_
  Çv�r™È, adv., _truly, indeed, in fact_. As a conj. _but, however_,
    usually stands second, never first.

  Çd�cid™, d�cidere, d�cid”, ----È, _fall down_ (deciduous)
  Çd�sili™, d�sil”re, d�silu”, d�sultusÈ, _leap down, dismount_
  Çmane™, man�re, m‰ns”, m‰nsžrusÈ, _remain_
  Çtr‰džc™, tr‰džcere, tr‰džx”, tr‰ductusÈ, _lead across_

Ç296.È The indefinite pronouns are used to refer to _some person_ or
_some thing_, without indicating which particular one is meant. The
pronouns ÇquisÈ and Çqu”È, which we have learned in their interrogative
and relative uses, may also be indefinite; and nearly all the other
indefinite pronouns are compounds of ÇquisÈ or Çqu”È and declined almost
like them. Review the declension of these words, ¤¤221, 227.

Ç297.È Learn the declension and meaning of the following indefinites:

  MASC.      FEM.             NEUT.
       ÇquisÈ                 ÇquidÈ, _some one, any one_ (substantive)
  Çqu”È      ÇquaÈ or ÇquaeÈ  ÇquodÈ, _some, any_ (adjective), ¤483
       ÇaliquisÈ              ÇaliquidÈ, _some one, any one_
                                (substantive), ¤487
  Çaliqu”È   ÇaliquaÈ         ÇaliquodÈ, _some, any_ (adjective), ¤487
  Çqu”damÈ   ÇquaedamÈ        ÇquoddamÈ, ÇquiddamÈ, _a certain,
                                 a certain one_, ¤485
       ÇquisquamÈ             ÇquicquamÈ or ÇquidquamÈ (no plural),
                                _any one_ (at all) (substantive), ¤486
       ÇquisqueÈ              ÇquidqueÈ, _each one, every one_
                                (substantive), ¤484
  ÇquisqueÈ  ÇquaequeÈ        ÇquodqueÈ, _each, every_ (adjective), ¤484

  [TranscriberÕs Note:
  In the original text, the combined forms (masculine/feminine) were
  printed in the ÒmasculineÓ column.]

NOTE. The meanings of the neuters, _something_, etc., are easily
inferred from the masculine and feminine.

    _a._ In the masculine and neuter singular of the indefinites,
    Çquis-Èforms and Çquid-Èforms are mostly used as substantives,
    Çqu”-Èforms and Çquod-Èforms as adjectives.

    _b._ The indefinites ÇquisÈ and Çqu”È never stand first in a clause,
    and are rare excepting after Çs”È, ÇnisiÈ, Çn�È, ÇnumÈ (as, Çs”
    quisÈ, _if any one_; Çs” quidÈ, _if anything_; Çnisi quisÈ, _unless
    some one_). Generally ÇaliquisÈ and Çaliqu”È are used instead.

    _c._ The forms ÇquaÈ and ÇaliquaÈ are both feminine nominative
    singular and neuter nominative plural of the indefinite adjectives
    Çqu”È and Çaliqu”È respectively. How do these differ from the
    corresponding forms of the relative Çqu”?È

    _d._ Observe that Çqu”damÈ (qu” + -dam) is declined like Çqu”È,
    except that in the accusative singular and genitive plural ÇmÈ of
    Çqu”È becomes ÇnÈ (cf. ¤287.a): ÇquendamÈ, ÇquandamÈ,
    Çqu™rundamÈ, Çqu‰rundam;È also that the neuter has ÇquiddamÈ
    (substantive) and ÇquoddamÈ (adjective) in the nominative and
    accusative singular. ÇQu”damÈ is the least indefinite of the
    indefinite pronouns, and implies that you could name the person or
    thing referred to if you cared to do so.

    _e._ ÇQuisquamÈ and ÇquisqueÈ (substantive) are declined like
    ÇquisÈ.

    _f._ ÇQuisquamÈ, _any one_ (ÇquicquamÈ or ÇquidquamÈ, _anything_),
    is always used substantively and chiefly in negative sentences. The
    corresponding adjective _any_ is Çžllus, -a, -umÈ (¤108).

Ç298.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 295.

I. 1. Aliquis d� ponte in flžmen d�cidit sed sine žll™ per”cul™ serv‰tus
est. 2. Est v�r™ in v”t‰ cuiusque hominis aliqua bona fortžna. 3. N�
m”litum quidem[1] quisquam in castr”s m‰nsit. 4. S” quem meae dom”
vid�s, iub� eum disc�dere. 5. S” quis pontem tenet, n� tantus quidem
exercitus capere urbem potest. 6. Urbs n™n satis mžn”ta erat et mer”di�
r�x qu”dam paene c™pi‰s su‰s tr‰ns pontem tr‰džxerat. 7. D�nique m”les
qu”dam arm‰tus in fluctžs d�siluit et incolumis ad alteram r”pam ocul™s
vertit. 8. Quisque ill” fort” m”lit” aliquid dare d�bet. 9. Tanta v�r™
virtžs R™m‰nus semper placuit. 10. ïlim Corinthus erat urbs satis magna
et paene par R™mae ips”; nunc v�r™ moenia d�cid�runt et pauca vest”gia
urbis ill”us reper”r” possunt. 11. Quisque l”bert‰tem amat, et aliquibus
v�r™ n™men r�gis est inv”sum.

II. 1. If you see a certain Cornelius at Corinth, send him to me.
2. Almost all the soldiers who fell down into the waves were unharmed.
3. Not even at Pompeii did I see so great a fire. 4. I myself was eager
to tell something to some one. 5. Each one was praising his own work.
6. Did you see some one in the country? I did not see any one. 7. Unless
some one will remain on the bridge with Horatius, the commonwealth will
be in the greatest danger.

    [Footnote 1: Observe that Çqu”damÈ and ÇquidemÈ are different
    words.]

Ç299.È HOW HORATIUS HELD THE BRIDGE (_Concluded_)

Mox, ubi parva pars pontis m‰nsit, Hor‰tius iussit comit�s disc�dere et
s™lus m”r‰ c™nstanti‰ impetum illius t™tius exercitžs sustin�bat.
D�nique magn™ frag™re p™ns in flžmen d�c”dit. Tum v�r™ Hor‰tius tergum
vertit et arm‰tus in aqu‰s d�siluit. In eum host�s multa t�la i�c�runt;
incolumis autem per fiuctžs ad alteram r”pam tr‰n‰vit. E” propter tant‰s
r�s gest‰s populus R™m‰nus n™n s™lum alia magna praemia dedit sed etiam
statuam Hor‰ti in loc™ pžblic™ posuit.

       *       *       *       *       *

  ÇSixth Review, Lessons XLV-LII, ¤¤521-523È

       *       *       *       *       *

LESSON LIII

REGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES

  [Special Vocabulary]

  Çaquila, -aeÈ, f., _eagle_ (aquiline)
  Çaud‰xÈ, gen. Çaud‰cisÈ, adj., _bold, audacious_
  Çceler, celeris, celereÈ, _swift, quick_ (celerity).  Cf. Çv�l™xÈ
  Çexpl™rat™r, -™risÈ, m., _scout, spy_ (explorer)
  Çing�nsÈ, gen. ÇingentisÈ, adj., _huge, vast_
  Çmedius, -a, -umÈ, _middle, middle part of_ (medium)
  Çm�ns, mentis (-ium)È, f., _mind_ (mental). Cf. ÇanimusÈ
  Çopportžnus, -a, -umÈ, _opportune_
  ÇquamÈ, adv., _than_. With the superlative ÇquamÈ gives the force of
    _as possible_, as ÇquamÈ aud‰cissim” vir”, _men as bold as possible_
  ÇrecensÈ, gen. ÇrecentisÈ, adj., _recent_
  ÇtamÈ, adv., _so_. Always with an adjective or adverb, while ÇitaÈ is
    generally used with a verb

  Çquaer™, quaerere, quaes”v”, quaes”tusÈ, _ask, inquire, seek_
    (question). Cf. Çpet™È

Ç300.È The quality denoted by an adjective may exist in either a higher
or a lower degree, and this is expressed by a form of inflection called
comparison. The mere presence of the quality is expressed by the
positive degree, its presence in a higher or lower degree by the
comparative, and in the highest or lowest of all by the superlative. In
English the usual way of comparing an adjective is by using the suffix
_-er_ for the comparative and _-est_ for the superlative; as, positive
_high_, comparative _higher_, superlative _highest_. Less frequently we
use the adverbs _more_ and _most_; as, positive _beautiful_, comparative
_more beautiful_, superlative _most beautiful._

In Latin, as in English, adjectives are compared by adding suffixes or
by using adverbs.

Ç301.È Adjectives are compared by using suffixes as follows:

  POSITIVE          COMPARATIVE          SUPERLATIVE
  cl‰rus, -a, -um   cl‰rior, cl‰r”us     cl‰rissimus, -a, -um
    (_bright_)        (_brighter_)         (_brightest_)
    (BASE cl‰r-)
  brevis, breve     brevior, brevius     brevissimus, -a, -um
    (_short_)         (_shorter_)          (_shortest_)
    (BASE brev-)
  v�l™x             v�l™cior, v�l™cius   v�l™cissimus, -a, -um
    (_swift_)         (_swifter_)          (_swiftest_)
    (BASE veloc-)

    _a._ The comparative is formed from the base of the positive by
    adding Ç-iorÈ masc. and fem., and Ç-iusÈ neut.; the superlative by
    adding Ç-issimus, -issima, -issimumÈ.

Ç302.È Less frequently adjectives are compared by using the adverbs
ÇmagisÈ, _more_; Çmaxim�È, _most_; as, Çid™neusÈ, _suitable_; Çmagis
id™neusÈ, _more suitable_; Çmaxim� id™neusÈ, _most suitable._

Ç303.È ÇDeclension of the Comparative.È Adjectives of the comparative
degree are declined as follows:

          SINGULAR                     PLURAL
          MASC. AND FEM.  NEUT.        MASC. AND FEM.  NEUT.
  _Nom._  cl‰rior         cl‰r”us      cl‰r”™r�s       cl‰ri™ra
  _Gen._  cl‰ri™ris       cl‰ri™ris    cl‰ri™rum       cl‰ri™rum
  _Dat._  cl‰ri™r”        cl‰ri™r”     cl‰ri™ribus     cl‰ri™ribus
  _Acc._  cl‰ri™rem       cl‰rius      cl‰ri™r�s       cl‰ri™ra
  _Abl._  cl‰ri™re        cl‰ri™re     cl‰ri™ribus     cl‰ri™ribus

    _a._ Observe that the endings are those of the consonant stems of
    the third declension.

    _b._ Compare ÇlongusÈ, _long_; ÇfortisÈ, _brave_; Çrec�nsÈ (base,
    Çrecent-È), _recent_; and decline the comparative of each.

Ç304.È Adjectives in Ç-erÈ form the comparative regularly, but the
superlative is formed by adding Ç-rimusÈ, Ç-aÈ, Ç-umÈ to the nominative
masculine of the positive; as,

  POSITIVE                    COMPARATIVE           SUPERLATIVE
  ‰cer, ‰cris, ‰cre           ‰crior, ‰crius        ‰cerrimus, -a, -um
    (BASE acr-)
  pulcher, pulchra, pulchrum  pulchrior, pulchrius  pulcherrimus,
    (BASE pulchr-)                                    -a, -um
  l”ber, l”bera, l”berum      l”berior, l”berius    l”berrimus, -a, -um
    (BASE l”ber-)

    _a._ In a similar manner compare ÇmiserÈ, ÇaegerÈ, Çcr�berÈ.

Ç305.È The comparative is often translated by _quite, too_, or
_somewhat_, and the superlative by _very_; as, ÇaltiorÈ, _quite_ (_too,
somewhat_) _high_; ÇaltissimusÈ, _very high._

Ç306.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 296.

I. 1. Quid expl™r‰t™r�s quaer�bant? Expl™r‰t™r�s tempus opportfžissimum
itiner” quaer�bant. 2. Medi‰ in silv‰ ign”s quam cr�berrim™s f�cimus,
quod fer‰s tam aud‰cis numquam ante‰ v”der‰mus. 3. Ant”qu”s temporibus
Germ‰n” erant forti™r�s quam Gall”. 4. Caesar erat cl‰rior quam
inim”c”[1] qu” eum nec‰v�runt. 5. Quisque scžtum ing�ns et p”lum longius
ger�bat. 6. Apud barbar™s Germ‰n” erant aud‰cissim” et fortissim”.
7. M�ns hominum est celerior quam corpus. 8. Vir” aliqu‰rum terr‰rum
sunt miserrim”. 9. Corpora Germ‰n™rum erant ingenti™ra quam R™m‰n™rum.
10. åcerrim” Gall™rum pr”ncip�s sine žll‰ mor‰ tr‰ns flžmen quoddam
equ™s v�l™cissim™s tr‰džx�runt. 11. Aest‰te di�s sunt longi™r�s quam
hieme. 12. Imper‰tor qu”dam ab expl™r‰t™ribus d� recent” adventž n‰vium
long‰rum quaes”vit.

II. 1. Of all birds the eagle is the swiftest. 2. Certain animals are
swifter than the swiftest horse. 3. The Roman name was most hateful to
the enemies of the commonwealth. 4. The Romans always inflicted the
severest[2] punishment on faithless allies. 5. I was quite ill, and so I
hastened from the city to the country. 6. Marcus had some friends dearer
than C¾sar.[3] 7. Did you not seek a more recent report concerning the
battle? 8. Not even after a victory so opportune did he seek the
generalÕs friendship.

    [Footnote 1: Why is this word used instead of Çhost�sÈ?]

    [Footnote 2: Use the superlative of ÇgravisÈ.]

    [Footnote 3: Accusative. In a comparison the noun after ÇquamÈ is in
    the same case as the one before it.]

N.B. Beginning at this point, the selections for reading will be found
near the end of the volume. (See p. 197.)


LESSON LIV

IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES
THE ABLATIVE WITH COMPARATIVES WITHOUT _QUAM_

  [Special Vocabulary]

  Çalacer, alacris, alacreÈ, _eager, spirited, excited_ (alacrity)
  Çcelerit‰s, -‰tisÈ, f., _speed_ (celerity)
  Çcl‰mor, cl‰m™risÈ, m., _shout, clamor_
  Çl�nis, l�neÈ, _mild, gentle_ (lenient)
  Çmulier, muli«erisÈ, f., _woman_
  Çmultitžd™, multitždinisÈ, f., _multitude_
  Çn�moÈ, dat. Çn�min”È, acc. Çn�minemÈ (gen. Çnžll”usÈ, abl. Çnžll™È,
     from ÇnžllusÈ), no plur., m. and f., _no one_
  Çn™bilis, n™bileÈ, _well known, noble_
  ÇnoctžÈ, adv. (an old abl.), _by night_ (nocturnal)
  ÇstatimÈ, adv., _immediately, at once_
  Çsubit™È, adv., _suddenly_
  Çtardus, -a, -umÈ, _slow_ (tardy)
  Çcupi™, cupere, cup”v”, cup”tusÈ, _desire, wish_ (cupidity)

Ç307.È The following six adjectives in Ç-lisÈ form the comparative
regularly; but the superlative is formed by adding Ç-limusÈ to the base
of the positive. Learn the meanings and comparison.

  POSITIVE                   COMPARATIVE         SUPERLATIVE
  facilis, -e, _easy_        facilior, -ius      facillimus, -a, -um
  difficilis, -e, _hard_     difficilior, -ius   difficillimus, -a, -um
  similis, -e, _like_        similior, -ius      simillimus, -a, -um
  dissimilis, -e, _unlike_   dissimilior, -ius   dissimillimus, -a, -um
  gracilis, -e, _slender_    gracilior, -ius     gracillimus, -a, -um
  humilis, -e, _low_         humilior, -ius      humillimus, -a, -um

Ç308.È From the knowledge gained in the preceding lesson we should
translate the sentence _Nothing is brighter than the sun_

  ÇNihil est cl‰rius quam s™lÈ

But the Romans, especially in negative sentences, often expressed the
comparison in this way,

  ÇNihil est cl‰rius s™leÈ

which, literally translated, is _Nothing is brighter away from the sun_;
that is, _starting from the sun as a standard, nothing is brighter_.
This relation is expressed by the separative ablative Çs™leÈ. Hence the
rule

Ç309.È RULE. ÇAblative with Comparatives.È _The comparative degree, if
ÇquamÈ is omitted, is followed by the separative ablative._

Ç310.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 296.

I. 1. N�m™ m”lit�s alacri™r�s R™m‰n”s v”dit. 2. Statim imper‰tor iussit
nžnti™s quam celerrim™s litter‰s R™mam port‰re. 3. Multa flžmina sunt
l�ni™ra Rh�n™. 4. Apud R™man™s quis erat cl‰rior Caesare? 5. Nihil
pulchrius urbe R™m‰ v”d”. 6. Subit™ multitždo audacissima magn™ clam™re
proelium ‰crius comm”sit. 7. Num est equus tuus tardus? N™n v�r™ tardus,
sed celerior aquil‰. 8. Ubi Romae fu”, n�m™ erat mihi amicior Sext™.
9. Quaedam mulier�s cibum m”litibus dare cup”v�runt. 10. R�x vetuit
c”vis ex urbe noctž disc�dere. 11. Ille puer est gracilior h‰c
muliere. 12. Expl™r‰tor du‰s (_two_) vi‰s, alteram facilem, alteram
difficili™rem, d�m™nstr‰vit.

II. 1. What city have you seen more beautiful than Rome? 2. The Gauls
were not more eager than the Germans. 3. The eagle is not slower than
the horse. 4. The spirited woman did not fear to make the journey by
night. 5. The mind of the multitude was quite gentle and friendly.
6. But the kingÕs mind was very different. 7. The king was not like
(similar to) his noble father. 8. These hills are lower than the huge
mountains of our territory.

  [Illustration: ARMA ROMANA]


LESSON LV

IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES (_Continued_)

  [Special Vocabulary]

  Çaedificium, aedifi«c”È, n., _building, dwelling_ (edifice)
  Çimperium, impe«r”È, n., _command, chief power; empire_
  Çmors, mortis (-ium)È, f., _death_ (mortal)
  Çreliquus, -a, -umÈ, _remaining, rest of_. As a noun, m. and n. plur.,
    _the rest_ (relic)
  Çscelus, scelerisÈ, n., _crime_
  Çservitžs, -žtisÈ, f., _slavery_ (servitude)
  Çvall�s, vallis (-ium)È, f., _valley_

  Çabd™, abdere, abdid”, abditusÈ, _hide_
  Çcontend™, contendere, contend”, contentusÈ, _strain, struggle;
     hasten_ (contend)
  Çocc”d™, occ”dere, occ”d”, occ”susÈ, _cut down, kill_. Cf. Çnec™È,
    Çinterfici™È
  Çperterre™, perterr�re, perterru”, perterritusÈ, _terrify, frighten_
  Çrecipi™, recipere, rec�p”, receptusÈ, _receive, recover_;
    Çs� recipereÈ, _betake oneÕs self, withdraw, retreat_
  Çtr‰d™, tr‰dere, tr‰did”, tr‰ditusÈ, _give over, surrender, deliver_
    (traitor)

Ç311.È Some adjectives in English have irregular comparison, as _good,
better, best_; _many, more, most._ So Latin comparison presents some
irregularities. Among the adjectives that are compared irregularly are

  POSITIVE                     COMPARATIVE        SUPERLATIVE
  Çbonus, -a, -umÈ, _good_     Çmelior, meliusÈ   Çoptimus, -a, -umÈ
  Çmagnus, -a, -umÈ, _great_   Çmaior, maiusÈ     Çmaximus, -a, -umÈ
  Çmalus, -a, -umÈ, _bad_      Çpeior, peiusÈ     Çpessimus, -a, -umÈ
  Çmultus, -a, -umÈ, _much_    Ç----, plžsÈ       Çplžrimus, -a, -umÈ
  Çmult”, -ae, -aÈ, _many_     Çplžr�s, plžraÈ    Çplžrim”, -ae, -aÈ
  Çparvus, -a, -umÈ, _small_   Çminor, minusÈ     Çminimus, -a, -umÈ

Ç312.È The following four adjectives have two superlatives. Unusual
forms are placed in parentheses.

  Çexterus, -a, -umÈ, (Çexterior, -iusÈ,    { Çextr�mus, -a, -umÈ }
    _outward_             _outer_)          {(Çextimus, -a, -umÈ) }
                                                _outermost, last_
  Ç”nferus, -a, -umÈ,  Ç”nferior, -iusÈ,    { Ç”nfimus, -a, -umÈ  }
    _low_                 _lower_           { Ç”mus, -a, -umÈ     }
                                                _lowest_
  Çposterus, -a, -umÈ, (Çposterior, -iusÈ,  { Çpostr�mus, -a, -umÈ }
    _next_                _later_)          {(Çpostumus, -a, -umÈ) }
                                                _last_
  Çsuperus, -a, -umÈ,  Çsuperior, -iusÈ     { Çsupr�mus, -a, -umÈ  }
    _above_               _higher_          { Çsummus, -a, -umÈ    }
                                                _highest_

Ç313.È ÇPlžsÈ, _more_ (plural _more, many, several_), is declined as
follows:

          SINGULAR                 PLURAL
          MASC. AND FEM.  NEUT.    MASC. AND FEM.  NEUT.
  _Nom._       ----       plžs     plžr�s          plžra
  _Gen._       ----       plžris   plžrium         plžrium
  _Dat._       ----       ----     plžribus        plžribus
  _Acc._       ----       plžs     plžr”s, -�s     plžra
  _Abl._       ----       plžre    plžribus        plžribus

    _a._ In the singular ÇplžsÈ is used only as a neuter substantive.

Ç314.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 296.

I. 1. Reliqu” host�s, qu” ‰ dextr™ cornž proelium comm”serant, d�
superi™re loc™ fžg�runt et s�s� in silvam maximam rec�p�runt. 2. In
extr�m‰ parte silvae castra hostium posita erant. 3. Plžrim” capt”v”
ab equitibus ad Caesarem duct” sunt. 4. Caesar v�r™ iussit e™s in
servitžtem tr‰d”. 5. Poster™ di� magna multitžd™ mulierum ab R™m‰n”s
in valle ”m‰ reperta est. 6. Hae mulier�s maxim� perterritae adventž
Caesaris s�s� occ”dere stud�bant. 7. Eae quoque plžr”s f‰bul‰s d�
exercitžs R™m‰n” sceleribus aud”verant. 8. F‰ma ill™rum m”litum optima
n™n erat. 9. In barbar™rum aedifici”s maior c™pia fržment” reperta est.
10. N�m™ cr�br”s proeli”s contendere sine aliqu™ per”cul™ potest.

II. 1. The remaining women fled from their dwellings and hid themselves.
2. They were terrified and did not wish to be captured and given over
into slavery. 3. Nothing can be worse than slavery. 4. Slavery is worse
than death. 5. In the Roman empire a great many were killed because they
refused to be slaves. 6. To surrender the fatherland is the worst crime.


LESSON LVI

IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES (_Concluded_)
ABLATIVE OF THE MEASURE OF DIFFERENCE

  [Special Vocabulary]

  Çaditus, -žsÈ, m., _approach, access; entrance_
  Çc”vit‰s, c”vit‰tisÈ, f., _citizenship; body of citizens, state_
    (city)
  ÇinterÈ, prep, with  acc.,  _between, among_ (interstate commerce)
  ÇnamÈ, conj., _for_
  Çobses, obsidisÈ, m. and f., _hostage_
  Çpaul™È, adv. (abl. n. of ÇpaulusÈ), _by a little, somewhat_

  Çincol™, incolere, incolu”, ----È, transitive, _inhabit_;
    intransitive, _dwell_. Cf. Çhabit™È, Çv”v™È
  Çrelinqu™, relinquere, rel”qu”, relictusÈ, _leave, abandon_
    (relinquish)
  Çstatu™, statuere, statu”, statžtusÈ, _fix, decide_ (statute), usually
    with infin.

Ç315.È The following adjectives are irregular in the formation of the
superlative and have no positive. Forms rarely used are in parentheses.

  COMPARATIVE              SUPERLATIVE
  ÇciteriorÈ, _hither_    (ÇcitimusÈ, _hithermost_)
  ÇinteriorÈ, _inner_     (ÇintimusÈ, _inmost_)
  ÇpriorÈ, _former_        Çpr”musÈ, _first_
  ÇpropiorÈ, _nearer_      ÇproximusÈ, _next, nearest_
  ÇulteriorÈ, _further_    ÇultimusÈ, _furthest_

Ç316.È In the sentence _Galba is a head taller than Sextus_, the phrase
_a head taller_ expresses the Çmeasure of differenceÈ in height between
Galba and Sextus. The Latin form of expression would be _Galba is taller
than Sextus Çby a headÈ_. This is clearly an ablative relation, and the
construction is called the Çablative of the measure of differenceÈ.

EXAMPLES

  ÇGalba est altior capite quam SextusÈ
    _Galba is a head taller_ (taller by a head) _than Sextus_.
  ÇIllud iter ad Italiam est mult™ breviusÈ
    _That route to Italy is much shorter_ (shorter by much)

Ç317.È RULE. ÇAblative of the Measure of DifferenceÈ. _With comparatives
and words implying comparison the ablative is used to denote the measure
of difference._

    _a._ Especially common in this construction are the neuter ablatives

  Çe™È, _by this, by that_         Çnihil™È,[1] _by nothing_
  Çh™cÈ, _by this_                 Çpaul™È, _by a little_
  Çmult™È, _by much_

    [Footnote 1: ÇnihilÈ was originally ÇnihilumÈ and declined like
    Çp”lumÈ. There is no plural.]

Ç318.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 297.

I. 1. Barbar” proelium committere statu�runt e™ magis quod R™m‰n”
”nf”rm” esse vid�bantur. 2. Meum c™nsilium est mult™ melius quam tuum
quia mult™ facilius est. 3. Haec via est mult™ l‰tior quam illa.
4. Barbar” erant nihil™ tardi™r�s quam R™m‰n”. 5. Tuus equus est paul™
celerior quam meus. 6. I” qu” paul™ forti™r�s erant prohibu�runt
reliqu™s aditum relinquere. 7. Inter ill‰s c”vit‰t�s Germ‰nia m”lit�s
habet optim™s. 8. Propior via quae per hanc vallem džcit est inter
portum et lacum. 9. Serv”, qu” agr™s citeri™r�s incol�bant, pri™r�s
domin™s relinquere n™n cup”v�runt, quod e™s am‰bant. 10. Ultimae
Germ‰niae part�s numquam in fidem R™m‰n™rum v�n�runt. 11. Nam tr‰ns
Rh�num aditus erat mult™ difficilior exercitu” R™m‰n™.

II. 1. Another way much more difficult (more difficult by much) was left
through hither Gaul. 2. In ancient times no state was stronger than the
Roman empire. 3. The states of further Gaul did not wish to give
hostages to C¾sar. 4. Slavery is no better (better by nothing) than
death. 5. The best citizens are not loved by the worst. 6. The active
enemy immediately withdrew into the nearest forest, for they were
terrified by C¾sarÕs recent victories.


LESSON LVII

FORMATION AND COMPARISON OF ADVERBS

  [Special Vocabulary]

  Çaequus, -a, -umÈ, _even, level; equal_
  Çcohors, cohortis (-ium)È, f., _cohort_, a tenth part of a legion,
     about 360 men
  Çcurr™, currere, cucurr”, cursusÈ, _run_ (course)
  Çdifficult‰s, -‰tisÈ, f., _difficulty_
  Çfossa, -aeÈ, f., _ditch_ (fosse)
  Çg�ns, gentis (-ium)È, f., _race, tribe, nation_ (Gentile)
  Çneg™tium, neg™t”È, n., _business, affair, matter_ (negotiate)
  Çregi™, -™nisÈ, f., _region, district_
  Çržmor, ržm™risÈ, m., _rumor, report_. Cf. f‰ma
  Çsimul atqueÈ, conj., _as soon as_

  Çsuscipi™, suscipere, susc�p”, susceptusÈ, _undertake_
  Çtrah™, trahere, tr‰x”, tr‰ctusÈ, _drag, draw_ (ex-tract)
  Çvale™, val�re, valu”, valitžrusÈ, _be strong_; plžrimum val�re,
     _to be most powerful, have great influence_ (value). Cf. validus

Ç319.È Adverbs are generally derived from adjectives, as in English
(e.g. adj. _sweet_, adv. _sweetly_). Like adjectives, they can be
compared; but they have no declension.

Ç320.È Adverbs derived from adjectives of the first and second
declensions are formed and compared as follows:

          POSITIVE                COMPARATIVE  SUPERLATIVE
  _Adj._  c‰rus, _dear_           c‰rior       c‰rissimus
  _Adv._  c‰r�, _dearly_          c‰rius       c‰rissim�

  _Adj._  pulcher, _beautiful_    pulchrior    pulcherrimus
  _Adv._  pulchr�, _beautifully_  pulchrius    pulcherrim�

  _Adj._  l”ber, _free_           l”berior     l”berrimus
  _Adv._  l”ber�, _freely_        l”berius     l”berrim�

    _a._ The positive of the adverb is formed by adding Ç-�È to the base
    of the positive of the adjective. The superlative of the adverb is
    formed from the superlative of the adjective in the same way.

    _b._ The comparative of any adverb is the neuter accusative singular
    of the comparative of the adjective.

Ç321.È Adverbs derived from adjectives of the third declension are
formed like those described above in the comparative and superlative.
The positive is usually formed by adding Ç-iterÈ to the base of
adjectives of three endings or of two endings, and Ç-terÈ to the base of
those of one ending;[1] as,

          POSITIVE              COMPARATIVE  SUPERLATIVE
  _Adj._  fortis, _brave_       fortior      fortissimus
  _Adv._  fortiter, _bravely_   fortius      fortissim�

  _Adj._  aud‰x, _bold_         aud‰cior     aud‰cissimus
  _Adv._  aud‰cter, _boldly_    aud‰cius     aud‰cissim�

    [Footnote 1: This is a good working rule, though there are some
    exceptions to it.]

Ç322.È ÇCase Forms as Adverbs.È As we learned above, the neuter
accusative of comparatives is used adverbially. So in the positive or
superlative some adjectives, instead of following the usual formation,
use the accusative or the ablative singular neuter adverbially; as,

  _Adj._  facilis, _easy_             pr”mus, _first_
  _Adv._  facile (acc.), _easily_     pr”mum (acc.), _first_
                                      pr”m™ (abl.), _at first_
  _Adj._  multus, _many_              plžrimus, _most_
  _Adv._  multum (acc.), _much_       plžrimum (acc.), _most_
          mult™ (abl.), _by much_

Ç323.È Learn the following irregular comparisons:

  bene, _well_           melius, _better_    optim�, _best_
  diž, _long_ (time)     dižtius, _longer_   dižtissim�, _longest_
  magnopere, _greatly_   magis, _more_       maxim�, _most_
  parum, _little_        minus, _less_       minim�, _least_
  prope, _nearly, near_  propius, _nearer_   proxim�, _nearest_
  saepe, _often_         saepius, _oftener_  saepissim�, _oftenest_

Ç324.È Form adverbs from the following adjectives, using the regular
rules, and compare them: ÇlaetusÈ, ÇsuperbusÈ, ÇmolestusÈ, Çam”cusÈ,
ljcerÈ, ÇbrevisÈ, ÇgravisÈ, Çrec�nsÈ.

Ç325.È RULE. ÇAdverbs.È _Adverbs modify verbs, adjectives, and other
adverbs._

Ç326.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 297.

I. 1. Nžlla r�s melius gesta est quam proelium illud[2] ubi Marius
mult™ min™re exercitž mult™ mai™r�s c™pi‰s Germ‰n™rum in fugam dedit.
2. Aud‰cter in R™m‰n™rum cohort”s host�s impetžs f�c�runt 3. Marius
autem omn�s h™s fortissim� sustinuit. 4. Barbar” nihil™ forti™r�s erant
quam R™m‰n”. 5. Pr”m™ barbar” esse superi™r�s vid�bantur, tum R™m‰n”
‰crius contend�runt. 6. D�nique, ubi iam dižtissim� paene aequ™ proeli™
pugn‰tum est, barbar” fugam peti�runt. 7. Quaedam Germ‰n™rum gent�s,
simul atque ržm™rem ill”us calamit‰tis aud”v�runt, s�s� in ultim”s
regi™nibus f”nium su™rum abdid�runt. 8. R™m‰n” saepius quam host�s
v”c�runt, quod meli™ra arma hab�bant. 9. Inter omn”s gent”s R™m‰n”
plžrimum val�bant. 10. Hae cohort�s simul atque in aequi™rem regi™nem
s� rec�p�runt, castra sine žll‰ difficult‰te posu�runt.

II. 1. Some nations are easily overcome by their enemies. 2. Germany is
much larger than Gaul. 3. Were not the Romans the most powerful among
the tribes of Italy? 4. On account of (his) wounds the soldier dragged
his body from the ditch with the greatest difficulty. 5. He was able
neither to run nor to fight. 6. Who saved him? A certain horseman boldly
undertook the matter. 7. The rumors concerning the soldierÕs death were
not true.

    [Footnote 2: ÇilleÈ standing after its noun means _that well-known,
    that famous_.]


LESSON LVIII

NUMERALS ¥ THE PARTITIVE GENITIVE

  [Special Vocabulary]

  Çcomme‰tus, -žsÈ, m.. _provisions_
  Çl‰titžd™, -inisÈ, f., _width_ (latitude)
  Çlongitžd™, -inisÈ, f., _length_ (longitude)
  Çmagnitžd™, -inisÈ, f., _size, magnitude_
  Çmerc‰tor, merc‰t™risÈ, m., _trader, merchant_
  Çmžn”ti™, -™nisÈ, f., _fortification_ (munition)
  Çspatium, spat”È, n., _room, space, distance; time_

  Çcogn™sc™, cogn™scere, cogn™v”, cognitusÈ, _learn_;
     in the perfect tenses, _know_ (re-cognize)
  Çc™g™, c™gere, co�g”, co‰ctusÈ, _collect; compel_ (cogent)
  Çd�fend™, d�fendere, d�fend”, d�f�nsusÈ, _defend_
  Çincend™, incendere, incend”, inc�nsusÈ, _set fire to, burn_
    (incendiary). Cf. Çcrem™È
  Çobtine™, obtin�re, obtinu”, obtentusÈ, _possess, occupy, hold_
    (obtain)
  Çperveni™, perven”re, perv�n”, perventusÈ, _come through, arrive_

Ç327.È The Latin numeral adjectives may be classified as follows:

  1. ÇCardinal NumeralsÈ, answering the question _how many?_ as, ÇžnusÈ,
  _one_; ÇduoÈ, _two_; etc.

  2. ÇOrdinal NumeralsÈ, derived in most cases from the cardinals and
  answering the question _in what order?_ as, Çpr”musÈ, _first_;
  ÇsecundusÈ, _second_; etc.

  3. ÇDistributive NumeralsÈ, answering the question _how many at a
  time?_ as, Çsingul”È, _one at a time_.

Ç328.È ÇThe Cardinal Numerals.È The first twenty of the cardinals are as
follows:

  1, ÇžnusÈ       6, ÇsexÈ      11, ÇžndecimÈ        16, Çs�decimÈ
  2, ÇduoÈ        7, ÇseptemÈ   12, ÇduodecimÈ       17, ÇseptendecimÈ
  3, Çtr�sÈ       8, Çoct™È     13, ÇtredecimÈ       18, Çduod�v”gint”È
  4, ÇquattuorÈ   9, ÇnovemÈ    14, ÇquattuordecimÈ  19, Çžnd�v”gint”È
  5, Çqu”nqueÈ   10, ÇdecemÈ    15, Çqu”ndecimÈ      20, Çv”gint”È

    _a._ Learn also ÇcentumÈ = 100, Çducent”È = 200, Çm”lleÈ = 1000.

Ç329.È ÇDeclension of the Cardinals.È Of the cardinals only ÇžnusÈ,
ÇduoÈ, Çtr�sÈ, the hundreds above one hundred, and Çm”lleÈ used as a
noun, are declinable.

    _a._ ÇžnusÈ is one of the nine irregular adjectives, and is declined
    like ÇnžllusÈ (cf. ¤¤109, 470). The plural of ÇžnusÈ is used to
    agree with a plural noun of a singular meaning, as, Çžna castraÈ,
    _one camp_; and with other nouns in the sense of _only_, as, ÇGall”
    žn”È, _only the Gauls_.

    _b._ Learn the declension of ÇduoÈ, _two_; Çtr�sÈ, _three_; and
    Çm”lleÈ, _a thousand_. (¤479.)

    _c._ The hundreds above one hundred are declined like the plural of
    ÇbonusÈ; as,

      ducent”,    -ae,   -a
      ducent™rum, -‰rum, -™rum
        etc.        etc.   etc.

Ç330.È We have already become familiar with sentences like the
following:

  ÇOmnium avium aquila est v�l™cissimaÈ
    _Of all birds the eagle is the swiftest_
  ÇHoc ™r‰culum erat omnium cl‰rissimumÈ
    _This oracle was the most famous of all_

In such sentences the genitive denotes the whole, and the word it
modifies denotes a part of that whole. Such a genitive, denoting the
whole of which a part is taken, is called a Çpartitive genitiveÈ.

Ç331.È RULE. ÇPartitive Genitive.È _Words denoting a part are often used
with the genitive of the whole, known as the Çpartitive genitiveÈ._

    _a._ Words denoting a part are especially pronouns, numerals, and
    other adjectives. But cardinal numbers excepting Çm”lleÈ regularly
    take the ablative with ÇexÈ or Çd�È instead of the partitive
    genitive.

    _b._ ÇM”lleÈ, _a thousand_, in the singular is usually an
    indeclinable adjective (as, Çm”lle m”lit�sÈ, _a thousand soldiers_),
    but in the plural it is a declinable noun and takes the partitive
    genitive (as, Çdecem m”lia m”litumÈ, _ten thousand soldiers_).

EXAMPLES:

  ÇFortissim” h™rum sunt Germ‰n”È
    _The bravest of these are the Germans_
  ÇDecem m”lia hostium interfecta suntÈ
    _Ten thousand_ (lit. _thousands_) _of the enemy were slain_
  Çóna ex capt”v”s erat soror r�gisÈ
    _One of the captives was the kingÕs sister_

Ç332.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 297.

I. 1. Caesar maximam partem aedifici™rum incendit. 2. Magna pars
mžn”ti™nis aqu‰ flžminis d�l�ta est. 3. Gall” huius regi™nis qu”nque
m”lia hominum co�gerant. 4. Duo ex me”s fr‰tribus eundem ržm™rem
aud”v�runt. 5. Quis R™m‰n™rum erat clarior Caesare? 6. Qu”nque cohort�s
ex ill‰ legi™ne castra quam fortissim� d�fend�bant. 7. Hic locus aberat
aequ™ spati™[1] ab castr”s Caesaris et castr”s Germ‰n™rum. 8. Caesar
simul atque perv�nit, plžs comme‰tžs ab soci”s postul‰vit. 9. N™nne
merc‰t™r�s magnitždinem ”nsulae cogn™verant? Longitždinem sed n™n
l‰titždinem cogn™verant. 10. Pauc” hostium obtin�bant collem quem
expl™r‰t™r�s nostr” v”d�runt.

II. 1. I have two brothers, and one of them lives at Rome. 2. C¾sar
stormed that very town with three legions. 3. In one hour he destroyed a
great part of the fortification. 4. When the enemy could no longer[2]
defend the gates, they retreated to a hill which was not far distant.[3]
5. There three thousand of them bravely resisted the Romans.[4]

    [Footnote 1: Ablative of the measure of difference.]

    [Footnote 2: Not ÇlongiusÈ. Why?]

    [Footnote 3: Latin, _was distant by a small space._]

    [Footnote 4: Not the accusative.]


LESSON LIX

NUMERALS (_Continued_) ¥ THE ACCUSATIVE OF EXTENT

  [Special Vocabulary]

  Çagmen, agminisÈ, n., _line of march, column_;
    Çpr”mum agmenÈ, _the van_;
    Çnovissimum agmenÈ, _the rear_
  ÇatqueÈ, ÇacÈ, conj., _and_; ÇatqueÈ is used before vowels and
     consonants, ÇacÈ before consonants only. Cf. ÇetÈ and Ç-queÈ
  Çconcilium, conci«l”È, n., _council, assembly_
  ÇHelv�ti”, -™rumÈ, m., _the Helvetii_, a Gallic tribe
  Çpassus, passžsÈ, m., _a pace_, five Roman feet;
    Çm”lle passuumÈ, _a thousand (of) paces_, a Roman mile
  Çqu‰ d� caus‰È, _for this reason, for what reason_
  Çv‰llum, -”È, n., _earth-works, rampart_

  Çcad™, cadere, cecid”, c‰sžrusÈ, _fall_ (decadence)
  Çd�d™, d�dere, d�did”, d�ditusÈ, _surrender, give up_;
     with a reflexive pronoun, _surrender oneÕs self, submit_, with the
     dative of the indirect object
  Çprem™, premere, press”, pressusÈ, _press hard, harass_
  Çvex™, vex‰re, vex‰v”, vex‰tusÈ, _annoy, ravage_ (vex)

Ç333.È Learn the first twenty of the ordinal numerals (¤478). The
ordinals are all declined like ÇbonusÈ.

Ç334.È The distributive numerals are declined like the plural of
ÇbonusÈ. The first three are

    Çsingul”, -ae, -aÈ, _one each, one by one_
    Çb”n”, -ae, -aÈ, _two each, two by two_
    Çtern”, -ae, -aÈ, _three each, three by three_

Ç335.È We have learned that, besides its use as object, the accusative
is used to express space relations not covered by the ablative. We have
had such expressions as Çper plžrim™s ann™sÈ, _for a great many years_;
Çper t™tum diemÈ, _for a whole day_. Here the space relation is one of
_extent of time_. We could also say Çper decem ped�sÈ, _for ten feet_,
where the space relation is one of _extent of space_. While this is
correct Latin, the usual form is to use the accusative with no
preposition, as,

  ÇVir t™tum diem cucurritÈ, _the man ran for a whole day_
  ÇCaesar mžrum decem ped�s m™vitÈ, _C¾sar moved the wall ten feet_

Ç336.È RULE. ÇAccusative of Extent.È _Duration of time and extent of
space are expressed by the accusative._

    _a._ This accusative answers the questions _how long? how far?_

    _b._ Distinguish carefully between the accusative of time _how long_
    and the ablative of time _when_, or _within which._

Select the accusatives of time and space and the ablatives of time in
the following:

When did the general arrive? He arrived at two oÕclock. How long had
he been marching? For four days. How far did he march? He marched
sixty-five miles. Where has he pitched his camp? Three miles from the
river, and he will remain there several days. The wall around the camp
is ten feet high. When did the war begin? In the first year after the
kingÕs death.

Ç337.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 298.

I. _C¾sar in Gaul_. Caesar bellum in Gallia septem ann™s gessit. Pr”m™
ann™ Helv�ti™s v”cit, et e™dem ann™ multae German™rum gent�s e” s�s�
d�did�runt. Mult™s iam ann™s Germ‰n” Gall™s vexabant[1] et duc�s Germ‰n”
c™pi‰s su‰s tr‰ns Rh�num saepe tr‰džc�bant.[1] N™n singul” veni�bant,
sed multa milia hominum in Galliam contend�bant. Qu‰ d� caus‰ pr”ncip�s
Galliae concilium convoc‰v�runt atque statu�runt legates ad Caesarem
mittere. Caesar, simul atque hunc ržm™rem aud”vit, c™pi‰s su‰s sine mor‰
co�git. Prim‰ lžce fortiter cum German”s proelium comm”sit. T™tum diem
‰criter pugn‰tum est. Caesar ipse ‰ dextr™ cornž acicm džxit. Magna pars
exercitžs Germ‰n” cecidit. Post magnam caedem pauc” multa milia passuum
ad flžmen fžg�runt.

II. 1. C¾sar pitched camp two miles from the river. 2. He fortified the
camp with a ditch fifteen feet wide and a rampart nine feet high. 3. The
camp of the enemy was a great way off (was distant by a great space).
4. On the next day he hastened ten miles in three hours. 5. Suddenly the
enemy with all their forces made an attack upon (ÇinÈ _with acc._) the
rear. 6. For two hours the Romans were hard pressed by the barbarians.
7. In three hours the barbarians were fleeing.

    [Footnote 1: Translate as if pluperfect.]


LESSON LX

DEPONENT VERBS

  [Special Vocabulary]

  ÇautÈ, conj., _or_; Çaut ... autÈ, _either ... or_
  Çcaus‰È, abl. of ÇcausaÈ, _for the sake of, because of_. Always stands
     _after_ the gen. which modifies it
  Çfer�È, adv., _nearly, almost_
  Çop”ni™, -™nisÈ, f., _opinion, supposition, expectation_
  Çr�s fržment‰ria, re” fržment‰riaeÈ, f. (lit. _the grain affair_),
    _grain supply_
  Çtimor, -™risÈ, m., _fear_. Cf. Çtime™È
  ÇundiqueÈ, adv., _from all sides_

  Çc™nor, c™n‰r”, c™n‰tus sumÈ, _attempt, try_
  Ç�gredior, �gred”, �gressus sumÈ, _move out, disembark_;
    Çpr™grediorÈ, _move forward, advance_ (egress, progress)
  Çmoror, mor‰r”, mor‰tus sumÈ, _delay_
  Çorior, orir”, ortus sumÈ, _arise, spring; begin; be born_ (_from_)
    (origin)
  Çprofic”scor, profic”sc”, profectus sumÈ, _set out_
  Çrevertor, revert”, reversus sumÈ, _return_ (revert). The forms of
    this verb are usually active, and not deponent, in the perfect
    system. Perf. act., Çrevert”È
  Çsequor, sequ”, secžtus sumÈ, _follow_ (sequence). Note the following
    compounds of ÇsequorÈ and the force of the different prefixes:
    Çc™nsequorÈ (_follow with_), _overtake_;
    Ç”nsequorÈ (_follow against_), _pursue_;
    ÇsubsequorÈ (_follow under_), _follow close after_

Ç338.È A number of verbs are passive in form but active in meaning; as,
ÇhortorÈ, _I encourage_; ÇvereorÈ, _I fear_. Such verbs are called
ÇdeponentÈ because they have laid aside (Çd�-p™nereÈ, _to lay aside_)
the active forms.

    _a._ Besides having all the forms of the passive, deponent verbs
    have also the future active infinitive and a few other active forms
    which will be noted later. (Sec¤¤375, 403.b.)

Ç339.È The principal parts of deponents are of course passive in form,
as,

  Conj. I         Çhortor, hort‰r”, hort‰tus sumÈ, _encourage_
  Conj. II        Çvereor, ver�r”, veritus sumÈ, _fear_
  Conj. III (_a_) Çsequor, sequ”, secžtus sumÈ, _follow_
            (_b_) Çpatior, pat”, passus sumÈ, _suffer, allow_
  Conj. IV        Çpartior, part”r”, part”tus sumÈ, _share, divide_

Learn the synopses of these verbs. (See ¤493.) ÇPatiorÈ is conjugated
like the passive of Çcapi™È (¤492).

Ç340.È PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE

The prepositions with the accusative that occur most frequently are

  ÇanteÈ, _before_
  ÇapudÈ, _among_
  ÇcircumÈ, _around_
  Çcontr‰È, _against, contrary to_
  Çextr‰È, _outside of_
  ÇinÈ, _into, in, against, upon_
  ÇinterÈ, _between, among_
  Çintr‰È, _within_
  ÇobÈ, _on account of_ (Çquam ob remÈ, _wherefore, therefore_)
  ÇperÈ, _through, by means of_
  ÇpostÈ, _after, behind_
  ÇpropterÈ, _on account of, because of_
  Çtr‰nsÈ, _across, over_

    _a._ Most of these you have had before. Review the old ones and
    learn the new ones. Review the list of prepositions governing the
    ablative, ¤209.

Ç341.È EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 298.

I. 1. Tr�s ex l�g‰t”s, contr‰ Caesaris op”ni™nem, iter facere per
hostium f”n”s ver�bantur. 2. Quis e™s hort‰tus est? Imper‰tor e™s
hort‰tus est et i”s persu‰d�re c™n‰tus est, sed n™n potuit. 3. Quid
l�g‰t™s perterruit? Aut timor hostium, qu” undique prem�bant, aut
longitžd™ viae e™s perterruit. 4. Tamen omn�s fer� Caesarem mult™ magis
quam host”s verit” sunt. 5. Fortissimae gent�s Galliae ex Germ‰n”s
ori�bantur. 6. Quam ob rem tam fort�s erant? Quia nec v”num nec
alia quae virtžtem d�lent ad s� port‰r” pati�bantur. 7. Caesar ex
merc‰t™ribus d� ”nsul‰ Britanni‰ quaes”vit, sed nihil cogn™scere potuit.
8. Itaque ipse statuit hanc terram petere, et medi‰ fer� aest‰te cum
mult”s n‰vibus long”s profectus est. 9. Magn‰ celerit‰te iter conf�cit
et in opportžnissim™ loc™ �gressus est. 10. Barbar” summ”s v”ribus eum
ab ”nsul‰ prohib�re c™n‰t” sunt. 11. Ille autem barbar™s multa m”lia
passuum ”nsecžtus est; tamen sine equit‰tž e™s c™nsequ” n™n potuit.

II. 1. Contrary to our expectation, the enemy fled and the cavalry
followed close after them. 2. From all parts of the multitude the shouts
arose of those who were being wounded. 3. C¾sar did not allow the
cavalry to pursue too far.[1] 4. The cavalry set out at the first hour
and was returning[2] to camp at the fourth hour. 5. Around the Roman
camp was a rampart twelve feet high. 6. C¾sar will delay three days
because of the grain supply. 7. Nearly all the lieutenants feared the
enemy and attempted to delay the march.

    [Footnote 1: Comparative of Çlong�È.]

    [Footnote 2: Will this be a deponent or an active form?]

       *       *       *       *       *

  ÇSeventh Review, Lessons LIII-LX, ¤¤524-526È

       *       *       *       *       *

  [Illustration]




PART III

CONSTRUCTIONS


INTRODUCTORY NOTE

The preceding part of this book has been concerned chiefly with forms
and vocabulary. There remain still to be learned the forms of the
Subjunctive Mood, the Participles, and the Gerund of the regular verb,
and the conjugation of the commoner irregular verbs. These will be taken
up in connection with the study of constructions, which will be the
chief subject of our future work. The special vocabularies of the
preceding lessons contain, exclusive of proper names, about six hundred
words. As these are among the commonest words in the language, _they
must be mastered_. They properly form the basis of the study of words,
and will be reviewed and used with but few additions in the remaining
lessons.

For practice in reading and to illustrate the constructions presented, a
continued story has been prepared and may be begun at this point (see p.
204). It has been divided into chapters of convenient length to
accompany progress through the lessons, but may be read with equal
profit after the lessons are finished. The story gives an account of the
life and adventures of Publius Cornelius Lentulus, a Roman boy, who
fought in C¾sarÕs campaigns and shared in his triumph. The colored
plates illustrating the story are faithful representations of ancient
life and are deserving of careful study.


LESSON LXI

THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD

Ç342.È In addition to the indicative, imperative, and infinitive moods,
which you have learned, Latin has a fourth mood called the subjunctive.
The tenses of the subjunctive are

  PRESENT    }
  IMPERFECT  }  ACTIVE AND PASSIVE
  PERFECT    }
  PLUPERFECT }

Ç343.È The tenses of the subjunctive have the same time values as the
corresponding tenses of the indicative, and, in addition, _each of them
may refer to future time_. No meanings of the tenses will be given in
the paradigms, as the translation varies with the construction used.

Ç344.È The present subjunctive is inflected as follows:

     CONJ. I    CONJ. II     CONJ. III                CONJ. IV
     ACTIVE VOICE
     SINGULAR
  1. a«mem      mo«neam      re«gam      ca«piam      au«diam
  2. a«m�s      mo«ne‰s      re«g‰s      ca«pi‰s      au«di‰s
  3. a«met      mo«neat      re«gat      ca«piat      au«diat

     PLURAL
  1. am�«mus    mone‰«mus    reg‰«mus    capi‰«mus    audi‰«mus
  2. am�«tis    mone‰«tis    reg‰«tis    capi‰«tis    audi‰«tis
  3. a«ment     mo«neant     re«gant     ca«piant     au«diant

     PASSIVE VOICE
     SINGULAR
  1. a«mer      mo«near      re«gar      ca«piar      au«diar
  2. am�«ris    mone‰«ris    reg‰«ris    capi‰«ris    audi‰«ris
        (-re)        (-re)       (-re)        (-re)        (-re)
  3. am�«tur    mone‰«tur    reg‰«tur    capi‰«tur    audi‰«tur

     PLURAL
  1. am�«mur    mone‰«mur    reg‰«mur    capi‰«mur    audi‰«mur
  2. am�«min”   mone‰«min”   reg‰«min”   capi‰«min”   audi‰«min”
  3. amen«tur   monean«tur   regan«tur   capian«tur   audian«tur

    _a._ The present subjunctive is formed from the present stem.

    _b._ The mood sign of the present subjunctive is Ç-�-È in the first
    conjugation and Ç-‰-È in the others. It is shortened in the usual
    places (cf. ¤12), and takes the place of the final vowel of the
    stem in the first and third conjugations, but not in the second and
    fourth.

    _c._ The personal endings are the same as in the indicative.

    _d._ In a similar way inflect the present subjunctive of Çcžr™È,
    Çiube™È, Çsžm™È, Çiaci™È, Çmžni™È.

Ç345.È The present subjunctive of the irregular verb ÇsumÈ is inflected
as follows:

        { 1.  sim            { 1.  s”mus
  SING. { 2.  s”s     PLURAL { 2.  s”tis
        { 3.  sit            { 3.  sint

Ç346.È ÇThe Indicative and Subjunctive Compared.È

  1. The two most important of the finite moods are the indicative and
  the subjunctive. The indicative deals with facts either real or
  assumed. If, then, we wish to assert something as a fact or to inquire
  after a fact, we use the indicative.

  2. On the other hand, if we wish to express a _desire_ or _wish_, a
  _purpose_, a _possibility_, an _expectation_, or some such notion, we
  must use the subjunctive. The following sentences illustrate the
  difference between the indicative and the subjunctive ideas.

     INDICATIVE IDEAS                SUBJUNCTIVE IDEAS

  1. _He is brave_                   1. _May he be brave_
       ÇFortis estÈ                       ÇFortis sitÈ (idea of wishing)
  2. _We set out at once_            2. _Let us set out at once_
       ÇStatim profic”scimurÈ             ÇStatim profic”sc‰murÈ
                                          (idea of willing)
  3. _You hear him every day_        3. _You can hear him every day_
       ÇCot”di� eum aud”sÈ                ÇCot”di� eum audi‰sÈ
                                           (idea of possibility)
  4. _He remained until the ship_    4. _He waited until the ship_
         _arrived_                          _should arrive_
       ÇM‰nsit dum n‰vis perv�nitÈ        ÇExspect‰vit dum n‰vis
                                             perven”retÈ[1]
                                          (idea of expectation)
  5. _C¾sar sends men who find the_  5. _C¾sar sends men_
       _bridge_                           _who are to find_
                                          (or _to find_) _the bridge_
       ÇCaesar mittit homin�s qu”È        ÇCaesar homin�s mittit qu”È
         Çpontem reperiuntÈ                 Çpontem reperiantÈ
                                          (idea of purpose)

    [Footnote 1: Çperven”retÈ, imperfect subjunctive.]

NOTE. From the sentences above we observe that the subjunctive may be
used in either independent or dependent clauses; but it is far more
common in the latter than in the former.

Ç347.È EXERCISE

Which verbs in the following paragraph would be in the indicative and
which in the subjunctive in a Latin translation?

There have been times in the history of our country when you might be
proud of being an American citizen. Do you remember the day when Dewey
sailed into Manila Bay to capture or destroy the enemyÕs fleet? You
might have seen the admiral standing on the bridge calmly giving his
orders. He did not even wait until the mines should be removed from the
harborÕs mouth, but sailed in at once. Let us not despair of our country
while such valor exists, and may the future add new glories to the past.


LESSON LXII

THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF PURPOSE

Ç348.È Observe the sentence

  ÇCaesar homin�s mittit qu” pontem reperiantÈ,
  _C¾sar sends men to find the bridge_

The verb ÇreperiantÈ in the dependent clause is in the subjunctive
because it tells us what C¾sar wants the men to do; in other words, it
expresses his will and the purpose in his mind. Such a use of the
subjunctive is called the subjunctive of purpose.

Ç349.È RULE. ÇSubjunctive of Purpose.È _The subjunctive is used in a
dependent clause to express the purpose of the action in the principal
clause._

Ç350.È A clause of purpose is introduced as follows:

I. If something is wanted, by

  Çqu”È, the relative pronoun (as above)
  ÇutÈ, conj., _in order that, that_
  Çqu™È (abl. of Çqu”È, _by which_), _in order that, that_, used when
    the purpose clause contains a comparative. The ablative Çqu™È
    expresses the measure of difference. (Cf. ¤317.)

II. If something is not wanted, by

  Çn�È, conj., _in order that not, that not, lest_

Ç351.È EXAMPLES

  1. ÇCaesar c™pi‰s c™git quibus host”s ”nsequ‰turÈ
    _C¾sar collects troops with which to pursue the foe_

  2. ÇP‰cem petunt ut domum revertanturÈ
    _They ask for peace in order that they may return home_

  3. ÇPontem faciunt qu™ facilius oppidum capiantÈ
    _They build a bridge that they may take the town more easily_
    (lit. _by which the more easily_)

  4. ÇFugiunt n� vulnerenturÈ
     _They flee that they may not_ (or _lest they_) _be wounded_

Ç352.È ÇExpression of Purpose in English.È In English, purpose clauses
are sometimes introduced by _that_ or _in order that_, but much more
frequently purpose is expressed in English by the infinitive, as _We eat
to live_, _She stoops to conquer_. In Latin prose, on the other hand,
Çpurpose is never expressed by the infinitiveÈ. Be on your guard and do
not let the English idiom betray you into this error.

Ç353.È EXERCISES

I.
  1. Veniunt ut         {  džcant, mittant, videant, audiant,
                        {  džcantur, mittantur, videantur, audiantur.
  2. Fugimus n�         {  capi‰mur, tr‰d‰mur, vide‰mus,
                        {  nec�mur, rapi‰mur, resist‰mus.
  3. Mittit nžnti™s qu” { dicant, audiant, veniant,
                        { n‰rrent, audiantur, in concili™ sedeant.
  4. Castra mžniunt     { s�s� d�fendant, impetum sustineant,
         qu™ facilius   { host”s vincant, salžtem petant.

II. 1. The Helvetii send ambassadors to seek[1] peace. 2. They are
setting out at daybreak in order that they may make a longer march
before night. 3. They will hide the women in the forest (_acc. with_
ÇinÈ) that they may not be captured. 4. The Gauls wage many wars to
free[1] their fatherland from slavery. 5. They will resist the Romans[2]
bravely lest they be destroyed.

    [Footnote 1: Not infinitive.]

    [Footnote 2: Not accusative.]


LESSON LXIII

INFLECTION OF THE IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE THE SEQUENCE OF TENSES

Ç354.È The imperfect subjunctive may be formed by adding the personal
endings to the present active infinitive.

     CONJ. I     CONJ. II     CONJ. III                 CONJ. IV
     ACTIVE
  1. am‰«rem     mon�«rem     re«gerem     ca«perem     aud”«rem
  2. am‰«r�s     mon�«r�s     re«ger�s     ca«per�s     aud”«r�s
  3. am‰«ret     mon�«ret     re«geret     ca«peret     aud”«ret

  1. am‰r�«mus   mon�r�«mus   reger�«mus   caper�«mus   aud”r�«mus
  2. am‰r�«tis   mon�r�«tis   reger�«tis   caper�«tis   aud”r�«tis
  3. am‰«rent    mon�«rent    re«gerent    ca«perent    aud”«rent

     PASSIVE
  1. am‰«rer     mon�«rer     re«gerer     ca«perer     aud”«rer
  2. am‰r�«ris   mon�r�«ris   reger�«ris   caper�«ris   aud”r�«ris
          (-re)        (-re)        (-re)        (-re)        (-re)
  3. am‰r�«tur   mon�r�«tur   reger�«tur   caper�«tur   aud”r�«tur

  1. am‰r�«mur   mon�r�«mur   reger�«mur   caper�«mur   aud”r�«mur
  2. am‰r�«min”  mon�r�«min”  reger�«min”  caper�«min”  aud”re«min”
  3. am‰ren«tur  mon�ren«tur  regeren«tur  caperen«tur  aud”ren«tur

    _a._ In a similar way inflect the imperfect subjunctive, active and
    passive, of Çcžr™È, Çiube™È, Çsžm™È, Çiaci™È, Çmžni™È.

Ç355.È The imperfect subjunctive of the irregular verb ÇsumÈ is
inflected as follows:

        { 1. es«sem           { 1. ess�«mus
  SING. { 2. es«s�s    PLURAL { 2. ess�«tis
        { 3. es«set           { 3. es«sent

Ç356.È The three great distinctions of time are _present_, _past_, and
_future_. All tenses referring to present or future time are called
Çprimary tensesÈ, and those referring to past time are called Çsecondary
tensesÈ. Now it is a very common law of language that in a complex
sentence the tense in the dependent clause should be of the same kind as
the tense in the principal clause. In the sentence _He ÇsaysÈ that he
ÇisÈ coming_, the principal verb, _says_, is present, that is, is in a
primary tense; and _is coming_, in the dependent clause, is naturally
also primary. If I change _he says_ to _he said_,--in other words, if I
make the principal verb secondary in character,--I feel it natural to
change the verb in the dependent clause also, and I say, _He ÇsaidÈ that
he ÇwasÈ coming_. This following of a tense by another of the same kind
is called _tense sequence_, from _sequ”_, Òto follow.Ó

In Latin the law of tense sequence is obeyed with considerable
regularity, especially when an indicative in the principal clause is
followed by a subjunctive in the dependent clause. Then a primary tense
of the indicative is followed by a primary tense of the subjunctive, and
a secondary tense of the indicative is followed by a secondary tense of
the subjunctive. Learn the following table:

Ç357.È TABLE FOR SEQUENCE OF TENSES

+-----+-------------------+-------------------------------------------+
|     |  PRINCIPAL VERB   |    DEPENDENT VERBS IN THE SUBJUNCTIVE     |
| P   |      IN THE       +---------------------+---------------------+
| R   |    INDICATIVE     | _Incomplete or_     | _Completed Action_  |
| I   |                   | _Continuing Action_ |                     |
| M   +-------------------+---------------------+---------------------+
| A   |      Present      |                     |                     |
| R   |      Future       |       Present       |       Perfect       |
| T   |   Future perfect  |                     |                     |
+-----+-------------------+---------------------+---------------------+
| S D |                   |                     |                     |
| E A |    Imperfect      |                     |                     |
| C R |     Perfect       |      Imperfect      |     Pluperfect      |
| O Y |    Pluperfect     |                     |                     |
| N-  |                   |                     |                     |
+-----+-------------------+---------------------+---------------------+

Ç358.È RULE. ÇSequence of Tenses.È _Primary tenses are followed by
primary tenses and secondary by secondary._

Ç359.È EXAMPLES

I. Primary tenses in principal and dependent clauses:

  ÇMittitÈ   }
  ÇMittetÈ   } Çhomin�s ut agr™s v‰stentÈ
  ÇM”seritÈ  }

       { _sends_          }       { _that they may_           }
  _He_ { _will send_      } _men_ { _in order to_             }
       { _will have sent_ }       { _to lay waste the fields_ }

II. Secondary tenses in principal and dependent clauses:

  ÇMitt�batÈ}
  ÇM”sitÈ   } Çhomin�s ut agr™s v‰st‰rentÈ
  ÇM”seratÈ }

       { _was sending_      }       { _that they might_         }
  _He_ { _sent or has sent_ } _men_ { _in order to_             }
       { _had sent_         }       { _to lay waste the fields_ }

Ç360.È EXERCISES

I.
  1. V�nerant ut {džcerent, mitterent, vid�rent, aud”rent,
                 {džcerentur, mitterentur, vid�rentur, audirentur

  2. Fugi�bat n� {caper�tur, tr‰der�tur, vid�r�tur,
                 {nec‰r�tur, raper�tur, resisteret.

  3. Misit nžnti™s qu” {d”cerent, aud”rent, ven”rent
                       {n‰rr‰rent, aud”rentur, in concili™ sed�rent.

  4. Castra mžn”v�runt {s�s� d�fenderent, impetum sustin�rent,
       qu™ facilius    {host”s vincerent, salžtem peterent.

II. 1. C¾sar encouraged the soldiers in order that they might fight more
bravely. 2. The Helvetii left their homes to wage war. 3. The scouts set
out at once lest they should be captured by the Germans. 4. C¾sar
inflicted punishment on them in order that the others might be more
terrified. 5. He sent messengers to Rome to announce the victory.


LESSON LXIV

THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES OF PURPOSE

Ç361.È The perfect and the pluperfect subjunctive active are inflected
as follows:

     CONJ. I       CONJ. II      CONJ. III                 CONJ. IV
     PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE ACTIVE
     SINGULAR
  1. am‰«verim     monu«erim     r�«xerim     c�«perim     aud”«verim
  2. am‰«veris     monu«eris     r�«xeris     c�«peris     aud”«veris
  3. am‰«verit     monu«erit     r�«xerit     c�«perit     aud”«verit

     PLURAL
  1. am‰ve«rimus   monue«rimus   r�xe«rimus   c�pe«rimus   aud”ve«rimus
  2. am‰ve«ritis   monue«ritis   r�xe«ritis   c�pe«ritis   aud”ve«ritis
  3. am‰«verint    monu«erint    r�«xerint    c�«perint    aud”«verint

     PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE ACTIVE
     SINGULAR
  1. am‰vis«sem    monuis«sem    r�xis«sem    c�pis«sem    aud”vis«sem
  2. am‰vis«s�s    monuis«s�s    r�xis«s�s    c�pis«s�s    aud”vis«s�m
  3. am‰vis«set    monuis«set    r�xis«set    c�pis«set    aud”vis«set

     PLURAL
  1. am‰viss�«mus  monuiss�«mus  r�xiss�«mus  c�piss�«mus  aud”viss�«mus
  2. am‰viss�«tis  monuiss�«tis  r�xiss�«tis  c�piss�«tis  aud”viss�«tis
  3. am‰vis«sent   monuis«sent   r�xis«sent   c�pis«sent   aud”vis«sent

    _a._ Observe that these two tenses, like the corresponding ones in
    the indicative, are formed from the perfect stem.

    _b._ Observe that the perfect subjunctive active is like the future
    perfect indicative active, excepting that the first person singular
    ends in Ç-mÈ and not in Ç-™È.

    _c._ Observe that the pluperfect subjunctive active may be formed by
    adding Ç-issem, -iss�sÈ, etc. to the perfect stem.

    _d._ In a similar way inflect the perfect and pluperfect subjunctive
    active of Çcžr™È, Çiube™È, Çsžm™È, Çiaci™È, Çmžni™È.

Ç362.È The passive of the perfect subjunctive is formed by combining the
perfect passive participle with ÇsimÈ, the present subjunctive of ÇsumÈ.

     CONJ. I       CONJ. II      CONJ. III                 CONJ. IV
     PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE PASSIVE
     SINGULAR
  1. am‰«tus sim   mo«nitus sim  r�c«tus sim  cap«tus sim  aud”«tus sim
  2. am‰«tus s”s   mo«nitus s”s  r�c«tus s”s  cap«tus s”s  aud”«tus s”s
  3. am‰«tus sit   mo«nitus sit  r�c«tus sit  cap«tus sit  aud”«tus sit

     PLURAL
  1. am‰«t” s”mus  mo«nit” s.    r�c«t” s.    cap«t” s.    aud”«t” s.
  2. am‰«t” s”tis  mo«nit” s.    r�c«t” s.    cap«t” s.    aud”«t” s.
  3. am‰«t” sint   mo«nit” sint  r�c«t” sint  cap«t” sint  aud”«t” sint

Ç363.È The passive of the pluperfect subjunctive is formed by combining
the perfect passive participle with ÇessemÈ, the imperfect subjunctive
of ÇsumÈ.

     CONJ. I        CONJ. II        CONJ. III                 CONJ. IV
     PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE PASSIVE
     SINGULAR
  1. am‰tus essem   monitus essem   r�ctus essem   captus e.  aud”tus e.
  2. am‰tus ess�s   monitus ess�s   r�ctus ess�s   captus e.  aud”tus e.
  3. am‰tus esset   monitus esset   r�ctus esset   captus e.  aud”tus e.

     PLURAL
  1. am‰t” ess�mus  monit” ess�mus  r�ct” ess�mus  capt” e.   aud”t” e.
  2. am‰t” ess�tis  monit” ess�tis  r�ct” ess�tis  capt” e.   aud”t” e.
  3. am‰t” essent   monit” essent   r�ct” essent   capt” e.   aud”t” e.

    _a._ In a similar way inflect the perfect and pluperfect subjunctive
    passive of Çcžr™È, Çiube™È, Çsžm™È, Çiaci™È, Çmžni™È.

Ç364.È The perfect and pluperfect subjunctive of the irregular verb
ÇsumÈ are inflected as follows:

  PERFECT               PLUPERFECT
  fu«erim  fue«rimus    fuis«sem  fuiss�«mus
  fu«eris  fue«ritis    fuis«s�s  fuiss�«tis
  fu«erit  fu«erint     fuis«set  fuis«sent

Ç365.È A substantive clause is a clause used like a noun, as,

  _That the men are afraid_ is clear enough (clause as subject)
  He ordered _them to call on him_ (clause as object)

We have already had many instances of infinitive clauses used in this
way (cf. ¤213), and have noted the similarity between Latin and English
usage in this respect. But the Latin often uses the _subjunctive_ in
substantive clauses, and this marks an important difference between the
two languages.

Ç366.È RULE. ÇSubstantive Clauses of Purpose.È _A substantive clause of
purpose with the subjunctive is used as the object of verbs of
ÇcommandingÈ, ÇurgingÈ, ÇaskingÈ, ÇpersuadingÈ, or ÇadvisingÈ, where in
English we should usually have the infinitive._

EXAMPLES

  1. _The general ordered the soldiers to run_
       ÇImper‰tor m”litibus imper‰vit ut currerentÈ
  2. _He urged them to resist bravely_
       ÇHort‰tus est ut fortiter resisterentÈ
  3. _He asked them to give the children food_
       ÇPet”vit ut l”ber”s cibum darentÈ
  4. _He will persuade us not to set out_
       ÇN™b”s persu‰d�bit n� profic”sc‰murÈ
  5. _He advises us to remain at home_
       ÇMonet ut dom” mane‰musÈ

    _a._ The object clauses following these verbs all express the
    purpose or will of the principal subject that something be done or
    not done. (Cf. ¤348.)

Ç367.È The following verbs are used with object clauses of purpose.
Learn the list and the principal parts of the new ones.

  ÇhortorÈ, _urge_
  Çimper™È, _order_ (with the _dative_ of the _person_ ordered and a
    _subjunctive clause_ of the _thing_ ordered done)
  Çmone™È, _advise_
  Çpet™È, Çquaer™È, Çrog™È, _ask, seek_
  Çpersu‰de™È, _persuade_ (with the same construction as imper™)
  Çpostul™È, _demand, require_
  Çsu‰de™È, _advise_ (cf. Çpersu‰de™È)

N.B. Remember that Çiube™È, _order_, takes the infinitive as in English.
(Cf. ¤213.1.) Compare the sentences

  ÇIube™ eum ven”reÈ, _I order him to come_
  ÇImper™ e” ut veniatÈ, _I give orders to him that he is to come_

We ordinarily translate both of these sentences like the first, but the
difference in meaning between iube™ and imper™ in the Latin requires the
_infinitive_ in the one case and the _subjunctive_ in the other.

Ç368.È EXERCISES

I. 1. Petit atque hort‰tur ut ipse d”cat. 2. Caesar Helv�ti”s imperr‰vit
n� per pr™vinciam iter facerent. 3. Caesar n™n iussit Helv�ti™s per
pr™vinciam iter facere. 4. Ille c”vibus persu‰sit ut d� f”nibus su”s
disc�derent. 5. Caesar pr”ncip�s mon�bit n� proelium committant.
6. Postul‰vit n� cum Helv�ti”s aut cum e™rum soci”s bellum gererent.
7. Ab i”s quaes”v” n� profic”scerentur. 8. I”s persu‰d�re n™n potu” ut
dom” man�rent.

II. 1. Who ordered C¾sar to make the march? (_Write this sentence both
with_ Çimper™È _and with_ Çiube™È.) 2. The faithless scouts persuaded
him to set out at daybreak. 3. They will ask him not to inflict
punishment. 4. He demanded that they come to the camp. 5. He advised
them to tell everything (ÇomniaÈ).

NOTE. Do not forget that the English infinitive expressing purpose must
be rendered by a Latin subjunctive. Review ¤352.

  [Illustration: LEGIO ITER FACIT]


LESSON LXV

THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF _POSSUM_ ¥ VERBS OF FEARING

Ç369.È Learn the subjunctive of ÇpossumÈ (¤495), and note especially the
position of the accent.

Ç370.È ÇSubjunctive after Verbs of Fearing.È We have learned that what
we want done or not done is expressed in Latin by a subjunctive clause
of purpose. In this class belong also _clauses after verbs of fearing_,
for we fear either that something will happen or that it will not, and
we either want it to happen or we do not. If we want a thing to happen
and fear that it will not, the purpose clause is introduced by ÇutÈ. If
we do not want it to happen and fear that it will, Çn�È is used. Owing
to a difference between the English and Latin idiom we translate ÇutÈ
after a verb of fearing by _that not_, and Çn�È by _that_ or _lest_.

Ç371.È EXAMPLES

  Çtime™È   }      { ÇveniatÈ
  Çtim�b™È  } ÇutÈ {
  Çtimuer™È }      { Çv�neritÈ

_I fear_, _shall fear_, _shall have feared_, _that he will not come_,
_has not come_

  Çtim�bamÈ  }      { Çven”retÈ
  Çtimu”È    } ÇutÈ {
  ÇtimueramÈ }      { Çv�nissetÈ

_I was fearing_, _feared_, _had feared_, _that he would not come_, _had
not come_

The same examples with Çn�È instead of ÇutÈ would be translated _I fear
that_ or _lest he will come_, _has come_, etc.

Ç372.È RULE. ÇSubjunctive after Verbs of Fearing.È _Verbs of fearing are
followed by a substantive clause of purpose introduced by ÇutÈ (Çthat
notÈ) or Çn�È (ÇthatÈ or ÇlestÈ)._

Ç373.È EXERCISES

I. 1. Caesar ver�b‰tur ut supplicium capt”v™rum Gall”s plac�ret.
2. R™m‰n” ips” magnopere ver�bantur n� Helv�ti” iter per pr™vinciam
facerent. 3. Tim�bant ut satis re” fržment‰riae mitt” posset. 4. Vereor
ut hostium impetum sustin�re possim. 5. Timuit n� imped”menta ab
hostibus capta essent. 6. Caesar numquam timuit n� legi™n�s vincerentur.
7. Legi™n�s pugn‰re n™n timu�runt.[1]

II. 1. We fear that they are not coming. 2. We fear lest they are
coming. 3. We feared that they had come. 4. We feared that they had
not come. 5. They feared greatly that the camp could not be defended.
6. Almost all feared[1] to leave the camp.

    [Footnote 1: Distinguish between what one is afraid _to do_
    (complementary infinitive as here) and what one is afraid _will
    take place_ or _has taken place_ (substantive clause with the
    subjunctive).]


LESSON LXVI

THE PARTICIPLES

Ç374.È The Latin verb has the following Participles:[1]

  [TranscriberÕs Note:
  For reasons of space, this table is given in two forms: first a
  reduced version without translation, and then the complete text,
  including translations, split into two elements.]

            CONJ. I   CONJ. II   CONJ. III           CONJ. IV
            ACTIVE
  PRESENT   am‰ns     mon�ns     reg�ns    capi�ns   audi�ns
  FUTURE    am‰tžrus  monitžrus  r�ctžrus  captžrus  aud”tžrus

            PASSIVE
  PERFECT   am‰tus    monitus    r�ctus    captus    aud”tus
  FUTURE[2] amandus   monendus   regendus  capiendus  audiendus

            CONJ. I            CONJ. II
            ACTIVE
  PRESENT   am‰ns              mon�ns
              _loving_           _advising_
  FUTURE    am‰tžrus           monitžrus
              _about to love_    _about to advise_

            PASSIVE
  PERFECT   am‰tus             monitus
              _loved, having_  _advised, having been advised_
              _been loved_
  FUTURE[2] amandus            monendus
              _to be loved_    _to be advised_

            CONJ. III                            CONJ. IV
            ACTIVE
  PRESENT   reg�ns             capi�ns           audi�ns
              _ruling_           _taking_         _hearing_
  FUTURE    r�ctžrus           captžrus          aud”tžrus
              _about to rule_   _about to take_    _about to hear_

            PASSIVE
  PERFECT   r�ctus             captus              aud”tus
              _ruled, having_    _taken, having_     _heard, havinh_
              _been ruled_       _been taken_        _been heard_
  FUTURE[2] regendus           capiendus           audiendus
              _to be ruled_      _to be taken_       _to be heard_

    [Footnote 1: Review ¤203.]

    [Footnote 2: The future passive participle is often called the
    _gerundive_.]

    _a._ The present active and future passive participles are formed
    from the present stem, and the future active and perfect passive
    participles are formed from the participial stem.

    _b._ The present active participle is formed by adding Ç-nsÈ to the
    present stem. In Ç-i™È verbs of the third conjugation, and in the
    fourth conjugation, the stem is modified by the addition of Ç-�-È,
    as Çcapi-�-nsÈ, Çaudi-�-nsÈ. It is declined like an adjective of one
    ending of the third declension. (Cf. ¤256.)

         Çam‰nsÈ, _loving_
         BASE Çamant-È STEM Çamanti-È
         SINGULAR                   PLURAL
         MASC. AND FEM.  NEUT.      MASC. AND FEM.  NEUT.
  _Nom._ am‰ns           am‰ns      amant�s         amantia
  _Gen._ amantis         amantis    amantium        amantium
  _Dat._ amant”          amant”     amantibus       amantibus
  _Acc._ amantem         am‰ns      amant”s         amantia
                                      _or_ -�s
  _Abl._ amant”          amant”     amantibus       amantibus
           _or_ -e         _or_ -e

  (1) When used as an adjective the ablative singular ends in Ç-”È;
  when used as a participle or as a substantive, in Ç-eÈ.

  (2) In a similar way decline Çmon�nsÈ, Çreg�nsÈ, Çcapi�nsÈ, Çaudi�nsÈ.

    _c._ The future active participle is formed by adding Ç-žrusÈ to the
    base of the participial stem. We have already met this form combined
    with ÇesseÈ to produce the future active infinitive. (Cf. ¤206.)

    _d._ For the perfect passive participle see ¤201. The future
    passive participle or gerundive is formed by adding Ç-ndusÈ to the
    present stem.

    _e._ All participles in Ç-usÈ are declined like ÇbonusÈ.

    _f._ Participles agree with nouns or pronouns like adjectives.

    _g._ Give all the participles of the following verbs: Çcžr™È,
    Çiube™È, Çsžm™È, Çiaci™È, Çmžni™È.

Ç375.È ÇParticiples of Deponent Verbs.È Deponent verbs have the
participles of the active voice as well as of the passive; consequently
every deponent verb has four participles, as,

                _Pres. Act._ Çhort‰nsÈ, _urging_
                 _Fut. Act._ Çhort‰tžrusÈ, _about to urge_
     _Perf. Pass._ (in form) Çhort‰tusÈ, _having urged_
  _Fut. Pass._ (_Gerundive_) ÇhortandusÈ, _to be urged_

    _a._ Observe that the perfect participle of deponent verbs is
    passive in form but _active_ in meaning. _No other verbs have a
    perfect active participle._ On the other hand, the future passive
    participle of deponent verbs is passive in meaning as in other
    verbs.

    _b._ Give the participles of Çc™norÈ, ÇvereorÈ, ÇsequorÈ, ÇpatiorÈ,
    ÇpartiorÈ.

Ç376.È ÇTenses of the Participle.È The tenses express time as follows:

  1. The present active participle corresponds to the English present
  active participle in _-ing_, but can be used only of an action
  occurring at the same time as the action of the main verb; as,
  Çm”lit�s ”nsequent�s c�p�runt mult™sÈ, _the soldiers, while pursuing,
  captured many._ Here the pursuing and the capturing are going on
  together.

  2. The perfect participle (excepting of deponents) is regularly
  passive and corresponds to the English past participle with or without
  the auxiliary _having been_; as, Çaud”tusÈ, _heard_ or _having been
  heard_.

  3. The future active participle, translated _about to_, etc., denotes
  time after the action of the main verb.

Ç377.È Review ¤¤203, 204, and, note the following model sentences:

  1. ÇM”lit�s current�s erant d�fess”È, _the soldiers who were running_
  (lit. _running_) _were weary_.

  2. ÇCaesar profectžrus R™mam n™n exspect‰vitÈ, _C¾sar, when about to
  set out_ (lit. _about to set out_) _for Rome, did not wait_.

  3. ÇOppidum captum v”dimusÈ, _we saw the town which had been captured_
  (lit. _captured town_).

  4. ÇImper‰tor tr”duum mor‰tus profectus estÈ, _the general, since_
  (_when_, or _after_) _he had delayed_ (lit. _the general, having
  delayed_) _three days, set out_.

  5. ÇM”lit�s v”ct” terga n™n vert�runtÈ, _the soldiers, though they
  were conquered_ (lit. _the soldiers conquered_), _did not retreat_.

In each of these sentences the literal translation of the participle is
given in parentheses. We note, however, that its proper translation
usually requires a clause beginning with some conjunction (_when, since,
after, though_, etc.), or a relative clause. Consider, in each case,
what translation will best bring out the thought, and do not, as a rule,
translate the participle literally.

Ç378.È EXERCISES

I. 1. Puer tim�ns n� capi‰tur fugit. 2. Aquila ”r‰ comm™ta av”s reliqu‰s
interficere c™n‰ta erat. 3. M”lit�s ab hostibus press” t�la iacere n™n
potu�runt. 4. Caesar decimam legi™nem laud‰tžrus ad pr”mum agmen
pr™gressus est. 5. Imper‰tor hort‰tus equit�s ut fortiter pugn‰rent
signum proeli™ dedit. 6. M”lit�s host”s oct™ milia passuum ”nsecžt”
mult”s cum capt”v”s ad castra revert�runt. 7. S™l ori�ns mult™s
interfect™s v”dit. 8. R™m‰n” c™nsilium aud‰x suspic‰t” barbaris s�s�
n™n comm”s�runt. 9. N‰vis � portž �gressa nžll™ in per”cul™ erat.

II.[3] 1. The army was in very great danger while marching through the
enemyÕs country. 2. Frightened by the length of the way, they longed for
home. 3. When the scouts were about to set out, they heard the shouts of
victory. 4. When we had delayed many days, we set fire to the buildings
and departed. 5. While living at Rome I heard orators much better than
these. 6. The soldiers who are fighting across the river are no braver
than we.

    [Footnote 3: In this exercise use participles for the subordinate
    clauses.]


LESSON LXVII

THE IRREGULAR VERBS _VOLï_, _NïLï_, _MåLï_
THE ABLATIVE WITH A PARTICIPLE, OR ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE

Ç379.È Learn the principal parts and conjugation of Çvol™È, _wish_;
Çn™l™È (ÇneÈ + Çvol™È), _be unwilling_; Çm‰l™È (ÇmagisÈ + Çvol™È), _be
more willing, prefer_ (¤497). Note the irregularities in the present
indicative, subjunctive, and infinitive, and in the imperfect
subjunctive. (Cf. ¤354.)

    _a._ These verbs are usually followed by the infinitive with or
    without a subject accusative; as, Çvolunt ven”reÈ, _they wish to
    come_; Çvolunt am”c™s ven”reÈ, _they wish their friends to come_.
    The English usage is the same.[1]

    [Footnote 1: Sometimes the subjunctive of purpose is used after
    these verbs. (See ¤366.)]

[ Conjugations given in ¤497:

  PRINCIPAL PARTS:
  Çvol™, velle, volu”È, ----, _be willing, will, wish_
  Çn™l™, n™lle, n™lu”È, ----, _be unwilling, will not_
  Çm‰l™, m‰lle, m‰lu”È, ----, _be more willing, prefer_

  INDICATIVE
           SINGULAR
  _Pres._  vol™                n™l™                m‰l™
           v”s                 n™n vis             m‰v”s
           vult                n™n vult            m‰vult

           PLURAL
           volumus             n™lumus             m‰lumus
           vultis              n™n vultis          m‰vul«tis
           volunt              n™lunt              m‰lunt

  _Impf._  vol�bam             n™l�bam             m‰l�bam
  _Fut._   volam, vol�s, etc.  n™lam, n™l�s, etc.  m‰lam, m‰l�s, etc.
  _Perf._  volu”               n™lu”               m‰lu”
  _Plup._  volueram            n™lueram            m‰lueram
  _F. P._  voluer™             n™luer™             m‰luer™

  SUBJUNCTIVE
           SINGULAR
  _Pres._  velim               n™lim               m‰lim
           vel”s               n™l”s               m‰l”s
           velit               n™lit               m‰lit

           PLURAL
           vel”«mus            n™l”«mus            m‰l”«mus
           vel”«tis            n™l”«tis            m‰l”«tis
           velint              n™lint              m‰lint

  _Impf._  vellem              n™llem              m‰llem
  _Perf._  voluerim            n™luerim            m‰luerim
  _Plup._  voluissem           n™luissem           m‰luissem


  IMPERATIVE
  _Pres._  n™l”
           n™l”te
  _Fut._   n™l”t™, etc.

  INFINITIVE
  _Pres._  velle               n™lle               m‰lle
  _Perf._  voluisse            n™luisse            m‰luisse

  PARTICIPLE
  _Pres._  vol�ns, -entis      n™l�ns, -entis      ----]

Ç380.È Observe the following sentences:

  1. ÇMagistr™ laudante omn�s puer” d”ligenter lab™rantÈ, _with the
  teacher praising_, or _since the teacher praises_, or _the teacher
  praising, all the boys labor diligently._

  2. ÇCaesare džcente n�m™ pr™gred” timetÈ, _with C¾sar leading_, or
  _when C¾sar leads_, or _if C¾sar leads_, or _C¾sar leading, no one
  fears to advance._

  3. ÇHis r�bus cognit”s m”lit�s fžg�runtÈ, _when this was known_, or
  _since this was known_, or _these things having been learned, the
  soldiers fled._

  4. ÇProeli™ commiss™ mult” vulner‰t” suntÈ, _after the battle had
  begun_, or _when the battle had begun_, or _the battle having been
  joined, many were wounded._

    _a._ One of the fundamental ablative relations is expressed in
    English by the preposition _with_ (cf. ¤50). In each of the
    sentences above we have a noun and a participle in agreement in
    the ablative, and the translation shows that in each instance the
    ablative expresses _attendant circumstance_. For example, in the
    first sentence the circumstance attending or accompanying the
    diligent labor of the boys is the praise of the teacher. This is
    clearly a _with_ relation, and the ablative is the case to use.

    _b._ We observe, further, that the ablative and its participle are
    absolutely independent grammatically of the rest of the sentence.
    If we were to express the thought in English in a similar way, we
    should use the nominative independent or absolute. In Latin the
    construction is called the Ablative Absolute, or the Ablative with a
    Participle. This form of expression is exceedingly common in Latin,
    but rather rare in English, so we must not, as a rule, employ the
    English absolute construction to translate the ablative abolute. The
    attendant circumstance may be one of _time_ (when or after), or one
    of _cause_ (since), or one of _concession_ (though), or one of
    _condition_ (if). In each case try to discover the precise relation,
    and tranlate the ablative and its participle by a clause which will
    best express the thought.

Ç381.È RULE. ÇAblative Absolute.È _The ablative of a noun or pronoun
with a present or perfect participle in agreement is used to express
attendant circumstance._

NOTE 1. The verb ÇsumÈ has no present participle. In consequence we
often find two nouns or a noun and an adjective in the ablative absolute
with no participle expressed; as, Çt� duceÈ, _you_ (being) _leader_,
_with you as leader_; Çpatre ”nfirm™È, _my father_ (being) _weak_.

NOTE 2. Be very careful not to put in the ablative absolute a noun and
participle that form the subject or object of a sentence. Compare

    _a._ _The Gauls, having been conquered by C¾sar, returned home_

    _b._ _The Gauls having been conquered by C¾sar, the army returned
           home_

In _a_ the subject is _The Gauls having been conquered by C¾sar_, and we
translate,

  ÇGall” ‰ Caesare victi domum revert�runtÈ

In _b_ the subject is _the army_. _The Gauls having been conquered by
C¾sar_ is nominative absolute in English, which requires the ablative
absolute in Latin, and we translate,

  ÇGall”s ‰ Caesare vict”s exercitus domum revertitÈ

NOTE 3. The fact that only deponent verbs have a perfect active
participle (cf. ¤375.a) often compels a change of voice when
translating from one language to the other. For example, we can
translate _C¾sar having encouraged the legions_ just as it stands,
because ÇhortorÈ is a deponent verb. But if we wish to say _C¾sar having
conquered the Gauls_, we have to change the voice of the participle to
the passive because Çvinc™È is not deponent, and say, _the Gauls having
been conquered by C¾sar_ (see translation above).

Ç382.È EXERCISES

I. 1. M‰v”s, n™n v”s, vultis, n™lumus. 2. Ut n™lit, ut vell�mus, ut
m‰lit. 3. N™l”, velle, n™luisse, m‰lle. 4. Vult, m‰vultis, ut n™llet,
n™l”te. 5. S™le oriente, av�s cant‰re inc�p�runt. 6. Cl‰m™ribus aud”t”s,
barbar” pr™gred” recžs‰bant. 7. Caesare legi™n�s hort‰t™, m”lit�s paul™
fortius pugn‰v�runt. 8. H”s r�bus cognit”s, Helv�ti” f”nitim”s
persu‰s�runt ut s�cum iter facerent. 9. Lab™ribus c™nfect”s, m”lit�s
‰ Caesare quaer�bant ut sibi praemia daret. 10. Concili™ convoc‰t™,
pr”ncip�s ita respond�runt. 11. Dux plžr”s di�s in Helv�ti™rum f”nibus
mor‰ns mult™s v”c™s incendit. 12. Magnitždine Germ‰n™rum cognit‰, qu”dam
ex R™m‰nis tim�bant. 13. Merc‰t™ribus rog‰t”s, Caesar nihil™ plžs
reper”re potuit.

II. 1. He was unwilling, lest they prefer, they have wished. 2. You
prefer, that they might be unwilling, they wish. 3. We wish, they had
preferred, that he may prefer. 4. C¾sar, when he heard the rumor (_the
rumor having been heard_), commanded (Çimper‰reÈ) the legions to advance
more quickly. 5. Since C¾sar was leader, the men were willing to make
the journey. 6. A few, terrified[2] by the reports which they had heard,
preferred to remain at home. 7. After these had been left behind, the
rest hastened as quickly as possible. 8. After C¾sar had undertaken the
business (_C¾sar, the business having been undertaken_), he was
unwilling to delay longer.[3]

    [Footnote 2: Would the ablative absolute be correct here?]

    [Footnote 3: Not ÇlongiusÈ. Why?]


LESSON LXVIII

THE IRREGULAR VERB _Fëï_ ¥ THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF RESULT

Ç383.È The verb Çf”™È, _be made, happen_, serves as the passive of
Çfaci™È, _make_, in the present system. The rest of the verb is formed
regularly from Çfaci™È. Learn the principal parts and conjugation
(¤500). Observe that the ÇiÈ is long except before Ç-erÈ and in ÇfitÈ.

    _a._ The compounds of ÇfacioÈ with prepositions usually form the
    passive regularly, as,

      _Active_   Çc™nfici™, c™nficere, c™nf�c”, c™nfectusÈ
      _Passive_  Çc™nficior, c™nfic”, c™nfectus sumÈ

[ Conjugation given in ¤500:

  PRINCIPAL PARTS Çf”™, fier”, factus sumÈ

  INDICATIVE                 SUBJUNCTIVE              IMPERATIVE
  _Pres._  f”™      ----     f”am          _2d Pers._ f”      f”te
           f”s      ----
           fit      f”unt
  _Impf._  f”�bam            fierem
  _Fut._   f”am              ----

  INDICATIVE                       SUBJUNCTIVE
  _Perf._  factus, -a, -um  sum    factus, -a, -um  sim
  _Plup._  factus, -a, -um  eram   factus, -a, -um  essem
  _F. P._  factus, -a, -um  er™

  INFINITIVE                       PARTICIPLES
  _Pres._  fier”                   _Perf._  factus, -a, -um
  _Perf._  factus, -a, -um  esse   _Ger._   faciendus, -a, -um
  _Fut._   [[factum ”r”]]]

Ç384.È Observe the following sentences:

  1. ÇTerror erat tantus ut omn�s fugerentÈ, _the terror was so great
  that all fled._

  2. ÇTerror erat tantus ut n™n facile m”lit�s s�s� reciperentÈ, _the
  terror was so great that the soldiers did not easily recover
  themselves._

  3. ÇTerror f�cit ut omn�s fugerentÈ, _terror caused all to flee_
  (lit. _made that all fled_).

    _a._ Each of these sentences is complex, containing a principal
    clause and a subordinate clause.

    _b._ The principal clause names a cause and the subordinate clause
    states the _consequence_ or _result_ of this cause.

    _c._ The subordinate clause has its verb in the subjunctive, though
    it is translated like an indicative. The construction is called the
    _subjunctive of consequence or result_, and the clause is called a
    consecutive or result clause.

    _d._ In the last example the clause of result is the object of the
    verb Çf�citÈ.

    _e._ The conjunction introducing the consecutive or result clause is
    ÇutÈ = _so that_; negative, Çut n™nÈ = _so that not_.

Ç385.È RULE. ÇSubjunctive of Result.È _Consecutive clauses of result are
introduced by ÇutÈ or Çut n™nÈ and have the verb in the subjunctive._

Ç386.È RULE. _Object clauses of result with ÇutÈ or Çut n™nÈ are found
after verbs of ÇeffectingÈ or Çbringing aboutÈ._

Ç387.È ÇPurpose and Result Clauses Compared.È There is great similarity
in the expression of purpose and of result in Latin. If the sentence is
affirmative, both purpose and result clauses may be introduced by ÇutÈ;
but if the sentence is negative, the purpose clause has Çn�È and the
result clause Çut n™nÈ. Result clauses are often preceded in the main
clause by such words as ÇtamÈ, ÇitaÈ, ÇsicÈ (_so_), and these serve to
point them out. Compare

    _a._ ÇTam graviter vulner‰tus est ut caper�turÈ
      _He was so severely wounded that he was captured_
    _b._ ÇGraviter vulner‰tus est ut caper�turÈ
      _He was severely wounded in order that he might be captured_

Which sentence contains a result clause, and how is it pointed out?

Ç388.È EXERCISES

I. 1. Fit, f”et, ut f”at, f”�b‰mus. 2. F”™, f”�s, ut fierent, fier”,
f”unt. 3. F”�tis, ut f”‰mus, f”s, f”emus. 4. M”lit�s erant tam tard”
ut ante noctem in castra n™n perven”rent. 5. S™l facit ut omnia sint
pulchra. 6. Eius mod” per”cula erant ut n�m™ profic”sc” vellet.
7. Equit�s hostium cum equit‰tž nostr™ in itinere contend�runt, ita
tamen[1] ut nostr” omnibus in partibus superi™r�s essent. 8. Virtžs
m”litum nostr™rum f�cit ut host�s n� žnum quidem[2] impetum sustin�rent.
9. Homin�s erant tam aud‰c�s ut nžll™ mod™ contin�r” possent.
10. Spatium erat tam parvum ut m”lit�s t�la iacere n™n facile possent.
11. H™c proeli™ fact™ barbar” ita perterrit” sunt ut ab ultim”s gentibus
l�g‰t” ad Caesarem mitterentur. 12. Hoc proelium factum est n� l�g‰t” ad
Caesarem mitterentur.

    [Footnote 1: Çita tamenÈ, _with such a result however_.]

    [Footnote 2: Çn� ... quidemÈ, _not even_. The emphatic word is
    placed between.]

II. 1. It will happen, they were being made, that it may happen. 2. It
happens, he will be made, to happen. 3. They are made, we were being
made, lest it happen. 4. The soldiers are so brave that they conquer.
5. The soldiers are brave in order that they may conquer. 6. The
fortification was made so strong that it could not be taken. 7. The
fortification was made strong in order that it might not be taken.
8. After the town was taken,[3] the townsmen feared that they would be
made slaves. 9. What state is so weak that it is unwilling to defend
itself?

    [Footnote 3: Ablative absolute.]


LESSON LXIX

THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF CHARACTERISTIC OR DESCRIPTION
THE PREDICATE ACCUSATIVE

Ç389.È Akin to the subjunctive of consequence or result is the use of
the subjunctive in clauses of characteristic or description.

This construction is illustrated in the following sentences:

  1. ÇQuis est qu” suam domum n™n amet?È _who is there who does not love
  his own home?_

  2. ÇErant qu” hoc facere n™llentÈ, _there were (some) who were
  unwilling to do this._

  3. ÇTž n™n is es qu” am”c™s tr‰d‰sÈ, _you are not such a one as to_,
  or _you are not the man to, betray your friends._

  4. ÇNihil vide™ quod timeamÈ, _I see nothing to fear_ (nothing of such
  as character as to fear it).

    _a._ Each of these examples contains a descriptive relative clause
    which tells what kind of a person or thing the antecedent is. To
    express this thought the subjunctive is used. A relative clause that
    merely states a fact and does not describe the antecedent uses the
    indicative. Compare the sentences

      _C¾sar is the man who is leading us_,
        ÇCaesar est is qu” n™s džcitÈ
          (mere statement of fact, no description, with the indicative)
      _C¾sar is the man to lead us_,
        ÇCaesar est is qu” n™s džcatÈ
          (descriptive relative clause with the subjunctive)

    _b._ Observe that in this construction a demonstrative pronoun and a
    relative, as is Çqu”È, are translated _such a one as to, the man
    to_.

    _c._ In which of the following sentences would you use the
    indicative and in which the subjunctive?

       _These are not the men who did this_
       _These are not the men to do this_

Ç390.È RULE. ÇSubjunctive of Characteristic.È _A relative clause with
the subjunctive is often used to describe an antecedent. This is called
the Çsubjunctive of characteristic or descriptionÈ._

Ç391.È Observe the sentences

  1. R™m‰n” ÇCaesarem c™nsulemÈ f�c�runt,
       _the Romans made ÇC¾sar consulÈ_.

  2. ÇCaesar c™nsulÈ ‰ R™m‰n”s factus est,
       _ÇC¾sarÈ was made ÇconsulÈ by the Romans_.

    _a._ Observe in 1 that the transitive verb Çf�c�runtÈ, _made_, has
    two objects: (1) the direct object, ÇCaesaremÈ; (2) a second object,
    Çc™nsulemÈ, referring to the same person as the direct object and
    completing the predicate. The second accusative is called a
    Predicate Accusative.

    _b._ Observe in 2 that when the verb is changed to the passive both
    of the accusatives become nominatives, the _direct object_ becoming
    the _subject_ and the _predicate accusative_ the _predicate
    nominative_.

Ç392.È RULE. ÇTwo Accusatives.È _Verbs of ÇmakingÈ, ÇchoosingÈ,
ÇcallingÈ, ÇshowingÈ, and the like, may take a predicate accusative
along with the direct object. With the passive voice the two accusatives
become nominatives._

Ç393.È The verbs commonly found with two accusatives are

  Çcreo, cre‰re, cre‰v”, cre‰tusÈ, _choose_
  Çappell™, appell‰re, appell‰v”, appell‰tusÈ }
  Çn™min™, n™min‰re, n™min‰v”, n™min‰tusÈ     } _call_
  Çvoc™, voc‰re, voc‰v”, voc‰tusÈ             }
  Çfaci™, facere, f�c”, factusÈ, _make_

Ç394.È EXERCISES

I. 1. In Germ‰niae silvis sunt[1] multa genera fer‰rum quae reliqu”s
in loc”s n™n v”sa sint. 2. Erant[1] itinera duo quibus Helv�ti” dom™
disc�dere possent. 3. Erat[1] manus nžlla, nžllum oppidum, nžllum
praesidium quod s� arm”s d�fenderet. 4. T™t™ fržment™ rapt™, dom” nihil
erat qu™ mortem prohib�re possent. 5. R™m‰n” Galbam ducem cre‰v�runt et
summ‰ celerit‰te profect” sunt. 6. Neque erat[1] tantae multitždinis
quisquam qu” mor‰r” vellet. 7. Germ‰n” n™n i” sunt qu” adventum Caesaris
vereantur. 8. C™nsulibus occ”s”s erant qu”[2] vellent cum r�gem cre‰re.
9. P‰ce fact‰ erat n�m™ qu” arma tr‰dere n™llet. 10. Inter Helv�ti™s
quis erat qu” n™bilior ill™ esset?

II. 1. The Romans called the city Rome. 2. The city was called Rome by
the Romans. 3. The better citizens wished to choose him king. 4. The
brave soldier was not the man to run. 5. There was no one [3]to call me
friend. 6. These are not the men to[4] betray their friends. 7. There
were (some) who called him the bravest of all.

    [Footnote 1: Remember that when the verb ÇsumÈ precedes its subject
    it is translated _there is_, _there are_, _there were_, etc.]

    [Footnote 2: Çerant qu”È, _there were_ (some) _who_. A wholly
    indefinite antecedent of Çqu”È does not need to be expressed.]

    [Footnote 3: A relative clause of characteristic or description.]

    [Footnote 4: See ¤389.b.]

       *       *       *       *       *

  ÇEighth Review, Lessons LXI-LXIX, ¤¤527-528È

       *       *       *       *       *

LESSON LXX

THE CONSTRUCTIONS WITH THE CONJUNCTION _CUM_ THE ABLATIVE OF
SPECIFICATION

Ç395.È The conjunction ÇcumÈ has the following meanings and
constructions:

  ÇcumÈ TEMPORAL = _when_, followed by the indicative or the subjunctive
  ÇcumÈ CAUSAL = _since_, followed by the subjunctive
  ÇcumÈ CONCESSIVE = _although_, followed by the subjunctive

As you observe, the mood after ÇcumÈ is sometimes indicative and
sometimes subjunctive. The reason for this will be made clear by a study
of the following sentences:

  1. ÇCaesarem v”d” tum cum in Galli‰ eramÈ,
       _I saw C¾sar at the time when I was in Gaul_.

  2. ÇCaesar in e™s impetum f�cit cum p‰cem peterentÈ,
       _C¾sar made an attack upon them when they were seeking peace_.

  3. ÇHoc erat difficile cum pauc” sine vulneribus essentÈ,
       _this was difficult, since only a few were without wounds_.

  4. ÇCum pr”m” ™rdin�s fžgissent, tamen reliqu” fortiter c™nsist�bantÈ,
       _though the front ranks had fled, yet the rest bravely stood
       their ground_.

    _a._ The underlying principle is one already familiar to you (cf.
    ¤389.a). When the ÇcumÈ clause states a fact and simply _fixes the
    time_ at which the main action took place, the indicative mood is
    used. So, in the first example, Çcum in Galli‰ eramÈ fixes the time
    when I saw C¾sar.

    _b._ On the other hand, when the ÇcumÈ clause _describes the
    circumstances_ under which the main act took place, the subjunctive
    mood is used. So, in the second example, the principal clause states
    that C¾sar made an attack, and the ÇcumÈ clause describes the
    circumstances under which this act occurred. The idea of _time_ is
    also present, but it is subordinate to the idea of _description_.
    Sometimes the descriptive clause is one of _cause_ and we translate
    ÇcumÈ by _since_; sometimes it denotes _concession_ and ÇcumÈ is
    translated _although_.

Ç396.È RULE. ÇConstructions with _Cum_È. _The conjunction ÇcumÈ means
ÇwhenÈ, ÇsinceÈ, or ÇalthoughÈ. It is followed by the subjunctive unless
it means ÇwhenÈ and its clause fixes the time at which the main action
took place._

NOTE. ÇCumÈ in clauses of description with the subjunctive is much more
common than its use with the indicative.

Ç397.È Note the following sentences:

  1. ÇOppidum erat parvum magnitždine sed magnum multitždine hominumÈ,
    _the town was small in size but great in population_.

  2. ÇHom™ erat corpore ”nf”rmus sed validus anim™È,
       _the man was weak in body but strong in courage_.

    _a._ Observe that ÇmagnitždineÈ, ÇmultitždineÈ, ÇcorporeÈ, and
    Çanim™È tell _in what respect_ something is true. The relation is
    one covered by the ablative case, and the construction is called the
    _ablative of specification_.

Ç398.È RULE. ÇAblative of Specification.È _The ablative is used to
denote Çin what respectÈ something is true._

Ç399.È IDIOMS

  Çaliquem certi™rem facereÈ, _to inform some one_ (lit. _to make some
    one more certain_)
  Çcertior fier”È, _to be informed_ (lit. _to be made more certain_)
  Çiter dareÈ, _to give a right of way, allow to pass_
  Çobsid�s inter s� dareÈ, _to give hostages to each other_

Ç400.È EXERCISES

I. 1. Helv�ti” cum patrum nostr™rum tempore dom™ prefect” essent,
c™nsulis exercitum in fugam dederant. 2. Cum Caesar in Galliam v�nit,
Helv�ti” ali™s agr™s pet�bant. 3. Caesar cum in citeri™re Gallia esset,
tamen d� Helv�ti™rum c™nsili”s certior f”�bat. 4. Cum Helv�ti” bell™
cl‰rissim” essent, Caesar iter per pr™vinciam dare recžs‰vit. 5. L�g‰tus
cum haec aud”visset, Caesarem certi™rem fecit. 6. Cum princip�s inter s�
obsid�s darent, R™m‰n” bellum par‰v�runt. 7. Caesar, cum id nžnti‰tum
esset, m‰tžrat ab urbe profic”sc”. 8. N� virtžte quidem Gall” erant
par�s Germ‰nis. 9. Caesar neque corpore neque anim™ ”nf”rmus erat.
10. Illud bellum tum inc�pit cum Caesar fuit c™nsul.

Observe in each case what mood follows ÇcumÈ, and try to give the
reasons for its use. In the third sentence the ÇcumÈ clause is
concessive, in the fourth and sixth causal.

II. 1. That battle was fought at the time when (Çtum cumÈ) I was at
Rome. 2. Though the horsemen were few in number, nevertheless they did
not retreat. 3. When the camp had been sufficiently fortified, the enemy
returned home. 4. Since the tribes are giving hostages to each other,
we shall inform C¾sar. 5. The Gauls and the Germans are very unlike in
language and laws.


LESSON LXXI

VOCABULARY REVIEW ¥ THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE ¥ THE PREDICATE GENITIVE

Ç401.È Review the word lists in ¤¤510, 511.

Ç402.È ÇThe Gerund.È Suppose we had to translate the sentence

  _By overcoming the Gauls C¾sar won great glory_

We can see that _overcoming_ here is a verbal noun corresponding to
the English infinitive in _-ing_, and that the thought calls for the
ablative of means. To translate this by the Latin infinitive would be
impossible, because the infinitive is indeclinable and therefore has
no ablative case form. Latin, however, has another verbal noun of
corresponding meaning, called the ÇgerundÈ, declined as a neuter of
the second declension in the _genitive_, _dative_, _accusative_, and
_ablative singular_, and thus supplying the cases that the infinitive
lacks.[1] Hence, to decline in Latin the verbal noun _overcoming_, we
should use the infinitive for the nominative and the gerund for the
other cases, as follows:

  _Nom._  Çsuper‰reÈ, _overcoming, to overcome_   INFINITIVE
  _Gen._  Çsuperand”È, _of overcoming_            }
  _Dat._  Çsuperand™È,  _for overcoming_          }
  _Acc._  ÇsuperandumÈ, _overcoming_              } GERUND
  _Abl._  Çsuperand™È, _by overcoming_            }

Like the infinitive, the gerund governs the same case as the verb from
which it is derived. So the sentence given above becomes in Latin

  ÇSuperand™ Gall™s Caesar magnam gl™riam report‰vitÈ

    [Footnote 1: Sometimes, however, the infinitive is used as an
    accusative.]

Ç403.È The gerund[2] is formed by adding Ç-nd”, -nd™, -ndum, -nd™È, to
the present stem, which is shortened or otherwise changed, as shown
below:

PARADIGM OF THE GERUND

          CONJ. I   CONJ. II   CONJ. III              CONJ. IV
  _Gen._  amand”    monend”    regend”    capiend”    audiend”
  _Dat._  amand™    monend™    regend™    capiend™    audiend™
  _Acc._  amandum   monendum   regendum   capiendum   audiendum
  _Abl._  amand™    monend™    regend™    capiend™    audiend™

    _a._ Give the gerund of Çcžr™È, Çd�le™È, Çsžm™È, Çiaci™È, Çveni™È.

    _b._ Deponent verbs have the gerund of the active voice (see ¤493).
    Give the gerund of Çc™norÈ, ÇvereorÈ, ÇsequorÈ, ÇpatiorÈ, ÇpartiorÈ.

    [Footnote 2: The gerund is the neuter singular of the future
    passive participle used as a noun, and has the same formation.
    (Cf. ¤374.d.)]

Ç404.È ÇThe Gerundive.È The gerundive is the name given to the future
passive participle (¤374.d) when the participle approaches the meaning
of a verbal noun and is translated like a gerund. It is the adjective
corresponding to the gerund. For example, to translate _the plan of
waging war_, we may use the gerund with its direct object and say
Çc™nsilium gerend” bellumÈ; or we may use the gerundive and say
Çc™nsilium bell” gerend”È, which means, literally, _the plan of the war
to be waged_, but which came to have the same force as the gerund with
its object, and was even preferred to it.

Ç405.È Compare the following parallel uses of the gerund and gerundive:

          GERUND                         GERUNDIVE
  _Gen._ ÇSp�s faciend” p‰cemÈ          ÇSp�s faciendae p‰cisÈ
  _Dat._ ÇLocus id™neus pugnand™È       ÇLocus id™neus castr”s p™nend”sÈ
           _A place suitable for_         _A place suitable for
              fighting_                      pitching camp_
  _Acc._ ÇM”sit equit�s ad ”nsequendumÈ ÇM”sit equit�s ad ”nsequend™s
                                             host”sÈ
           _He sent horsemen to pursue_   _He sent horsemen to pursue
                                             the enemy_
  _Abl._ ÇN‰rrand™ f‰bul‰s magister     ÇN‰rrand”s f‰bul”s magister
              puer”s placuitÈ                puer”s placuitÈ
           _The teacher pleased the       _The teacher pleased the
              boys by telling stories_       boys by telling stories_

    _a._ We observe

      (1) That the gerund is a noun and the gerundive an adjective.
      (2) That the gerund, being a noun, may stand alone or with an
      object.
      (3) That the gerundive, being an adjective, is used only in
      agreement with a noun.

Ç406.È RULE. ÇGerund and Gerundive.È

  1. _The Gerund is a verbal noun and is used only in the genitive,
  dative, accusative, and ablative singular. The constructions of these
  cases are in general the same as those of other nouns._

  2. _The Gerundive is a verbal adjective and must be used instead of
  gerund + object excepting in the genitive and in the ablative without
  a preposition. Even in these instances the gerundive construction is
  more usual._

Ç407.È RULE. ÇGerund or Gerundive of Purpose.È _The accusative of the
gerund or gerundive with_ ÇadÈ, _or the genitive with Çcaus‰È[3] (= for
the sake of), is used to express purpose._

  GERUND                        GERUNDIVE
  ÇAd audiendum v�n�runtÈ or    ÇAd urbem videndam v�n�runtÈ or
    ÇAudiend” caus‰ v�n�runtÈ     ÇUrbis videndae caus‰ v�n�runtÈ
    _They came to hear_           _They came to see the city_

    [Footnote 3: Çcaus‰È always _follows_ the genitive.]

NOTE. These sentences might, of course, be written with the subjunctive
of purpose,--Çv�n�runt ut aud”rentÈ; Çv�n�runt ut urbem vid�rentÈ. In
short expressions, however, the gerund and gerundive of purpose are
rather more common.

Ç408.È We have learned that the word denoting the owner or possessor of
something is in the genitive, as, Çequus GalbaeÈ, _GalbaÕs horse._ If,
now, we wish to express the idea _the horse is GalbaÕs_, Galba remains
the possessor, and hence in the genitive as before, but now stands in
the predicate, as, Çequus est GalbaeÈ. Hence this is called the
predicate genitive.

Ç409.È RULE. ÇPredicate Genitive.È _The possessive genitive often stands
in the predicate, especially after the forms of ÇsumÈ, and is then
called the predicate genitive._

Ç410.È IDIOMS

  Çal”cui neg™tium dareÈ, _to employ someone_
    (lit. _to give business to some one_)
  Çnov”s r�bus stud�reÈ, _to be eager for a revolution_
    (lit. _to be eager for new things_)
  Çre” m”lit‰ris per”tissimusÈ, _very skillful in the art of war_
  Çs� suaque omniaÈ, _themselves and all their possessions_

Ç411.È EXERCISES

I. 1. Caesar cum in Galli‰ bellum gereret, militibus decimae legi™nis
maxim� f‰vit quia re” m”lit‰ris per”tissim” erant. 2. Soci”s neg™tium
dedit re” frument‰riae cžrandae. 3. L�g‰ti n™n s™lum audiend” caus‰ sed
etiam dicend” caus‰ v�n�runt. 4. Imper‰tor iussit expl™r‰t™res locum
id™neum mžnind™ reper”re. 5. Nuper hae gent�s nov”s r�bus stud�bant;
mox i”s persu‰d�b™ ut Caesar” s� suaque omnia d�dant. 6. Iub�re est
reg”nae[4] et p‰r�re est multitždinis.[4] 7. H™c proeli™ fact™ qu”dam ex
hostibus ad p‰cem petendam ven�runt. 8. Erant qu” arma tr‰dere n™llent.
9. Host�s tam celeriter pr™gress” sunt ut spatium p”la in host”s
iaciend” non dar�tur. 10. Spatium neque arma capiend”[5] neque auxil”
petend”[5] datum est.

II. 1. These ornaments [6]belong to Cornelia. 2. Men very skillful in
the art of war were sent [7]to capture the town. 3. The scouts found a
hill suitable for fortifying very near to the river. 4. Soon the cavalry
will come [8]to seek supplies. 5. The mind of the Gauls is eager for
revolution and for undertaking wars. 6. To lead the line of battle
[9]belongs to the general. 7. [10]Whom shall we employ to look after
the grain supply?

    [Footnote 4: Predicate genitive.]

    [Footnote 5: Which of these expressions is gerund and which
    gerundive?]

    [Footnote 6: _belong to_ = _are of_.]

    [Footnote 7: Use the gerundive with ÇadÈ.]

    [Footnote 8: Use the genitive with Çcaus‰È. Where should Çcaus‰È
    stand?]

    [Footnote 9: Compare the first sentence.]

    [Footnote 10: Compare the second sentence in the Latin above.]


LESSON LXXII

THE IRREGULAR VERB _Eï_ ¥ INDIRECT STATEMENTS

Ç412.È Learn the principal parts and the conjugation of Çe™È, _go_
(¤499).

    _a._ Notice that Ç”-È, the root of Çe™È, is changed to Çe-È before
    a vowel, excepting in Çi�nsÈ, the nominative of the present
    participle. In the perfect system Ç-v-È is regularly dropped.

[ Conjugation given in ¤499:

  PRINCIPAL PARTS Çe™, ”re, i” (”v”), itumÈ (n. perf. part.)
  PRES. STEM ”-
  PERF. STEM ”- or ”v-
  PART. STEM it-

          INDICATIVE       SUBJUNCTIVE                IMPERATIVE
          SING.  PLUR.
  _Pres._ e™   ”mus        eam             _2d Pers._ ”     ”te
          ”s   ”tis
          it   eunt
  _Impf._ ”bam             ”rem
  _Fut._  ”b™              ----            _2d Pers._ ”t™   ”t™te
                                           _3d Pers._ ”t™   eunt™
  _Perf._ i” (”v”)        ierim (”verim)
  _Plup._ ieram (”veram)  ”ssem (”vissem)
  _F. P._ ier™ (”ver™)

  INFINITIVE
  _Pres._ ”re
  _Perf._ ”sse (”visse)
  _Fut._  itžrus, -a, -um   esse

  PARTICIPLES
  _Pres._ i�ns, _gen._ euntis (¤472)
  _Fut._  itžrus, -a, -um
  _Ger._  eundum

  GERUND
  _Gen._  eund”
  _Dat._  eund™
  _Acc._  eundum
  _Abl._  eund™

  SUPINE
  _Acc._  [[itum]]
  _Abl._  [[itž]] ]

Ç413.È Learn the meaning and principal parts of the following compounds
of Çe™È with prepositions:

  Çad«e™, ad”«re, ad«i”, ad«itusÈ, _go to, visit_, with the accusative
  Çex«e™, ex”«re, ex«i”, ex«itusÈ, _go forth_, with ÇexÈ or Çd�È
    and the ablative of the place from which
  Çin«e™, in”«re, in«i”, in«itusÈ, _begin, enter upon_,
    with the accusative
  Çred«e™, red”«re, red«i”, red«itusÈ, _return_, with ÇadÈ or ÇinÈ and
    the accusative of the place to which
  Çtr‰ns«e™, tr‰ns”«re, tr‰ns«i”, tr‰ns«itusÈ, _cross_,
    with the accusative

Ç414.È ÇIndirect Statements in English.È Direct statements are those
which the speaker or writer makes himself or which are quoted in his
exact language. Indirect statements are those reported in a different
form of words from that used by the speaker or writer. Compare the
following direct and indirect statements:

                      { 1. The Gauls are brave
  Direct statements   { 2. The Gauls were brave
                      { 3. The Gauls will be brave

  Indirect statements { 1. _He says_ that the Gauls _are_ brave
    after a verb in   { 2. _He says_ that the Gauls _were_ brave
    the present tense { 3. _He says_ that the Gauls _will be_ brave

  Indirect statements { 1. _He said_ that the Gauls _were_ brave
    after a verb in   { 2. _He said_ that the Gauls _had been_ brave
    a past tense      { 3. _He said_ that the Gauls _would be_ brave

We see that in English

    _a._ The indirect statement forms a clause introduced by the
    conjunction _that_.

    _b._ The verb is finite (cf. ¤173) and its subject is in the
    nominative.

    _c._ The tenses of the verbs originally used are changed after the
    past tense, _He said._

Ç415.È ÇIndirect Statements in Latin.È In Latin the direct and indirect
statements above would be as follows:

    DIRECT   { 1. ÇGall” sunt fort�sÈ
  STATEMENTS { 2. ÇGall” erant fort�sÈ
             { 3. ÇGall” erunt fort�sÈ


             { 1. ÇD”citÈ or ÇD”xit Gall™s esse fort”sÈ
             {    (_He says_ or _He said_
             {     _the Gauls to be brave_)[1]
   INDIRECT  { 2. ÇD”citÈ or ÇD”xit Gall™s fuisse fort”sÈ
  STATEMENTS {    (_He says_ or _He said_
             {     _the Gauls to have been brave_)[1]
             { 3. ÇD”citÈ or ÇD”xit Gall™s futžr™s esse fort”sÈ
             {    (_He says_ or _He said_
             {     _the Gauls to be about to be brave_)[1]

    [Footnote 1: These parenthetical renderings are not inserted as
    translations, but merely to show the literal meaning of the Latin.]

Comparing these Latin indirect statements with the English in the
preceding section, we observe three marked differences:

    _a._ There is no conjunction corresponding to _that_.

    _b._ The verb is in the infinitive and its subject is in the
    accusative.

    _c._ The tenses of the infinitive are not changed after a past tense
    of the principal verb.

Ç416.È RULE. ÇIndirect Statements.È _When a direct statement becomes
indirect, the principal verb is changed to the infinitive and its
subject nominative becomes subject accusative of the infinitive._

Ç417.È ÇTenses of the Infinitive.È When the sentences in ¤415 were
changed from the direct to the indirect form of statement, ÇsuntÈ became
ÇesseÈ, ÇerantÈ became ÇfuisseÈ, and ÇeruntÈ became Çfutžr™s esseÈ.

Ç418.È RULE. ÇInfinitive Tenses in Indirect Statements.È _A present
indicative of a direct statement becomes present infinitive of the
indirect, a past indicative becomes perfect infinitive, and a future
indicative becomes future infinitive._

NOTE. When translating into Latin an English indirect statement, first
decide what tense of the indicative would have been used in the direct
form. That will show you what tense of the infinitive to use in the
indirect.

Ç419.È RULE. ÇVerbs followed by Indirect Statements.È _The
accusative-with-infinitive construction in indirect statements is found
after verbs of ÇsayingÈ, ÇtellingÈ, ÇknowingÈ, ÇthinkingÈ, and
ÇperceivingÈ._

Ç420.È Verbs regularly followed by indirect statements are:

  _a_. Verbs of saying and telling:
    Çd”c™, d”cere, d”x”, dictusÈ, _say_
    Çneg™, neg‰re, neg‰v”, neg‰tusÈ, _deny, say not_
    Çnžnti™, nžnti‰re, nžnti‰v”, nžnti‰tusÈ, _announce_
    Çresponde™, respond�re, respond”, resp™nsusÈ, _reply_

  _b_. Verbs of knowing:
    Çcogn™sc™, cogn™scere, cogn™v”, cognitusÈ, _learn_,
      (in the perf.) _know_
    Çsci™, sc”re, sc”v”, sc”tusÈ, _know_

  _c_. Verbs of thinking:
    Çarbitror, arbitr‰r”, arbitr‰tus sumÈ, _think, consider_
    Çex”stim™, ex”stim‰re, ex”stim‰v”, ex”stim‰tusÈ, _think, believe_
    Çiždic™, iždic‰re, iždic‰vi, iždic‰tusÈ, _judge, decide_
    Çput™, put‰re, put‰v”, put‰tusÈ, _reckon, think_
    Çsp�r™, sp�r‰re, sp�r‰vi, sp�r‰tusÈ, _hope_

  _d_. Verbs of perceiving:
    Çaudi™, aud”re, aud”v”, aud”tusÈ, _hear_
    Çsenti™, sent”re, s�ns”, s�nsusÈ, _feel, perceive_
    Çvide™, vid�re, v”d”, v”susÈ, _see_
    Çintelleg™, intellegere, intell�x”, intell�ctusÈ, _understand,
      perceive_

Learn such of these verbs as are new to you.

Ç421.È IDIOMS
  Çpostr”di� eius di�”È, _on the next day_
    (lit. _on the next day of that day_)
  Çinit‰ aest‰teÈ, _at the beginning of summer_
  Çmemori‰ ten�reÈ, _to remember_ (lit. _to hold by memory_)
  Çper expl™r‰t™r�s cogn™scereÈ, _to learn through scouts_

Ç422.È EXERCISES

I. 1. It, ”mus, ”te, ”re. 2. Eunt”, iisse _or_ ”sse, ”bunt, eunt.
3. Eundi, ut eant, ”bitis, ”s. 4. N� ”rent, ”, ”bant, ierat. 5. Caesar
per explor‰tores cogn™vit Gall™s flžmen tr‰ns”sse. 6. R™m‰n” aud”v�runt
Helv�ti™s init‰ aest‰te d� f”nibus su”s exitžr™s esse. 7. Leg‰t”
respond�runt n�minem ante Caesarem illam ”nsulam ad”sse. 8. Pr”ncip�s
Gall™rum d”cunt s� nžllum c™nsilium contr‰ Caesaris imperium initžr™s
esse. 9. Arbitr‰mur potentiam r�g”nae esse mai™rem quam c”vium.
10. R™m‰n” negant se l”bert‰tem Gall”s �reptžr™s esse. 11. H”s r�bus
cognit”s s�nsimus l�g‰t™s non v�nisse ad p‰cem petendam. 12. Helv�tii
sciunt R™m‰n™s pri™r�s vict™ri‰s memori‰ ten�re. 13. Soci” cum
intellegerent mult™s vulner‰r”, statu�runt in su™s f”n”s red”re.
14. Aliquis nžnti‰vit M‰rcum c™nsulem cre‰tum esse.

II. 1. The boy is slow. He says that the boy is, was, (and) will be
slow. 2. The horse is, has been, (and) will be strong. He judged that
the horse was, had been, (and) would be strong. 3. We think that the
army will go forth from the camp at the beginning of summer. 4. The next
day we learned through scouts that the enemyÕs town was ten miles
off.[2] 5. The king replied that the ornaments belonged to[3] the queen.

    [Footnote 2: _to be off, to be distant_, ÇabesseÈ.]

    [Footnote 3: Latin, _were of_ (¤409).]

  [Illustration: TUBA]


LESSON LXXIII

VOCABULARY REVIEW ¥ THE IRREGULAR VERB _FERï_
THE DATIVE WITH COMPOUNDS

Ç423.È Review the word lists in ¤¤513, 514.

Ç424.È Learn the principal parts and conjugation of the verb Çfer™È,
_bear_ (¤498).

  1. Learn the principal parts and meanings of the following compounds
  of fer™, _bear_:

  Çad«fer™, adfer«re, at«tul”, adl‰«tusÈ, _bring to; report_
  Çc™n«fer™, c™nfer«re, con«tul”, conl‰«tusÈ, _bring together, collect_
  Çd�«fer™, d�fer«re, d�«tul”, d�l‰«tusÈ, _bring to; report;
     grant, confer_
  Ç”n«fer™, ”nfer«re, in«tul”, inl‰«tusÈ, _bring in, bring against_
  Çre«fer™, refer«re, ret«tul”, rel‰«tusÈ, _bear back, report_

[ Conjugation given in ¤498:

  PRINCIPAL PARTS Çfer™, ferre, tul”, l‰tusÈ
  PRES. STEM  fer-    PERF. STEM  tul-    PART. STEM  l‰t-

  INDICATIVE
          ACTIVE                    PASSIVE
  _Pres._ fer™      ferimus         feror        ferimur
          fers      fert”s          ferris, -re  ferimim”
          fert      ferunt          fertur       feruntur
  _Impf._ fer�bam                   fer�bar
  _Fut._  feram, fer�s, etc.        ferar, fer�ris, etc.
  _Perf._ tul”                      l‰tus, -a, -um sum
  _Plup._ tuleram                   l‰tus, -a, -um eram
  _F. P._ tuler™                    l‰tus, -a, -um er™

  SUBJUNCTIVE
  _Pres._ feram, fer‰s, etc.        ferar, fer‰ris, etc.
  _Impf._ ferrem                    ferrer
  _Perf._ tulerim                   l‰tus, -a, -um sim
  _Plup._ tulissem                  l‰tus, -a, -um essem

  IMPERATIVE
  _Pres. 2d Pers._  fer     ferte     ferre    ferimin”
  _Fut. 2d Pers._   fert™   fert™te   fertor
       _3d Pers._   fert™   ferunto   fertor   feruntor

  INFINITIVE
  _Pres._ ferre                     ferr”
  _Perf._ tulisse                   l‰tus, -a, -um esse
  _Fut._  l‰tžrus, -a, -um esse     ----

  PARTICIPLES
  _Pres._ fer�ns, -entis    _Pres._ ----
  _Fut._  l‰tžrus, -a, -um  _Ger._  ferendus, -a, -um
  _Perf._ ----              _Perf._ l‰tus, -a, -um

  GERUND
  _Gen._ ferend”
  _Dat._ ferend™
  _Acc._ ferendum
  _Abl._ ferend™

  SUPINE (Active Voice)
  _Acc._ [[l‰tum]]
  _Abl._ [[l‰tž]] ]

Ç425.È The dative is the case of the indirect object. Many intransitive
verbs take an indirect object and are therefore used with the dative
(cf. ¤153). Transitive verbs take a direct object in the accusative; but
sometimes they have an indirect object or dative as well. _The whole
question, then, as to whether or not a verb takes the dative, defends
upon its capacity for governing an indirect object._ A number of verbs,
some transitive and some intransitive, which in their simple form would
not take an indirect object, when compounded with certain prepositions,
have a meaning which calls for an indirect object. Observe the following
sentences:

  1. ÇHaec r�s exercitu” magnam calamit‰tem attulitÈ, _this circumstance
  brought great disaster to the army._

  2. ÇGerm‰n” Gall”s bellum ”nferuntÈ, _the Germans make war upon the
  Gauls._

  3. ÇHae c™piae proeli™ n™n intererantÈ, _these troops did not take
  part in the battle._

  4. ÇEquit�s fugientibus hostibus occurruntÈ, _the horsemen meet the
  fleeing enemy._

  5. ÇGalba c™pi”s f”lium praef�citÈ, _Galba put his son in command of
  the troops._

In each sentence there is a dative, and in each a verb combined with a
preposition. In no case would the simple verb take the dative.

Ç426.È RULE. ÇDative with Compounds.È _Some verbs compounded with ÇadÈ,
ÇanteÈ, ÇconÈ, Çd�È, ÇinÈ, ÇinterÈ, ÇobÈ, ÇpostÈ, ÇpraeÈ, Çpr™È, ÇsubÈ,
ÇsuperÈ, admit the dative of the indirect object. Transitive compounds
may take both an accusative and a dative._

NOTE 1. Among such verbs are[1]

  Çad«fer™, adfer«re, at«tul”, adl‰«tusÈ, _bring to; report_
  Çad«sum, ades«se, ad«fu”, adfutž«rusÈ, _assist; be present_
  Çd�«fer™, d�fer«re, d�«tul”, d�l‰tusÈ, _report; grant, confer_
  Çd�«sum, dees«se, d�«fu”,----È, _be wanting, be lacking_
  Ç”n«fer™, ”nfer«re, in«tul”, inl‰«tusÈ, _bring against, bring upon_
  Çinter«sum, interes«se, inter«fu”, interfutž«rusÈ, _take part in_
  Çoccur«r™, occur«rere, occur«r”, occur«susÈ, _run against, meet_
  Çpraefi«ci™, praefi«cere, praef�«c”, praefec«tusÈ, _appoint over,
     place in command of_
  Çprae«sum, praees«se, prae«fu”, ----È, _be over, be in command_

    [Footnote 1: But the accusative with ÇadÈ or ÇinÈ is used with some
    of these, when the idea of _motion to_ or _against_ is strong.]

Ç427.È IDIOMS

  ÇgraviterÈ or Çmolest� ferreÈ, _to be annoyed at, to be indignant at_,
    followed by the accusative and infinitive
  Çs� c™nferre adÈ or ÇinÈ, with the accusative,
    _to betake oneÕs self to_
  Çalicui bellum ”nferreÈ, _to make war upon some one_
  Çpedem referreÈ, _to retreat_ (lit. _to bear back the foot_)

Ç428.È EXERCISES

I. 1. Fer, ferent, ut ferant, ferunt. 2. Ferte, ut ferrent, tulisse,
tulerant. 3. Tulimus, fer�ns, l‰tus esse, ferre. 4. Cum n‰vigia insulae
adpropinqu‰rent, barbar” terr™re comm™t” pedem referre c™n‰t” sunt.
5. Gall” molest� fer�bant R™m‰n™s agr™s vast‰re. 6. Caesar soci”s
imper‰vit n� f”nitimis su”s bellum ”nferrent. 7. Explor‰t™r�s, qui
Caesar” occurr�runt, d”x�runt exercitum hostium vulneribus d�fessum s�s�
in alium locum contulisse. 8. Hostes sci�bant R™m‰n™s fržment™ eg�re et
hanc rem Caesar” summum per”culum adl‰tžram esse. 9. Imped”ment”s in
žnum locum conl‰tis, aliqu” m”litum flžmen quod n™n long� aberat
tr‰nsi�runt. 10. H™s r�x hort‰tus est ut ™r‰culum ad”rent et r�s aud”t‰s
ad s� referrent. 11. Quem imper‰tor ill” legi™n” praef�cit? Pžblius ill”
legi™n” pracerat. 12. Cum esset Caesar in citeri™re Galli‰, cr�br” ad
eum[2] ržm™r�s adfer�bantur litter”sque quoque certior f”�bat Gall™s
obsid�s inter s� dare.

II. 1. The Gauls will make war upon C¾sarÕs allies. 2. We heard that the
Gauls would make war upon C¾sarÕs allies. 3. Publius did not take part
in that battle. 4. We have been informed that Publius did not take part
in that battle. 5. The man who was in command of the cavalry was wounded
and began to retreat. 6. C¾sar did not place you in command of the
cohort to bring[3] disaster upon the army.

    [Footnote 2: Observe that when Çadfer™È denotes _motion to_, it is
    not followed by the dative; cf. footnote, p. 182.]

    [Footnote 3: Not the infinitive. (Cf. ¤352.)]


LESSON LXXIV

VOCABULARY REVIEW ¥ THE SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS

Ç429.È Review the word lists in ¤¤517, 518.

Ç430.È When we report a statement instead of giving it directly, we have
an indirect statement. (Cf. ¤414.) So, if we report a question instead
of asking it directly, we have an indirect question.

  DIRECT QUESTION                  INDIRECT QUESTION
  _Who conquered the Gauls?      He asked who conquered the Gauls_

    _a._ An indirect question depends, usually as object, upon a verb of
    asking (as Çpet™È, Çpostul™È, Çquaer™È, Çrog™È) or upon some verb or
    expression of saying or mental action. (Cf. ¤420.)

Ç431.È Compare the following direct and indirect questions:

  DIRECT  INDIRECT

  ÇQuis Gall™s vincit?È    {  _a._ ÇRogat quis Gall™s vincatÈ
  _Who is conquering the_  {       _He asks who is conquering the_
    _Gauls?_               {       _Gauls_
                           {  _b._ ÇRogavit quis Gall™s vinceretÈ
                           {       _He asked who was conquering_
                           {       _the Gauls_

                           {  _a._ ÇRogat ubi sit R™maÈ
  ÇUb” est R™ma?È          {       _He asks where Rome is_
  _Where is Rome?_         {  _b._ ÇRog‰vit ubi esset R™maÈ
                           {        _He asked where Rome was_

                           {  _a._ ÇRogat num Caesar Gall™s v”ceritÈ
                           {       _He asks whether C¾sar conquered_
  ÇCaesarne Gall™s v”cit?È {       _the Gauls_
  _Did C¾sar conquer the_  {  _b._ ÇRog‰vit num Caesar Gall™s
    _Gauls?_               {         Çv”cissetÈ
                           {       _He asked whether C¾sar had_
                           {       _conquered the Gauls_

    _a._ The verb in a direct question is in the indicative mood, but
    the mood is subjunctive in an indirect question.

    _b._ The tense of the subjunctive follows the rules for tense
    sequence.

    _c._ Indirect questions are introduced by the same interrogative
    words as introduce direct questions, excepting that_yes_-or-_no_
    direct questions (cf. ¤210) on becoming indirect are usually
    introduced by ÇnumÈ, _whether_.

Ç432.È RULE. ÇIndirect Questions.È _In an indirect question the verb is
in the subjunctive and its tense is determined by the law for tense
sequence._

Ç433.È IDIOMS

  Çd� terti‰ vigili‰È, _about the third watch_
  Çinižri‰s alicui ”nferreÈ, _to inflict injuries upon some one_
  Çfacere verba pr™È, with the ablative, _to speak in behalf of_
  Çin reliquum tempusÈ, _for the future_

Ç434.È EXERCISES

I. 1. R�x rog‰vit quid l�g‰t” postul‰rent et cžr ad s� v�nissent.
2. Quaes”vit quoque num nec recent”s inižri‰s nec dubiam R™m‰n™rum
am”citiam memori‰ ten�rent. 3. Vid�tisne quae oppida host�s
oppugn‰verint? 4. N™nne sc”tis cžr Gall” sub montem s�se contulerint?
5. Aud”vimus qu‰s inižrias tibi Germ‰n” intulissent. 6. D� terti‰
vigili‰ imper‰tor m”sit homin�s qu” cogn™scerent quae esset n‰tžra
montis. 7. Pr™ h”s ™r‰tor verba f�cit et rog‰vit cžr c™nsul�s n‰v”s
ad pl�nem summ” per”cul” locum mittere vellent. 8. L�g‰t”s convoc‰t”s
d�m™nstr‰vit quid fier” vellet. 9. Nžntius refer�bat quid in Gall™rum
concili™ d� arm”s tr‰dend”s dictum esset. 10. Mone™ n� in reliquum
tempus pedit�s et equit�s tr‰ns flžmen džc‰s.

II. 1. What hill did they seize? I see what hill they seized. 2. Who
has inflicted these injuries upon our dependents? 3. They asked who had
inflicted those injuries upon their dependents. 4. Whither did you go
about the third watch? You know whither I went. 5. At what time did the
boys return home? I will ask at what time the boys returned home.


LESSON LXXV

VOCABULARY REVIEW ¥ THE DATIVE OF PURPOSE, OR END FOR WHICH

Ç435.È Review the word lists in ¤¤521, 522.

Ç436.È Observe the following sentences:

  1. ÇExpl™r‰t™r�s locum castr”s d�l�g�runtÈ, _the scouts chose a place
  for a camp._

  2. ÇHoc erat magn™ imped”ment™ Gall”sÈ, _this was_ (for) _a great
  hindrance to the Gauls._

  3. ÇDu‰s legi™n�s praesidi™ castr”s rel”quitÈ, _he left two legions
  as_ (lit. _for_) _a guard to the camp._

In each of these sentences we find a dative expressing the _purpose
or end for which_ something is intended or for which it serves. These
datives are Çcastr”sÈ, Çimped”ment™È, and Çpraesidi™È. In the second and
third sentences we find a second dative expressing the _person or thing
affected_ (ÇGall”sÈ and Çcastr”sÈ). As you notice, these are true
datives, covering the relations of _for which_ and _to which_. (Cf.
¤43.)

Ç437.È RULE. ÇDative of Purpose or End.È _The dative is used to denote
the Çpurpose or end for whichÈ, often with another dative denoting the
Çperson or thing affectedÈ._

Ç438.È IDIOMS

  Çc™nsilium omittereÈ, _to give up a plan_
  Çlocum castr”s d�ligereÈ, _to choose a place for a camp_
  Çalicui magn™ žsu” esseÈ, _to be of great advantage to some one_
    (lit. _for great advantage to some one_)

Ç439.È EXERCISES

I. 1. Rog‰vit cžr illae c™piae relictae essent. Respond�runt ill‰s
c™pi‰s esse praesidi™ castr”s. 2. Caesar m”sit expl™r‰t™r�s ad locum
d�ligendum castr”s. 3. Quisque ex”stim‰vit ipsum n™men Caesaris magn™
terr™r” barbar”s futžrum esse. 4. Pr”m‰ lžce ”dem exercitus proelium
‰cre comm”sit, sed gravia su™rum vulnera magnae cžrae imper‰t™r” erant.
5. R�x respondit am”citiam popul” R™m‰n” sibi ™rn‰ment™ et praesidi™
d�b�re esse. 6. Quis praeerat equit‰tu” quem auxili™ Caesar” soci”
m”serant? 7. Aliquibus r�s secundae sunt summae calamit‰t” et r�s
adversae sunt m”r™ žsu”. 8. Gall”s magn™ ad pugnam erat imped”ment™ quod
equit‰tus ‰ dextr™ cornž prem�bat. 9. Memoria pr”stinae virtžtis n™n
minus quam metus hostium erat nostr”s magn™ žsu”. 10. Tam d�nsa erat
silva ut pr™gred” n™n possent.

II. 1. I advise you [1]to give up the plan [2]of making war upon the
brave Gauls. 2. Do you know [3]where the cavalry has chosen a place for
a camp? 3. The fear of the enemy will be of great advantage to you.
4. C¾sar left three cohorts as (for) a guard to the baggage. 5. In
winter the waves of the lake are so great [4]that they are (for) a great
hindrance to ships. 6. C¾sar inflicted severe[5] punishment on those who
burned the public buildings.

    [Footnote 1: Subjunctive of purpose. (Cf. ¤366.)]

    [Footnote 2: Express by the genitive of the gerundive.]

    [Footnote 3: Indirect question.]

    [Footnote 4: A clause of result.]

    [Footnote 5: Çgravis, -eÈ.]


LESSON LXXVI

VOCABULARY REVIEW ¥ THE GENITIVE AND ABLATIVE OF QUALITY OR DESCRIPTION

Ç440.È Review the word lists in ¤¤524, 525.

Ç441.È Observe the English sentences

  (1) _A man ÇofÈ great courage_, or (2) _A man ÇwithÈ great courage_

  (3) _A forest ÇofÈ tall trees_, or (4) _A forest ÇwithÈ tall trees_

Each of these sentences contains a phrase of quality or description.
In the first two a man is described; in the last two a forest. The
descriptive phrases are introduced by the prepositions _of_ and _with_.

In Latin the expression of quality or description is very similar.

The prepositions _of_ and _with_ suggest the genitive and the ablative
respectively, and we translate the sentences above

  (1) ÇVir magnae virtžtisÈ, or (2) ÇVir magn‰ virtžteÈ
  (3) ÇSilva alt‰rum arborumÈ, or (4) ÇSilva alt”s arboribusÈ

There is, however, one important difference between the Latin and the
English. In English we may say, for example, _a man of courage_, using
the descriptive phrase without an adjective modifier. _In Latin,
however, an adjective modifier must always be used_, as above.

    _a._ Latin makes a distinction between the use of the two cases in
    that _numerical descriptions of measure are in the genitive_ and
    _descriptions of physical characteristics are in the ablative._
    Other descriptive phrases may be in either case.

Ç442.È EXAMPLES

  1. ÇFossa duodecim pedumÈ, _a ditch of twelve feet_.

  2. ÇHom™ magn”s pedibus et parv™ capiteÈ,
     _a man with big feet and a small head_.

  3. ÇR�x erat vir summ‰ aud‰ci‰È or Çr�x erat vir summae aud‰ciaeÈ,
    _the king was a man of the greatest boldness_.

Ç443.È RULE. ÇGenitive of Description.È _Numerical descriptions of
measure are expressed by the genitive with a modifying adjective._

Ç444.È RULE. ÇAblative of Description.È _Descriptions of physical
characteristics are expressed by the ablative with a modifying
adjective._

Ç445.È RULE. ÇGenitive or Ablative of Description.È _Descriptions
involving neither numerical statements nor physical characteristics may
be expressed by either the genitive or the ablative with a modifying
adjective._

Ç446.È IDIOMS

  ÇHelv�ti”s in anim™ estÈ, _the Helvetii intend_,
    (lit. _it is in mind to the Helvetians_)
  Çin m‰trim™nium dareÈ, _to give in marriage_
  Çnihil posseÈ, _to have no power_
  Çfossam perdžcereÈ, _to construct a ditch_
    (lit. _to lead a ditch through_)

Ç447.È EXERCISES

I. 1. M”lit�s fossam decem pedum per e™rum f”n”s perdžx�runt.
2. Pr”nceps Helv�ti™rum, vir summae aud‰ciae, pr”ncipibus gentium
f”nitim‰rum sor™r�s in m‰trim™nium dedit. 3. E™rum am”citiam c™nf”rm‰re
voluit qu™ facilius R™m‰n”s bellum ”nferret. 4. German” et Gall” n™n
erant eiusdem gentis. 5. Omn�s fer� Germ‰n” erant magn”s corporum
v”ribus.[1] 6. Gall” qui oppidum fortiter d�fend�bant saxa ingentis
magnitždinis d� mžr™ iaci�bant. 7. Cum Caesar ab expl™r‰t™ribus
quaereret qu” illud oppidum incolerent, expl™r‰t™r�s respond�runt e™s
esse homines summ‰ virtžte et magn™ c™nsili™. 8. Moenia v”gint” pedum
‰ sinistr‰ parte, et ‰ dextr‰ parte flžmen magnae altitždinis oppidum
d�fend�bant. 9. Cum Caesar in Galliam perv�nisset, erat ržmor Helv�ti”s
in anim™ esse iter per pr™vinciam R™m‰nam facere. 10. Caesar, ut e™s ab
f”nibus R™m‰nis prohib�ret, mžn”ti™nem [2]multa m”lia passuum longam
f�cit.

II. 1. C¾sar was a general of much wisdom and great boldness, and very
skillful in the art of war. 2. The Germans were of great size, and
thought that the Romans had no power. 3. Men of the highest courage
were left in the camp as (for) a guard to the baggage. 4. The kingÕs
daughter, who was given in marriage to the chief of a neighboring state,
was a woman of very beautiful appearance. 5. The soldiers will construct
a ditch of nine feet around the camp. 6. A river of great width was
between us and the enemy.

    [Footnote 1: From Çv”sÈ. (Cf. ¤468.)]

    [Footnote 2: Genitives and ablatives of description are adjective
    phrases. When we use an _adverbial_ phrase to tell _how long_ or
    _how high_ or _how deep_ anything is, we must use the accusative of
    extent. (Cf. ¤336.) For example, in the sentence above Çmulta m”lia
    passuumÈ is an adverbial phrase (accusative of extent) modifying
    ÇlongamÈ. If we should omit ÇlongamÈ and say _a fortification of
    many miles_, the genitive of description (an adjective phrase)
    modifying Çmžn”ti™nemÈ would be used, as Çmžn”ti™nem mult™rum m”lium
    passuumÈ.]

  [Illustration: GLADII]


LESSON LXXVII

REVIEW OF AGREEMENT, AND OF THE GENITIVE, DATIVE, AND ACCUSATIVE

Ç448.È There are four agreements:

  1. That of the predicate noun or of the appositive with the noun to
  which it belongs (¤¤76, 81).

  2. That of the adjective, adjective pronoun, or participle with its
  noun (¤65).

  3. That of a verb with its subject (¤28).

  4. That of a relative pronoun with its antecedent (¤224).

Ç449.È The relation expressed by the ÇgenitiveÈ is, in general, denoted
in English by the preposition _of_. It is used to express

                { _a._ As attributive (¤38).
  1. Possession {
                { _b._ In the predicate (¤409).

  2. The whole of which a part is taken (partitive genitive) (¤331).

  3. Quality or description (¤¤443, 445).

Ç450.È The relation expressed by the ÇdativeÈ is, in general, denoted in
English by the prepositions _to_ or _for_ when they do not imply motion
through space. It is used to express

                         { _a._ With intransitive verbs and with
                         {   transitive verbs in connection with a
                         {   direct object in the accusative (¤45).
  1. The indirect object { _b_. With special intransitive verbs (¤154).
                         { _c_. With verbs compounded with ÇadÈ, ÇanteÈ,
                         {   ÇconÈ, Çd�È, ÇinÈ, ÇinterÈ, ÇobÈ, ÇpostÈ,
                         {   ÇpraeÈ, Çpr™È, ÇsubÈ, ÇsuperÈ (¤426).

  2. The object to which the quality of an adjective is directed (¤143).

  3. The purpose, or end for which, often with a second dative denoting
  the person or thing affected (¤437).

Ç451.È The ÇaccusativeÈ case corresponds, in general, to the English
objective. It is used to express

  1. The direct object of a transitive verb (¤37).

  2. The predicate accusative together with the direct object after
  verbs of _making, choosing, falling, showing_, and the like (¤392).

  3. The subject of the infinitive (¤214).

  4. The object of prepositions that do not govern the ablative (¤340).

  5. The duration of time and the extent of space (¤336).

  6. The place to which (¤¤263, 266).

Ç452.È EXERCISES

I. 1. M”lit�s qu™s v”dimus d”x�runt imperium bell” esse Caesaris
imper‰t™ris. 2. Helv�ti” statu�runt quam[1] maximum numerum equ™rum
et carr™rum c™gere. 3. T™t”us Galliae Helv�ti” plžrimum valu�runt.
4. Mult‰s h™r‰s ‰criter pugn‰tum est neque quisquam poterat vid�re
hostem fugientem. 5. Vir” summae virtžtis host”s decem m”lia passuum
”nsecžt” sunt. 6. Caesar popul™ R™m‰n™ persu‰sit ut s� c™nsulem cre‰ret.
7. Vict™ria exercitžs erat semper imper‰t™r” gr‰tissima. 8. Tr”duum iter
f�c�runt et Gen‰vam, in oppidum[2] hostium, perv�n�runt. 9. Caesar
aud”vit Germ‰n™s bellum Gall”s intulisse. 10. Magn™ žsu” m”litibus
Caesaris erat quod pri™ribus proeli”s s�s� exercuerant.

II. 1. One[3] of the kingÕs sons and many of his men were captured.
2. There was no one who wished[4] to appoint her queen. 3. The grain
supply was always a care (for a care) to C¾sar, the general. 4. I think
that the camp is ten miles distant. 5. We marched for three hours
through a very dense forest. 6. The plan [5]of making war upon the
allies was not pleasing to the king. 7. When he came to the hill he
fortified it [6]by a twelve-foot wall.

    [Footnote 1: What is the force of ÇquamÈ with superlatives?]

    [Footnote 2: ÇurbsÈ or ÇoppidumÈ, appositive to a name of a town,
    takes a preposition.]

    [Footnote 3: What construction is used with numerals in preference
    to the partitive genitive?]

    [Footnote 4: What mood? (Cf. ¤390.)]

    [Footnote 5: Use the gerund or gerundive.]

    [Footnote 6: Latin, _by a wall of twelve feet._]


LESSON LXXVIII

REVIEW OF THE ABLATIVE

Ç453.È The relations of the ablative are, in general, expressed in
English by the prepositions _with_ (or _by_), _from_ (or _by_), and _in_
(or _at_). The constructions growing out of these meanings are

  I. Ablative rendered _with_ (or _by_):
    1. Cause (¤102)
    2. Means (¤103)
    3. Accompaniment (¤104)
    4. Manner (¤105)
    5. Measure of difference (¤317)
    6. With a participle (ablative absolute) (¤381)
    7. Description or quality (¤¤444, 445)
    8. Specification (¤398)

  II. Ablative rendered _from_ (or _by_):
    1. Place from which (¤¤179, 264)
    2. Ablative of separation (¤180)
    3. Personal agent with a passive verb (¤181)
    4. Comparison without ÇquamÈ (¤309)

  III. Ablative rendered _in_ (or _at_):
    1. Place at or in which (¤¤265, 266)
    2. Time when or within which (¤275)

Ç454.È EXERCISES

I. 1. Gall” loc”s superi™ribus occup‰t”s itinere exercitum prohib�re
c™nantur. 2. Omn�s oppid‰n” ex oppid™ �gress” salžtem fug‰ petere
inc�p�runt. 3. Caesar docet s� m”litum v”tam su‰ salžte hab�re mult™
c‰ri™rem. 4. Cum celerius omnium op”ni™ne perv�nisset, host�s ad eum
obsid�s m”s�runt 5. V”cus in valle positus montibus altissim”s undique
contin�tur. 6. Plžrimum inter Gall™s haec g�ns et virtžte et hominum
numer™ val�bat. 7. Secund‰ vigili‰ nžll™ cert™ ™rdine neque imperi™ �
castr”s �gress” sunt. 8. Du‰bus legi™nibus Gen‰vae relict”s, proxim™ di�
cum reliqu”s domum profectus est. 9. Erant itinera duo quibus itineribus
Helv�ti” dom™ ex”re possent. 10. R�x erat summ‰ aud‰ci‰ et magn‰ apud
populum potenti‰. 11. Gall” tim™re servitžtis comm™t” bellum par‰bant.
12. Caesar monet l�g‰t™s ut contineant milit�s, n� studi™ pugnand” aut
sp� praedae longius[1] pr™grediantur. 13. Bellum ‰cerrimum ‰ Caesare in
Gall™s gestum est.

II. 1. The lieutenant after having seized the mountain restrained his
(men) from battle. 2. All the Gauls differ from each other in laws.
3. This tribe is much braver than the rest. 4. This road is [2]ten miles
shorter than that. 5. In summer C¾sar carried on war in Gaul, in winter
he returned to Italy. 6. At midnight the general set out from the camp
with three legions. 7. I fear that you cannot protect[3] yourself from
these enemies. 8. [4]After this battle was finished peace was made by
all the Gauls.

    [Footnote 1: ÇlongiusÈ, _too far_. (Cf. ¤305.)]

    [Footnote 2: Latin, _by ten thousands of paces_.]

    [Footnote 3: Çd�fendereÈ.]

    [Footnote 4: Ablative absolute.]


LESSON LXXIX

REVIEW OF THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE, THE INFINITIVE, AND THE SUBJUNCTIVE

Ç455.È The gerund is a verbal noun and is used only in the genitive,
dative, accusative, and ablative singular. The constructions of these
cases are in general the same as those of other nouns (¤¤402, 406.1).

Ç456.È The gerundive is a verbal adjective and must be used instead of
gerund + object, excepting in the genitive and in the ablative without a
preposition. Even in these instances the gerundive construction is more
usual (¤406.2).

Ç457.È The infinitive is used:

  I. As in English.

    _a._ As subject or predicate nominative (¤216).

    _b._ To complete the predicate with verbs of incomplete predication
    (complementary infinitive) (¤215).

    _c._ As object with subject accusative after verbs of _wishing,
    commanding, forbidding_, and the like (¤213).

  II. In the principal sentence of an indirect statement after verbs
  of _saying _and _mental action_. The subject is in the accusative
  (¤¤416, 418, 419).

Ç458.È The subjunctive is used:

  1. To denote purpose (¤¤349, 366, 372).

  2. To denote consequence or result (¤¤385, 386).

  3. In relative clauses of characteristic or description (¤390).

  4. In ÇcumÈ clauses of time, cause, and concession (¤396).

  5. In indirect questions (¤432).

Ç459.È EXERCISES

I. 1. Caesar, cum perv�nisset, milit�s hort‰b‰tur n� c™nsilium oppid”
capiendi omitterent. 2. R�x, castr”s prope oppidum posit”s, m”sit
expl™r‰t™r�s qu” cogn™scerent ubi exercitus R™manus esset. 3. N�mo
relinqu�b‰tur qu” arma ferre posset. 4. Nžnti” v”d�runt ingentem
arm™rum multitudinem d� mžr™ in fossani iactam esse. 5. Dux su™s
tr‰ns”re flžmen iussit. Tr‰ns”re autem hoc flžmen erat difficillimum.
6. R™m‰n” cum hanc calamit‰tem molest� ferrant, tamen terga vertere
recžs‰v�runt. 7. H™c ržm™re aud”t™, tantus terror omnium anim™s
occup‰vit ut n� fortissim” quidem proelium committere vellent. 8. Erant
qu” put‰rent tempus ann” id™neum n™n esse itiner” faciend™. 9. Tam
‰criter ab utraque parte pugn‰b‰tur ut multa m”lia hominum occ”derentur.
10. Quid tim�s? Time™ n� R™m‰n”s in anim™ sit t™tam Galliam super‰re et
n™b”s inižri‰s inferre.

II. 1. Do you not see who is standing on the wall? 2. We hear that the
plan of taking the town has been given up. 3. Since the Germans thought
that the Romans could not cross the Rhine, C¾sar ordered a bridge to be
made. 4. When the bridge was finished, the savages were so terrified
that they hid themselves. 5. They feared that C¾sar would pursue them.
6. C¾sar [1]asked the traders what the size of the island was. 7. The
traders advised him not [2]to cross the sea. 8. He sent scouts [3]to
choose a place for a camp.

    [Footnote 1: Çquaerere abÈ.]

    [Footnote 2: Not infinitive.]

    [Footnote 3: Use the gerundive with ÇadÈ.]




READING MATTER


INTRODUCTORY SUGGESTIONS

ÇHow to Translate.È You have already had considerable practice in
translating simple Latin, and have learned that the guide to the meaning
lies in the endings of the words. If these are neglected, no skill can
make sense of the Latin. If they are carefully noted and accurately
translated, not many difficulties remain. Observe the following
suggestions:

  1. Read the Latin sentence through to the end, noting endings of
  nouns, adjectives, verbs, etc.

  2. Read it again and see if any of the words you know are nominatives
  or accusatives. This will often give you what may be called the
  backbone of the sentence; that is, subject, verb, and object.

  3. Look up the words you do not know, and determine their use in the
  sentence from their endings.

  4. If you cannot yet translate the sentence, put down the English
  meanings of all the words _in the same order as the Latin words_. You
  will then generally see through the meaning of the sentence.

  5. Be careful to

    _a._ Translate adjectives with the nouns to which they belong.

    _b._ Translate together prepositions and the nouns which they
    govern.

    _c._ Translate adverbs with the words that they modify.

    _d._ _Make sense._ If you do not make sense, you have made a
    mistake. One mistake will spoil a whole sentence.

  6. When the sentence is correctly translated, read the Latin over
  again, and try to understand it as Latin, without thinking of the
  English translation.

ÇThe Parts of a Sentence.È You will now meet somewhat longer sentences
than you have had before. To assist in translating them, remember, first
of all, that every sentence conveys a meaning and either tells us
something, asks a question, or gives a command. Every sentence must have
a subject and a verb, and the verb may always have an adverb, and, if
transitive, will have a direct object.

However long a sentence is, you will usually be able to recognize its
subject, verb, and object or predicate complement without any
difficulty. These will give you the leading thought, and they must never
be lost sight of while making out the rest of the sentence. The chief
difficulty in translating arises from the fact that instead of a single
adjective, adverb, or noun, we often have a phrase or a clause taking
the place of one of these; for Latin, like English, has adjective,
adverbial, and substantive clauses and phrases. For example, in the
sentence _The idle boy does not study_, the word _idle_ is an adjective.
In _The boy wasting his time does not study_, the words _wasting his
time_ form an adjective phrase modifying _boy_. In the sentence _The boy
who wastes his time does not study_, the words _who wastes his time_
form an adjective clause modifying _boy_, and the sentence is complex.
These sentences would show the same structure in Latin.

In translating, it is important to keep the parts of a phrase and the
parts of a clause together and not let them become confused with the
principal sentence. To distinguish between the subordinate clauses and
the principal sentence is of the first importance, and is not difficult
if you remember that a clause regularly contains a word that marks it as
a clause and that this word usually stands first. These words join
clauses to the words they depend on, and are called _subordinate
conjunctions_. They are not very numerous, and you will soon learn to
recognize them. In Latin they are the equivalents for such words as
_when, while, since, because, if, before, after, though, in order that,
that_, etc. Form the habit of memorizing the Latin subordinate
conjunctions as you meet them, and of noting carefully the mood of the
verb in the clauses which they introduce.


  [Illustration: HERCULES]

THE LABORS OF HERCULES

  Hercules, a Greek hero celebrated for his great strength, was pursued
  throughout his life by the hatred of Juno. While yet an infant he
  strangled some serpents sent by the goddess to destroy him. During his
  boyhood and youth he performed various marvelous feats of strength,
  and on reaching manhood he succeeded in delivering the Thebans from
  the oppression of the Miny¾. In a fit of madness, sent upon him by
  Juno, he slew his own children; and, on consulting the Delphic oracle
  as to how he should cleanse himself from this crime, he was ordered to
  submit himself for twelve years to Eurystheus, king of Tiryns, and to
  perform whatever tasks were appointed him. Hercules obeyed the oracle,
  and during the twelve years of his servitude accomplished twelve
  extraordinary feats known as the Labors of Hercules. His death was
  caused, unintentionally, by his wife Deiani«ra. Hercules had shot with
  his poisoned arrows a centaur named Nessus, who had insulted Deianira.
  Nessus, before he died, gave some of his blood to Deianira, and told
  her it would act as a charm to secure her husbandÕs love. Some time
  after, Deianira, wishing to try the charm, soaked one of her husbandÕs
  garments in the blood, not knowing that it was poisoned. Hercules put
  on the robe, and, after suffering terrible torments, died, or was
  carried off by his father Jupiter.


  [Illustration: HERCULES ET SERPENTES]

LIII.[1] THE INFANT HERCULES AND THE SERPENTS

D”[2] grave supplicium sžmmit de mal”s, sed i” qu” l�gibus[3] de™rum
p‰rent, etiam post mortem cžrantur. Illa v”ta d”s[2] erat gr‰tissima
quae hominibus miser”s žtilissima fuerat. Omnium autem praemi™rum summum
erat immort‰lit‰s. Illud praemium Hercul” datum est.

Herculis pater fuit Iuppiter, m‰ter Alcm�na, et omnium hominum
validissimus fuisse d”citur. Sed Ižn™, r�g”na de™rum, eum, adhžc
”nfantem, interficere stud�bat; nam e”[1] et[2] Hercul�s et Alcm�na
erant inv”s”. Itaque m”sit du‰s serpent”s, utramque saevissimam, quae
medi‰ nocte domum[3] Alcm�nae v�n�runt. Ibi Hercul�s, cum fr‰tre su™,
n™n in lectul™ sed in scžt™ ingent” dormi�bat. Iam aud‰c�s serpent�s
adpropinqu‰verant, iam scžtum mov�bant. Tum fr‰ter, terr™re comm™tus,
magn‰ v™ce m‰trem voc‰vit, sed Hercul�s ipse, fortior quam fr‰ter,
statim ingent”s serpent”s manibus su”s rapuit et interf�cit.

    [Footnote 1: This number refers to the lesson after which the
    selection may be read.]

    [Footnote 2: ÇD”È and Çd”sÈ are from ÇdeusÈ. Cf. ¤468.]

    [Footnote 3: Çl�gibusÈ, ¤501.14.]

    [Footnote 1: Çe”È, _to her_, referring to Juno.]

    [Footnote 2: Çet ... etÈ, _both ... and_.]

    [Footnote 3: ÇdomumÈ, ¤501.20.]


LIV. HERCULES CONQUERS THE MINY®

Hercul�s ‰ puer™[1] corpus suum gravissim”s et difficillim”s lab™ribus
exerc�bat et h™c mod™ v”r�s[2] su‰s c™nfirm‰vit. Iam adul�sc�ns
Th�b”s[3] habit‰bat. Ibi Cre™n qu”dam erat r�x. Minyae, g�ns
validissima, erant f”nitim” Th�b‰n”s, et, quia ™lim Th�b‰n™s v”cerant,
quotann”s l�g‰t™s mitt�bant et vect”gal postul‰bant. Hercul�s autem
c™nstituit c”v”s su™s h™c vect”g‰l” l”ber‰re et dixit r�g”, ÒD‰ mihi
exercitum tuum et ego h™s superb™s host”s super‰b™.Ó Hanc condici™nem
r�x n™n recžs‰vit, et Hercul�s nžnti™s in omn”s partis d”m”sit et c™pi‰s
co�git.[4] Tum tempore opportžnissim™ proelium cum Miny”s comm”sit. Diž
pugn‰tum est, sed d�nique ill” impetum Th�b‰n™rum sustin�re n™n
potu�runt et terga vert�runt fugamque c�p�runt.

    [Footnote 1: lj puer™È, _from boyhood_.]

    [Footnote 2: Çvir�sÈ, from Çv”sÈ. Cf. ¤468.]

    [Footnote 3: ÇTh�b”sÈ, ¤501.36.1.]

    [Footnote 4: Çco�gitÈ, from Çc™g™È.]


HE COMMITS A CRIME AND GOES TO THE DELPHIAN ORACLE TO SEEK EXPIATION

Post hoc proelium Cre™n r�x, tant‰ vict™ri‰ laetus, f”liam suam Hercul”
in m‰trim™nium dedit. Th�b”s Hercul�s cum ux™re su‰ diž v”v�bat et ab
omnibus magnopere am‰b‰tur; sed post mult™s ann™s subit™ [1]in fur™rem
incidit et ipse su‰ manž l”ber™s su™s interf�cit. Post breve tempus
[2]ad s‰nit‰tem reductus tantum scelus expi‰re cupi�bat et c™nstituit ad
™r‰culum Delphicum iter facere. Hoc autem ™r‰culum erat omnium
cl‰rissimum. Ibi sed�bat f�mina quaedam quae Pythia appell‰b‰tur. Ea
c™nsilium dabat i”s qu” ad ™r‰culum veni�bant.

    [Footnote 1: Çin fur™rem inciditÈ, _went mad_.]

    [Footnote 2: Çad s‰nit‰tem reductusÈ, lit. _led back to sanity_.
    What in good English?]


  [Illustration: HERCULES LEONEM SUPERAT]

LV. HERCULES BECOMES SUBJECT TO EURYSTHEUS[1] ¥
      HE STRANGLES THE NEME«AN LION

Itaque Hercul�s Pythiae t™tam rem d�monstr‰vit nec scelus suum abdidit.
Ubi iam Hercul�s f”nem f�cit, Pythia iussit eum ad urbem T”ryntha[2]
disc�dere et ibi r�g” Eurysthe™ s�s� committere. Quae[3] ubi aud”vit,
Hercul�s ad illam urbem statim contendit et Eurysthe™ s� in servitžtem
tr‰didit et d”xit, ÒQuid pr”mum, ï r�x, m� facere iub�s?Ó Eurystheus,
qu” perterr�b‰tur v” et corpore ingent” Herculis et eum occid”[4]
stud�bat, ita respondit: ÒAud”, Hercul�s! Multa mira[5] n‰rrantur d�
le™ne saevissim™ qu” h™c tempore in valle Nemae‰ omnia v‰stat. Iube™ t�,
vir™rum omnium fortissimum, ill™ m™nstr™ homin�s l”ber‰re.Ó Haec verba
Hercul” maxim� placu�runt. ÒProper‰bo,Ó inquit, Òet par�b™ imperi™[6]
tu™.Ó Tum in silv‰s in quibus le™ habit‰bat statim iter f�cit. Mox feram
v”dit et plžr”s impetžs f�cit; fržstr‰ tamen, quod neque sagitt”s neque
žll™ ali™ t�l™ m™nstrum vulner‰re potuit. D�nique Hercul�s saevum le™nem
su”s ingentibus bracchi”s rapuit et fauc”s eius omnibus v”ribus
compressit. H™c mod™ brev” tempore eum interf�cit. Tum corpus le™nis ad
oppidum in umer”s report‰vit et pellem poste‰ pr™[7] veste ger�bat.
Omn�s autem qu™ eam regi™nem incol�bant, ubi f‰mam d� morte le™nis
ingentis acc�p�runt, erant laetissim” et Herculem laud‰bant verb”s
amplissim”s.

    [Footnote 1: ÇEu-rys«theusÈ (pronounced _U-ris«thžs_) was king of
    _T”«ryns_, a Grecian city, whose foundation goes back to prehistoric
    times.]

    [Footnote 2: ÇT”rynthaÈ, the acc. case of ÇT”rynsÈ, a Greek noun.]

    [Footnote 3: ÇQuaeÈ, obj. of Çaud”vitÈ. It is placed first to make a
    close connection with the preceding sentence. This is called a
    connecting relative.]

    [Footnote 4: Çocc”d”È, pres. pass. infin.]

    [Footnote 5: Çm”raÈ, _marvelous things_, the adj. being used as a
    noun. Cf. ÇomniaÈ, in the next line.]

    [Footnote 6: Çimperi™È, ¤501.14.]

    [Footnote 7: Çpr™È, _for, instead of_.]


LVI. SLAYING THE LERNE«AN HYDRA

Deinde Hercul�s ab Eurysthe™ iussus est Hydram occ”dere. Itaque cum
am”c™ Iol‰™[1] contendit ad palždem Lernaeam ubi Hydra incol�bat. Hoc
autem m™nstrum erat serp�ns ing�ns quae novem capita hab�bat. Mox is
m™nstrum repperit et summ™[2] cum per”cul™ collum eius sinistr‰ manž
rapuit et tenuit. Tum dextr‰ manž capita novem absc”dere inc�pit, sed
fržstr‰ lab™r‰bat, quod quoti�ns hoc f�cerat toti�ns alia nova capita
vid�bat. Quod[3] ubi v”dit, statuit capita ign” crem‰re. H™c mod™ oct™
capita d�l�vit, sed extr�mum caput vulner‰r” n™n potuit, quod erat
immort‰le. Itaque illud sub ingent” sax™ Hercul�s posuit et ita
vict™riam report‰vit.

    [Footnote 1: ÇIol‰™È, abl. of _I-o-l‰«us_, the heroÕs best friend.]

    [Footnote 2: Note the emphatic position of this adjective.]

    [Footnote 3: ÇQuod ubiÈ, _when he saw this_, another instance of the
    connecting relative. Cf. p. 199, l. 3.]


LVII. THE ARCADIAN STAG AND THE ERYMANTHIAN BOAR

Postquam Eurysthe™ mors Hydrae nuntiata est, summus terror animum eius
occupavit. Itaque iussit Herculem capere et ad s� report‰re cervum
quendam; nam minim� cup”vit tantum virum in r�gn™ su™ ten�re. Hie autem
cervus d”c�b‰tur aurea cornua et ped�s mult™[1] celeri™r�s vent™[2]
hab�re. Pr”mum Hercul�s vest”gia anim‰lis pet”vit, deinde, ubi cervum
ipsum v”dit, omnibus v”ribus currere inc�pit. Per plžrim™s di�s
contendit nec noctž cess‰vit. D�nique postquam per t™tum annum
cucurrerat--ita d”citur--cervum iam d�fessum c�pit et ad Eurystheum
port‰vit.

Tum v�r™ iussus est Hercul�s aprum quendam capere qu” ill™ tempore agr™s
Erymanthi™s v‰st‰bat et homin�s ill”us loc” magnopere perterr�bat.
Hercul�s laet� neg™tium susc�pit et in Arcadiam celeriter s� rec�pit.
Ibi mox aprum repperit. Ille autem; simul atque Herculem v”dit, statim
quam[3] celerrim� fžgit et metž perterritus in fossam altam s�s�
abdidit. Hercul�s tamen summ‰ cum difficult‰te eum extr‰xit, nec aper
žll™ mod™ s�s� l”ber‰re potuit, et v”vus ad Eurystheum port‰tus est.

    [Footnote 1: Çmult™È, ¤501.27.]

    [Footnote 2: Çvent™È, ¤501.34.]

    [Footnote 3: ÇquamÈ. What is the force of ÇquamÈ with a
    superlative?]


LVIII. HERCULES CLEANS THE AUGE«AN STABLES AND KILLS THE
  STYMPHALIAN BIRDS

Deinde Eurystheus Hercul” hunc lab™rem mult™ gravi™rem imper‰vit.
Aug�‰s[1] qu”dam, qu” ill™ tempore r�gnum ælidis[2] obtin�bat, tria
m”lia boum[3] hab�bat. H”[4] ingent” stabul™ contin�bantur. Hoc
stabulum, quod per tr”gint‰ ann™s n™n pžrg‰tum erat, Hercul�s intr‰
spatium žn”us di�” pžrg‰re iussus est. llle neg™tium alacriter susc�pit,
et pr”mum lab™re gravissim™ maximam fossam f™dit per quam flžminis aquam
d� montibus ad mžrum stabul” džxit. Tum partem parvam mžr” d�l�vit et
aquam in stabulum imm”sit. H™c mod™ f”nm operis f�cit žn™ di� facillim�.

Post pauc™s di�s Hercul�s ad oppidum Stymph‰lum iter f�cit; nam
Eurystheus iusserat eum avis Stymph‰lid�s occ”dere. Hae av�s r™stra
ferrea hab�bant et homin�s miser™s d�vor‰bant. Ille, postquam ad locum
perv�nit, lacum v”dit in qu™ av�s incol�bant. Nžll™ tamen mod™ Hercul�s
avibus adpropinqu‰re potuit; lacus enim n™n ex aqu‰ sed � l”m™
c™nstitit.[5] D�nique autem av�s [6]d� aliqu‰ caus‰ perterritae in aur‰s
vol‰v�runt et magna pars e‰rum sagitt”s Herculis occ”sa est.

    [Footnote 1: ÇAug�‰sÈ, pronounced in English _Aw-j�«as_.]

    [Footnote 2: ÇælidisÈ, gen. case of ÇælisÈ, a district of Greece.]

    [Footnote 3: ÇboumÈ, gen. plur. of Çb™sÈ. For construction see
    ¤501.11.]

    [Footnote 4: Çingent” stabul™È, abl. of means, but in our idiom we
    should say _in a huge stable_.]

    [Footnote 5: Çc™nstititÈ, from ÇconstoÈ.]

    [Footnote 6: Çd� aliqu‰ caus‰ perterritaeÈ, _frightened for some
    reason_.]


  [Illustration: HERCULES ET TAURUS]

LIX. HERCULES CAPTURES THE CRETAN BULL AND CARRIES HIM LIVING TO
EURYSTHEUS

Tum Eurystheus iussit Herculem port‰re v”vum ex ”nsul‰ Cr�t‰ taurum
quendam saevissimum. Ille igitur n‰vem c™nscendit--nam ventus erat
id™neus--atque statim solvit. Postquam tr”duum n‰vigavit, incolumis
”nsulae adpropinqu‰vit. Deinde, postquam omnia par‰ta sunt, contendit ad
eam regi™nem quam taurus vex‰bat. Mox taurum v”dit ac sine žll™ metž
cornua eius corripuit. Tum ingent” lab™re m™nstrum ad n‰vem tr‰xit atque
cum h‰c praed‰ ex ”nsul‰ discessit.


THE FLESH-EATING HORSES OF DIOME«DES

Postquam ex ”nsul‰ Cr�t‰ domum perv�nit, Hercules ab Eurysthe™ in
Thr‰ciam missus est. Ibi Diom�d�s qu”dam, vir saevissimus, r�gnum
obtin�bat et omn”s ‰ f”nibus su”s prohib�bat. Hercul�s iussus erat equ™s
Diomedis rapere et ad Eurystheum džcere. H” autem equ” homin�s
miserrim™s d�vor‰bant d� quibus r�x supplicium sžmere cupi�bat. Hercul�s
ubi perv�nit, pr”mum equ™s ‰ r�ge postul‰vit, sed r�x e™s d�dere
recžs‰vit. Deinde ille ”r‰ comm™tus r�gem occ”dit et corpus eius equ”s
tr‰didit. Itaque is qu” ante‰ mult™s nec‰verat, ipse e™dem supplici™
nec‰tus est. Et equ”, nžper saevissima anim‰lia, postquam domin” su”
corpus d�vor‰v�runt, m‰nsu�t” erant.


LX. THE BELT OF HIPPOL«YTE, QUEEN OF THE AMAZONS

G�ns Am‰zonum[1] d”citur[2] omn”n™ ex mulieribus fuisse. Hae cum vir”s
proelium committere n™n ver�bantur. Hippolyt�, Am‰zonum r�g”na, balteum
habuit pulcherrimum. Hunc balteum possid�re f”lia Eurysthe” vehementer
cupi�bat. Itaque Eurystheus iussit Herculem impetum in Am‰zon�s facere.
Ille mult”s cum c™pi”s n‰vem c™nscend”t et paucis di�bus in Am‰zonum
f”n”s perv�nit, ac balteum postul‰vit. Eum tr‰dere ipsa Hipporyt� quidem
cup”vit; reliqu”s tamen Amazonibus[3] persu‰d�re n™n potuit. Postr”di�
Hercul�s proelium comm”sit. Mult‰s h™r‰s utrimque quam fortissim�
pugn‰tum est D�nique tamen mulieres terga vert�runt et fug‰ salžtem
peti�runt. Multae autem captae sunt, in qu™ numer™ erat ipsa Hippolyt�.
Hercul�s postquam balteum acc�pit, omnibus capt”v”s l”bert‰tem dedit.

    [Footnote 1: A fabled tribe of warlike women living in Asia Minor.]

    [Footnote 2: Çomn”n™È, etc., _to have consisted entirely of women._]

    [Footnote 3: ÇAm‰zonibusÈ, ¤501.14.]


  [Illustration: HERCULES ET CERBERUS]

THE DESCENT TO HADES AND THE DOG CER«BERUS

Iamque žnus modo � duodecim lab™ribus relinqu�b‰tur sed inter omn”s hic
erat difficillimus. Iussus est enim canem Cerberum[4] ex Orc™ in lžcem
trahere. Ex Orc™ autem n�m™ ante‰ reverterat. Praetere‰ Cerberus erat
m™nstrum maxim� horribile et tria capita hab�bat. Hercul�s postquam
imperia Eurysthe” acc�pit, statim profectus est et in Orcum d�scendit.
Ibi v�r™ n™n sine summ™ pericul™ Cerberum manibus rapuit et ingent” cum
lab™re ex Orc™ in lžcem et adurbem Eurysthe” tr‰xit.

Sic duodecim labor�s ill”[5] intr‰ duodecim ann™s c™nfect” sunt. D�mum
post longam v”tam Hercul�s ‰ de”s receptus est et Iuppiter f”li™ su™
dedit immort‰lit‰tem.

    [Footnote 4: The dog Cerberus guarded the gate of Orcus, the abode
    of the dead.]

    [Footnote 5: Çill”È, _those famous._]


  [Illustration: PUERI ROMANI]

P. CORNELIUS LENTULUS: THE STORY OF A ROMAN BOY[1]

LXI. PUBLIUS IS BORN NEAR POMPE«II

P. Corn�lius Lentulus,[2] adul�sc�ns R™m‰nus, amplissim‰ famili‰[3]
n‰tus est; nam pater eius, M‰rcus, erat dux per”tissimus, cuius
virtžte[4] et c™nsili™ multae vict™riae report‰tae erant; atque mater
eius, lžlia, ‰ cl‰rissim”s mai™ribus orta est. N™n v�r™ in urbe sed
ržr”[5] Pžblius n‰tus est, et cum m‰tre habit‰bat in v”ll‰ quae in maris
l”tore et sub rad”cibus magn” montis sita erat. M™ns autem erat Vesuvius
et parva urbs Pomp�i” oct™ m”lia[6] passuum[7] aberat. In Itali‰ ant”qu‰
erant plžrimae quidem villae et pulchrae, sed inter h‰s omn”s nžlla erat
pulchrior quam villa M‰rc” Ižliaeque. Fr™ns v”llae mžr™ a maris
fluctibus mžni�b‰tur. Hinc mare et l”tora et ”nsulae long� l‰t�que
c™nspic”[8] ac saepe n‰v�s longae et oner‰riae poterant. å terg™ et ab
utr™que latere agr” fer‰cissim” pat�bant. Undique erat magna vari™rum
fl™rum c™pia et multa ingentium arborum genera quae aest‰te[9] umbram
d�fess”s agricol”s gr‰tissimam adfer�bant. Praetere‰ erant[10] in agr”s
stabul”sque multa anim‰lium genera, n™n s™lum equ” et bov�s sed etiam
r‰rae av�s. Etiam erat[10] magna pisc”na pl�na piscium; nam R™m‰n”
pisc”s d”ligenter col�bant.

    [Footnote 1: This story is fiction with certain historical facts in
    C¾sarÕs career as a setting. However, the events chronicled might
    have happened, and no doubt did happen to many a Roman youth.]

    [Footnote 2: A Roman had three names, as, ÇPžbliusÈ (given name),
    ÇCorn�liusÈ (name of the _g�ns_ or clan), ÇLentulusÈ (family name).]

    [Footnote 3: Abl. of source, which is akin to the abl. of
    separation (¤501.32).]

    [Footnote 4: ÇvirtžteÈ, ¤501.24.]

    [Footnote 5: Çržr”È, ¤501.36.1.]

    [Footnote 6: Çm”liaÈ, ¤501.21.]

    [Footnote 7: ÇpassuumÈ, ¤501.11.]

    [Footnote 8: Çc™nspic”È, infin. with poterant, ¤215. Consult the
    map of Italy for the approximate location of the villa.]

    [Footnote 9: Çaest‰teÈ, ¤501.35.]

    [Footnote 10: How are the forms of ÇsumÈ translated when they
    precede the subject?]


  [Illustration: CASA ROMANA]

LXII. HIS LIFE ON THE FARM

Huius v”llae D‰vus, servus M‰rc”, est v”licus[1] et cum Lesbi‰ ux™re
omnia cžrat. V”licus et uxor in cas‰ humil”, medi”s in agr”s sit‰,
habitant. å pr”m‰ lžce žsque ad vesperum s�[2] gravibus lab™ribus
exercent ut omn” r�s bene gerant.[3] Plžrima enim sunt officia D‰v” et
Lesbiae. V”licus serv™s regit n� tard” sint[3]; mittit ali™s qu” agr™s
arent,[3] ali™s qu” hort™s inrigent,[3] et opera in[4] t™tum diem
imp™nit. Lesbia autem omnibus vest”menta parat, cibum coquit, p‰nem
facit.

N™n long� ab h™rum cas‰ et in summ™ colle situm surg�bat domicilium
ips”us domin” dominaeque amplissimum. Ibi plžr”s ann™s[5] Pžblius cum
m‰tre v”tam f�l”cem ag�bat; nam pater eius, M‰rcus, in terr”s longinqu”s
gravia re” pžblicae bella ger�bat nec domum[6] revert” poterat. Neque
puer™ quidem molestum est ržr”[7] v”vere. Eum multae r�s d�lectant.
Magnopere amat silv‰s, agr™s, equ™s, bov�s, gall”n‰s, av”s, reliquaque
anim‰lia. Saepe plžr”s h™r‰s[8] ad mare sedet qu™[9] melius fluctžs et
n‰v”s spectet. Nec omn”n™ sine comitibus erat, quod Lydia, D‰v” f”lia,
quae erat eiusdem aet‰tis, cum e™ adhžc infante lžd�bat, inter qu™s cum
ann”s am”citia cr�sc�bat. Lydia nžllum alium ducem d�lig�bat et Pžblius
ab puellae latere r‰r™ disc�d�bat. Itaque sub cl‰r™ Italiae s™le Pžblius
et Lydia, am”c” fid�lissim”, per camp™s coll”sque cot”di� vag‰bantur.
Modo in silv‰ f”nitim‰ lždebant ubi Pžblius sagitt”s[10] celeribus avis
d�ici�bat et Lydia cor™n”s vari™rum fl™rum com‰s su‰s ™rn‰bat; modo
aquam et cibum port‰bant ad D‰vum serv™sque d�fess™s qu” agr™s col�bant:
modo in cas‰ parv‰ aut h™r‰s lact‰s in lžd™ c™nsžm�bant aut auxilium
dabant Lesbiae, quae cibum vir™ et serv”s par‰bat vel ali‰s r�s
domestic‰s ag�bat.

    [Footnote 1: The Çv”licusÈ was a slave who acted as overseer of a
    farm. He directed the farming operations and the sale of the
    produce.]

    [Footnote 2: ÇseÈ, reflexive pron., object of ÇexercentÈ.]

    [Footnote 3: For the construction, see ¤501.40.]

    [Footnote 4: ÇinÈ, _for_.]

    [Footnote 5: Çann™sÈ, ¤501.21.]

    [Footnote 6: ÇdomumÈ, ¤501.20.]

    [Footnote 7: Çržr”È, ¤501.36.1.]

    [Footnote 8: Çh™r‰sÈ, cf. Çann™sÈ, line 17.]

    [Footnote 9: Çqu™ ... spectetÈ, ¤¤349, 350.]

    [Footnote 10: ÇsagittisÈ, ¤501.24.]


LXIII. MARCUS LENTULUS, THE FATHER OF PUBLIUS, IS SHIPWRECKED ¥
JULIA RECEIVES A LETTER FROM HIM

Iam Pžblius[1] decem ann™s hab�bat cum M. Corn�lius Lentulus, pater
eius, qu” qu”nque ann™s[2] grave bellum in Asi‰ ger�bat, non sine gl™ri‰
domum[3] revert�b‰tur. Namque multa secunda proelia f�cerat, maxim‰s
hostium c™pi‰s d�l�verat, mult‰s urb”s populo[4] R™m‰n™ inim”c‰s
c�perat. Primum nžntius perv�nit qu” ‰ Lentul™[5] missus erat[6] ut
profecti™nem suam nžnti‰ret. Deinde plžr”s di�s[7] reditum vir” optim”
m‰ter f”liusque exspect‰bant et anim”s[8] sollicitis de™s immort‰l”s
fržstr‰ col�bant. Tum d�mum h‰s litter‰s summo cum gaudi™ acc�p�runt:

[9]ÒM‰rcus Ižliae suac salžtem d”cit. S” val�s, bene est; ego vale™. Ex
Graeci‰, qu™[10] praeter spem et op”ni™nem hodi� perv�n”, h‰s litter‰s
ad t� scrib™. Namque n‰vis nostra fr‰cta est; n™s autem--[11]d”s est
gratia--incolumes sumus. Ex Asiae[12] portž n‰vem l�n” vent™ solvimus.
Postquam[13] altum mare tenuimus [14]nec iam žllae terrae app‰ru�runt,
caelum undique et undique fluctžs, subit™ magna tempest‰s coorta est et
n‰vem vehementissim� adfl”xit. Vent”s fluctibusque adfl”ct‰t”[15] nec
s™lem discernere nec cursum ten�re poter‰mus et omnia praesentem mortem
intent‰bant. Tr”s di�s[16] et tr”s noct”s[16] sine r�m”s v�l”sque
agimur. Qu‰rt™ di�[17] pr”mum terra v”sa est et violenter in saxa, quae
n™n long� ‰ l”tore aberant, d�iect” sumus. Tum v�r™ mai™ra per”cula
tim�b‰mus; sed nauta qu”dam, vir fortissimus, ex n‰ve in fluctžs ”r‰t™s
d�siluit [18]ut fžnem ad l”tus port‰ret; quam rem summ™ lab™re vix
eff�cit. Ita omn�s serv‰t” sumus. Gr‰ti‰s igitur et hon™rem Neptžn™
d�b�mus, qu” deus n™s � per”cul™ �ripuit. Nunc Ath�n”s[19] sum, qu™
c™nfžg” ut mihi pauc‰s h™r‰s ad qui�tem darem.[20] Quam pr”mum autem
aliam n‰vem condžcam ut iter ad Italiam reliquum c™nficiam et domum[21]
ad me™s c‰r™s revertar. Salžt‰ nostrum Pžblium am”cissim� et val�tždinem
tuam cžr‰ d”ligenter. [22]Kalend”s M‰rti”s.Ó

    [Footnote 1: _was ten years old_.]

    [Footnote 2: Çann™sÈ, ¤501.21.]

    [Footnote 3: ÇdomumÈ, ¤501.20.]

    [Footnote 4: Çpopul™È, dat. with inim”c‰s, cf. ¤501.16.]

    [Footnote 5: ÇLentul™È, ¤501.33.]

    [Footnote 6: Çut ... nžnti‰retÈ, ¤501.40.]

    [Footnote 7: Çdi�sÈ, cf. ann™s, 1. 9.]

    [Footnote 8: Çanim”sÈ, abl. of manner. Do you see one in line 15?]

    [Footnote 9: This is the usual form for the beginning of a Latin
    letter. First we have the greeting, and then the expression S”
    val�s, etc. The date of the letter is usually given at the end, and
    also the place of writing, if not previously mentioned in the
    letter.]

    [Footnote 10: Çqu™È, _where_.]

    [Footnote 11: Çd”s est gr‰tiaÈ, _thank God_, in our idiom.]

    [Footnote 12: Asia refers to the Roman province of that name in Asia
    Minor.]

    [Footnote 13: Çaltum mare tenuimusÈ, _we were well out to sea._]

    [Footnote 14: Çnec iamÈ, _and no longer_.]

    [Footnote 15: Çadfl”ct‰t”È, perf. passive part. _tossed about_.]

    [Footnote 16: What construction?]

    [Footnote 17: Çdi�È, ¤501.35.]

    [Footnote 18: Çut ... port‰retÈ, ¤501.40.]

    [Footnote 19: ÇAth�n”sÈ, ¤501.36.1.]

    [Footnote 20: ÇdaremÈ, cf. Çport‰retÈ, l. 6.]

    [Footnote 21: Why not Çad domumÈ?]

    [Footnote 22: ÇKalend”s M‰rti”sÈ, _the Calends_ or _first of March_;
    abl. of time, giving the date of the letter.]


LXIV. LENTULUS REACHES HOME ¥ PUBLIUS VISITS POMPEII WITH HIS FATHER

Post pauc™s di�s n‰vis M. Corn�l” Lentul” portum M”s�n”[1] petiit, qu”
portus n™n long� ‰ Pomp�i”s situs est; qu™ in portž classis R™m‰n‰
p™n�b‰tur et ad pugn‰s n‰v‰l”s ™rn‰b‰tur. Ibi n‰v�s omnium generum
c™nspic” poterant. Iamque incr�dibil” celerit‰te n‰vis longa qu‰
Lentulus veh�b‰tur l”tor” adpropinqu‰vit; nam n™n s™lum vent™ sed etiam
r�m”s impell�b‰tur. In alt‰ puppe st‰bat gubern‰tor et n™n procul aliqu”
m”lit�s R™m‰n” cum arm”s splendid”s, inter qu™s cl‰rissimus erat
Lentulus. Deinde serv” r�m”s contendere cess‰v�runt[2]; nautae v�lum
contr‰x�runt et ancor‰s i�c�runt. Lentulus statim � n‰v” �gressus est
et[3] ad villam suam proper‰vit. Eum Ižlia, Pžblius, t™taque familia
exc�p�runt. [4]Qu” complexžs, quanta gaudia fu�runt!

Postr”di� eius di�” Lentulus f”li™ su™ d”xit, ÒVen”, m” Pžbl”, m�cum.
Pomp�i™s iter hodi� faciam. M‰ter tua su‰det[5] ut fržctžs et cib‰ria
emam. Namque plžr”s am”c™s ad c�nam voc‰vimus et mult”s r�bus[6] eg�mus.
Ea hort‰tur ut quam pr”mum profic”sc‰mur.Ó ÒLibenter, m” pater,Ó inquit
Pžblius. ÒT�cum esse mihi semper est gr‰tum; nec Pomp�i™s umquam v”d”.
Sine mor‰ profic”sc” par‰tus sum.Ó Tum celeriter currum c™nscend�runt et
ad urbis mžr™s vect” sunt. Stabi‰n‰ port‰[7] urbem ingress” sunt.
Pžblius str‰t‰s vi‰s m”r‰tur et saxa alti™ra quae in medi™ disposita
erant et alt‰s orbit‰s qu‰s rotae inter haec saxa f�cerant. Etiam
strepitum m”r‰tur, multitždinem, carr™s, font”s, dom™s, tabern‰s,
forum[8] cum statu”s, templ”s, reliqu”sque aedifici”s pžblic”s.

    [Footnote 1: Misenum had an excellent harbor, and under the emperor
    Augustus became the chief naval station of the Roman fleet. See map
    of Italy.]

    [Footnote 2: Why is the infinitive used with Çcess‰v�runtÈ?]

    [Footnote 3: See Plate I, Frontispiece.]

    [Footnote 4: Observe that these words are exclamatory.]

    [Footnote 5: What construction follows Çsu‰de™È? ¤501.41.]

    [Footnote 6: Çr�busÈ, ¤501.32.]

    [Footnote 7: This is the abl. of the _way by which_ motion takes
    place, sometimes called the abl. of route. The construction comes
    under the general head of the abl. of means. For the scene here
    described, see Plate II, p. 53, and notice especially the
    stepping-stones for crossing the street (Çsaxa quae in medi™
    disposita erantÈ).]

    [Footnote 8: The forum of Pompeii was surrounded by temples, public
    halls, and markets of various sorts. Locate Pompeii on the map.]


LXV. A DAY AT POMPEII

Apud forum � currž d�scend�runt et Lentulus d”xit, ÒH”c sunt multa
tabern‰rum genera, m” Pžbl”. Ecce, tr‰ns viam est pop”na! [1]Hoc genus
tabern‰rum cib‰ria v�ndit. Fržctžs quoque ante i‰nuam stant. Ibi cib‰ria
mea emam.Ó ÒOptim�,Ó respondit Pžblius. ÒAt ubi, m” pater, cržstula
emere possumus? Namque m‰ter n™b”s imper‰vit [2]ut haec quoque
par‰r�mus. Time™ ut[3] ista pop”na v�ndat cržstula.Ó ÒBene d”cis,Ó
inquit Lentulus. ÒAt n™nne vid�s illum fontem ‰ dextr‰ ubi aqua per
le™nis caput fluit? In ill™ ips™ loc™ est taberna p”st™ris qu” sine
dubi™ v�ndit cržstula.Ó

Brev” tempore[4] omnia erant par‰ta, iamque [5]qu”nta h™ra erat. Deinde
Lentulus et f”lius ad caup™nam proper‰v�runt, quod fam�[6] et sit”[7]
urg�bantur. Ibi sub arboris umbr‰ s�d�runt et puer™ imper‰v�runt ut
sibi[8] cibum et v”num daret. Huic imperi™[9] puer celeriter p‰ruit. Tum
laet” s�[10] ex lab™re ref�c�runt.

Post prandium prefect” sunt ut alia urbis spect‰cula vid�rent. Ill™
tempore fu�runt Pomp�i”s[11] multa templa, duo the‰tra, thermae
magnumque amphithe‰trum, quae omnia post pauc™s ann™s flamm”s atque
incendi”s Vesuv” et terrae m™tž d�l�ta sunt. Ante hanc calamit‰tem autem
homin�s [12]nihil d� monte verit” sunt. In amphithe‰tr™ quidem Pžblius
mor‰r” cup”vit ut spect‰cula gladi‰t™ria vid�ret, quae in[13] illum
ipsum diem pr™scr”pta erant et iam [14]r� v�r‰ inc�perant. Sed Lentulus
d”xit, ÒMor‰r”, Pžbl”, [15]vereor ut poss”mus. Iam decima h™ra est et
via est longa. Tempus su‰det ut quam pr”mum domum revert‰mur.Ó Itaque
serv™ imper‰vit ut equ™s iungeret, et s™lis occ‰sž[16] ad v”llam
perv�n�runt.

    [Footnote 1: We say, _this kind of shop_; Latin, _this kind of
    shops_.]

    [Footnote 2: Çut ... par‰r�musÈ, ¤501.41.]

    [Footnote 3: How is ÇutÈ translated after a verb of fearing? How
    Çn�È? Cf. ¤501.42.]

    [Footnote 4: ÇtemporeÈ, ¤501.35.]

    [Footnote 5: Çqu”nta h™raÈ. The Romans numbered the hours of the day
    consecutively from sunrise to sunset, dividing the day, whether long
    or short, into twelve equal parts.]

    [Footnote 6: Çfam�È shows a slight irregularity in that the abl.
    ending Ç-eÈ is long.]

    [Footnote 7: ÇsitisÈ, _thirst_, has Ç-imÈ in the acc. sing., Ç-”È in
    the abl. sing., and no plural.]

    [Footnote 8: Observe that the reflexive pronoun ÇsibiÈ does not here
    refer to the subject of the subordinate clause in which it stands,
    but to the subject of the main clause. This so-called _indirect_ use
    of the reflexive is often found in object clauses of purpose.]

    [Footnote 9: What case? Cf. ¤501.14.]

    [Footnote 10: Çs�È, cf. p. 205, l. 7, and note.]

    [Footnote 11: ÇPomp�i”sÈ, ¤501.36.1.]

    [Footnote 12: Çnihil ... verit” suntÈ, _had no fears of the
    mountain_.]

    [Footnote 13: ÇinÈ, _for_.]

    [Footnote 14: Çr� v�r‰È, _in fact_.]

    [Footnote 15: Çvereor utÈ, ¤501.42.]

    [Footnote 16: Çocc‰sžÈ, ¤501.35.]


LXVI. LENTULUS ENGAGES A TUTOR FOR HIS SON

å pr”m”s ann”s quidem Ižlia ipsa f”lium suum docuerat, et Pžblius n™n
s™lum [1]pžr� et Lat”n� loqu” poterat sed etiam commod� leg�bat et
scr”b�bat. Iam Ennium[2] ali™sque po�t‰s l�gerat. Nunc v�r™ Pžblius
[3]duodecim ann™s hab�bat; itaque e” pater bonum magistrum, [4]virum
omn” doctr”n‰ et virtžte ™rn‰tissimum, par‰vit, [5]qu” Graeca, mžsicam,
ali‰sque art”s doc�ret. [6]Namque ill”s temporibus omn�s fer� gent�s
Graec� loqu�bantur. Cum Pžbli™ ali” puer”, Lentul” am”c™rum f”li”,[7]
disc�bant. Nam saepe apud R™m‰n™s m™s erat [8]n™n in lždum f”li™s
mittere sed dom” per magistrum doc�re. Cot”di� discipul” cum magistr™ in
peristyl™[9] M‰rc” domžs sed�bant. Omn�s puer” bullam auream, or”ginis
honestae signum, in coll™ ger�bant, et omn�s tog‰ praetext‰ amict”
erant, [10]quod n™ndum s�decim ann™s[11] n‰t” sunt.

    [Footnote 1: Çpžr� ... poteratÈ, freely, _could speak Latin well_.
    What is the literal translation?]

    [Footnote 2: ÇEnniumÈ, the father of Latin poetry.]

    [Footnote 3: Çduodecim ... hab�batÈ, cf. p. 206, l. 8, and note.]

    [Footnote 4: ÇvirumÈ, etc., _a very well-educated and worthy man_.
    Observe the Latin equivalent.]

    [Footnote 5: Çqu” ... doc�retÈ, a relative clause of purpose. Cf. ¤¤
    349, 350.]

    [Footnote 6: In C¾sarÕs time Greek was spoken more widely in the
    Roman world than any other language.]

    [Footnote 7: Çf”li”È, in apposition with Çpuer”È.]

    [Footnote 8: Çn™n ... mittereÈ. This infinitive clause is the
    subject of ÇeratÈ. Cf. ¤216. The same construction is repeated in
    the next clause, Çdom” ... doc�reÈ. The object of Çdoc�reÈ is
    Çf”li™sÈ understood.]

    [Footnote 9: The peristyle was an open court surrounded by a
    colonnade.]

    [Footnote 10: At the age of sixteen a boy laid aside the _bulla_
    and the _toga praetexta_ and assumed _toga vir”lis_ or manly gown.]

    [Footnote 11: Çann™sÈ, ¤501.21. The expression Çn™ndum s�decim
    ann™s n‰t” suntÈ means literally, _they were born not yet sixteen
    years_. This is the usual expression for age. What is the English
    equivalent?]


  [Illustration: TABULA ET STILUS]

SCENE IN SCHOOL ¥ AN EXERCISE IN COMPOSITION

DISCIPULë. Salv�, magister.
MAGISTER. V™s quoque omn�s, salv�te. [1]Tabul‰sne port‰vistis et
  stil™s?
D. Port‰vimus.
M. Iam f‰bulam Aes™p”[2] disc�mus. Ego legam, v™s in tabul”s scr”bite.
  Et tž, Pžbl”, d‰ mihi � caps‰[3] Aes™p” volžmen.[4] Iam aud”te
  omn�s: _Vulp�s et óva_.
Vulp�s ™lim fam� co‰cta žvam d�pendentem v”dit. Ad žvam sali�bat,
  sžmere c™n‰ns. Fržstr‰ diž c™n‰ta, tandem ”r‰ta erat et sal”re
  cess‰ns d”xit: ÒIlla žva est acerba; acerbam žvam [5]nihil moror.Ó
Omnia«ne scr”psistis, puer”?
D. Omnia, magister.

    [Footnote 1: Tablets were thin boards of wood smeared with wax. The
    writing was done with a stylus, a pointed instrument like a pencil,
    made of bone or metal, with a knob at the other end. The knob was
    used to smooth over the wax in making erasures and corrections.]

    [Footnote 2: ÇAes™p”È, the famous Greek to whom are ascribed most of
    the fables current in the ancient world.]

    [Footnote 3: A cylindrical box for holding books and papers, shaped
    like a hatbox.]

    [Footnote 4: Ancient books were written on rolls made of papy«rus.]

    [Footnote 5: Çnihil mororÈ, _I care nothing for_.]


LXVII. PUBLIUS GOES TO ROME TO FINISH HIS EDUCATION

Iamque Pžblius, [1]qu”ndecim ann™s n‰tus, [2]pr”m”s litter‰rum element”s
c™nfect”s, R™mam petere voluit ut schol‰s grammatic™rum et philosoph™rum
frequent‰ret. Et facillim� patr”[3] su™, qui ipse philosophiae studi™
ten�b‰tur, persu‰sit. Itaque [4]omnibus r�bus ad profecti™nem
compar‰t”s, pater f”liusque equ”s anim™s”s vect”[5] ad magnam urbem
profect” sunt. E™s profic”scent”s Ižlia t™taque familia v™t”s
precibusque pr™secžtae sunt. Tum per loca[6] pl‰na et collis silv”s
vest”t™s viam ingress” sunt ad N™lam, quod oppidum e™s hospiti™ modic™
exc�pit. N™lae[7] du‰s h™r‰s mor‰t” sunt, quod s™l mer”di‰nus ‰rd�bat.
Tum r�ct‰ vi‰[8] circiter v”gint” m”lia[9] passuum[9] Capuam,[9] ad
”nsignem Camp‰niae urbem, contend�runt. E™[10] mult‰ nocte d�fess”
perv�n�runt. [11]Postr”di� eius di�”, somn™ et cib™ recre‰t”, Capu‰
discess�runt et [13]viam Appiam ingress”, quae Capuam tangit et žsque ad
urbem R™mam džcit, ante mer”diem Sinuessam perv�n�runt, quod oppidum
tangit mare. Inde pr”m‰ lžce profic”scent�s Formi‰s[13] proper‰v�runt,
ubi Cicer™, ™r‰tor clarissimus, qu” forte apud v”llam suam erat, e™s
benign� exc�pit. Hinc [14]itinere v”gint” qu”nque m”lium passuum fact™,
Tarrac”nam, oppidum in sax”s altissim”s situm, v”d�runt. Iamque n™n
long� aberant palžd�s magnae, quae multa m”lia passuum undique patent.
Per e‰s pedestris via est gravis et in n‰ve vi‰t™r�s vehuntur. Itaque
[15]equ”s relict”s Lentulus et Pžblius n‰vem c™nscend�runt, et, žn‰
nocte in tr‰nsitž c™nsžmpt‰, Forum App” v�n�runt. Tum brev” tempore
Ar”cia e™s exc�pit. Hoc oppidum, in colle situm, ab urbe Rom‰ s�decim
m”lia passuum abest. Inde d�clivis via žsque ad latum campum džcit ubi
R™ma stat. Quem ad locum ubi Pžblius v�nit et R™mam adhžc rem™tam,
maximam t™t”us orbis terr‰rum urbem, c™nsp�xit, summ‰ adm”r‰ti™ne et
gaudi™ adfectus est. Sine mor‰ d�scend�runt, et, medi™ interv‰ll™ quam
celerrim� super‰t™, urbem port‰ Cap�n‰ ingress” sunt.

    [Footnote 1: Çqu”ndecimÈ, etc., cf. p. 210, l. 5, and note.]

    [Footnote 2: Çpr”m”s ... c™nfect”sÈ, abl. abs. Cf. ¤501.28.]

    [Footnote 3: Çpatr”È, dat. with Çpersu‰sitÈ.]

    [Footnote 4: Çomnibus ... compar‰t”sÈ, cf. note 2.]

    [Footnote 5: Çvect”È, perf. pass. part. of Çveh™È.]

    [Footnote 6: What is there peculiar about the gender of this word?]

    [Footnote 7: ÇN™laeÈ, locative case, ¤501.36.2.]

    [Footnote 8: Çvi‰È, cf. Çport‰È, p. 208, l. 7, and note.]

    [Footnote 9: What construction?]

    [Footnote 10: ÇE™È, adv. _there_.]

    [Footnote 11: ÇPostr”di� eius di�”È, _on the next day_.]

    [Footnote 12: Çviam AppiamÈ, the most famous of all Roman roads, the
    great highway from Rome to Tarentum and Brundisium, with numerous
    branches. Locate on the map the various towns that are mentioned in
    the lines that follow.]

    [Footnote 13: ÇFormi‰sÈ, _Formi¾_, one of the most beautiful spots
    on this coast, and a favorite site for the villas of rich Romans.]

    [Footnote 14: Çitinere ... fact™È, abl. abs. The gen. Çm”liumÈ
    modifies ÇitinereÈ.]

    [Footnote 15: Çequ”s relict”sÈ. What construction? Point out a
    similar one in the next line.]


  [Illustration: BULLA]

LXVIII. PUBLIUS PUTS ON THE TOGA VIRILIS

Pžblius iam t™tum annum R™mae mor‰b‰tur[1] multaque urbis spect‰cula
v”derat et mult™s sibi[2] am”c™s par‰verat. E”[3] omn�s fav�bant; [4]d�
e™ omn�s bene sp�r‰re poterant. Cot”di� Pžblius scholas philosoph™rum et
grammatic™rum tant™ studi™ frequent‰bat [5]ut ali”s cl‰rum exemplum
praeb�ret. Saepe erat cum patre in cžri‰[6]; quae r�s eff�cit [7]ut
summ™s re” pžblicae vir™s et aud”ret et vid�ret. Ubi [8]s�decim ann™s
natus est, bullam[9] auream et togam praetextam m™re R™m‰n™ d�posuit
atque vir”lem togam sžmpsit. Vir”lis autem toga erat omn”n™ alba, sed
praetexta cl‰vum purpureum in margine hab�bat. [10]D�p™nere togam
praetextam et sžmere togam vir”lem erat r�s gr‰tissima puer™ R™m‰n™,
quod poste‰ vir et c”vis R™m‰nus hab�b‰tur.

[11]H”s r�bus gest”s Lentulus ad ux™rem suam h‰s litter‰s scr”psit:

[12]ÒM‰rcus Ižliae suae salžtem d”cit. S” val�s, bene est; ego vale™.
Acc�p” tu‰s litter‰s. H‰s nunc R™m‰ per servum fid�lissimum mitt™ ut d�
Pžbli™ nostr™ quam celerrim� sci‰s. Nam hodi� e” togam vir”lem ded”.
Ante lucem surr�x”[13] et pr”mum bullam auream d� coll™ eius rem™v”. H‰c
Laribus[14] c™nsecr‰t‰ et sacr”s fact”s, eum tog‰ vir”l” vest”v”.
Interim plžr�s am”c” cum multitždine optim™rum c”vium et honest™rum
clientium perv�nerant [15]qu” Pžblium dom™ in forum d�džcerent. Ibi in
c”vit‰tem receptus est et n™men, Pžblius Corn�lius Lentulus, apud c”v”s
R™m‰n™s ascr”ptum est. Omn�s e” am”cissim” fu�runt et magna[16] de e™
praed”cunt. Sapientior enim aequ‰libus[17] est et magnum ingenium habet.
[18]Cžr‰ ut vale‰s.Ó

    [Footnote 1: Çmor‰b‰turÈ, translate as if pluperfect.]

    [Footnote 2: ÇsibiÈ, _for himself_.]

    [Footnote 3: ÇE”È, why dat.?]

    [Footnote 4: Çd� ... poterantÈ, in English, _all regarded him as a
    very promising youth;_ but what does the Latin say?]

    [Footnote 5: Çut ... praeb�retÈ, ¤501.43.]

    [Footnote 6: Çcžri‰È, a famous building near the Roman Forum.]

    [Footnote 7: Çut ... aud”ret et vid�retÈ, ¤501.44.]

    [Footnote 8: Çs�decim, etc.È, cf. p. 210, l. 5, and note.]

    [Footnote 9: ÇbullamÈ, cf. p. 210, l. 3, and note 4.]

    [Footnote 10: These infinitive clauses are the subject of ÇeratÈ.
    Cf. ¤216.]

    [Footnote 11: ÇH”s r�bus gest”sÈ, i.e. the assumption of the _toga
    virilis_ and attendant ceremonies.]

    [Footnote 12: Compare the beginning of this letter with the one on
    page 206.]

    [Footnote 13: Çsurr�x”È, from Çsurg™È.]

    [Footnote 14: The Lares were the spirits of the ancestors, and were
    worshiped as household gods. All that the house contained was
    confided to their care, and sacrifices were made to them daily.]

    [Footnote 15: Çqu” ... d�džcerentÈ, ¤350.]

    [Footnote 16: ÇmagnaÈ, _great things_, a neuter adj. used as a
    noun.]

    [Footnote 17: Çaequ‰libusÈ, ¤501.34.]

    [Footnote 18: ÇCžr‰ ut vale‰sÈ, _take good care of your health_. How
    does the Latin express this idea?]


LXIX. PUBLIUS JOINS C®SARÕS ARMY IN GAUL

Pžblius iam adul�sc�ns postquam togam vir”lem sžmpsit, ali”s r�bus
stud�re inc�pit et praesertim žsž[1] arm™rum s�[2] d”ligenter exercuit.
Magis magisque am‰vit ill‰s art”s quae m”lit‰rem animum d�lectant.
Iamque erant [3]qu” e” cursum m”lit‰rem praed”cerent. Nec sine caus‰,
quod cert� patris ”signe exemplum [4]ita multum trah�bat. [5]Pauc”s ante
ann”s C. Ižlius Caesar, ducum R™m‰n™rum maximus, c™nsul cre‰tus erat et
h™c tempore in Galli‰ bellum grave ger�bat. Atque in exercitž eius
plžr�s adul�scent�s m”lit‰bant, apud qu™s erat am”cus qu”dam Pžbl”. Ille
Pžblium cr�br”s litter”s vehementer hort‰b‰tur [6]ut iter in Galliam
faceret. Neque Pžblius recžs‰vit, et, mult”s am”c”s ad portam urbis
pr™sequentibus, ad Caesaris castra profectus est. Qu‰rt™ di� postquam
iter ingressus est, ad Alp”s, mont”s altissim™s, perv�nit. H”s summ‰
difficult‰te super‰t”s, tandem Gall™rum in f”nibus erat. Pr”m™ autem
veritus est ut[7] castr”s R™m‰n”s adpropinqu‰re posset, quod Gall”,
maxim”s c™pi”s co‰ct”s, R™m‰n™s obsid�bant et vi‰s omn”s iam clauserant.
H”s r�bus comm™tus Pžblius vestem Gallicam induit n� ‰ Gall”s caper�tur,
et ita per hostium c™pi‰s incolumis ad castra perven”re potuit. Intr‰
mžn”ti™nes acceptus, ‰ Caesare benign� exceptus est. Imper‰tor fortem
adul�scentem amplissim”s verb”s laud‰vit et eum [8]tribžnum m”l”tum
cre‰vit.

    [Footnote 1: Abl. of means.]

    [Footnote 2: Çs�È, reflexive object of ÇexercuitÈ.]

    [Footnote 3: Çqu” ... praed”cerentÈ, ¤501.45.]

    [Footnote 4: Çita multum trah�batÈ, _had a great influence in that
    direction_.]

    [Footnote 5: ÇPauc”s ante ann”sÈ, _a few years before_; in Latin,
    _before by a few years_, ÇanteÈ being an adverb and Çann”sÈ abl. of
    degree of difference.]

    [Footnote 6: Çut ... faceretÈ, ¤501.41.]

    [Footnote 7: ÇutÈ, how translated here? See ¤501.42.]

    [Footnote 8: The _military tribune_ was a commissioned officer
    nearly corresponding to our rank of colonel. The tribunes were often
    inexperienced men, so C¾sar did not allow them much responsibility.]


  [Illustration: IMPEDIMENTA]

HOW THE ROMANS MARCHED AND CAMPED

Exercitus qu” in hostium f”nibus bellum genit mult”s per”cu”s
circumdatus est. [1]Quae per”cula ut v”t‰ret, R™m‰ni summam cžram
adh”b�re sol�bant. Adpropinquante�s c™pi”s hostium agmen ita disp™n�bant
[2]ut imper‰tor ipse cum pl‰ribus legi™nibus exped”t”s[3] pr”mum agmen
džceret. Post e‰s c™pi‰s imped”menta[4] t™t”us exercitžs conloc‰bant.
[5]Tum legi™n�s quae proxim� c™nscr”ptae erant t™tum agmen claud�bant.
Equit�s quoque in omn”s part”s d”mitt�bantur qu” loca expl™r‰rent; et
centuri™n�s praemitt�bantur ut locum castr”s id™neum d�ligerent. Locus
hab�batur id™neus castr”s [6]qu” facile d�fend” posset et prope aquam
esset. Qu‰ d� caus‰ castra[7] in colle ab utr‰que parte ardu™, ‰ fronte
l�niter d�cl”v” saepe p™n�bantur; vel locus palždibus c”nctus vel in
flžminis r”p”s situs d�lig�b‰tur. Ad locum postquam exercitus perv�nit,
ali” m”litum [8]in arm”s erant, ali” castra mžn”re incipi�bant. Nam
[9]qu™ tžti™r�s ab hostibus m”lit�s essent, n�ve incaut” et impar‰t”
opprimerentur, castra foss‰ l‰t‰ et v‰ll™ alt™ mžni�bant. In castr”s
portae quattuor erant ut �rupti™ m”litum omn”s in part”s fier” posset.
In angul”s castr™rum erant turr�s d� quibus t�la in host”s
conici�bantur. [10]T‰libus in castr”s qu‰lia d�scr”psimus Pžblius ‰
Caesare exceptus est.

    [Footnote 1: ÇQuae per”culaÈ, object of Çv”t‰rentÈ. It is placed
    first to make a proper connection with the preceding sentence.]

    [Footnote 2: Çut ... džceretÈ, ¤501.43.]

    [Footnote 3: Çexped”t”sÈ, i.e. without baggage and ready for
    action.]

    [Footnote 4: Çimped”mentaÈ. Much of the baggage was carried in carts
    and on beasts of burden, as is shown above; but, besides this, each
    soldier (unless Çexped”tusÈ) carried a heavy pack. See also picture,
    p. 159.]

    [Footnote 5: The newest legions were placed in the rear, because
    they were the least reliable.]

    [Footnote 6: Çqu” ... posset ... essetÈ, ¤501.45.]

    [Footnote 7: ÇcastraÈ, subject of Çp™n�banturÈ.]

    [Footnote 8: Çin arm”s erantÈ, _stood under arms_.]

    [Footnote 9: Çqu™ ... essentÈ. When is Çqu™È used to introduce a
    purpose clause? See ¤350.I.]

    [Footnote 10: ÇT‰libus in castr”s qu‰liaÈ, _in such a camp as_.
    It is important to remember the correlatives Çt‰lis ... qu‰lisÈ,
    _such ... as_.]


  [Illustration: CENTURIO]

LXX. THE RIVAL CENTURIONS

Ill”s in castr”s erant duo centuri™n�s,[1] fortissim” vir”, T. Pull™ et
L. Vor�nus, qu™rum neuter alter” virtžte[2] c�dere vol�bat. Inter e™s
iam mult™s ann™s ”nf�nsum cert‰men ger�b‰tur. Tum d�mum f”nis
contr™versiae h™c mod™[3] factus est. Di� terti™ postquam Pžblius
perv�nit, host�s, mai™ribus c™pi”s co‰ct”s, ‰cerrimum impetum in castra
f�c�runt. Tum Pull™, [4]cum R™m‰n” tardi™r�s[5] vid�rentur, ÒCžr
dubit‰s,Ó inquit, ÒVor�ne? Quam commodi™rem occ‰si™nem exspect‰s? Hic
di�s d� virtžte nostr‰ iždic‰bit.Ó Haec[6] cum d”xisset, extr‰
mžn”ti™n�s pr™cessit et in eam hostium partem quae c™fertissima
[7]vid�b‰tur inržpit. Neque Vor�nus quidem tum v‰ll™[8] s�s� continet,
sed Pull™nem subsequitur. Tum Pull™ p”lum in host”s immittit atque žnum
ex multitždine pr™currentem tr‰icit. Hunc percussum et exanim‰tum host�s
scžt”s pr™tegunt et in Pull™nem omn�s t�la coniciunt. Eius scžtum
tr‰nsf”gitur et t�lum in balte™ d�f”gitur. Hic c‰sus v‰g”nam ‰vertit et
dextram manum eius gladium �džcere c™nantis[9] mor‰tur. Eum ita
imped”tum host�s circumsistunt.

Tum v�ro [10]e” lab™rant” Vor�nus, cum sit inim”cus, tamen auxilium dat.
Ad hunc c™nfestim [11]‰ Pull™ne omnis multitžd™ s� convertit. Gladi™
comminus pugnat Vor�nus, atque, žn™ interfect™, reliqu™s paulum
pr™pellit. Sed ”nst‰ns cupidius[12] ”nf�l”x, [13]pede s� fallente,
concidit.

Huic ržrsus circumvent™ auxilium dat Pull™, atque amb™ incolum�s,
plžribus interfect”s, summ‰ cum laude intr‰ mžn”ti™n�s s� recipiunt. Sic
inim”c™rum alter alter” auxilium dedit nec de e™rum virtžte quisquam
iždic‰re potuit.

    [Footnote 1: A centurion commanded a company of about sixty men. He
    was a common soldier who had been promoted from the ranks for his
    courage and fighting qualities. The centurions were the real leaders
    of the men in battle. There were sixty of them in a legion. The
    centurion in the picture (p. 216) has in his hand a staff with a
    crook at one end, the symbol of his authority.]

    [Footnote 2: ÇvirtžteÈ, ¤501.30.]

    [Footnote 3: Abl. of manner.]

    [Footnote 4: Çcum ... vid�renturÈ, ¤501.46.]

    [Footnote 5: Çtardi™r�sÈ, _too slow_, a not infrequent translation
    of the comparative degree.]

    [Footnote 6: ÇHaecÈ, obj. of Çd”xissetÈ. It is placed before ÇcumÈ
    to make a close connection with the preceding sentence. What is the
    construction of Çd”xissetÈ?]

    [Footnote 7: Çvid�batur, inržpitÈ. Why is the imperfect used in one
    case and the perfect in the other? Cf. ¤190.]

    [Footnote 8: Çv‰ll™È, abl. of means, but in English we should say
    _within the rampart_. Cf. Çingent” stabul™È, p. 201, l. 13, and
    note.]

    [Footnote 9: Çc™nantisÈ, pres. part. agreeing with ÇeiusÈ.]

    [Footnote 10: Çe” lab™rant”È, indir. obj. of dat.]

    [Footnote 11: lj Pull™neÈ, _from Pullo_, abl. of separation.]

    [Footnote 12: ÇcupidiusÈ, _too eagerly_.]

    [Footnote 13: Çpede s� fallenteÈ, lit. _the foot deceiving itself_;
    in our idiom, _his foot slipping_.]


LXXI. THE ENEMY BESIEGING THE CAMP ARE REPULSED

Cum iam sex h™r‰s pugnatum esset[1] ac n™n s™lum v”r�s sed etiam t�la
R™m‰n™s d�ficerent[1], atque host�s ‰crius inst‰rent,[1] et v‰llum
scindere fossamque compl�re inc�pissent,[1] Caesar, vir re” m”lit‰ris
per”tissimus, su”s imper‰vit ut proelium paulisper intermitterent,[2]
et, sign™ dat™, ex castr”s �rumperent.[2] [3]Quod iuss” sunt faciunt, et
subit™ ex omnibus port”s �rumpunt. Atque tam celeriter m”lit�s
concurr�runt et tam propinqu” erant host�s[4] ut spatium p”la
coniciend”[5] n™n dar�tur. Itaque reiect”s p”l”s [6]comminus gladi”s
pugn‰tum est. Diž et aud‰cter host�s restit�runt et in extr�m‰ sp�
salžtis tantam virtžtem praestit�runt ut ‰ dextr™ cornž vehementer
[7]multitždine su™rum aciem R™manam premerent. [8]Id imper‰tor cum
animadvertisset, Pžblium adul�scentem cum equit‰tž m”sit qu”
lab™rantibus[9] auxilium daret. Eius impetum sustin�re n™n potu�runt
host�s[10] et omn�s terga vert�runt. E™s in fugam dat™s Pžblius
subsecžtus est žsque ad flžmen Rh�num, quod ab e™ loc™ qu”nque m”lia
passuum aberat. Ibi pauc” salžtem sibi repper�runt. Omnibus reliqu”s
interfect”s, Pžblius et equit�s in castra s�s� rec�p�runt. D� h‰c
calamit‰te f”nitimae gent�s cum certi™r�s factae essent, ad Caesarem
l�g‰t™s m”s�runt et s� suaque omnia d�did�runt.

    [Footnote 1: Çpugn‰tum esset, d�ficerent, ”nst‰rent, inc�pissentÈ.
    These are all subjunctives with ÇcumÈ. Cf. ¤501.46.]

    [Footnote 2: Çintermitterent, �rumperentÈ. What use of the
    subjunctive?]

    [Footnote 3: ÇQuodÈ, etc., _they do as ordered_. The antecedent of
    ÇquodÈ is ÇidÈ understood, which would be the object of ÇfaciuntÈ.]

    [Footnote 4: Çut ... dar�turÈ. Is this a clause of purpose or of
    result?]

    [Footnote 5: Çconiciend”È, ¤402.]

    [Footnote 6: Çcomminus gladi”s pugn‰tum estÈ, _a hand-to-hand
    conflict was waged with swords_.]

    [Footnote 7: Çmultitždine su™rumÈ, _by their numbers_. Çsu™rumÈ is
    used as a noun. What is the literal translation of this expression?]

    [Footnote 8: ÇId imper‰tor. IdÈ is the obj. and Çimper‰torÈ the
    subj. of ÇanimadvertissetÈ.]

    [Footnote 9: Çlab™rantibusÈ. This participle agrees with Çi”sÈ
    understood, the indir. obj. of Çdaret; qui ... daretÈ is a purpose
    clause, ¤501.40.]

    [Footnote 10: Çhost�sÈ, subj. of Çpotu�runtÈ.]


LXXII. PUBLIUS GOES TO GERMANY ¥ ITS GREAT FORESTS AND STRANGE ANIMALS

Init‰ aest‰te Caesar litter”s certior f”�bat et per expl™r‰t™r�s
cogn™sc�bat plžr”s c”vit‰t�s Galliae nov”s r�bus stud�re,[1] et contr‰
populum R™m‰num conižr‰re[1] obsid�sque [2]inter s� dare,[1] atque cum
h”s Germ‰n™s qu™sdam quoque s�s� conižnctžr™s esse.[1] H”s litter”s
nžnti”sque comm™tus Caesar c™nstituit quam celerrim� in Gall™s
profic”sc”,[3] ut e™s inop”nant”s opprimeret, et Labi�num l�g‰tum cum
du‰bus legi™nibus peditum et du™bus m”libus equitum in Germ‰n™s
mittere.[3] [4]Itaque r� fržment‰ri‰ compar‰t‰ castra m™vit. Ab
utr™que[5] r�s bene gesta est; nam Caesar tam celeriter in hostium f”n”s
perv�nit ut spatium [6]c™pi‰s c™gend” n™n dar�tur[4]; et Labi�nus d�
Germ‰n”s tam grave supplicium sžmpsit ut n�m™ ex e‰ gente in reliquum
tempus Gall”s auxilium dare aud�ret.[7]

Hoc iter in Germ‰niam Pžblius quoque f�cit et, [8]cum ibi mor‰r�tur,
multa m”r‰bilia v”dit. Praesertim v�r™ ingentem silvam m”r‰b‰tur, quae
tantae magnitždinis esse d”c�b‰tur [9]ut n�m™ eam tr‰ns”re posset, nec
quisquam sc”ret aut initium aut f”nem. Qu‰ d� r� plžra cogn™verat ‰
m”lite qu™dam qu” ™lim captus ‰ Germ‰n”s mult™s ann™s ibi incoluit.
Ille[10] d� silv‰ d”c�ns, Òënf”n”tae magnitždinis est haec silva,Ó
inquit; Ònee quisquam est [11]huius Germ‰niae [12]qu” initium eius sciat
aut ad f”nem adierit. N‰scuntur ill”c multa t‰lia anim‰lium genera
qu‰lia reliqu”s in loc”s n™n inveniuntur. Sunt bov�s qu” žnum[13] cornž
habent; sunt etiam anim‰lia quae appellantur alc�s. Hae nžll™s
cržrum[14] articul™s habent. Itaque, s” forte concid�runt, s�s� �rigere
nžll™ mod™ possunt. Arbor�s habent pr™[15] cub”libus; ad e‰s s�
applicant atque ita recl”n‰tae qui�tem capiunt. Tertium est genus e™rum
qu” žr” appellantur. H” sunt paul™ min™r�s elephant”s.[16] Magna vis
e™rum est et magna v�l™cit‰s. Neque homin” neque ferae parcunt.[17]Ó

    [Footnote 1: Observe that all these infinitives are in indirect
    statements after Çcertior f”�batÈ, _he was informed_, and
    Çcogn™sc�batÈ, _he learned_. Cf. ¤501.48, 49.]

    [Footnote 2: Çinter s�È, _to each other_.]

    [Footnote 3: Çprofic”sc”, mittereÈ. These infinitives depend upon
    Çc™nstituitÈ.]

    [Footnote 4: Before beginning a campaign, food had to be provided.
    Every fifteen days grain was distributed. Each soldier received
    about two pecks. This he carried in his pack, and this constituted
    his food, varied occasionally by what he could find by foraging.]

    [Footnote 5: Abl. of personal agent, ¤501.33.]

    [Footnote 6: Çc™pi‰s c™gend”È, ¤501.37.1.]

    [Footnote 7: Çdar�tur, aud�retÈ, ¤501.43. Çaud�retÈ is not from
    Çaudi™È.]

    [Footnote 8: Çcum ... mor‰r�turÈ, ¤501.46.]

    [Footnote 9: Çut ... posset, ... sc”retÈ, ¤501.43.]

    [Footnote 10: ÇIlleÈ, subj. of ÇinquitÈ.]

    [Footnote 11: Çhuius Germ‰niaeÈ, _of this part of Germany_.]

    [Footnote 12: Çqu” ... sc”at ... adieritÈ, ¤501.45.]

    [Footnote 13: ÇžnumÈ, _only one_.]

    [Footnote 14: ÇcržrumÈ, from ÇcržsÈ.]

    [Footnote 15: Çpr™È, _for, in place of_.]

    [Footnote 16: Çelephant”sÈ, ¤501.34.]

    [Footnote 17: ÇparcuntÈ. What case is used with this verb?]


  [Illustration: VINEA]

LXXIII. THE STORMING OF A CITY

Pžblius plžr”s di�s in Germ‰ni‰ mor‰tus[1] in Galliam rediit, et ad
Caesaris castra s� contulit. Ille quia molest� fer�bat Gall™s[2] eius
regi™nis obsid�s dare recžs‰visse et exercitu” fržmentum praeb�re
n™luisse, c™nstituit e”s[3] bellum ”nferre. Agr”s v‰st‰t”s, v”c”s
inc�ns”s, perv�nit ad oppidum validissimum quod et n‰tžr‰ et arte
mžn”tum erat. Cing�b‰tur mžr™ v”gint” qu”nque ped�s[4] alt™. å lateribus
du™situm, praerupt™ fast”gi™ ad pl‰nitiem verg�gat; ‰ qu‰rt™ tantum[5]
latere aditus erat facilis. Hoc oppidum oppugn‰re, [6]cum opus esset
difficillimum, tamen c™nstituit Caesar. Et castr”s mžn”t”s Pžbli™
neg™tium dedit ut r�s [7]ad oppugnandum necess‰ri‰s par‰ret.

R™m‰n™rum autem oppugn‰ti™ est haec.[8] Pr”mum turr�s aedificantur
quibus m”lit�s in summum mžrum �v‰dere possint[9]; v”neae[10] f”unt
quibus t�ct” m”lit�s ad mžrum succ�dant; plute”[11] parantur post qu™s
m”lit�s tormenta[12] administrent; sunt quoque ariet�s qu” mžrum et
port‰s discutiant. H”s omnibus r�bus compar‰t”s, deinde [13]agger ab e‰
parte ubi aditus est facillimus exstruitur et cum v”ne”s ad ipsum
oppidum agitur. Tum turris in aggere pr™mov�tur; arietibus qu” sub
v”ne”s conloc‰t” erant mžrus et portae discutiuntur; ballist”s,
catapult”s, reliqu”sque torment”s lapid�s et t�la in oppidum
coniciuntur. Postr�m™ cum iam turris et agger altitždinem mžr” adaequant
et ariet�s moenia perfr�g�runt,[14] sign™ dat™ m”lit�s inruunt et
oppidum expugnant.

    [Footnote 1: Çmor‰tusÈ. Is this part. active or passive in meaning?]

    [Footnote 2: ÇGall™sÈ, subj. acc. of the infins. Çrecžs‰visseÈ and
    Çn™luisseÈ. The indirect statement depends upon Çmolest� fer�batÈ.]

    [Footnote 3: Çe”sÈ, ¤501.15.]

    [Footnote 4: Çped�sÈ, ¤501.21.]

    [Footnote 5: ÇtantumÈ, adv. _only_.]

    [Footnote 6: Çcum ... essetÈ, a clause of concession, ¤501.46.]

    [Footnote 7: Çad oppugnandumÈ, a gerund expressing purpose.]

    [Footnote 8: ÇhaecÈ, _as follows_.]

    [Footnote 9: ÇpossintÈ, subjv. of purpose. Three similar
    constructions follow.]

    [Footnote 10: Çv”neaeÈ. These Çv”neaeÈ were wooden sheds, open in
    front and rear, used to protect men who were working to take a
    fortification. They were about eight feet high, of like width, and
    double that length, covered with raw hides to protect them from
    being set on fire, and moved on wheels or rollers.]

    [Footnote 11: Çplute”È, large screens or shields with small wheels
    attached to them. These were used to protect besiegers while moving
    up to a city or while serving the engines of war.]

    [Footnote 12: ÇtormentaÈ. The engines of war were chiefly the
    catapult for shooting great arrows, and the ballista, for hurling
    large stones. They had a range of about two thousand feet and were
    very effective.]

    [Footnote 13: The ÇaggerÈ, or mound, was of chief importance in a
    siege. It was begun just out of reach of the missiles of the enemy,
    and then gradually extended towards the point to be attacked. At the
    same time its height gradually increased until on a level with the
    top of the wall, or even higher. It was made of earth and timber,
    and had covered galleries running through it for the use of the
    besiegers. Over or beside the _agger_ a tower was moved up to the
    wall, often with a battering-ram (_aries_) in the lowest story. (See
    picture, p. 221.)]

    [Footnote 14: Çperfr�g�runtÈ, from Çperfring™È.]

  [Illustration: BALLISTA]


  [Illustration: TURRES, ARIETES, VINEA]

LXXIV. THE CITY IS TAKEN ¥ THE CAPTIVES ARE QUESTIONED

Omnibus r�bus necess‰ri”s ad oppugnandum ‰ Pžbli™ compar‰t”s,
d�l”ber‰tur in concili™ quod c™nsilium [1]oppid” expugnand” ineant.[2]
Tum žnus[3] ex centuri™nibus, vir re” m”lit‰ris per”tissimus, ÒEgo
su‰de™,Ó inquit, Òut ab e‰ parte, ubi aditus sit[5] facillimus, aggerem
exstru‰mus[4] et turrim pr™move‰mus[6] atque ariete adm™t™ simul mžrum
discutere c™n�mur.[5]Ó [6]Hoc c™nsilium cum omnibus plac�ret, Caesar
concilium d”m”sit. Deinde m”lit�s hort‰tus ut pri™r�s vict™ri‰s
memori‰[7] ten�rent, iussit aggerem exstru”, turrim et arietem admov�r”.
Neque oppid‰n”s[8] c™nsilium d�fuit. Ali” ignem et omne genus t�l™rum d�
mžr™ in turrim coni�c�runt, ali” ingentia saxa in v”ne‰s et arietem
d�volv�runt. Diž utrimque ‰cerrim� pugn‰tum est. N� vulner‰t” quidem
pedem rettul�runt. Tandem, [9]d� terti‰ vigili‰, Pžblius, quem Caesar
ill” oper”[10] praef�cerat, nžnti‰vit partem[11] mžr” ictibus arietis
labefactam concidisse. Qu‰ r� aud”t‰ Caesar signum dat; m”lit�s inruunt
et magn‰ cum caede hostium oppidum capiunt.

Postr”di� eius di�”, h™c oppid™ expugn‰t™, [12]capt”v™rum qu”
n™bilissim” sunt ad imper‰t™rem ante praet™rium[13] addžcuntur. Ipse,
l™r”c‰ aur‰t‰ et palud‰ment™ purpure™ ”nsignis, capt”v™s per interpretem
in hunc modum interrogat:[14] V™s qu” estis[15]?

INTERPRES. Rogat imper‰tor qu” s”tis.

CAPTëVë. F”li” r�gis sumus.

INTERPRES. D”cunt s� f”li™s esse r�gis.

IMPERåTOR. Cžr mihi tant‰s inižri‰s intulistis?

INTERPRES. Rogat cžr sibi tant‰s inižri‰s intuleritis.

CAPTëVë. Inižri‰s e” n™n intulimus sed pr™ patri‰ bellum gessimus.
Semper voluimus R™m‰n”s esse am”c”, sed R™m‰n” sine caus‰ n™s dom™
patri‰que expellere c™n‰t” sunt.

INTERPRES. [16]Negant s� inižri‰s tibi intulisse, sed pr™ patri‰ bellum
gessisse. [17]Semper s� voluisse am”c™s R™m‰n”s esse, sed R™m‰n™s sine
caus‰ s� dom™ patri‰que expellere c™n‰t™s esse.

IMPERåTOR. [18]Man�bitisne in reliquum tempus in fid�, h‰c rebelli™ne
cond™n‰t‰?

Tum v�r™ capt”v” mult”s cum lacrim”s ižr‰v�runt s� in fid� m‰nsžr™s
esse, et Caesar e™s incolum”s domum d”m”sit.

    [Footnote 1: Çoppid” expugnand”È. Is this a gerund or a gerundive
    construction? Cf. ¤501.37.]

    [Footnote 2: ÇineantÈ. ¤501.50.]

    [Footnote 3: ÇžnusÈ. subj. of ÇinquitÈ.]

    [Footnote 4: ÇsitÈ. This is a so-called subjunctive by attraction,
    which means that the clause beginning with ÇubiÈ stands in such
    close connection with the subjv. clause beginning with ÇutÈ, that
    its verb is attracted into the same mood.]

    [Footnote 5: All these verbs are in the same construction.]

    [Footnote 6: ÇHoc c™nsiliumÈ, subj. of Çplac�retÈ. For the order
    cf. ÇHaec cumÈ, etc., p. 215, l. 22, and note; ÇId imper‰tor cumÈ,
    p. 217, l. 8.]

    [Footnote 7: Çmemori‰È, abl. of means.]

    [Footnote 8: Çoppid‰n”sÈ, ¤501.15.]

    [Footnote 9: Between twelve and three oÕclock in the morning. The
    night was divided into four watches.]

    [Footnote 10: Çoper”È, ¤501.15.]

    [Footnote 11: ÇpartemÈ, subj. acc. of ÇconcidisseÈ.]

    [Footnote 12: Çcapt”v™rum ... suntÈ, _the noblest of the captives_.]

    [Footnote 13: The generalÕs headquarters.]

    [Footnote 14: Study carefully these direct questions, indirect
    questions, and indirect statements.]

    [Footnote 15: See Plate III, p. 148.]

    [Footnote 16: ÇNegantÈ, etc., _they say that they have not_, etc.
    ÇNegantÈ is equivalent to Çd”cunt n™nÈ, and the negative modifies
    ÇintulisseÈ, but not the remainder of the indirect statement.]

    [Footnote 17: ÇSemperÈ, etc., _that they have always_, etc.]

    [Footnote 18: ÇMan�bitisne in fid�È, _will you remain loyal?_]


LXXV. CIVIL WAR BREAKS OUT BETWEEN C®SAR AND POMPEY
THE BATTLE OF PHARSALIA

N� c™nfect™[1] quidem bell™ Gallic™, [2]bellum c”v”le inter Caesarem et
Pomp�ium exortum est. Nam Pomp�ius, qu” summum imperium pet�bat, sen‰tu”
persu‰serat ut Caesarem re” pžblicae hostem[3] iždic‰ret et exercitum
eius d”mitt” iub�ret. Quibus cognit”s r�bus Caesar exercitum suum
d”mittere recžs‰vit, atque, hort‰tus m”lit�s ut ducem toti�ns vict™rem
ab inim”c™rum inižri”s d�fenderent, imper‰vit ut s� R™mam sequerentur.
Summ‰ cum alacrit‰te m”lit�s p‰ru�runt, et tr‰nsit™ Rubic™ne[4] initium
bell” c”v”lis factum est.

Italiae urb�s quidem omn�s fer� [5]r�bus Caesaris fav�bant et eum
benign� exc�p�runt. Qu‰ r� comm™tus Pomp�ius ante Caesaris adventum R™m‰
excessit et Brundisium[6] perv�nit, inde [7]pauc”s post di�bus cum
omnibus c™pi”s ad æp”rum mare tr‰nsiit. Eum Caesar cum septem legi™nibus
et qu”ngent”s equitibus secžtus est, et ”nsignis inter Caesaris
comit‰tum erat Pžblius.

Plžribus levi™ribus proeli”s fact”s, tandem c™piae adversae ad
Phars‰lum[8] in Thessali‰ sitam castra posu�runt. Cum Pompe” exercitus
esset bis tantus quantus Caesaris, tamen erant mult” qu” veter‰n‰s
legi™n�s quae Gall™s et Germ‰n™s super‰verant vehementer tim�bant.
Qu™s[9] [10]ante proelium commissum Labi�nus[11] l�g‰tus, qu” ab Caesare
nžper d�f�cerat, ita adlocžtus est: Ò[12]N™l”te ex”stim‰re hunc esse
exercitum veter‰n™rum m”litum. Omnibus interfu” proeli”s[13] neque
temer� incognitam rem pr™nžnti™. Perexigua pars ill”us exercitžs qu”
Gall™s super‰vit adhžc superest. Magna pars occ”sa est, mult” domum
discess�runt, mult” sunt relict” in Itali‰. Hae c™piae qu‰s vid�tis in
[14]citeri™re Galli‰ nžper c™nscr”ptae sunt.Ó Haec[15] cum d”xisset,
ižr‰vit s� nisi vict™rem in castra n™n reversžrum esse. [16]Hoc idem
Pomp�ius et omn�s reliqu” ižr‰v�runt, et magn‰ sp� et laetiti‰, s”cut
certam ad vict™riam, c™piae � castr”s exi�runt.

Item Caesar, anim™[17] ad d”micandum par‰tus, exercitum suum �džxit et
septem cohortibus [18]praesidi™ castr”s relict”s c™pi‰s triplic” aci�
”nstržxit. Tum, m”litibus studi™ pugnae ‰rdentibus, tub‰ signum dedit.
M”lit�s pr™curr�runt et p”l”s miss”s gladi™s str”nx�runt. Neque v�r™
virtžs hostibus d�fuit. Nam et t�la missa sustinu�runt et impetum
gladi™rum exc�p�runt et ™rdin�s c™nserv‰v�runt. Utrimque diž et ‰criter
pugn‰tum est nec quisquam pedem rettulit. Tum equit�s Pomp�” aciem
Caesaris circum”re c™n‰t” sunt. Quod[19] ubi Caesar animadvertit,
tertiam aciem,[20] quae ad id tempus qui�ta fuerat, pr™currere iussit.
Tum v�r™ integr™rum impetum[21] d�fess” host�s sustin�re n™n potu�runt
et omn�s terga vert�runt. Sed Pomp�ius d� fortžn”s su”s d�sp�r‰ns s� in
castra equ™ contulit, inde mox cum pauc”s equitibus effžgit.

    [Footnote 1: With Çn� ... quidemÈ the emphatic word stands between
    the two.]

    [Footnote 2: The Civil War was caused by the jealousy and rivalry
    between C¾sar and Pompey. It resulted in the defeat and subsequent
    death of Pompey and the elevation of C¾sar to the lordship of the
    Roman world.]

    [Footnote 3: ÇhostemÈ, predicate accusative, ¤501.22.]

    [Footnote 4: The Rubicon was a small stream in northern Italy that
    marked the boundary of C¾sarÕs province. By crossing it with an
    armed force C¾sar declared war upon Pompey and the existing
    government. C¾sar crossed the Rubicon early in the year 49 B.C.]

    [Footnote 5: Çr�bus Caesaris fav�bantÈ, _favored C¾sarÕs side_. In
    what case is Çr�busÈ?]

    [Footnote 6: ÇBrundisiumÈ, a famous port in southern Italy whence
    ships sailed for Greece and the East. See map.]

    [Footnote 7: Çpauc”s post di�busÈ, _a few days later_; literally,
    _afterguards by a few days_. Cf. Çpauc”s ante ann”sÈ, p. 213, l. 12,
    and note.]

    [Footnote 8: The battle of Pharsalia was fought on August 9, 48 B.C.
    In importance it ranks as one of the great battles of the world.]

    [Footnote 9: ÇQu™sÈ, obj. of Çadlocžtus estÈ.]

    [Footnote 10: Çante proelium commissumÈ, _before the beginning of
    the battle_.]

    [Footnote 11: ÇLabi�nusÈ, C¾sarÕs most faithful and skillful
    lieutenant in the Gallic War. On the outbreak of the Civil War, in
    49 B.C., he deserted C¾sar and joined Pompey. His defection caused
    the greatest joy among the Pompeian party; but he disappointed the
    expectations of his new friends, and never accomplished anything of
    importance. He fought against his old commander in several battles
    and was slain at the battle of Munda in Spain, 45 B.C.]

    [Footnote 12: ÇN™l”te ex”stim‰reÈ, _don«t think_.]

    [Footnote 13: Çproeli”sÈ, ¤501.15.]

    [Footnote 14: Çciteri™re Galli‰È. This name is applied to Cisalpine
    Gaul, or Gaul south of the Alps.]

    [Footnote 15: ÇHaecÈ, obj. of Çd”xissetÈ.]

    [Footnote 16: ÇHoc idemÈ, obj. of Çižr‰v�runtÈ.]

    [Footnote 17: Çanim™È, ¤501.30.]

    [Footnote 18: Çpraesidi™ castr”sÈ, ¤501.17.]

    [Footnote 19: ÇQuodÈ, obj. of ÇanimadvertitÈ.]

    [Footnote 20: ÇaciemÈ, subj. of Çpr™currereÈ.]

    [Footnote 21: ÇimpetumÈ, obj. of Çsustin�reÈ.]


  [Illustration: SIGNIFER]

LXXVI. THE TRIUMPH OF CAESAR

Pomp�i™ am”c”sque eius super‰t”s atque omnibus hostibus ub”que vict”s,
Caesar imper‰tor R™mam rediit et [1]extr‰ moenia urbis in camp™ M‰rti™
castra posuit. Tum v�r™ amplissim”s hon™ribus adfectus est. Dict‰tor
cre‰tus est, et e” triumphus ‰ sen‰tž est d�cr�tus. [2]Qu™ di� de Gall”s
triumphum �git, tanta multitžd™ hominum in urbem undique c™nflžxit [3]ut
omnia loca essent c™nferta. Templa pat�bant, ‰rae fžm‰bant, columnae
sert”s ™rn‰tae erant. [4]Cum v�r™ pompa urbem intr‰ret, quantus hominum
fremitus ortus est! Pr”mum per portam ingress” sunt sen‰tus et
magistr‰tžs. Secžt” sunt t”b”cin�s, signifer”, pedit�s laure‰ cor™n‰t”
canent�s: ÒEcce Caesar nunc triumphat, qu” sub�git Galliam,Ó et ÒM”lle,
m”lle, m”lle, m”lle Gall™s truc”d‰vimus.Ó Mult” praedam capt‰rum urbium
port‰bant, arma, omnia bell” ”nstržmenta. Secžt” sunt equit�s, anim™s”s
atque splendidissim� ™rn‰t”s equ”s vect”, inter qu™s Pžblius adul�sc�ns
fortissimus hab�b‰tur. Addžc�bantur taur”, ariet�s, [5]qu” d”s
immort‰libus immol‰rentur. Ita long™ agmine pr™gredi�ns exercitus
[6]sacr‰ vi‰ per forum in Capit™lium perr�xit.

Imper‰tor ipse cum urbem intr‰ret, undique laet™ cl‰m™re multitždinis
salžt‰tus est. St‰bat in currž aure™ quem quattuor alb” equ” veh�bant.
Indžtus [7]tog‰ pict‰, alter‰ manž hab�n‰s et lauream ten�bat, alter‰
eburneum sc�ptrum. Post eum servus in currž st‰ns auream cor™nam super
caput eius ten�bat. Ante currum miserrim” capt”v”, r�g�s pr”ncip�sque
super‰t‰rum gentium, cat�n”s v”nct”, pr™gredi�bantur; et v”gint”
quattuor l”ct™r�s[8] laureat‰s fasc”s ferent�s et signifer” currum
Caesaris comit‰bantur. Conclždit agmen multitžd™ capt”v™rum, qu”, in
servitžtem red‰ct”,[9] d�miss™ vultž, v”nct”s[10] bracchi”s, sequuntur;
quibuscum veniunt longissim™ ™rdine m”lit�s, etiam h” praedam vel
insignia m”lit‰ria ferent�s.

  [Illustration: LICTORES CUM FASCIBUS]

Caesar cum Capit™lium ascendisset, in templ™ Iov” Capit™l”n™ sacra
f�cit. Simul[11] captiv™rum qu” n™bilissim” erant, abduct” in
carcerem,[12] interfect” sunt. Sacr”s fact”s Caesar d� Capit™li™
d�scendit et in for™ m”itibus su”s hon™r�s m”lit‰r”s dedit e”sque
pecžniam ex bell” praed‰ distribuit.

H”s omnibus r�bus c™nfect”s, Pžblius Caesarem val�re[13] iussit et quam
celerrim� ad v”llam contendit ut patrem m‰tremque salžt‰ret.

[14]D� r�bus gest”s P. Corn�l” Lentul” h‰ctenus.

    [Footnote 1: A victorious general with his army was not allowed to
    enter the city until the day of his triumph. A triumph was the
    greatest of all military honors.]

    [Footnote 2: ÇQu™ di�È, _on the day that_, abl. of time.]

    [Footnote 3: Çut ... essentÈ, ¤501.43.]

    [Footnote 4: ÇCum ... intr‰retÈ, ¤501.46.]

    [Footnote 5: Çqu” ... immol‰renturÈ, ¤501.40.]

    [Footnote 6: The Sacred Way was a noted street running along one
    side of the Forum to the base of the Capitoline Hill, on whose
    summit stood the magnificent temple of Jupiter Capitolinus. This
    route was always followed by triumphal processions.]

    [Footnote 7: The Çtoga pictaÈ worn by a general in his triumph was a
    splendid robe of Tyrian purple covered with golden stars. See Plate
    IV, p. 213.]

    [Footnote 8: The lictors were a guard of honor that attended the
    higher magistrates and made a way for them through the streets. On
    their shoulders they carried the _fasces_, a bundle of rods with an
    ax in the middle, symbolizing the power of the law.]

    [Footnote 9: Çd�miss™ vultžÈ, _with downcast countenance_.]

    [Footnote 10: Çv”nct”sÈ, from Çvinci™È.]

    [Footnote 11: ÇSimulÈ, etc., _At the same time those of the captives
    who were the noblest._]

    [Footnote 12: The prison was a gloomy dungeon on the lower slopes of
    the Capitoline Hill.]

    [Footnote 13: Çval�re iussitÈ, _bade farewell to_.]

    [Footnote 14: This sentence marks the end of the story.]




APPENDIX I

DECLENSIONS, CONJUGATIONS, NUMERALS, ETC.


NOUNS

Ç460.È Nouns are inflected in five declensions, distinguished by the
final letter of the stem and by the termination of the genitive
singular.

FIRST DECLENSION--Çå-Èstems, Gen. Sing. Ç-aeÈ

SECOND DECLENSION--ÇO-Èstems, Gen. Sing. Ç-”È

THIRD DECLENSION--Consonant stems and ÇI-Èstems, Gen. Sing. Ç-isÈ

FOURTH DECLENSION--ÇU-Èstems, Gen. Sing. Ç-žsÈ

FIFTH DECLENSION--Çæ-Èstems, Gen. Sing. Ç-�”È or Ç-e”È

Ç461.È FIRST DECLENSION. _å_-STEMS

   ÇdominaÈ, _lady_    STEM Çdomin‰-È    BASE Çdomin-È

          SINGULAR            PLURAL
                 TERMINATIONS          TERMINATIONS
  _Nom._  domina   -a         dominae    -ae
  _Gen._  dominae  -ae        domin‰rum  -‰rum
  _Dat._  dominae  -ae        domin”s    -”s
  _Acc._  dominam  -am        domin‰s    -‰s
  _Abl._  domin‰   -‰         domin”s    -”s

    _a._ ÇDeaÈ and Çf”liaÈ have the termination Ç-‰busÈ in the dative
    and ablative plural.

Ç462.È SECOND DECLENSION. _O_-STEMS

    _a._ MASCULINES IN -us

   ÇdominusÈ, _master_   STEM Çdomino-È   BASE Çdomin-È

          SINGULAR            PLURAL
                 TERMINATIONS          TERMINATIONS
  _Nom._  dominus  -us        domin”     -”
  _Gen._  domin”   -”         domin™rum  -™rum
  _Dat._  domin™   -™         domin”s    -”s
  _Acc._  dominum  -um        domin™s    -™s
  _Abl._  domin™   -™         domin”s    -”s

  1. Nouns in Ç-usÈ of the second declension have the termination Ç-eÈ
  in the vocative singular, as ÇdomineÈ.

  2. Proper names in Ç-iusÈ, and ÇfiliusÈ, end in Ç-”È in the vocative
  singular, and the accent rests on the penult, as ÇVergi«l”, f”l”È.

    _b._ NEUTERS IN -um

    Çp”lumÈ, _spear_   STEM Çp”lo-È   BASE Çp”l-È

          SINGULAR          PLURAL
               TERMINATIONS        TERMINATIONS
  _Nom._  p”lum  -um        p”la     -a
  _Gen._  p”l”   -”         p”l™rum  -™rum
  _Dat._  p”l™   -™         p”l”s    -”s
  _Acc._  p”lum  -um        p”la     -a
  _Abl._  p”l™   -™         p”l”s    -”s

  1. Masculines in Ç-iusÈ and neuters in Ç-iumÈ end in Ç-”È in the
  genitive singular, _not_ in Ç-i”È, and the accent rests on the penult.

    _c._ MASCULINES IN -er AND -ir

         ÇpuerÈ, _boy_  ÇagerÈ, _field_  ÇvirÈ, _man_
   STEMS Çpuero-È       Çagro-È          Çviro-È
   BASES Çpuer-È        Çagr-È           Çvir-È

          SINGULAR                               TERMINATIONS
  _Nom._  puer           ager             vir      --
  _Gen._  puer”          agr”             vir”     -”
  _Dat._  puer™          agr™             vir™     -™
  _Acc._  puerum         agrum            virum    -um
  _Abl._  puer™          agr™             vir™     -™

          PLURAL
  _Nom._  puer”          agr”             vir”     -”
  _Gen._  puer™rum       agr™rum          vir™rum  -™rum
  _Dat._  puer”s         agr”s            vir”s    -”s
  _Acc._  puer™s         agr™s            vir™s    -™s
  _Abl._  puer”s         agr”s            vir”s    -”s

Ç463.È THIRD DECLENSION.

CLASSIFICATION

I. Consonant Stems

  1. Stems that add Ç-sÈ to the base to form the nominative
     singular: masculines and feminines only.

  2. Stems that add no termination in the nominitive singular:
     _a._ masculines and feminines; _b._ neuters.

II. _I_-Stems.

  Masculines, feminines, and neuters.

Ç464.È I. CONSONANT STEMS

1. _Nouns that add Ç-sÈ to the base to form the nominative singular:
masculines and feminines only_

          Çpr”ncepsÈ,   Çm”lesÈ, m.,  ÇlapisÈ, m.,
          m., _chief_   _soldier_     _stone_
  BASES |
  OR    | Çpr”ncip-È    Çm”lit-È      Çlapid-È
  STEMS |

          SINGULAR                             TERMINATIONS
  _Nom._  pr”nceps      m”les         lapis      -s
  _Gen._  pr”ncipis     m”litis       lapidis    -is
  _Dat._  pr”ncip”      m”lit”        lapid”     -”
  _Acc._  pr”ncipem     m”litem       lapidem    -em
  _Abl._  pr”ncipe      m”lite        lapide     -e

          PLURAL
  _Nom._  pr”ncip�s     m”lit�s       lapid�s    -�s
  _Gen._  pr”ncipum     m”litum       lapidum    -um
  _Dat._  pr”ncipibus   m”litibus     lapidibus  -ibus
  _Acc._  pr”ncip�s     m”lit�s       lapid�s    -�s
  _Abl._  pr”ncipibus   m”litibus     lapidibus  -ibus

          Çr�xÈ, m.,  ÇiždexÈ, m.,   ÇvirtžsÈ, f.,
          _king_      _judge_        _virtue_
  BASES |
  OR    | Çr�g-È      Çiždic-È       Çvirtžt-È
  STEMS |

          SINGULAR                             TERMINATIONS
  _Nom._  r�x         iždex          virtžs      -s
  _Gen._  r�gis       iždicis        virtžtis    -is
  _Dat._  r�g”        iždic”         virtžt”     -”
  _Acc._  r�gem       iždicem        virtžtem    -em
  _Abl._  r�ge        iždice         virtžte     -e

          PLURAL
  _Nom._  r�g�s       iždic�s        virtžt�s    -�s
  _Gen._  r�gum       iždicum        virtžtum    -um
  _Dat._  r�gibus     iždicibus      virtžtibus  -ibus
  _Acc._  r�g�s       iždic�s        virtžt�s    -es
  _Abl._  r�gibus     iždicibus      virtžtibus  -ibus

NOTE. For consonant changes in the nominative singular, cf. ¤233.3.

  2. _Nouns that have no termination in the nominative singular_

    _a._ MASCULINES AND FEMININES

          Çc™nsulÈ, m.,  Çlegi™È, f.,  Ç™rd™È,     ÇpaterÈ, m.,
          _consul_       _legion_      m., _row_   _father_
  BASES |
  OR    | Çconsul-È      Çlegi™n-È     Ç™rdin-È    Çpatr-È
  STEMS |

          SINGULAR                                         TERMINATIONS
  _Nom._  c™nsul         legi™         ™rd™        pater     --
  _Gen._  c™nsulis       legi™nis      ™rdinis     patris    -is
  _Dat._  c™nsul”        legi™n”       ™rdin”      patr”     -”
  _Acc._  c™nsulem       legi™nem      ™rdinem     patrem    -em
  _Abl._  c™nsule        legi™ne       ™rdine      patre     -e

          PLURAL
  _Nom._  c™nsul�s       legi™n�s      ™rdin�s     patr�s    -�s
  _Gen._  c™nsulum       legi™num      ™rdinum     patrum    -um
  _Dat._  c™nsulibus     legi™nibus    ™rdinibus   patribus  -ibus
  _Acc._  c™nsul�s       legi™n�s      ™rdin�s     patr�s    -�s
  _Abl._  c™nsulibus     legi™nibus    ™rdinibus   patribus  -ibus

NOTE. For vowel and consonant changes in the nominative singular, cf.
¤236.1-3.

    _b._ NEUTERS
          ÇflžmenÈ,     ÇtempusÈ,    ÇopusÈ,      ÇcaputÈ,
          n., _river_   n., _time_   n., _work_   n., _head_
  BASES |
  OR    | Çflžmin-È     Çtempor-È    Çoper-È      Çcapit-È
  STEMS |

          SINGULAR                                         TERMINATIONS
  _Nom._  flžmen        tempus       opus         caput      --
  _Gen._  flžminis      temporis     operis       capitis    -is
  _Dat._  flžmin”       tempor”      oper”        capit”     -”
  _Acc._  flžmen        tempus       opus         caput      --
  _Abl._  flžmine       tempore      opere        capite     -e

          PLURAL
  _Nom._  flžmina       tempora      opera        capita     -a
  _Gen._  flžminum      temporum     operum       capitum    -um
  _Dat._  flžminibus    temporibus   operibus     capitibus  -ibus
  _Acc._  flžmina       tempora      opera        capita     -a
  _Abl._  flžminibus    temporibus   operibus     capitibus  -ibus

NOTE. For vowel and consonant changes in the nominative singular, cf.
¤238.2, 3.

Ç465.È II. _I_-STEMS

    _a._ MASCULINES AND FEMININES

         Çcaed�sÈ, f., ÇhostisÈ,    ÇurbsÈ, f., Çcli�nsÈ, m.,
         _slaughter_   m., _enemy_  _city_      _retainer_
  STEMS  Çcaedi-È      Çhosti-È     Çurbi-È     Çclienti-È
  BASES  Çcaed-È       Çhost-È      Çurb-È      Çclient-È

          SINGULAR                                          TERMINATIONS
  _Nom._  caed�s       hostis       urbs        cli�ns         -s, -is,
                                                                _or_ -�s
  _Gen._  caedis       hostis       urbis       clientis       -is
  _Dat._  caed”        host”        urb”        client”        -”
  _Acc._  caedem       hostem       urbem       clientem       -em (-im)
  _Abl._  caede        hoste        urbe        cliente        -e (-”)

          PLURAL
  _Nom._  caed�s       host�s       urb�s       client�s       -�s
  _Gen._  caedium      hostium      urbium      clientium      -ium
  _Dat._  caedibus     hostibus     urbibus     clientibus     -ibus
  _Acc._  caed”s, -�s  host”s, -�s  urb”s, -�s  client”s, -�s  -”s, -�s
  _Abl._  caedibus     hostibus     urbibus     clientibus     -ibus

  1. ÇAvisÈ, Çc”visÈ, Çf”nisÈ, ÇignisÈ, Çn‰visÈ, have the abl. sing. in
  Ç-”È or Ç-eÈ.

  2. ÇTurrisÈ has accusative ÇturrimÈ and ablative Çturr”È or ÇturreÈ.

    _b._ NEUTERS

          Ç”nsigneÈ, n.,   ÇanimalÈ, n.,   ÇcalcarÈ,
          _decoration_     _animal_        n., _spur_

  STEMS   Ç”nsigni-È       Çanim‰li-È      Çcalc‰ri-È
  BASES   Ç”nsign-È        Çanim‰l-È       Çcalc‰r-È

          SINGULAR                                   TERMINATIONS
  _Nom._  ”nsigne          animal          calcar      -e _or_ --
  _Gen._  ”nsignis         anim‰lis        calc‰ris    -is
  _Dat._  ”nsign”          anim‰l”         calc‰r”     -”
  _Acc._  ”nsigne          animal          calcar      -e _or_ --
  _Abl._  ”nsign”          anim‰l”         calc‰r”     -”

          PLURAL
  _Nom._  ”nsignia         anim‰lia        calc‰ria    -ia
  _Gen._  ”nsignium        anim‰lium       calc‰rium   -ium
  _Dat._  ”nsignibus       anim‰libus      calc‰ribus  -ibus
  _Acc._  ”nsignia         anim‰lia        calc‰ria    -ia
  _Abl._  ”nsignibus       anim‰libus      calc‰ribus  -ibus

Ç466.È THE FOURTH DECLENSION. _U_-STEMS

         ÇadventusÈ, m.,    ÇcornžÈ, n., _horn_
         _arrival_
  STEMS  Çadventu-È         Çcornu-È
  BASES  Çadvent-È          Çcorn-È

                                       TERMINATIONS
          SINGULAR                     MASC.    NEUT.
  _Nom._  adventus           cornž      -us      -ž
  _Gen._  adventžs           cornžs     -žs      -žs
  _Dat._  adventu” (ž)       cornž      -u” (ž)  -ž
  _Acc._  adventum           cornž      -um      -ž
  _Abl._  adventž            cornž      -ž       -ž

          PLURAL
  _Nom._  adventžs           cornua     -žs     -ua
  _Gen._  adventuum          cornuum    -uum    -uum
  _Dat._  adventibus         cornibus   -ibus   -ibus
  _Acc._  adventžs           cornua     -žs     -ua
  _Abl._  adventibus         cornibus   -ibus   -ibus

Ç467.È THE FIFTH DECLENSION. _æ_-STEMS

          Çdi�sÈ, m., _day_   Çr�sÈ, f., _thing_
  STEMS   Çdi�-È              Çr�-È
  BASES   Çdi-È               Çr-È

          SINGULAR                   TERMINATIONS
  _Nom._  di�s                r�s      -�s
  _Gen._  di�”                re”      -�” _or_ -e”
  _Dat._  di�”                re”      -�” _or_ -e”
  _Acc._  diem                rem      -em
  _Abl._  di�                 r�       -�

          PLURAL
  _Nom._  di�s                r�s      -�s
  _Gen._  di�rum              r�rum    -�rum
  _Dat._  di�bus              r�bus    -�bus
  _Acc._  di�s                r�s      -�s
  _Abl._  di�bus              r�bus    -�bus

Ç468.È SPECIAL PARADIGMS

          ÇdeusÈ,       ÇdomusÈ, f.,  Çv”sÈ, f.,    ÇiterÈ,
          m., _god_     _house_       _strength_    n., _way_
  STEMS   Çdeo-È        Çdomu-È       Çv”-È and     Çiter-È and
                                        Çv”ri-È       Çitiner-È
  BASES   Çde-È         Çdom-È        Çv-È and      Çiter-È and
                                        Çv”r-È        Çitiner-È

  SINGULAR
  _Nom._  deus          domus          v”s          iter
  _Gen._  de”           domžs          v”s (rare)   itineris
  _Dat._  de™           domu”, -™      v” (rare)    itiner”
  _Acc._  deum          domum          vim          iter
  _Abl._  de™           dom™, -ž       v”           itinere

  PLURAL
  _Nom._  de”, d”       domžs          v”r�s        itinera
  _Gen._  de™rum, deum  domuum, -™rum  v”rium       itinerum
  _Dat._  de”s, d”s     domibus        v”ribus      itineribus
  _Acc._  de™s          dom™s, -žs     v”r”s, -�s   itinera
  _Abl._  de”s, d”s     domibus        v”ribus      itineribus

    _a._ The vocative singular of ÇdeusÈ is like the nominative.

    _b._ The locative of ÇdomusÈ is Çdom”È.


ADJECTIVES

Ç469.È FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. _O_- AND _å_-STEMS

    _a._ ADJECTIVES IN -us

          ÇbonusÈ, _good_
  STEMS   Çbono-È m. and n., Çbona-È f.
  BASE    Çbon-È

          SINGULAR
          MASC.     FEM.      NEUT.
  _Nom._  bonus     bona      bonum
  _Gen._  bon”      bonae     bon”
  _Dat._  bon™      bonae     bon™
  _Acc._  bonum     bonam     bonum
  _Abl._  bon™      bon‰      bon™

          PLURAL
  _Nom._  bon”      bonae     bona
  _Gen._  bon™rum   bon‰rum   bon™rum
  _Dat._  bon”s     bon”s     bon”s
  _Acc._  bon™s     bon‰s     bona
  _Abl._  bon”s     bon”s     bon”s

    _b._ ADJECTIVES IN Ç-erÈ

          Çl”berÈ, _free_
  STEMS   Çl”bero-È m. and n., Çl”ber‰-È f.
  BASE    Çl”ber-È

          SINGULAR
          MASC.       FEM.        NEUT.
  _Nom._  l”ber       l”bera      l”berum
  _Gen._  l”ber”      l”berae     l”ber”
  _Dat._  l”ber™      l”berae     l”ber™
  _Acc._  l”berum     l”beram     l”berum
  _Abl._  l”ber™      l”ber‰      l”ber™

          PLURAL
  _Nom._  l”ber”      l”berae     l”bera
  _Gen._  l”ber™rum   l”ber‰rum   l”ber™rum
  _Dat._  l”ber”s     l”ber”s     l”ber”s
  _Acc._  l”ber™s     l”ber‰s     l”bera
  _Abl._  l”ber”s     l”ber”s     l”ber”s

          ÇpulcherÈ, _pretty_
  STEMS   Çpulchro-È m. and n., Çpulchr‰-È f.
  BASE    Çpulchr-È

          SINGULAR
          MASC.        FEM.         NEUT.
  _Nom._  pulcher      pulchra      pulchrum
  _Gen._  pulchr”      pulchrae     pulchr”
  _Dat._  pulchr™      pulchrae     pulchr™
  _Acc._  pulchrum     pulchram     pulchrum
  _Abl._  pulchr™      pulchr‰      pulchr™

          PLURAL
  _Nom._  pulchr”      pulchrae     pulchra
  _Gen._  pulchr™rum   pulchr‰rum   pulchr™rum
  _Dat._  pulchr”s     pulchr”s     pulchr”s
  _Acc._  pulchr™s     pulchr‰s     pulchra
  _Abl._  pulchr”s     pulchr”s     pulchr”s


Ç470.È THE NINE IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES

          ÇaliusÈ, _another_
  STEMS   Çalio-È m. and n., Çali‰-È f.
  BASE    Çali-È

          SINGULAR                  PLURAL
          MASC.   FEM.    NEUT.     MASC.     FEM.      NEUT.
  _Nom._  alius   alia    aliud     ali”      aliae     alia
  _Gen._  al”us   al”us   al”us     ali™rum   ali‰rum   ali™rum
  _Dat._  ali”    ali”    ali”      ali”s     ali”s     ali”s
  _Acc._  alium   aliam   aliud     ali™s     ali‰s     alia
  _Abl._  ali™    ali‰    ali™      ali”s     ali”s     ali”s

          ÇžnusÈ, _one, only_
  STEMS   Çžno-È m. and n., Çžn‰-È f.
  BASE    Çžn-È

          MASC.   FEM.    NEUT.     MASC.     FEM.      NEUT.
  _Nom._  žnus    žna     žnum      žn”       žnae      žna
  _Gen._  žn”us   žn”us   žn”us     žn™rum    žn‰rum    žn™rum
  _Dat._  žn”     žn”     žn”       žn”s      žn”s      žn”s
  _Acc._  žnum    žnam    žnum      žn™s      žn‰s      žna
  _Abl._  žn™     žn‰     žn™       žn”s      žn”s      žn”s

_a._ For the complete list see ¤108.

Ç471.È ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. _I_-STEMS

  I. THREE ENDINGS

          ljcer, ‰cris, ‰creÈ, _keen, eager_
          STEM ljcri-È  BASE ljcr-È

          SINGULAR                  PLURAL
          MASC.   FEM.    NEUT.     MASC.        FEM.         NEUT.
  _Nom._  ‰cer    ‰cris   ‰cre      ‰cr�s        ‰cr�s        ‰cria
  _Gen._  ‰cris   ‰cris   ‰cris     ‰crium       ‰crium       ‰crium
  _Dat._  ‰cr”    ‰cr”    ‰cr”      ‰cribus      ‰cribus      ‰cribus
  _Acc._  ‰crem   ‰crem   ‰cre      ‰cr”s, -�s   ‰cr”s, -�s   ‰cria
  _Abl._  ‰cr”    ‰cr”    ‰cr”      ‰cribus      ‰cribus      ‰cribus

  II. TWO ENDINGS

          Çomnis, omneÈ, _every, all_
          STEM Çomni-È  BASE Çomn-È

          SINGULAR                  PLURAL
          MASC. AND FEM.  NEUT.     MASC. AND FEM.  NEUT.
  _Nom._  omnis           omne      omn�s           omnia
  _Gen._  omnis           omnis     omnium          omnium
  _Dat._  omn”            omn”      omnibus         omnibus
  _Acc._  omnem           omne      omn”s, -�s      omnia
  _Abl._  omn”            omn”      omnibus         omnibus

  III. ONE ENDING

          Çp‰rÈ, _equal_
          STEM Çpari-È  BASE Çpar-È

          SINGULAR                   PLURAL
          MASC. AND FEM.  NEUT.      MASC. AND FEM.  NEUT.
  _Nom._  p‰r             p‰r        par�s           paria
  _Gen._  paris           paris      parium          parium
  _Dat._  par”            par”       paribus         paribus
  _Acc._  parem           p‰r        par”s, -�s      paria
  _Abl._  par”            par”       paribus         paribus

  1. Observe that all i-stem adjectives have Ç-”È in the ablative
  singular.

  [TranscriberÕs Note:
  This sentence appears to be a footnote, but there is no footnote tag
  on the page.]

Ç472.È PRESENT ACTIVE PARTICIPLES

          Çam‰nsÈ, _loving_
          STEM Çamanti-È BASE Çamant-È

          SINGULAR                     PLURAL
          MASC. AND FEM.  NEUT.        MASC. AND FEM.  NEUT.
  _Nom._  am‰ns           am‰ns        amant�s         amantia
  _Gen._  amantis         amantis      amantium        amantium
  _Dat._  amant”          amant”       amantibus       amantibus
  _Acc._  amantem         am‰ns        amant”s, -�s    amantia
  _Abl._  amante, -”      amante, -”   amantibus       amantibus

          Çi�nsÈ, _going_
          STEM Çienti-, eunti-È  BASE Çient-, eunt-È

  _Nom._  i�ns            i�ns         eunt�s          euntia
  _Gen._  euntis          euntis       euntium         euntium
  _Dat._  eunt”           eunt”        euntibus        euntibus
  _Acc._  euntem          i�ns         eunt”s, -�s     euntia
  _Abl._  eunte, -”       eunte, -”    euntibus        euntibus

Ç473.È REGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES

  POSITIVE             COMPARATIVE                 SUPERLATIVE
  MASC.                MASC. AND FEM.  NEUT.       MASC. FEM. NEUT.
  altus (alto-)        altior          altius      altissimus -a -um
  l”ber (l”bero-)      l”berior        l”berius    l”berrimus -a -um
  pulcher (pulchro-)   pulchrior       pulchrius   pulcherrimus -a -um
  aud‰x (aud‰ci-)      aud‰cior        aud‰cius    aud‰cissimus -a -um
  brevis (brevi-)      brevior         brevius     brevissimus -a -um
  ‰cer (‰cri-)         ‰crior          ‰crius      ‰cerrimus -a -um

Ç474.È DECLENSION OF COMPARATIVES

          ÇaltiorÈ, _higher_

          SINGULAR                    PLURAL
          MASC. AND FEM.  NEUT.       MASC. AND FEM.  NEUT.
  _Nom._  altior          altius      alti™r�s        alti™ra
  _Gen._  alti™ris        alti™ris    alti™rum        alti™rum
  _Dat._  alti™r”         alti™r”     alti™ribus      alti™ribus
  _Acc._  alti™rem        altius      alti™r�s        alti™ra
  _Abl._  alti™re         alti™re     alti™ribus      alti™ribus

          ÇplžsÈ, _more_

  _Nom._  ----            plžs        plžr�s          plžra
  _Gen._  ----            plžris      plžrium         plžrium
  _Dat._  ----            ----        plžribus        plžribus
  _Acc._  ----            plžs        plžr”s (-�s)    plžra
  _Abl._  ----            plžre       plžribus        plžribus

Ç475.È IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES

  POSITIVE                COMPARATIVE              SUPERLATIVE
  bonus, -a, -um,       melior, melius,        optimus, -a, -um,
    _good_                  _better_                 _best_
  malus, -a, -um,       peior, peius,          pessimus, -a, -um,
    _bad_                   _worse_                  _worst_
  magnus, -a, -um,      maior, maius,          maximus, -a, -um,
    _great_                 _greater_                _greatest_
  multus, -a, -um,      ----, plžs, _more_     plžrimus, -a, -um,
    _much_                                           _most_
  parvus, -a, -um,      minor, minus,          minimus, -a, -um,_
    _small_                 _smaller_                _smallest
  senex, senis,         senior                 maximus n‰tž
    _old_
  iuvenis, -e,          ižnior                 minimus n‰tž
    _young_
  vetus, veteris,       vetustior, -ius        veterrimus, -a, -um
    _old_
  facilis, -e,          facilior, -ius         facillimus, -a, -um
    _easy_
  difficilis, -e,       difficilior, -ius      difficillimus, -a, -um
    _difficult_
  similis, -e,          similior, -ius         simillimus, -a, -um
    _similar_
  dissimilis, -e,       dissimilior, -ius      dissimillimus, -a, -um
    _dissimilar_
  humilis, -e, _low_    humilior, -ius         humillimus, -a, -um
  gracilis, -e,         gracilior, -ius        gracillimus, -a, -um
    _slender_
  exterus, _outward_    exterior,              extr�mus, extimus,
                            _outer, exterior_        _outermost, last_
  ”nferus, _below_      ”nferior,  _lower_     ”nfimus, ”mus, _lowest_
  posterus,             posterior, _later_     postr�mus, postumus,
    _following_                                      _last_
  superus, _above_      superior,              supr�mus, summus,
                            _higher_                 _highest_
  [[cis, citr‰,]]       citerior, _hither_     citimus, _hithermost_
    [[_on this side_]]
  [[in, intr‰,]]        interior, _inner_      intimus, _inmost_
    [[_in, within_]]
  [[prae, pr™,]]        prior,  _former_       pr”mus, _first_
    [[_before_]]
  [[prope, _near_]]     propior, _nearer_      proximus, _next_
  [[ultr‰, _beyond_]]   ulterior, _further_    ultimus, _furthest_

Ç476.È REGULAR COMPARISON OF ADVERBS

  POSITIVE                        COMPARATIVE  SUPERLATIVE
  c‰r� (c‰rus), _dearly_          c‰rius       c‰rissim�
  miser� (miser), _wretchedly_    miserius     miserrim�
  ‰criter (‰cer), _sharply_       ‰crius       ‰cerrim�
  facile (facilis), _easily_      facilius     facillim�

Ç477.È IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADVERBS

  POSITIVE                   COMPARATIVE        SUPERLATIVE
  diž, _long, a long time_   dižtius            dižtissim�
  bene (bonus), _well_       melius, _better_   optim�, _best_
  male (malus), _ill_        peius, _worse_     pessim�, _worst_
  magnopere, _greatly_       magis, _more_      maxim�, _most_
  multum (multus), _much_    plžs, _more_       plžrimum, _most_
  parum, _little_            minus, _less_      minim�, _least_
  saepe, _often_             saep”us            saepissim�

Ç478.È NUMERALS

The cardinal numerals are indeclinable excepting ÇžnusÈ, ÇduoÈ, Çtr�sÈ,
the hundreds above one hundred, and Çm”lleÈ used as a noun. The ordinals
are declined like Çbonus, -a, -umÈ.

         CARDINALS                   ORDINALS
         (_How many_)                (_In what order_)
     1,  žnus, -a, -um,  _one_       pr”mus, -a, -um        _first_
     2,  duo, duae, duo  _two_       secundus (_or_ alter)  _second_
     3,  tr�s, tria      _three_,    tertius                _third_,
     4,  quattuor          etc.      qu‰rtus                  etc.
     5,  qu”nque                     qu”ntus
     6,  sex                         sextus
     7,  septem                      septimus
     8,  oct™                        oct‰vus
     9,  novem                       n™nus
    10,  decem                       decimus
    11,  žndecim                     žndecimus
    12,  duodecim                    duodecimus
    13,  tredecim (decem (et) tr�s)  tertius decimus
    14,  quattuordecim               qu‰rtus decimus
    15,  qu”ndecim                   qu”ntus decimus
    16,  s�decim                     sextus decimus
    17,  septendecim                 septimus decimus
    18,  duod�v”gint” (oct™decim)    duod�v”c�nsimus
    19,  žnd�v”gint” (novendecim)    žnd�v”c�nsimus
    20,  v”gint”                     v”c�nsimus
    21, {v”gint” žnus _or_          {v”c�nsimus pr”mus _or_
        {žnus et v”gint”, etc.      {žnus et v”c�nsimus, etc.
    30,  tr”gint‰                    tr”c�nsimus
    40,  quadr‰gint‰                 quadr‰g�nsimus
    50,  qu”nqu‰gint‰                qu”nqu‰g�nsimus
    60,  sex‰gint‰                   sex‰g�nsimus
    70,  septu‰gint‰                 septu‰g�nsimus
    80,  oct™gint‰                   oct™g�nsimus
    90,  n™n‰gint‰                   n™n‰g�nsimus
   100,  centum                      cent�nsimus
   101,  centum (et) žnus, etc.      cent�nsimus (et) pr”mus, etc.
   120,  centum (et) v”gint”         cent�nsimus v”c�nsimus
   121,  centum (et) v”gint” žnus,   cent�nsimus (et) v”c�nsimus pr”mus,
           etc.                        etc.
   200,  ducent”, -ae, -a            ducent�nsimus
   300,  trecent”                    trecent�nsimus
   400,  quadringent”                quadringent�nsimus
   500,  qu”ngent”                   qu”ngent�nsimus
   600,  sescent”                    sescent�nsimus
   700,  septingent”                 septingent�nsimus
   800,  octingent”                  octingent�nsimus
   900,  n™ngent”                    n™ngent�nsimus
  1000,  m”lle                       m”ll�nsimus

Ç479.È Declension of ÇduoÈ, _two_, Çtr�sÈ, _three_, and Çm”lleÈ,
_a thousand_.

        MASC.     FEM.    NEUT.     M. AND F.  NEUT.     SING.  PLUR.
  _N._  duo       duae    duo       tr�s       tr”a      m”lle  m”lia
  _G._  du™rum    du‰rum  du™rum    trium      trium     m”lle  m”lium
  _D._  du™bus    du‰bus  du™bus    tribus     tribus    m”lle  m”libus
  _A._  du™s      du‰s    duo       tr”s       tria      m”lle  m”lia
        _or_ duo  du‰s    duo       _or_ tr�s  tria
  _A._  du™bus    du‰bus  du™bus    tribus     tribus    m”lle  m”libus

NOTE. ÇM”lleÈ is used in the plural as a noun with a modifying genitive,
and is occasionally so used in the nominative and accusative singular.
For the declension of ÇžnusÈ cf. ¤470.


PRONOUNS

Ç480.È PERSONAL

          ego, _I_             tž, _you_            su”, _of himself,_
                                                           _etc._
          SING. PLUR.          SING. PLUR.          SING.     PLUR.
  _Nom._  ego   n™s            tž    v™s            ----      ----
  _Gen._  me”   nostrum, -tr”  tu”   vestrum, -tr”  su”       su”
  _Dat._  mihi  n™b”s          tibi  v™b”s          sibi      sibi
  _Acc._  m�    n™s            t�    v™s            s�, s�s�  s�, s�s�
  _Abl._  m�    n™b”s          t�    v™b”s          s�, s�s�  s�, s�s�

Note that Çsu”È is always reflexive.

Ç481.È DEMONSTRATIVE

Demonstratives belong to the first and second declensions, but have the
pronominal endings Ç-”usÈ or Ç-iusÈ and Ç-”È in the gen. and dat. sing.

         ÇipseÈ, _self_

         SINGULAR                       PLURAL
         MASC.     FEM.      NEUT.      MASC.      FEM.       NEUT.
  _Nom._ ipse      ipsa      ipsum      ips”       ipsae      ipsa
  _Gen._ ips”«us   ips”«us   ips”«us    ips™rum    ips‰rum    ips™rum
  _Dat._ ips”      ips”      ips”       ips”s      ips”s      ips”s
  _Acc._ ipsum     ipsam     ipsum      ips™s      ips‰s      ipsa
  _Abl._ ips™      ips‰      ips™       ips”s      ips”s      ips”s

         ÇhicÈ, _this_ (here), _he_

  _Nom._ hic       haec      hoc        h”         hae        haec
  _Gen._ huius     huius     huius      h™rum      h‰rum      h™rum
  _Dat._ huic      huic      huic       h”s        h”s        h”s
  _Acc._ hunc      hanc      hoc        h™s        h‰s        haec
  _Abl._ h™c       h‰c       h™c        h”s        h”s        h”s

         ÇisteÈ, _this, that_ (of yours), _he_

  _Nom._ iste      ista      istud      ist”       istae      ista
  _Gen._ ist”«us   ist”«us   ist”«us    ist™rum    ist‰rum    ist™rum
  _Dat._ ist”      ist”      ist”       ist”s      ist”s      ist”s
  _Acc._ istum     istam     istud      ist™s      ist‰s      ista
  _Abl._ ist™      ist‰      ist™       ist”s      ist”s      ist”s

         ÇilleÈ, _that_ (yonder), _he_

  _Nom._ ille      illa      illud      ill”       illae      illa
  _Gen._ ill”«us   ill”«us   ill”«us    ill™rum    ill‰rum    ill™rum
  _Dat._ ill”      ill”      ill”       ill”s      ill”s      ill”s
  _Acc._ illum     illam     illud      ill™s      ill‰s      illa
  _Abl._ ill™      ill‰      ill™       ill”s      ill”s      ill”s

         ÇisÈ, _this, that, he_

  _Nom._ is        ea        id         i”, e”     eae        ea
  _Gen._ eius      eius      eius       e™rum      e‰rum      e™rum
  _Dat._ e”        e”        e”         i”s, e”s   i”s, e”s   i”s, e”s
  _Acc._ eum       eam       id         e™s        e‰s        ea
  _Abl._ e™        e‰        e™         i”s, e”s   i”s, e”s   i”s, e”s

         Ç”demÈ, _the same_

  _Nom._ ”dem      e«adem    idem       i”«dem     eae«dem    e«adem
                                         e”«dem
  _Gen._ eius«dem  eius«dem  eius«dem   e™run«dem  e‰run«dem  e™run«dem
  _Dat._ e”«dem    e”«dem    e”«dem     i”s«dem    i”s«dem    i”s«dem
                                          e”s«dem    e”s«dem   e”s«dem
  _Acc._ eun«dem   ean«dem   idem       e™s«dem    e‰s«dem    e«adem
  _Abl._ e™«dem    e‰«dem    e™«dem     i”s«dem    i”s«dem    i”s«dem
                                          e”s«dem    e”s«dem    e”s«dem

NOTE. In the plural of ÇisÈ and Ç”demÈ the forms with two iÕs are
preferred, the two iÕs being pronounced as one.

Ç482.È RELATIVE

          Çqu”È, _who, which, that_

          SINGULAR                PLURAL
          MASC.  FEM.   NEUT.     MASC.   FEM.    NEUT.
  _Nom._  qu”    quae   quod      qu”     quae    quae
  _Gen._  cuius  cuius  cuius     qu™rum  qu‰rum  qu™rum
  _Dat._  cui    cui    cui       quibus  quibus  quibus
  _Acc._  quem   quam   quod      qu™s    qu‰s    quae
  _Abl._  qu™    qu‰    qu™       quibus  quibus  quibus

Ç483.È INTERROGATIVE

          ÇquisÈ, substantive, _who, what_

          SINGULAR                      PLURAL
          MASC. & FEM.  NEUT.           MASC.    FEM.     NEUT.
  _Nom._  quis          quid            qui      quae     quae
  _Gen._  cuius         cuius           qu™rum   qu‰rum   qu™rum
  _Dat._  cui           cui             quibus   quibus   quibus
  _Acc._  quem          quid            qu™s     qu‰s     quae
  _Abl._  qu™           qu™             quibus   quibus   quibus

The interrogative adjective Çqu”, quae, quodÈ, is declined like the
relative.

Ç484.È INDEFINITES

ÇquisÈ and Çqu”È, as declined above,[1] are used also as indefinites
(_some, any_). The other indefinites are compounds of ÇquisÈ and Çqu”È.

          ÇquisqueÈ, _each_

          SUBSTANTIVE                ADJECTIVE
          MASC. & FEM.  NEUT.        MASC.      FEM.       NEUT.
  _Nom._  quisque       quidque      quisque    quaeque    quodque
  _Gen._  cuius«que     cuius«que    cuius«que  cuius«que  cuius«que
  _Dat._  cuique        cuique       cuique     cuique     cuique
  _Acc._  quemque       quidque      quemque    quamque    quodque
  _Abl._  qu™que        qu™que       qu™que     qu‰que     qu™que

    [Footnote 1: ÇquaÈ is generally used instead of ÇquaeÈ in the
    feminine nominative singular and in the neuter nominative and
    accusative plural.]

Ç485.È Çqu”damÈ, _a certain one, a certain_

Observe that in the neuter singular the adjective has ÇquoddamÈ and the
substantive ÇquiddamÈ.

          SINGULAR
          MASC.       FEM.        NEUT.
  _Nom._  qu”dam      quaedam     quoddam, quiddam (_subst._)
  _Gen._  cuius«dam   cuius«dam   cuius«dam
  _Dat._  cuidam      cuidam      cuidam
  _Acc._  quendam     quandam     quoddam, quiddam (_subst._)
  _Abl._  qu™dam      qu‰dam      qu™dam

          PLURAL
  _Nom._  qu”dam      quaedam     quaedam
  _Gen._  qu™run«dam  qu‰run«dam  qu™run«dam
  _Dat._  quibus«dam  quibus«dam  quibus«dam
  _Acc._  qu™sdam     qu‰sdam     quaedam
  _Abl._  quibus«dam  quibus«dam  quibus«dam

Ç486.È ÇquisquamÈ, substantive, _any one_ (at all)

          MASC. AND FEM.  NEUT.
  _Nom._  quisquam        quicquam (quidquam)
  _Gen._  cuius«quam      cuius«quam
  _Dat._  cuiquam         cuiquam
  _Acc._  quemquam        quicquam (quidquam)
  _Abl._  qu™quam         qu™quam

Ç487.È ÇaliquisÈ, substantive, _some one_. Çaliqu”È, adjective, _some_

          SINGULAR
          SUBSTANTIVE                   ADJECTIVE
          MASC. AND FEM.  NEUT.       MASC.      FEM.       NEUT.
  _Nom._  aliquis        aliquid      aliqu”     aliqua     aliquod
  _Gen._  alicu«ius      alicu«ius    alicu«ius  alicu«ius  alicu«ius
  _Dat._  alicui         alicui       alicui     alicui     alicui
  _Acc._  aliquem        aliquid      aliquem    aliquam    aliquod
  _Abl._  aliqu™         aliqu™       aliqu™     aliqu‰     aliqu™

          PLURAL FOR BOTH SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE
          MASC.       FEM.        NEUT.
  _Nom._  aliqu”      aliquae     aliqua
  _Gen._  aliqu™«rum  aliqu‰«rum  aliqu™«rum
  _Dat._  ali«quibus  ali«quibus  ali«quibus
  _Acc._  aliqu™s     aliqu‰s     aliqua
  _Abl._  ali«quibus  ali«quibus  ali«quibus

    _a._ Çquis (qu”)È, _any one, any_, is the least definite (¤297.b).
    Çaliquis (aliqu”)È, _some one, some_, is more definite than ÇquisÈ.
    ÇquisquamÈ, _any one_ (at all), and its adjective ÇžllusÈ, _any_,
    occur mostly with a negative, expressed or implied, and in clauses
    of comparison.


REGULAR VERBS

Ç488.È FIRST CONJUGATION. _å_-VERBS. _AMï_

  PRINCIPAL PARTS Çam™, am‰re, am‰v”, am‰tusÈ
  PRES. STEM am‰-    PERF. STEM am‰v-    PART. STEM am‰t-

  ACTIVE                       PASSIVE
  INDICATIVE
  PRESENT
  _I love, am loving,_         _I am loved_, etc.
    _do love_, etc.
  am™        am‰mus            amor              am‰mur
  am‰s       am‰tis            am‰ris, -re       am‰min”
  amat       amant             am‰tur            amantur

  IMPERFECT
  _I loved, was loving_,       _I was loved_, etc.
    _did love_, etc.
  am‰bam     am‰b‰mus          am‰bar            am‰b‰mur
  am‰b‰s     am‰b‰tis          am‰b‰ris, -re     am‰b‰min”
  am‰bat     am‰bant           am‰b‰tur          am‰bantur

  FUTURE
  _I shall love_, etc.         _I shall be loved_, etc.
  am‰b™      am‰bimus          am‰bor            am‰bimur
  am‰bis     am‰bitis          am‰beris, -re     am‰bimin”
  am‰bit     am‰bunt           am‰bitur          am‰buntur

  PERFECT
  _I have loved, loved,_       _I have been (was) loved_, etc.
    _did love_, etc.
  am‰vi      am‰vimus          am‰tus, {sum      am‰t”,  {sumus
  am‰vist”   am‰vistis         -a, -um {es       -ae, -a {estis
  am‰vit     am‰v�runt, -re            {est              {sunt

  PLUPERFECT
  _I had loved_, etc.          _I had been loved_, etc.
  am‰veram   am‰ver‰mus        am‰tus, {eram     am‰t”,  {er‰mus
  am‰ver‰s   am‰ver‰tis        -a, -um {er‰s     -ae, -a {er‰tis
  am‰verat   am‰verant                 {erat             {erant

  FUTURE PERFECT
  _I shall have loved_, etc.   _I shall have been loved_, etc.
  am‰ver™    am‰verimus        am‰tus, {er™      am‰t”,  {erimus
  am‰veris   am‰veritis        -a, -um {eris     -ae, -a {eritis
  am‰verit   am‰verint                 {erit             {erunt

  SUBJUNCTIVE
  PRESENT
  amem       am�mus            amer              am�mur
  am�s       am�tis            am�ris, -re       am�min”
  amet       ament             am�tur            amentur

  IMPERFECT
  am‰rem     am‰remus          am‰rer            am‰r�mur
  am‰r�s     am‰r�tis          am‰r�ris, -re     am‰r�min”
  am‰ret     am‰rent           am‰r�tur          am‰rentur

  PERFECT
  am‰verim   am‰verimus        am‰tus, {sim      am‰t”,  {s”mus
  am‰veris   am‰veritis        -a, -um {s”s      -ae, -a {s”tis
  am‰verit   am‰verint                 {sit              {sint

  PLUPERFECT
  am‰vissem  am‰viss�mus       am‰tus, {essem    am‰t”,  {ess�mus
  am‰viss�s  am‰viss�tis       -a, -um {ess�s    -ae, -a {ess�tis
  am‰visset  am‰vissent                {esset            {essent

  IMPERATIVE
  PRESENT
  am‰, _love thou_             am‰re, _be thou loved_
  am‰te, _love ye_             am‰min”, _be ye loved_

  FUTURE
  am‰t™, _thou shalt love_     am‰tor, _thou shalt be loved_
  am‰t™, _he shall love_       am‰tor, _he shall be loved_
  am‰t™te, _you shall love_    ----
  amant™, _they shall love_    amantor, _they shall be loved_

  INFINITIVE
  _Pres._ am‰re, _to love_     am‰r”, _to be loved_
  _Perf._ am‰visse,            am‰tus, -a, -um esse,
            _to have loved_      _to have been loved_
  _Fut._ am‰tžrus, -a, -um     [[am‰tum ”r”]], _to be about to be loved_
            esse, _to be_
            _about to love_

  PARTICIPLES
  _Pres._ am‰ns, -antis,       _Pres._ ----
            _loving_
  _Fut._  am‰tžrus, -a, -um,   _Gerundive[1]_ amandus, -a, -um, _to be
           _about to love_                      loved_
  _Perf._ ----                 _Perf._ am‰tus, -a, -um,
                                         _having been loved, loved_

  GERUND
  _Nom._ ----
  _Gen._ amand”, _of loving_
  _Dat._ amand™, _for loving_
  _Acc._ amandum, _loving_
  _Abl._ amand™, _by loving_

  SUPINE (Active Voice)
  _Acc._ [[am‰tum]], _to love_
  _Abl._ [[am‰tž]], _to love, in the loving_

    [Footnote 1: Sometimes called the future passive participle.]

Ç489.È SECOND CONJUGATION. _æ_-VERBS. _MONEï_

  PRINCIPAL PARTS Çmone™, mon�re, monu”, monitusÈ
  PRES. STEM mon�-    PERF. STEM monu-    PART. STEM  monit-

  ACTIVE                       PASSIVE
  INDICATIVE
  PRESENT
  _I advise_, etc.,            _I am advised,_ etc.
  mone™      mon�mus           moneor            mon�mur
  mon�s      mon�tis           mon�ris, -re      mon�min”
  monet      monent            mon�tur           monentur

  IMPERFECT
  _I was advising_, etc.,      _I was advised_, etc.
  mon�bam    mon�b‰mus         mon�bar           mon�b‰mur
  mon�b‰s    mon�b‰tis         mon�b‰ris, -re    mon�b‰min”
  mon�bat    mon�bant          mon�b‰tur         mon�b‰ntur

  FUTURE
  _I shall advise_, etc.,      _I shall be advised_, etc.
  mon�b™     mon�bimus         mon�bor           mon�bimur
  mon�bis    mon�bitis         mon�beris, -re    mon�bimin”
  mon�bit    mon�bunt          mon�bitur         mon�buntur

  PERFECT
  _I have advised,_            _I have been (was) advised_, etc.
    _I advised_, etc.
  monu”      monuimus                   {sum             {sumus
  monuist”   monuistis         monitus, {es      monit”, {estis
  monuit     monu�runt, -re    -a, -um  {est     -ae, -a {sunt

  PLUPERFECT
  _I had advised_, etc.,       _I had been advised_, etc.

  monueram   monuer‰mus                 {eram            {er‰mus
  monuer‰s   monuer‰tis        monitus, {eras    monit”, {eratis
  monuerat   monuerant         -a, -um  {erat    -ae, -a {erant

  FUTURE PERFECT
  _I shall have advised_,      _I shall have been advised_, etc.
     etc.
  monuer™    monuerimus                 {er™             {erimus
  monueris   monuer”tis        monitus, {eris    monit”, {eritis
  monuerit   monuer”nt         -a, -um  {erit    -ae, -a {erunt

  SUBJUNCTIVE
  PRESENT
  moneam     mone‰mus          monear            mone‰mur
  mone‰s     mone‰tis          mone‰ris, -re     mone‰min”
  moneat     moneant           mone‰tur          moneantur

  IMPERFECT
  mon�rem    mon�r�mus         mon�rer           mon�r�mur
  mon�r�s    mon�r�tis         mon�r�ris, -re    mon�r�min”
  mon�ret    mon�rent          mon�r�tur         mon�rentur

  PERFECT
  monuerim   monuerimus                 {sim             {s”mus
  monueris   monueritis        monitus, {s”s     monit”, {s”tis
  monuerit   monuerint         -a, -um  {sit     -ae, -a {sint

  PLUPERFECT
  monuissem  monuiss�mus                {essem           {ess�mus
  monuiss�s  monuiss�tis       monitus, {ess�s   monit”, {ess�tis
  monuisset  monuissent        -a, -um  {esset   -ae, -a {essent

  IMPERATIVE
  PRESENT
  mon�, _advise thou_          mon�re, _be thou advised_
  mon�te, _advise ye_          mon�min”, _be ye advised_

  FUTURE
  mon�t™, _thou shall_         mon�tor, _thou shalt be advised_
            _advise_
  mon�t™, _he shall advise_    mon�tor, _he shall be advised_
  mon�t™te, _you shall advise_  ----
  monent™, _they shall_        monentor, _they shall be advised_
            _advise_

  INFINITIVE
  _Pres._ mon�re, _to advise_  mon�r”, _to be advised_
  _Perf._ monuisse, _to have_  monitus, -a, -um esse,
            _advised_            _to have been advised_
  _Fut._ monitžrus, -a, -um    [[monitum ”r”]],